Canon 5455C010 imageCLASS MF753Cdw Multifunction Wireless User Manual

imageCLASS

MF753Cdw / MF751Cdw

User

's Guide

USRMA-7178-01 2022-11 en Copyright CANON INC. 2022

Contents

About the Machine .......................................................................................................................................

Supported Functions and Options .............................................................................................................................. 3

Paper Feeder PF-K ................................................................................................................................................. 5

System Manager ID and PIN ...................................................................................................................................... 6

Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access ................................................................................................................. 7

Names of Parts and Their Functions ........................................................................................................................... 9

Front Side .......................................................................................................................................................... 10

Rear Side ........................................................................................................................................................... 12

Interior .............................................................................................................................................................. 13

Operation Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 14

Feeder ............................................................................................................................................................... 16

Multi-purpose Tray ............................................................................................................................................. 17

Paper Drawer ..................................................................................................................................................... 18

Usable Paper ........................................................................................................................................................... 19

Precautions When Handling Paper ........................................................................................................................ 23

Specications .......................................................................................................................................................... 24

Basic Specications ............................................................................................................................................. 25

Feeder Specications .......................................................................................................................................... 28

Print Specications ............................................................................................................................................. 29

Scan Specications ............................................................................................................................................. 30

Fax Specications ............................................................................................................................................... 31

Network Specications ........................................................................................................................................ 32

Security and Management Function Specications .................................................................................................. 33

Supported Environment ...................................................................................................................................... 37

Recommended Functions ........................................................................................................................................ 39

Digitizing Documents .......................................................................................................................................... 40

Cost Savings ...................................................................................................................................................... 41

Making Operations More Ecient ......................................................................................................................... 42

Setting Up .......................................................................................................................................................... 45

Conguring the Default Settings (Setup Guide) ........................................................................................................ 46

Setting Up the Network ........................................................................................................................................... 50

Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN ........................................................................................................................... 52

Connecting to a Wired LAN .................................................................................................................................. 53

Connecting to a Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................................... 54

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Using the Router Button (Push Button Mode) .................................................... 57

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Entering a PIN Code (WPS PIN Code Mode) ....................................................... 58

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Searching for a Router (Access Point Setup Method) ........................................... 60

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method) ........................................................ 62

Setting IPv4 Addresses ........................................................................................................................................ 65

Setting IPv6 Addresses ........................................................................................................................................ 67

Conguring Y

our Machine for Your Network Environment ....................................................................................... 69

Manually Conguring the Ethernet Settings ..................................................................................................... 70

Conguring DNS .......................................................................................................................................... 71

Conguring SMB .......................................................................................................................................... 74

Conguring WINS ......................................................................................................................................... 76

Registering LDAP Servers .............................................................................................................................. 77

Conguring SNMP ........................................................................................................................................ 81

Conguring SNTP ......................................................................................................................................... 84

Conguring SLP Communication .................................................................................................................... 86

Checking the Network Status and Settings ............................................................................................................. 88

Conguring the Fax Settings (Fax Setup Guide) ........................................................................................................ 91

Installing Software and Drivers to the Computer ...................................................................................................... 95

Basic Operations .......................................................................................................................................... 98

Turning ON and OFF the Machine ............................................................................................................................ 99

Turning ON the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 100

Turning OFF the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 101

Restarting the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 104

Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep Mode) ........................................................................................................... 106

Using the Operation Panel .................................................................................................................................... 108

Screens Displayed on the Operation Panel ........................................................................................................... 109

[Home] Screen ........................................................................................................................................... 111

[Status Monitor] Screen ............................................................................................................................... 114

How to Operate the Operation Panel .................................................................................................................. 116

Entering Characters .......................................................................................................................................... 119

Customizing the [Home] Screen ......................................................................................................................... 121

Rearranging the Buttons and Renaming the Tabs (Remote UI) ......................................................................... 123

Logging In to the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 126

Placing Originals ................................................................................................................................................... 128

Loading Paper ....................................................................................................................................................... 131

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer .................................................................................................................... 132

Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray ............................................................................................................. 137

Preparations and Orientation for Loading Envelopes ............................................................................................ 140

Orientation for Loading Paper with a Logo .......................................................................................................... 142

Specifying the Paper Size and Type ..................................................................................................................... 144

Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Paper Drawer ..................................................................................... 145

Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray ............................................................................. 147

Registering a Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray .................................................. 149

Registering Non-standard Size Paper (Custom Paper) ..................................................................................... 151

Hiding Unused Paper Sizes .......................................................................................................................... 152

Using the Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function .................................................................................... 153

Registering Destinations (Address Book) ................................................................................................................ 154

Address Book Function ...................................................................................................................................... 155

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Operation Panel) ............................................................................ 157

Registering Groups to the Address Book (Operation Panel) .............................................................................. 160

Editing and Deleting Destinations in the Address Book (Operation Panel) .......................................................... 162

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI)

.................................................................................... 164

Registering Groups to the Address Book (Remote UI) ...................................................................................... 168

Specifying Destinations ......................................................................................................................................... 170

Specifying Destinations (Address Book) ............................................................................................................... 171

Specifying Destinations (Direct Input) .................................................................................................................. 173

Specifying Destinations (LDAP Server) ................................................................................................................. 174

Specifying Destinations (Address Book on a Mobile Device) ................................................................................... 175

Specifying Destinations (TX Job Log) .................................................................................................................... 176

Inserting and Removing a USB Memory Device ...................................................................................................... 177

Registering Frequently Used Settings .................................................................................................................... 179

Registering and Calling Up Favorite Settings ........................................................................................................ 180

Changing the Default Settings ............................................................................................................................ 183

Adjusting the Sound Volume ................................................................................................................................. 185

Adjusting the Volume (For Models with a Fax Function) ......................................................................................... 186

Adjusting the Volume (For Models without a Fax Function) .................................................................................... 189

[Volume Settings] Screen ................................................................................................................................... 190

Printing .............................................................................................................................................................. 192

Printing Preparations ............................................................................................................................................ 194

Preparing to Print from a Computer .................................................................................................................... 195

Conguring a Printer Port (Windows) ............................................................................................................ 198

Setting Up a Print Server ................................................................................................................................... 201

Preparations for Using Universal Print ................................................................................................................. 204

Registering the Machine to Cloud Service ...................................................................................................... 205

Registering the Machine to the Computer ..................................................................................................... 208

Preparing to Print from a USB Memory Device ..................................................................................................... 209

Printing from a Computer ..................................................................................................................................... 210

Registering Non-standard Size Paper to the Computer (Custom Size) ...................................................................... 213

Printing a Document Secured with a PIN (Secure Print) ......................................................................................... 215

Changing the Time Period That Print Data with a PIN (Secure Data) Is Saved ...................................................... 218

Enabling Secure Print in a Printer Driver (macOS) ........................................................................................... 219

Printing with Universal Print .............................................................................................................................. 220

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print) ..................................................................................... 221

Screen for Selecting Files in USB Memory Device .................................................................................................. 223

Memory Media Print Settings ............................................................................................................................. 224

Canceling Printing ................................................................................................................................................ 230

Viewing the Print Job Status and Log ..................................................................................................................... 233

Scanning ........................................................................................................................................................... 235

Preparations for Scanning ..................................................................................................................................... 237

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Computer ................................................................................................... 238

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a USB Memory Device ..................................................................................... 240

Preparing to Send Scanned Data by E-mail ........................................................................................................... 241

Conguring the Basic Settings for Sending E-mail (Send Function Setting Tool) .................................................. 242

Using the Downloaded Send Function Setting Tool ................................................................................... 244

III

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI) ...................................................................

245

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Shared Folder .............................................................................................. 247

Registering a Shared Folder to the Address Book (Send Function Setting Tool) ................................................... 248

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to an FTP Server ................................................................................................. 250

Conguring FTP PASV Mode ......................................................................................................................... 251

Scanning (Saving to a Computer) ........................................................................................................................... 252

Scanning (Saving to a USB Memory Device) ............................................................................................................ 254

Scanning (Sending by E-mail) ................................................................................................................................. 256

Scanning (Saving to a Shared Folder or FTP Server) ................................................................................................. 259

Scanning from a Computer (Saving to a Computer) ................................................................................................ 262

Starting MF Scan Utility ..................................................................................................................................... 265

Scan Settings ........................................................................................................................................................ 266

Canceling Scanning ............................................................................................................................................... 271

Checking the Send and Save Status and Log of Scanned Data .................................................................................. 272

Faxing .................................................................................................................................................................. 275

Preparing to Send and Receive Faxes ..................................................................................................................... 277

Preparing to Send Faxes from a Computer ........................................................................................................... 278

Changing Fax RX Mode and Setting the Action when Receiving a Fax ...................................................................... 280

Changing the Fax Number and Unit Name ........................................................................................................... 282

Forwarding Faxes and Conguring the Backup Settings ......................................................................................... 283

Backing Up Sent Faxes ...................................................................................................................................... 284

Auto Forwarding and Backing Up Received Faxes ................................................................................................. 286

Sending Faxes ....................................................................................................................................................... 288

Sending a Fax after a Phone Conversation (Manual Sending) ................................................................................. 291

Sending Faxes from a Computer (PC Faxing) ........................................................................................................... 293

Securely Sending PC Faxes ................................................................................................................................. 296

Fax Original Scan Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 297

Receiving Faxes .................................................................................................................................................... 299

Receiving Faxes via Telephone (Remote RX) ......................................................................................................... 300

Changing the Print Settings for Received Faxes .................................................................................................... 301

Canceling Fax Sending ........................................................................................................................................... 303

Checking the Status and Log for Sent and Received Faxes ....................................................................................... 304

Using Internet Fax (I-Fax) ...................................................................................................................................... 306

Changing the Print Settings of the Received I-Fax ................................................................................................. 310

Copying .............................................................................................................................................................. 313

Copy Operations ................................................................................................................................................... 314

Additional Copying Features .................................................................................................................................. 317

Copying Both Sides of ID Cards onto One Sheet ...................................................................................................... 324

Copying Multiple Passports onto One Sheet ........................................................................................................... 327

Canceling Copy Operations .................................................................................................................................... 330

Checking the Copy Status and Log ......................................................................................................................... 331

Linking with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................ 333

Preparations for Linking with Mobile Devices ......................................................................................................... 335

Preparations for Direct Connection ..................................................................................................................... 336

Preparations for Using AirPrint ........................................................................................................................... 338

Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine ........................................................................................................... 341

Connecting a Mobile Device via Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) ................................................................... 342

Connecting a Mobile Device Directly to the Machine (Direct Connection) ................................................................. 343

Using a Dedicated Application to Print and Scan (Canon PRINT Business) ................................................................ 346

Using AirPrint Application to Print and Scan Data and Send Faxes ........................................................................... 347

Printing from an Android Device ............................................................................................................................ 351

Printing from Chromebook or Other Device with Chrome OS .................................................................................. 353

Security .............................................................................................................................................................. 356

Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator ...................................................................................... 357

Authenticating Users and Managing Groups .......................................................................................................... 359

Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with Department ID (Department ID Management) ............................... 360

Registering a Department ID and PIN ........................................................................................................... 362

Enabling Department ID Management .......................................................................................................... 364

Setting the Department ID and PIN on a Computer ........................................................................................ 366

Conrming Usage by Department ID ............................................................................................................ 369

Performing User Authentication with an LDAP Server When Sending or Saving Data ................................................. 370

Protecting the Network ........................................................................................................................................ 373

Setting the Firewall ........................................................................................................................................... 374

Changing the Port Number ................................................................................................................................ 377

Using a Proxy ................................................................................................................................................... 378

Using TLS ........................................................................................................................................................ 380

Using IPSec ...................................................................................................................................................... 382

Using IEEE 802.1X ............................................................................................................................................. 386

Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate ...................................................................................................... 388

Generating a Key and Certicate .................................................................................................................. 389

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate .................... 391

Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate from an SCEP Server ............................................ 394

If an Error Is Displayed in the Certicate Issuance Request Status .............................................................. 399

Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained from an Issuing Authority ....................................... 401

Verifying a Received Certicate with OCSP ..................................................................................................... 403

Preventing Sending Data by Mistake and Leaking Information ............................................................................... 404

Limiting Available Destinations ........................................................................................................................... 405

Conrming the Destination before Sending ......................................................................................................... 407

Restricting Fax Sending ..................................................................................................................................... 409

Restricting Use of Memory Media ....................................................................................................................... 411

Restricting Use from a Mobile Device .................................................................................................................. 413

Restricting Printing ........................................................................................................................................... 414

Restricting Printing from a Computer to Secure Print ...................................................................................... 415

Saving Received Documents in the Machine (Memory Lock) ............................................................................. 416

Preventing Unauthorized Use ................................................................................................................................

419

Restricting Address Book Registration and Editing ................................................................................................ 420

Restricting Use of Remote UI ............................................................................................................................. 422

Preventing Connection to Computer via USB Port ................................................................................................. 424

Conguring LPD, RAW, or WSD ........................................................................................................................... 425

Disabling HTTP Communication ......................................................................................................................... 427

Applying a Security Policy ...................................................................................................................................... 428

Security Policy Items ......................................................................................................................................... 430

Managing the Machine ........................................................................................................................ 435

Setting the Date and Time ..................................................................................................................................... 436

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ............................................................................................ 437

Starting Remote UI ........................................................................................................................................... 438

Portal Page of Remote UI .................................................................................................................................. 441

Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI ........................................................................................................... 443

Monitoring the Usage ........................................................................................................................................... 445

Checking the Number of Printed Pages (Check Counter) ........................................................................................ 446

Printing and Viewing Reports and Lists ................................................................................................................ 447

Changing the Report and List Print Settings ................................................................................................... 449

Clearing the Mail Box ............................................................................................................................................ 451

Importing and Exporting the Address Book and Settings ........................................................................................ 452

Updating the Firmware ......................................................................................................................................... 455

Initializing the Settings and Data .......................................................................................................................... 458

Settings Menu Items .............................................................................................................................. 462

[Preferences] ........................................................................................................................................................ 463

[Display Settings] .............................................................................................................................................. 465

[Timer/Energy Settings] ..................................................................................................................................... 469

[Network] ........................................................................................................................................................ 472

[Wireless LAN Settings] ............................................................................................................................... 477

[TCP/IP Settings] ......................................................................................................................................... 479

[External Interface] ........................................................................................................................................... 487

[Accessibility] ................................................................................................................................................... 488

[Adjustment/Maintenance] ................................................................................................................................... 489

[Adjust Image Quality] ...................................................................................................................................... 490

[Auto Correction Settings] ............................................................................................................................ 493

[Special Processing] .................................................................................................................................... 495

[Maintenance] .................................................................................................................................................. 501

[Function Settings] ................................................................................................................................................ 503

[Common] ....................................................................................................................................................... 505

[Paper Feed Settings] .................................................................................................................................. 506

[Print Settings] ........................................................................................................................................... 508

[Scan Settings] ........................................................................................................................................... 509

[Generate File] ........................................................................................................................................... 510

[Copy] ............................................................................................................................................................. 511

[Printer] ..........................................................................................................................................................

513

[Printer Settings] ........................................................................................................................................ 514

[PDL Selection (Plug and Play)] ..................................................................................................................... 533

[Send] ............................................................................................................................................................. 534

[Common Settings] ..................................................................................................................................... 535

[Scan and Send Settings] ............................................................................................................................. 537

[Fax Settings] ............................................................................................................................................. 543

[Receive/Forward] ............................................................................................................................................. 548

[Common Settings] ..................................................................................................................................... 549

[I-Fax Settings] ........................................................................................................................................... 551

[Fax Settings] ............................................................................................................................................. 552

[Store/Access Files] ........................................................................................................................................... 556

[Common Settings] ..................................................................................................................................... 557

[Set Destination] ................................................................................................................................................... 564

[Management Settings] ......................................................................................................................................... 565

[User Management] .......................................................................................................................................... 567

[Device Management] ....................................................................................................................................... 568

[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware] ..................................................................................... 571

[Remote UI Settings] ................................................................................................................................... 572

[Data Management] .......................................................................................................................................... 573

[Security Settings] ............................................................................................................................................. 575

[Authentication/Password Settings] .............................................................................................................. 576

Settings that Can Be Imported and Exported .......................................................................................................... 577

[Preferences] ................................................................................................................................................... 578

[Adjustment/Maintenance] ................................................................................................................................ 582

[Function Settings] ............................................................................................................................................ 583

[Set Destination] ............................................................................................................................................... 587

[Management Settings] ..................................................................................................................................... 588

Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 591

Cleaning the Machine ........................................................................................................................................... 593

Cleaning the Surface of the Machine ................................................................................................................... 594

Cleaning the Platen Glass .................................................................................................................................. 595

Cleaning the Feeder .......................................................................................................................................... 596

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 599

Cleaning the Transfer Belt ................................................................................................................................. 600

Replacing Consumables ......................................................................................................................................... 601

Replacing the Toner Cartridges .......................................................................................................................... 602

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables ................................................................................................ 607

List of Consumables .......................................................................................................................................... 608

Adjusting the Print Quality and Position ................................................................................................................ 610

Calibrating the Gradation .................................................................................................................................. 611

Correcting Color Mismatch ................................................................................................................................ 616

Adjusting the Reproducibility of Near Black Color Text .......................................................................................... 617

Adjusting the Print Position ............................................................................................................................... 619

VII

Moving the Machine .............................................................................................................................................

621

Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................... 625

Paper Jams ........................................................................................................................................................... 626

Paper Jams in the Output Tray and Rear Side ....................................................................................................... 628

Paper Jams in a Paper Source ............................................................................................................................. 630

Paper Jams in the Feeder ................................................................................................................................... 633

Paper Jams That Occur Repeatedly ..................................................................................................................... 634

Problems with Printing Results .............................................................................................................................. 636

Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear ................................................................................................................. 638

Streaks Appear ................................................................................................................................................. 639

Printing Is Uneven ............................................................................................................................................ 641

Printed Paper Is Blank ....................................................................................................................................... 643

Smudge Marks Appear on the Edge of Printouts ................................................................................................... 644

Text or Images Are Blurry .................................................................................................................................. 645

Printouts Have Ghost Images ............................................................................................................................. 646

Printouts Are Faded .......................................................................................................................................... 647

The Edge of the Page Is Not Printed .................................................................................................................... 649

Colors or Stains Appear on the Background of Printouts ........................................................................................ 650

White Spots Appear .......................................................................................................................................... 651

Smudge Marks Appear on the Back Side of Printouts ............................................................................................ 653

Printouts Are Skewed ........................................................................................................................................ 654

Paper and Paper Feeding Problems ........................................................................................................................ 655

Paper Creases .................................................................................................................................................. 656

Paper Curls ...................................................................................................................................................... 657

Paper Is Not Fed or Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together ..................................................................................... 658

Paper Drawer Does Not Fit in the Machine ........................................................................................................... 659

Setting Up ............................................................................................................................................................ 660

The Machine Connected via WSD Port Is Not Displayed During Driver Installation .................................................... 661

Cannot Connect to Wireless LAN ......................................................................................................................... 662

Network ............................................................................................................................................................... 663

Cannot Switch to Wireless LAN ........................................................................................................................... 664

Cannot Find the Print Server to Connect to .......................................................................................................... 665

Cannot Connect to a Shared Printer .................................................................................................................... 666

Cannot Find the IP Address of the Machine .......................................................................................................... 667

AirPrint Does Not Work ..................................................................................................................................... 668

Printing and Copying ............................................................................................................................................ 669

Cannot Print or Copy ......................................................................................................................................... 670

Cannot Print (Wireless LAN) ......................................................................................................................... 671

Cannot Print (Wired LAN) ............................................................................................................................. 673

Cannot Print (USB Connection) ..................................................................................................................... 674

Cannot Print (via Print Server) ...................................................................................................................... 675

Printing Is Slow ................................................................................................................................................ 676

Scanning .............................................................................................................................................................. 677

VIII

Cannot Save Scanned Data to a Computer ...........................................................................................................

678

Cannot Save Scanned Data to a Shared Folder ...................................................................................................... 680

Faxing and Using the Telephone ............................................................................................................................ 682

Cannot Send a Fax ............................................................................................................................................ 683

Cannot Receive a Fax ........................................................................................................................................ 685

Machine Does Not Automatically Switch Between Telephone and Fax ..................................................................... 687

Cannot Send or Receive a Fax via Optical Line ...................................................................................................... 688

Cannot Send a Fax to an International Destination ............................................................................................... 689

Other Party's Telephone or Fax Number Is Not Displayed ...................................................................................... 690

Management Functions and Environment Settings ................................................................................................ 691

Cannot Access Remote UI or Send Function Setting Tool ....................................................................................... 692

Changing the Volume of the Conrmation Sound and Warning Tone ...................................................................... 693

Changing the Time Until Sleep Mode .................................................................................................................. 694

Lost Department ID or PIN for the Administrator .................................................................................................. 695

Checking the Items That Can Be Congured on the Machine and Their Settings ....................................................... 696

A Message Appears ............................................................................................................................................... 697

An Error Code Is Displayed ..................................................................................................................................... 717

If the Problem Persists .......................................................................................................................................... 728

Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................... 730

Manuals of the Machine ........................................................................................................................................ 731

Using the User's Guide .......................................................................................................................................... 732

Manual Display Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 735

Operation Examples When Using a Computer ........................................................................................................ 736

Environmental Information, Regulations, and Standards ........................................................................................ 746

Notice .................................................................................................................................................................. 753

Trademarks and Copyrights ................................................................................................................................... 754

Third-party Software ............................................................................................................................................. 756

About the Machine

About the Machine ............................................................................................................................................

Supported Functions and Options ........................................................................................................................ 3

Paper Feeder PF-K ............................................................................................................................................ 5

System Manager ID and PIN ................................................................................................................................. 6

Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access .......................................................................................................... 7

Names of Parts and Their Functions .................................................................................................................... 9

Front Side ....................................................................................................................................................... 10

Rear Side ........................................................................................................................................................ 12

Interior ........................................................................................................................................................... 13

Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 14

Feeder ............................................................................................................................................................ 16

Multi-purpose Tray ......................................................................................................................................... 17

Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................................................. 18

Usable Paper ........................................................................................................................................................ 19

Precautions When Handling Paper ................................................................................................................. 23

Specications ....................................................................................................................................................... 24

Basic Specications ......................................................................................................................................... 25

Feeder Specications ...................................................................................................................................... 28

Print Specications ......................................................................................................................................... 29

Scan Specications ......................................................................................................................................... 30

Fax Specications ........................................................................................................................................... 31

Network Specications ................................................................................................................................... 32

Security and Management Function Specications ......................................................................................... 33

Supported Environment ................................................................................................................................. 37

Recommended Functions .................................................................................................................................... 39

Digitizing Documents ..................................................................................................................................... 40

Cost Savings ................................................................................................................................................... 41

Making Operations More Ecient .................................................................................................................. 42

About the Machine

84CU-088

Befor

e using the machine, check the basic information of the machine such as the supported functions and options,

names of each part, and specications of the functions. Also consider the management system of the machine and

measures against security risks.

Basic Information

The supported functions and options vary depending on the model. Check the list for details.

You can also check the specications of the options.

Supported Functions and Options(P. 3)

Check the names of parts, usable paper, and specications of functions, as needed.

Names of Parts and Their Functions(P. 9)

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Specications(P

. 24)

Information Required for Management Functions

When using the management functions, use the System Manager ID and PIN to log in.

The preset System Manager ID and PIN vary depending on the model.

System Manager ID and PIN(P. 6)

When using the machine in a network envir

onment, check the examples of measures to prevent

unauthorized access, and consider implementing these.

Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access(P. 7)

Useful Tips

Intr

oduces recommended functions useful for digitizing documents, reducing costs, and making operations

more ecient.

Recommended Functions(P. 39)

About the Machine

Supported Functions and Options

84CU-089

User

's Guide (this manual) describes all functions of the model series including the machine. Some of the functions

listed in User's Guide may not be available depending on your model. Use the table below to see which functions and

options are supported by your model.

Supported Functions(P. 3)

Supported Options(P. 4)

Supported Functions

: Supported : Not supported

Function MF753Cdw MF751Cdw

Scan

Fax

Copy

2-sided Printing

Forward received faxes

Send scanned data (e-Mail/SMB/FTP)

Wired LAN connection

Wireless LAN connection

USB connection

Remote UI

Keys and certicates

Linking with mobile devices

Display

Touch panel Touch panel

Feeder

(2-sided scanning) (1-sided scanning)

About the Machine

Function MF753Cdw MF751Cdw

Default System Manager ID

Not specied Not specied

Default System Manager PIN

Not specied Not specied

Department ID Management

Application Library

Toner Replenishment Service

● For details about the types of available drivers, see the Canon website for your country or r

egion, or see the

supplied User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.

https://global.canon/en/support/

Supported Options

You can use the option to suit your purpose.

● Adding a paper dr

awer

Paper Feeder PF-K(P. 5)

: Supported : Not supported

Option MF753Cdw MF751Cdw

Paper Feeder PF-K

About the Machine

Paper Feeder PF-K

84CU-08A

When fr

equently using paper of varying sizes or types or when loading large quantities of paper at a time, install the

optional Paper Feeder PF-K. This option reduces the work of loading paper.

For how to install Paper Feeder PF-K, see "Setup Guide."

Manuals of the Machine(P. 731)

◼ Specications

Paper size Maximum: 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 356.0 mm)

Minimum: 4" x 5 7/8" (100.0 mm x 148.0 mm)

Paper basis weight 16 lb Bond to 73 lb Cover (60 g/m² to 200 g/m²)

Number of paper sources and paper capacity

Paper drawer x 1

550 sheets (21 lb Bond (80 g/m²)), 640 sheets (17 lb Bond (64 g/m²))

Dimensions

(W x D x H)

16 1/2" x 16 7/8" x 6 1/8" (420 mm x 427 mm x 156 mm)

Weight Approx. 10.4 lb (4.7 kg)

aries depending on the installation environment and paper to be used.

About the Machine

System Manager ID and PIN

84CU-08C

The machine has a System Manager Mode for vie

wing and changing important settings.

When System Manager ID and System Manager PIN are set, only those users who know this information are able to

log into System Manager Mode.

The System Manager ID and System Manager PIN are not set.

System Manager Mode is disabled, allowing anyone to see and change important settings. Set the System Manager ID

and System Manager PIN to protect the information, and allow only certain administrators of this information.

For details about how to change and set the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN, see the following:

Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 357)

About the Machine

Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access

84CU-08E

Be sur

e to read this section before using the machine in a network environment.

Printers and multifunction machines can provide various useful functions when connected to a network. However,

because this also creates risks of unauthorized access and eavesdropping over the network, measures against security

risks are essential.

This section provides examples of measures against unauthorized access that you can implement during setup when

using the machine in a network environment.

Using a Private IP Address(P. 7)

Using a PIN to Protect Information(P. 7)

Precautions When Using Remote UI(P. 8)

● Ther

e are additional measures against security risks you can implement on the machine, such as restricting

communication with a rewall and using TLS encrypted communication to prevent eavesdropping and

tampering. Take the necessary measures according to your usage environment.

Security(P. 356)

Using a Private IP Address

Ther

e are two types of IP addresses: a global IP address, which is used for connecting to the Internet, and a private IP

address, which is used in a local area network such as a company LAN.

If a global IP address is assigned to the machine, the machine can be accessed by users on the Internet. Thus, the risk

of information leakage due to unauthorized access from external network increases.

On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned to the machine, access to the machine is restricted to only users

on your local area network. Therefore, it reduces the risk of unauthorized access compared to an assigned global IP

address.

Basically, assign a private IP address to the machine.

A private IP address is used in one of the following ranges.

Ranges for Private IP Addresses

● From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255

● From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255

● From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255

For details about how to assign and conrm the IP address, see the following:

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 67)

If you want to assign a global IP addr

ess to the machine, you can create an environment to prevent outside access,

such as by using a rewall, to reduce the risk of unauthorized access. Contact your network administrator about how

to implement network security.

Using a PIN to Protect Information

By setting up a PIN to pr

otect the information stored in the machine, you can reduce the risk of information leakage or

unauthorized use if a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access.

You can set a PIN to the functions indicated below. Only users who know the PIN can use these functions and access

the information on the machine.

Remote UI

About the Machine

You can require the user to enter the Remote UI Access PIN when using Remote UI.

Setting the PIN to Use for Remote UI(P. 422)

System Manager ID

ou can require the user to enter the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN, when changing any

important settings.

Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 357)

Addr

ess Book

You can require the user to enter the Address Book PIN when adding new entries and editing existing ones.

Restricting Address Book Registration and Editing by Setting a PIN(P. 420)

Precautions When Using Remote UI

● Do not access other websites when using Remote UI.

● After using Remote UI, be sure to log out and close your browser.

About the Machine

Names of Parts and Their Functions

84CU-08F

ont Side

Check these parts on the front when operating the machine.

Front Side(P. 10)

● Use the oper

ation panel to operate the machine and congure the settings.

Operation Panel(P. 14)

● Place the original on the platen glass or in the feeder when scanning, sending a fax, or cop

ying.

Feeder(P. 16)

● Load printing and cop

ying paper into the following paper sources:

Multi-purpose Tray(P. 17)

Paper Drawer(P. 18)

Rear Side

Check the r

ear parts when installing and connecting the machine and when clearing paper jams.

Rear Side(P. 12)

Interior

Pull out the toner cartridge tr

ay when replacing toner cartridges.

Interior(P. 13)

About the Machine

Front Side

84CU-08H

Feeder

ou can place two or more sheets of originals in the feeder. The placed originals are fed and scanned one by

one automatically.

Feeder(P. 16)

Paper stopper

Open the paper stopper to pr

event paper from falling out of the output tray.

USB port (for USB devices)

ou can connect a commercial USB memory device or USB keyboard.

Speaker

Emits sounds to notify you of the fax communication status as well as the oper

ations and status of the

machine.

Adjusting the Volume (For Models with a Fax Function)(P. 186)

Adjusting the Volume (For Models without a Fax Function)(P. 189)

Lift handles

Hold the lift handles when mo

ving the machine.

About the Machine

Ventilation slots

Air inside the machine is r

eleased through the ventilation slots to cool down the inside of the machine.

Do not place objects next to the ventilation slots, as this can prevent ventilation.

Operation panel

Use the display and k

eys to operate the machine and conrm the operations and status.

Operation

Panel

(P. 14)

Output tray

Printed and copied paper is ejected to the output tr

ay.

Power switch

urns the power of the machine ON and OFF.

Turning ON and OFF the Machine(P. 99)

Front cover

Open the fr

ont cover when replacing toner cartridges.

Paper drawer

Load paper you usually use into the paper dr

awer.

Paper Drawer(P. 18)

Multi-purpose tray

o temporarily use paper not loaded in the paper drawer, load it in the multi-purpose tray.

Multi-purpose

ray(P. 17)

Platen glass

Place books, thick paper, thin paper, and other originals that cannot be placed in the feeder on the platen

glass to cop

y or scan. The placed originals are scanned in a xed position.

Placing Originals(P. 128)

● T

o ensure ecient use of the machine, regularly clean the surface and platen glass.

Cleaning the Surface of the Machine(P. 594)

Cleaning the Platen Glass(P. 595)

● If the follo

wing symptoms occur when using the feeder, clean the feeder:

Cleaning the Feeder(P. 596)

Originals become dirty

- Originals frequently jam

- Printouts appear smudged after scanning, copying, or sending faxes

About the Machine

Rear Side

84CU-08J

Telephone line jack (LINE)

Use the supplied telephone cor

d to connect the machine to the telephone line.

External telephone jack (EXT.)

Connect a commer

cial telephone to this jack.

Ventilation slots

Air inside the machine is r

eleased through the ventilation slots to cool down the inside of the machine.

Do not place objects next to the ventilation slots, as this can prevent ventilation.

Power socket

Connect the po

wer cord to the power socket.

Rear cover

Open the r

ear cover when a paper jam occurs inside the machine.

Rating label

This label sho

ws the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine.

USB port (for USB devices)

ou can connect a commercial USB keyboard to the USB port.

USB port (for computer connection)

ou can connect a computer to the USB port using a commercial USB cable.

LAN port

ou can connect the machine to a wired LAN using a commercial Ethernet cable connected to the LAN port.

About the Machine

Interior

84CU-08K

Install the toner cartridges into the machine. Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 602)

Slots

Install the Y (yello

w), M (magenta), C (cyan), and K (black) toner cartridges in the slots from the rear to the

front, respectively. The slots have labels indicating the color of the toner cartridge to be installed.

Toner cartridge tray

Pull out the toner cartridge tr

ay when replacing toner cartridges.

About the Machine

Operation Panel

84CU-08L

Use the operation panel to operate the machine and congur

e the settings.

If the display is dicult to see, adjust the angle of the operation panel, as

shown on the right.

Display

Displays the scr

eens for operating the functions, usage, messages, and other information. This touch panel

can be operated by directly touching the screen with your nger.

Using the Operation Panel(P. 108)

Sound Volume key ( ）

Adjusts the volume.

Adjusting the Volume (For Models with a Fax Function)(P. 186)

Adjusting the Volume (For Models without a Fax Function)(P. 189)

Energy Saver key ( ）

Puts the machine into sleep mode to r

educe power consumption. In sleep mode,

lights up yellow-green.

Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep Mode)(P. 106)

Data indicator

Blinks when an oper

ation is being performed, such as during communication or printing, and lights up when

data is waiting to be processed.

About the Machine

Error indicator

Blinks or lights up when a paper jam or other err

or occurs.

Home key ( ）

Displays the [Home] scr

een.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Stop key ( )

Cancels an oper

ation being executed.

About the Machine

Feeder

84CU-08R

Feeder cover

Open the feeder co

ver when cleaning the inside of the feeder or clearing a paper jam inside the feeder.

Slide guides

Align the slide guides against the edges of the originals to pr

operly place the original.

Original supply tray

You can place two or more sheets of originals in the original supply tray. Placing Originals(P. 128)

Original output tray

Scanned originals ar

e output to the original output tray.

Document feed scanning area

Originals placed on the feeder ar

e scanned.

● Do not place objects on the original output tr

ay. This can damage the originals.

● If the following symptoms occur when using the feeder, clean the feeder: Cleaning the Feeder(P. 596)

- Originals become dirty

- Originals frequently jam

- Printouts appear smudged after scanning, copying, or sending faxes

About the Machine

Multi-purpose Tray

84CU-08U

Load paper that you will tempor

arily use in the multi-purpose tray.

Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose

ray(P. 137)

Paper guides

Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper to pr

operly place the paper.

Paper tray

Pull out the paper tr

ay when loading paper.

Lock release lever

ve the paper guides while pressing the lock release lever.

About the Machine

Paper Drawer

84CU-08W

Load paper that you usually use into the paper dr

awer.

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 132)

Paper guides

Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper to pr

operly place the paper.

Lock release lever

ve the paper guides while pressing the lock release lever.

Lock release lever (for extending the paper drawer)

When loading paper longer than A4, e

xtend the paper drawer toward you while pressing the lock release

lever.

* When the paper drawer is extended from the machine, it is not fully housed.

About the Machine

Usable Paper

84CU-08X

The sizes and types of paper that can be used on the machine ar

e shown below.

Usable Paper Sizes(P. 19)

Usable Paper Types(P. 20)

Unusable Paper(P. 22)

● Pr

ecautions must be taken when handling and storing paper.

Precautions When Handling Paper(P. 23)

Usable Paper Sizes

: Usable : Not usable

Paper Size Paper Drawer 1

Paper Drawer 2

Multi-purpose Tray

Automatic 2-sided Printing

*3*4*5

*3*6

Legal (LGL)

*3*4

Letter (LTR)

*3*4*5

Statement (STMT)

Executive (EXEC)

Ocio

*3*4

Ocio (Br

azil)

*3*4

Ocio (Me

xico)

*3*4

Letter (Government)

*3*4

Legal (Government)

*3*4

About the Machine

Paper Size Paper Drawer 1

Paper Drawer 2

Multi-purpose Tray

Automatic 2-sided Printing

Foolscap/Folio

*3*4

Foolscap (Australia)

*3*4

Legal (India)

3x5inch

Envelope No.10 (COM10)

Envelope Monarch

Envelope C5

Envelope DL

Custom Paper Size

*10

The optional Paper Feeder PF-K

Automatically prints on both sides without having to r

eload the paper.

Enables printing of received faxes.

Enables printing of received I-Faxes.

Enables printing of reports and lists.

Enables loading of paper in the portrait or landscape orientation.

You can use a custom size from 3 7/8" x 5 7/8" (98.0 mm x 148.0 mm) to 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 356.0 mm).

You can use a custom size from 4" x 5 7/8" (100.0 mm x 148.0 mm) to 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 356.0 mm).

You can use a custom size from 3" x 5" (76.0 mm x 127.0 mm) to 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 356.0 mm).

*10

You can use a custom size from 5 7/8" x 5 7/8" (148.0 mm x 148.0 mm) to 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 356.0 mm).

Usable Paper Types

ou can use non-chlorine paper.

: Usable : Not usable

Paper Type Paper Weight Paper

awer 1

Paper

Drawer 2

Multi-

purpose

Tray

Automatic 2-

sided Printing

Thin 1

16 lb Bond (60 g/m²)

Plain 1

*3*4

17 lb Bond to 19 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 74

g/m²)

About the Machine

Paper Type Paper Weight Paper

awer 1

Paper

Drawer 2

Multi-

purpose

Tray

Automatic 2-

sided Printing

Plain 2

*3*4

20 lb Bond to 21 lb Bond (75 g/m² to 82

g/m²)

Plain 3

*3*4

22 lb Bond to 24 lb Bond (83 g/m² to 90

g/m²)

Plain 4 25 lb Bond to 31 lb Bond (91 g/m² to 119

g/m²)

Heavy 1 32 lb Bond to 34 lb Bond (120 g/m² to

128 g/m²)

Heavy 2 35 lb Bond to 60 lb Cover (129 g/m² to

163 g/m²)

Heavy 3 61 lb Cover to 65 lb Cover (164 g/m² to

176 g/m²)

Recycled 1

*3*4

17 lb Bond to 19 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 74

g/m²)

Recycled 2

*3*4

20 lb Bond to 21 lb Bond (75 g/m² to 82

g/m²)

Recycled 3

22 lb Bond to 24 lb Bond (83 g/m² to 90

g/m²)

Recycled 4 25 lb Bond to 31 lb Bond (91 g/m² to 119

g/m²)

Pre-punched 1 17 lb Bond to 19 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 74

g/m²)

Pre-punched 2 20 lb Bond to 21 lb Bond (75 g/m² to 82

g/m²)

Labels

Color

*3*4

17 lb Bond to 19 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 74

g/m²)

Letterhead 1 17 lb Bond to 19 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 74

g/m²)

Letterhead 2 20 lb Bond to 21 lb Bond (75 g/m² to 82

g/m²)

Letterhead 3 22 lb Bond to 24 lb Bond (83 g/m² to 90

g/m²)

About the Machine

Paper Type Paper Weight Paper

awer 1

Paper

Drawer 2

Multi-

purpose

Tray

Automatic 2-

sided Printing

Letterhead 4 25 lb Bond to 31 lb Bond (91 g/m² to 119

g/m²)

Letterhead 5 32 lb Bond to 34 lb Bond (120 g/m² to

128 g/m²)

Letterhead 6 35 lb Bond to 60 lb Cover (129 g/m² to

163 g/m²)

Letterhead 7 61 lb Cover to 65 lb Cover (164 g/m² to

176 g/m²)

Coated 1 32 lb Bond (118 g/m² to 120 g/m²)

Coated 2 33 lb Bond to 39 lb Bond (121 g/m² to

150 g/m²)

Coated 3 56 lb Cover to 73 lb Cover (151 g/m² to

200 g/m²)

Envelope

The optional Paper Feeder PF-K

Automatically prints on both sides without having to r

eload the paper.

Enables printing of received faxes and I-Faxes.

Enables printing of reports and lists.

When you specify a custom size, [Envelope 1] and [Envelope 2] are displayed for the paper type. If you cannot print

properly with [Envelope 1], such as due to the toner coming off, try using [Envelope 2].

Unusable Paper

Before printing, check whether the paper to use is suitable. Do not use the following types of paper, as they can

cause paper jams or printing err

ors:

● Wrinkled, creased, curled, torn, or damp paper

● Thin straw paper, very thin paper, coarse paper, glossy paper

● Paper with glue or other adhesive sticking out or label paper whose back side can be easily peeled off

● Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer, back side of paper printed by a thermal transfer printer

Printing on damp paper may cause steam to be emitted fr

om the output area or water droplets to adhere to the

output part, but this does not indicate a malfunction. This is because the water contained in the paper evaporates due to

the heat generated when the toner xes to the paper. This is more likely to occur when the room temperature is low.

About the Machine

Precautions When Handling Paper

84CU-08Y

o prevent paper jams and other errors and ensure beautiful printing, you must take precautions when handling and

storing paper.

To maintain the quality of printed paper, pay attention when storing and gluing paper.

◼ Handling and Storing Paper

Acclimating the Paper to the Usage Environment

Before using the paper in the machine, be sure to fully acclimate the paper to the environment where the

machine is located. Immediately using paper stored in a location with a different temperature or humidity

can cause paper jams or printing errors.

Storing Paper Before Use

● It is recommended that you use paper as soon as possible after opening the package. Any remaining

paper should be wrapped in the original package and stored on a at surface.

● To protect the paper from moisture or dryness, keep the paper wrapped in its package until use.

● Do not store the paper so that it curls or folds.

● Do not store the paper vertically, and do not stack too much paper.

● Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place with high humidity, dryness, or a drastically different

temperature or humidity compared to the usage environment.

◼ Storing and Gluing Printed Paper

Storing Paper

● Store the paper on a at surface.

● Do not store the paper together with items made of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) such as a clear folder. The

toner may melt, causing the paper to stick to the PVC material.

● Do not store the paper folded or creased. Toner may peel off.

● Do not store the paper in a place with high temperature.

● When storing the paper for a long period of time (two years or longer), store in a binder or similar item.

● Storing the paper for a long period of time can cause a discoloration of the paper, resulting in a

discoloration of printed images.

Precautions When Gluing Printed Paper

● Always use insoluble adhesives.

● Before applying adhesive, perform a test using an unneeded printout.

● Allow glued paper to fully dry before stacking.

About the Machine

Specications

84CU-090

Specications ar

e subject to change for product improvement, and the contents may be updated depending on

products released in the future. For details about product information, see the Canon website.

https://global.canon/

Specications of Main Unit

Basic Specications(P

. 25)

Feeder Specications(P

. 28)

Specications of Functions

Print Specications(P

. 29)

Scan Specications(P

. 30)

Fax Specications(P

. 31)

Network Specications(P

. 32)

Security and Management Function Specications(P

. 33)

Operating Environment and Supported Software and Servers

Supported Environment(P. 37)

◼ See Also

Specications of Options

ou can check the compatibility of options and their specications.

Supported Options(P. 4)

About the Machine

Basic Specications

84CU-091

Type Desktop

Color Supported Full Color

Scan Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi

Print Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi

Number of Tones 256

Copy Original Maximum: 8 1/2" x 11 3/4" (216.0 mm × 297.0 mm)

Sheet/Book: 3/4" (20 mm) or less

Copy Paper Size Maximum: 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 356.0 mm)

Minimum (paper dr

awer): 3 7/8" x 5 7/8" (98.0 mm x 148.0 mm)

Minimum (multi-purpose tray): 3" x 5" (76.0 mm x 127.0 mm)

Margin (when copying)

Platen Glass

Top: 1/4" ± 1/4" (5 mm ± 4.5 mm)

Left and right: 1/4" ± 1/8" (5 mm ± 3.0 mm)

Feeder

Top: 1/4" ± 1/4" (5 mm ± 4.5 mm)

Left and right: 1/4" ± 1/4" (5 mm ± 4.5 mm)

Paper Type and Weight

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Warm-up time

After powering ON

14.0 seconds or less

* Quick startup may not be available depending on the usage conditions.

After r

ecovering from sleep mode

5.3 seconds or less

First Copy Time

(Letter)

Full Color: Approx. 9.2 seconds

Black and White: Appr

ox. 8.1 seconds

Continuous Copy Speed

(Letter)

Full Color: 35 sheets/minute

Black and White: 35 sheets/minute

Original Scanning Speed Full Color: 1.9 seconds/sheet

About the Machine

(Letter) Black and White: 1.8 seconds/sheet

Magnication 25% to 400% (in 1% increments)

Paper Feeding System and Paper Capacity

Paper Drawer x 1

250 sheets (17 lb Bond (64 g/m²), 21 lb Bond (80 g/m²))

Multi-purpose T

ray

50 sheets (17 lb Bond (64 g/m²), 21 lb Bond (80 g/m²))

Output System and Output Capacity

Output Tray

150 sheets (20 lb Bond (75 g/m²))

Number of Continuous Copies 999 sheets

Power supply AC 110 V - 127 V, 6.6 A, 60 Hz

Power Consumption

Maximum Power Consumption

1,610 W or less

During Sleep Mode

Appr

ox. average of 1.0 W (USB, wired LAN, or wireless LAN connection)

With Power Turned OFF

0.3 W or less

Dimensions

(W x D x H)

16 3/4" x 18 1/8" x 17" (425 mm x 461 mm x 430 mm)

Weight

(Not including toner cartridges)

MF753Cdw

Appr

ox. 48.5 lb (22.0 kg)

MF751Cdw

Approx. 47.8 lb (21.7 kg)

Maximum Occupancy Space 23 1/4" x 36 1/8" x 34" (591 mm x 917 mm x 862 mm)

* Provide a space of at least 4" (100 mm) around the machine.

Memory Capacity RAM: 1 GB

Usage Environment Temperature: 50 °F to 86 °F (10 °C to 30 °C)

Humidity: 20% to 80% RH (no condensation)

May vary depending the usage envir

onment and usage conditions.

Copy/print speeds are measured based on internal testing using Letter size paper copied/printed with 100% copy/

print ratio to original on one-sided paper. Internal testing involved continuously copying/printing the same one page of

content on plain paper (copy speed is tested by copying on the platen glass). Copy/print speeds may vary depending on

paper type, paper size or paper feeding direction.

The device may automatically pause or slow down in order to adjust printer condition such as controlling temperature of

a certain unit or limiting impact to image quality during continuous copying/printing.

About the Machine

May vary depending on the installation envir

onment and paper to be used.

About the Machine

Feeder Specications

84CU-092

Feeder Type MF753Cdw

Automatic 2-sided Document Feeder

MF751Cdw

Automatic Document Feeder

Original Size and Type Original Size

Maximum: 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm)

Minimum: 1 7/8" x 3 3/8" (48.0 mm x 85.0 mm)

Original W

eight

13 lb Bond to 28 lb Bond (50 g/m² to 105 g/m²)

Original Storage Capacity

(Letter)

50 sheets (21 lb Bond (80 g/m²))

Original Scanning Speed

(Letter)

Copying (300 dpi × 600 dpi)

1-sided Scanning

Full Color: 20 pages/minute

Black and White: 40 pages/minute

2-sided Scanning

Full Color: 40 pages/minute

Black and White: 80 pages/minute

Cop

ying (300 dpi × 300 dpi)

1-sided Scanning

Full Color: 40 pages/minute

Black and White: 50 pages/minute

2-sided Scanning

Full Color: 80 pages/minute

Black and White: 100 pages/minute

May vary depending the usage envir

onment and usage conditions.

About the Machine

Print Specications

84CU-094

UFR II Printer Function(P. 29)

Memory Media Print Function(P. 29)

UFR II Printer Function

Type Internal

Print Size Usable Paper(P. 19)

Continuous Print Speed Same as "Continuous Copy Speed" for main unit

Basic Specications(P

. 25)

Resolution Data Processing

1,200 dpi × 1,200 dpi, 600 dpi × 600 dpi

Page Description Language (PDL) UFR II

Protocol Supported TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, IPP, IPPS, WSD

Resident Fonts None

Interface USB

USB 2.0 Hi-Speed

Wir

ed LAN

10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)

Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

Memory Media Print Function

Printable Formats PDF, TIFF/JPEG

About the Machine

Scan Specications

84CU-095

Type Color Scanner

Original Scan Size Platen Glass

Same as "Cop

y Original" for main unit

Basic Specications(P

. 25)

Feeder

Same as "Original Size and Type" for feeder

Feeder Specications(P

. 28)

Resolution (Maximum) 600 dpi × 600 dpi

Original Scanning Speed Platen Glass

Same as "Original Scanning Speed" for main unit

(

Basic Specications(P

. 25) )

Feeder

Same as "Original Scanning Speed" for feeder

Feeder Specications(P

. 28)

Interface USB

USB 2.0 Hi-Speed

Wired LAN

10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T shared (RJ-45)

Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

Protocol Supported

FTP (TCP/IP), SMB (TCP/IP), SMTP, POP3, TCP/IP, USB

Output Format

TIFF, JPEG (Single Page), PDF (Compact, Searchable), PDF (Encrypted, Digital Signature)

Some formats ar

e not available depending on the function.

About the Machine

Fax Specications

84CU-096

Line Used

Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), Facsimile Communication Network (PSTN)

Scan Line Density Normal Mode

G3: 8 pels/mm

× 3.85 line/mm

Fine Mode

G3: 8 pels/mm

× 7.7 line/mm

Superne Mode

G3: 8 pels/mm

× 15.4 line/mm

Ultr

ane Mode

G3: 16 pels/mm

× 15.4 line/mm

Transmission Speed

SuperG3: 33.6 Kbps

G3: 14.4 Kbps

Compression Method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG

Communication Mode SuperG3, G3

Maximum Sending Original Size Legal

Recording Paper Size

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Transmission Time

Approx. 2.6 seconds

Depending on your telephone line and r

egion, you may not be able to perform data communication, such as when the

sum of the resistance value of the telephone line and that of the machine exceeds 1,700 Ω. In this case, contact your

dealer or service representative.

Pels stands for picture elements (pixels).

With Automatic Fallback function.

Value obtained with Canon original test sheet of A4 size, standard ECM (JBIG) transmission.

About the Machine

Network Specications

84CU-097

◼ Common

Protocol Supported TCP/IP

ame type: Ethernet II

Print applications: LPD, Raw, IPP, IPPS, WSD, Mopria, AirPrint, Windows10 Mobile Print,

Windows11 Mobile Print

◼ Wir

ed LAN

Interface 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T shared (RJ-45)

◼ Wir

eless LAN

Standard IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

Transmission Method IEEE 802.11b (Modulation system: DS-SS)

IEEE 802.11g (Modulation system: OFDM method)

IEEE 802.11n (Modulation system: OFDM method)

Communication Mode Infrastructure Mode

Access Point Mode

Security

(Encryption Method)

Infrastructure Mode

128 (104) / 64 (40) bit WEP

A-PSK (TKIP / AES-CCMP)

WPA2-PSK (TKIP / AES-CCMP)

WPA-EAP (AES-CCMP)

WPA2-EAP (AES-CCMP)

Access Point Mode

WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)

Setup Method WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup

About the Machine

Security and Management Function Specications

84CU-098

Firewall(P. 33)

IPSec(P. 33)

Keys and Certicates(P

. 34)

Denition of "

Weak Encryption"(P. 35)

TLS(P. 36)

Firewall

● Up to 16 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specied for both IPv4 and IPv6.

● Up to 32 MAC addresses can be specied.

IPSec

IPSec of the machine conforms to RFC2401, RFC2402, RFC2406, and RFC4305.

Operating system of connected device Windows 8.1

Windo

ws 10

Connection mode Transport mode

Key exchange protocol IKEv1 (main mode)

Authentication method

Pre-shared key

Digital signature

Hash algorithm (and key length)

HMA

C-SHA1-96

HMAC-SHA2 (256 bits or 384 bits)

Encryption algorithm (and key length)

3DES-CBC

AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, 256 bits)

Key exchange algorithm/group (and key length)

Die-Hellman (DH)

Group 14 (2048 bits)

ECDH-P256 (256 bits)

ECDH-P384 (384 bits)

ESP Hash algorithm

About the Machine

HMAC-SHA1-96

Encryption algorithm (and key length)

3DES-CBC

AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, 256 bits)

Hash/encryption algorithm (and key length)

AES-GCM (128 bits, 192 bits, 256 bits)

AH Hash algorithm

HMA

C-SHA1-96

● IPSec supports communication to a unicast addr

ess (single device).

Keys and Certicates

The follo

wing keys and certicates are supported:

◼ Self-generated Key and Self-signed Certicate or CSR

Public key algorithm (and key length) RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits)

DSA (1024Bits, 2048Bits, 3072Bits)

ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)

Certicate signatur

e algorithm

RSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384

, SHA-512

, MD2, MD5

DSA: SHA-1

ECDSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512

Certicate thumbprint algorithm SHA1

SHA384-RSA and SHA512-RSA ar

e available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.

◼ Key and Certicate or CA Certicate for Installation

Format Key

CS#12

CA certicate

X.509 DER format/PEM format

About the Machine

File extension Key

".p12" or ".pfx"

CA certicate

".cer

" or ".pem"

Public key algorithm (and key length) RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits)

DSA (1024 bits, 2048 bits, 3072 bits)

ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)

Certicate signature algorithm

RSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384

, SHA-512

, MD2, MD5

DSA: SHA-1

ECDSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512

Certicate thumbprint algorithm SHA1

Requir

ements for the certicate contained in a key are pursuant to CA certicates.

SHA384-RSA and SHA512-RSA are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.

● The machine does not support use of a certicate r

evocation list (CRL).

Denition of "

Weak Encryption"

When [Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.] in [Encryption Settings] is set to [On], the use of the following algorithms is

prohibited.

[Encryption Settings](P. 575)

Hash MD4, MD5, SHA-1

HMAC HMAC-MD5

Common key encryption RC2, RC4, DES

Public key encryption RSA encryption (512 bits/1024 bits)

RSA signatur

e (512 bits/1024 bits)

DSA (512 bits/1024 bits)

DH (512 bits/1024 bits)

● Even when [Pr

ohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.] in [Encryption Settings] is set to [On], the hash algorithm

SHA-1, which is used for signing a root certicate, can be used.

About the Machine

TLS

The following combinations of the TLS version and algorithm are usable:

: Usable : Not usable

Algorithm TLS Version

TLS 1.3 TLS 1.2 TLS 1.1 TLS 1.0

Encryption Algorithm

AES-CBC (256bit)

AES-CBC (128bit)

AES-GCM (256bit)

AES-GCM (128bit)

3DES-CBC

CHACHA20-POLY1305

Key Exchange Algorithm

RSA

ECDHE

X25519

Signature Algorithm

RSA

ECDSA

HMAC Algorithm

SHA1

SHA256

SHA384

About the Machine

Supported Environment

84CU-099

Operating Environment(P. 37)

Supported Software and Servers(P. 37)

Operating Environment

System Environment for WSD Scan Windows 8.1

Windo

ws 10

Windows 11

Operating Conditions of Send Function Setting

Tool

Internet Explorer 11

Microsoft Edge

Google Chrome

AirPrint Operating Environment

Using AirPrint Application to Print and Scan Data and Send

Fax

es(P. 347)

Remote UI Operating Environment

Windows

Internet Explor

er 11

Microsoft Edge

Google Chrome

macOS

Safari 11

Google Chrome

Android

Google Chrome

UC Browser

iOS

Safari 11

UC Browser

ou must set your Web browser to enable cookies and use JavaScript.

Supported Software and Servers

E-mail/I-Fax Forwarding Server

Softwar

Microsoft Exchange Server 2013

Micr

osoft Exchange Server 2016

Microsoft Exchange Server 2019

About the Machine

Lotus Domino R7.0

Sendmail 8.15.2

E-mail/I-Fax Receiving Server Software Microsoft Exchange Server 2013

Micr

osoft Exchange Server 2016

Microsoft Exchange Server 2019

Lotus Domino R7.0

Qpopper 4.1.0

File Servers Available for File

Transmission

SMB

Windows 8.1

Windows 10

Windows 11

Windows Server 2012 / Windows Server 2012 R2

Windows Server 2016

Windows Server 2019

Windows Server 2022

Mac OS X 10.15 / 11.0 / 12.0

CentStream8

FTP

Windows Server 2012: Internet Information Services 8.0

Windows 8.1 / Server 2012 R2: Internet Information Services 8.5

Windows 10 / Windows 11 / Server 2016 / Server 2019 / Server 2022 : Internet

Information Services 10

CentStream8

Available LDAP Servers Windows Server 2012 with Active Directory

Windows Server 2012 R2 with Active Directory

Windows Server 2016 with Active Directory

Windows Server 2019 with Active Directory

Windows Server 2022 with Active Directory

About the Machine

Recommended Functions

84CU-09A

This section intr

oduces recommended functions that can be useful for your purpose and help you solve problems,

such as to simplify document management and sharing, save paper and power, and improve operations.

Digitizing Documents(P. 40) Cost Savings(P. 41) Making Operations More

Ecient(P

. 42)

Canon strives to be environmentally and energy conscious in all aspects of its operations.

Click her

e to learn about the ways in which Canon is helping to protect the environment.

About the Machine

Digitizing Documents

84CU-09C

By digitizing paper documents, you do not have to worry about stor

age space and documents deteriorating, and you

can view and use these documents on a computer or mobile device.

Scanning Paper Documents

You can use the scan function to scan documents and photos into data that can

be saved and sent.

Scanning(P. 235)

Use the scan settings to convert these into data accor

ding to your purpose. You

can convert the data into a text-searchable PDF, and divide and save the data into

pages.

Scan Settings(P. 266)

Digitizing Fax Documents

You can digitize received faxes and send faxes directly from a computer. You can also send and view faxes in a

timely fashion e

ven if you are away from the machine.

Forwarding and Saving Received Faxes as Data

Received fax

es can be automatically forwarded to a specied computer or

mobile device and saved.

Auto Forwarding and Backing Up Received Faxes(P. 286)

Sending Faxes from a Computer

ou can use a procedure similar to that for printing documents and photos to

send faxes directly from a computer.

Sending Faxes from a Computer (PC Faxing)(P. 293)

Using AirPrint Application to Print and Scan Data and Send

Fax

es(P. 347)

About the Machine

Cost Savings

84CU-09E

This machine can help you save costs on paper, po

wer, and fax communication.

Saving Paper

Saving Paper When Printing

ou can print on both sides of the paper, and print multiple pages on one

sheet of paper.

Printing from a Computer(P. 210)

Preparing to Print from a USB Memory Device(P. 209)

Saving Paper When Faxing

Instead of immediately printing r

eceived faxes, you can temporarily save them in the memory of the

machine and forward them automatically. You can view the faxes and print only those that are needed.

Saving Received Documents in the Machine (Memory Lock)(P. 416)

Auto Forwarding and Backing Up Received Faxes(P. 286)

ou can print received faxes on both sides of the paper.

Changing the Print Settings for Received Faxes(P. 301)

Saving Paper When Copying

ou can copy on both sides of the paper, and copy multiple originals or the front and back of a card on a

sheet of paper.

Additional Copying Features(P. 317)

Copying Both Sides of ID Cards onto One Sheet(P. 324)

Restricting and Managing the Number of Sheets of Paper

You can allocate a Department ID to each user or group to manage the number of pages printed and copied

per Department ID

Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with Department ID (Department ID Management)(P. 360)

Saving Ener

You can congur

e the machine to enter sleep mode when not in use to save energy. The power of the machine

does not turn OFF, so it can quickly resume operations and receive faxes.

Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep Mode)(P. 106)

Saving Fax Communication Costs

If both the fax sending and receiving devices support I-Fax, you can send and

receive faxes over the Internet to control costs.

Using Internet Fax (I-Fax)(P. 306)

About the Machine

Making Operations More Ecient

84CU-09F

ou can print and share data even in an environment where a computer cannot be used. In addition, you can use the

job logs and customize the operation panel to make operations more ecient and reduce the amount of time using

the machine.

Printing and Sharing Data Without Using a Computer

Printing Data from a Smartphone or Tablet

ou can print data from a mobile device connected to the machine while using

an application. The machine supports direct connection for easy connection

setup without having to use a wireless LAN router.

Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 333)

Using a USB Memory Device

ou can insert a USB memory device into the machine to display the data in

the USB memory device on the operation panel and print it on the machine.

You can save scanned data to a USB memory device and share it with a

computer not on the network.

Preparing to Print from a USB Memory Device(P. 209)

Scanning (Saving to a USB Memory Device)(P. 254)

Saving and Sharing Paper Documents as Data

ou can scan a document, send the data by e-mail, and save it to a shared

folder. By just operating the machine, you can save and share data with a

computer.

Scanning (Sending by E-mail)(P. 256)

Scanning (Saving to a Shared Folder or FTP Server)(P. 259)

Easy Touch Panel Operations

Using the Job Log to Send Data and Faxes

ou can send scanned data or faxes to destinations specied in the past by

calling up the TX Job Log for scan or fax jobs. In addition to calling up the

destination, you can also call up the past settings to save the trouble of having

to congure the settings again.

Specifying Destinations (TX Job Log)(P. 176)

Customizing the Operation Panel for Greater Usability

ou can rearrange the buttons on the [Home] screen for greater usability.

Customizing the [Home] Screen(P. 121)

ou can register your favorite settings in the scan, fax, and copy

functions for faster operations and change the default settings that

are treated as standard when you use a function.

Registering Frequently Used Settings(P. 179)

Changing the Default Settings(P. 183)

About the Machine

One-touch Operation of Useful Functions

Use the Application Library to quickly execute an operation (such as "Print

egular document" or "View consumables information") with a single touch of

a button.

To use this function, you must click [Application Library] on the Portal Page of

Remote UI, and congure the application.

Portal Page of Remote

UI(P

. 441)

For more information, see the User's Guide of the Application Library.

Application Library

Through the toner replenishment service, new toner cartridges are

automatically deliver

ed to you before your existing toner cartridge is used up.

* Use of the toner replenishment service requires prior registration with

select retailers. This service is only available in certain countries.

About the Machine

Setting Up

Setting Up .............................................................................................................................................................

Conguring the Default Settings (Setup Guide) ................................................................................................ 46

Setting Up the Network ...................................................................................................................................... 50

Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN ..................................................................................................................... 52

Connecting to a Wired LAN ............................................................................................................................. 53

Connecting to a Wireless LAN ......................................................................................................................... 54

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Using the Router Button (Push Button Mode) ...................................... 57

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Entering a PIN Code (WPS PIN Code Mode) ......................................... 58

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Searching for a Router (Access Point Setup Method) ............................ 60

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method) .......................................... 62

Setting IPv4 Addresses ................................................................................................................................... 65

Setting IPv6 Addresses ................................................................................................................................... 67

Conguring Your Machine for Your Network Environment ............................................................................. 69

Manually Conguring the Ethernet Settings ............................................................................................ 70

Conguring DNS ...................................................................................................................................... 71

Conguring SMB ...................................................................................................................................... 74

Conguring WINS .................................................................................................................................... 76

Registering LDAP Servers ......................................................................................................................... 77

Conguring SNMP ................................................................................................................................... 81

Conguring SNTP .................................................................................................................................... 84

Conguring SLP Communication ............................................................................................................. 86

Checking the Network Status and Settings ..................................................................................................... 88

Conguring the Fax Settings (Fax Setup Guide) ................................................................................................ 91

Installing Software and Drivers to the Computer ............................................................................................. 95

Setting Up

84CU-05U

After installing the machine, congur

e the required settings to enable use of the functions by performing the following

steps.

Steps 1 to 3 are the machine settings.

Step 4 is the setting for using the machine from a computer. Congure this setting for each computer using the

machine.

Step 1

When you turn ON the machine for the rst time, the screen (Setup Guide) for setting the

items required for using the machine is displayed. Congure the settings by following the

instructions on the screen.

Conguring the Default Settings (Setup Guide)(P. 46)

Step 2

Congure the network settings not included in the Setup Guide.

If you did not connect to the network using the Setup Guide, do that during this step.

Setting Up the Network(P. 50)

Step 3

Set the items required to perform fax operations by following the instructions on the screen.

Conguring the Fax Settings (Fax Setup Guide)

(P. 91)

Step 4

Install the software required to use the machine and any printer and fax drivers on your

computer.

Installing Software and Drivers to the Computer(P. 95)

◼ See Also

Implementing Measur

es to Prevent Unauthorized Access

It is important to provide measures against security risks when using the machine in a network environment.

Check examples of measures that you can take with the machine.

Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access(P. 7)

Checking Available Functions

The functions available on the machine vary depending on the model. Check the functions that ar

e available

on your model.

Supported Functions and Options(P. 3)

Conguring the Settings Requir

ed to Use the Functions of the Machine

Additional settings may be required depending on your model. For details about the settings required for

each function, see the following:

Printing Preparations(P. 194)

Preparations for Scanning(P. 237)

Preparations for Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 335)

Importing Settings Data fr

om Another Machine

You can share settings data with other machines to save time on registering and conguring the settings.

You can export data from another machine of the same model to a computer and import that data to the

machine so as to share the settings.

Importing and Exporting the Address Book and Settings(P. 452)

Setting Up

Conguring the Default Settings (Setup Guide)

84CU-05W

When you turn ON the machine for the rst time, the scr

een (Setup Guide) for setting the items required for using the

machine is displayed. Congure the settings using the procedure below by following the instructions on the screen.

Step 1: Setting the Display Language and Country or Region(P. 46)

Step 2: Setting the Date and Time(P. 46)

Step 3: Setting Remote UI(P. 47)

Step 4: Correcting the Color(P. 47)

Step 5: Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 48)

Step 6: Conguring Settings for T

oner Replenishment Service(P. 49)

Step 7: Viewing an Overview of the Application Library and Setup Method(P. 49)

● These settings can only be congur

ed one time using the Setup Guide when starting the machine for the

rst time. To change the settings congured with the Setup Guide at a later time, set the items in Steps 1 to

6 individually. For the details of each setting, see the following.

Setting the Date and Time(P. 436)

Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 357)

Setting the PIN to Use for Remote UI(P. 422)

Calibrating the Gradation(P. 611)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 54)

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Step 1: Setting the Display Language and Country or Region

Set the language displayed on the oper

ation panel screen and reports to be printed. Next, set the country or region

where the machine is used.

On the [Language] screen, select the display language.

Press [Yes].

➠ The display language is set, and the [Select Country/Region] scr

een is displayed.

Depending on the country or region, the [Select Country/Region] screen is not displayed and the [Time

Zone] screen is displayed. When the [Time Zone] screen is displayed, proceed to "Step 2: Setting the Date

and Time."

Step 2: Setting the Date and Time(P. 46)

On the [Select Country/Region] screen, select the country or region.

➠ The country or region is set, and the [Time Zone] screen is displayed.

Step 2: Setting the Date and Time

The date and time ar

e used as the reference for the functions using date and time information, and therefore, they

need to be set accurately.

Setting Up

On the [Time Zone] screen, select your time zone.

Set the time zone (UTC

) and Daylight Saving Time accor

ding to the region where this machine is installed.

*1 The UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) is a coordinated universal time that is standard for all parts of the

world. Internet-based communication relies on the UTC being set correctly.

On the [Current Date/Time Settings] screen, enter the date and time, and press

[Apply].

➠ The time and date ar

e set, and the Remote UI conrmation screen is displayed.

Step 3: Setting Remote UI

With Remote UI, you can use a W

eb browser on a computer to check the operation status of the machine, change the

settings, and perform other operations.

Set the System Manager ID and Remote UI Access PIN to prevent unauthorized access to the machine.

On the Remote UI conrmation scr

een, press [Yes].

To use System Manager Mode to view and change important settings, set the System Manager ID. System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

To set the System Manager ID at a later time, press [No] and proceed to 2.

When Setting the System Manager ID

On the [Congur

e System Manager Mode] screen, press [Yes], and set the System Manager ID and PIN by

following the instructions on the screen.

● Set the System Manager ID and PIN by specifying any number. You cannot set an ID or PIN consisting of

all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."

● Specify any number other than "7654321" for the System Manager PIN. You cannot set a PIN consisting of

all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."

On the [Congur

e General User Mode] screen, press [Yes].

Restrict the use of Remote UI to only those users who know the Remote UI Access PIN.

Enter the Remote UI Access PIN, and press [Apply].

Specify any number. You cannot set a PIN consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."

Enter the PIN again, and press [Apply].

➠ After the message [Settings congur

ed.] appears, the color correction conrmation screen is displayed.

Step 4: Correcting the Color

By correcting the color, you can improve the color reproducibility when copying.

It is recommended that you correct the color to ensure better copy results.

Required Preparations

● Load the follo

wing paper in the paper drawer:

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 132)

Paper size: A4 or letter

Setting Up

- Paper type: Plain 1 to Plain 3, Recycled 1 or Recycled 2, or Thin 1

On the color correction conrmation scr

een, press [Yes].

If you pressed [No], proceed to "Step 5: Connecting to a Wireless LAN."

Step 5: Connecting to a Wireless

LAN(P

. 48)

Check that paper is loaded in the paper drawer, and then press [OK].

Check the operating procedure, and press [Start].

➠ The calibr

ation image (image used for calibration) is printed.

Place the paper with the calibration image printed on the platen glass.

Open the feeder.

Place the paper on the platen glass in the landscape orientation while aligning the corner of the paper

with the top left corner of the platen glass.

Place the print side of the calibration image face down with the black band at the back of the machine.

Gently close the feeder.

Press [Start Scanning].

➠ The color is corr

ected.

When color correction is completed, the message [Finished.] appears, and then the screen for conrming

the wireless LAN connection is displayed.

Remove the paper with the printed calibration image from the platen glass.

Step 5: Connecting to a Wireless LAN

Connect to the network using wir

eless local area network (LAN).

On the screen for conrming the wir

eless LAN connection, press [Yes].

● If the machine is not connected to a wir

eless LAN, press [No], and proceed to "Step 6: Conguring Settings

for Toner Replenishment Service." Step 6: Conguring Settings for Toner Replenishment

Service(P. 49)

Setting Up

● When connecting to a wir

ed LAN, congure the wired LAN connection settings after exiting the Setup Guide.

Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN(P. 52)

Select the Wireless LAN connection type, and connect to the Wireless LAN.

➠ When the connection to the wir

eless LAN is completed, the Toner Replenishment Service conﬁrmation

screen is displayed.

Depending on your wireless LAN router, the connection type and security standards may vary. Check for a

connection type and security standard that are supported by both the wireless LAN router and the machine,

and then establish a connection according to the connection type. For the standards and procedure, see the

following:

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 54)

Step 6: Conguring Settings for T

oner Replenishment Service

You can congure settings for toner replenishment service. Through toner replenishment service, new toner

cartridges are automatically delivered to you before your existing toner cartridges are used up.

* Use of the toner replenishment service requires prior registration with select retailers. This service is only available in

certain countries.

* This service can be set up through [Toner Delivery Settings] displayed on the [Home] screen.

[Home]

Scr

een(P. 111)

On the conrm scr

een of toner replenishment service, press [Next].

Press [Accept].

If you press [Do Not Accept], the screen for conguring settings for toner r

eplenishment service is skipped

and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 7.

Press [OK].

➠ The [Application Libr

ary] screen is displayed.

● If connecting to the server fails, try conguring the settings again through [Connect to Server/Verify

Connection with Server] in [Toner Delivery Settings].

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Step 7: Viewing an Overview of the Application Library and Setup Method

On the [Application Library] screen, you can see a description of each function.

● Pr

ess [See More Info.] to see an overview of each function in the Application Library. Press [About Remote UI]

to see the setup method of the Application Library.

● For more information, see the manual of the Application Library. You can display the manual by pressing

[User's Manual] and scanning the displayed QR code with a mobile device.

Press [End].

➠ The settings congur

ed in the Setup Guide are applied.

When you exit the Setup Guide, the [Home] screen is displayed. [Home] Screen(P. 111)

Setting Up

Setting Up the Network

84CU-05X

o operate the machine from a computer or to connect to a server, you must connect the machine to a network.

Use the procedure below to connect the machine to a network and congure the settings of the machine according to

the network environment.

Administrator privileges are required to set up the network.

Depending on the model, the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN may be set by default.

System Manager

ID and PIN(P

. 6)

● Connecting the machine to a network without pr

oper security measures may leak information from the

machine to third parties.

Protecting the Network(P. 373)

◼ Pr

eparing to Set Up the Network

● Provide an Ethernet cable and router according to the usage environment of the machine.

● Check the information of the network environment used by the machine and the required network settings. For

details, contact the network administrator.

● Check that the computer and router to be used in the network are properly connected, and complete the network

settings. For details on the connection method, see the manuals of the devices or contact the manufacturer.

◼ Network Settings Procedure

Step 1

Select whether to use wired or wireless LAN and connect to the network.

o connect to a Wired LAN

Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN(P. 52)

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 53)

o connect to a Wireless LAN

Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN(P. 52)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 54)

Step 2

Set the IP address.

● By default, when the machine connects to a wir

ed or wireless LAN, an IP address is obtained

automatically and set to the machine.

● To use a speciﬁc IP address, set this manually.

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 67)

* When setting an IP addr

ess manually, you cannot use the operation panel to congure

some IPv6 address settings. It is recommended to use the operation panel to set the IPv4

address, and then use Remote UI to set the IPv6 address.

Setting Up

Step 3

Congure the settings of the machine according to the network environment, as needed.

Conguring Your Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 69)

* You cannot use the operation panel to congure some of the settings. It is recommended

that you congure the settings using Remote UI in Step 3

◼ Checks after Conguring the Network Settings

Check that the machine is pr

operly connected to the network.

Check the IP address and MAC address of the machine and other information, as needed.

Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 88)

Setting Up

Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN

84CU-05Y

Set whether to connect the machine to the network using a wir

ed or wireless LAN.

If you want to switch from wired LAN to wireless LAN, you can make the setting during the procedure for connecting

to wireless LAN.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 54)

* Y

ou cannot connect to a wired LAN and wireless LAN at the same time.

Use the operation panel to congure the settings. On the operation panel, you can also congure the settings by

pressing [Menu] in the [Home] screen

[Preferences]. You cannot congur

e the settings using Remote UI from a

computer.

Administrator privileges are required.

On the operation panel, press [

] (wired LAN) or [ ] (wireless LAN) in the [Home]

scr

een.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The [Network] scr

een is displayed.

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].

System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

Press [Select Wired/Wireless LAN].

Select [Wired LAN] or [Wireless LAN].

➠ The message [Settings congur

ed.] appears.

Next, connect to the wired or wireless LAN.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 53)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 54)

When Switching between Wired and Wireless LAN

● Any installed drivers must be uninstalled and then r

einstalled.

For details about uninstalling and installing drivers, see the driver manual at the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

Setting Up

Connecting to a Wired LAN

84CU-060

Connect a computer to the machine via a r

outer. Use an Ethernet cable to connect the machine to the router.

Connect an Ethernet cable to the machine and router.

➠ When the machine is connected to the wir

ed LAN, [

] appears on the [Home] screen and screen of each

function.

Insert the connector all the way into the port until it clicks in place.

Wait a few minutes.

➠ By default, the IP addr

ess is set automatically.

To use a specic IP address, set this manually.

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 67)

Setting Up

Connecting to a Wireless LAN

84CU-061

Connect a computer to the machine via a wir

eless LAN router (access point).

Depending on your wireless LAN router, the connection type and security standards may vary. Check for a connection

type and security standard that are supported by both the wireless LAN router and the machine, and then establish a

connection according to the connection type.

Depending on the connection type, you must enter the security information of the wireless LAN router.

Checking the Connection Types and Security Standards Supported by the Machine(P. 54)

Wireless LAN Router Information Required for Connection(P. 55)

Connect with a Secure Network Environment

● The r

adio waves used for wireless communication can reach beyond walls and other obstructions within a

certain range. Therefore, connecting the machine to a network without proper security measures may leak

personal data and other information to third parties. Connect the machine to a wireless LAN at your own

discretion and responsibility.

Protecting the Network(P. 373)

Reducing Power Consumption

● When Po

wer Save Mode is enabled, the machine regularly enters the power save state according to the

signal transmitted by the wireless LAN router.

[Power Save Mode](P. 478)

Checking the Connection Types and Security Standards Supported by the

Machine

◼ Connection T

ype

Connect using a type that is supported by your wireless LAN router. To specify the authentication, encryption, or other

security method in detail, use the manual setup method to connect.

The following connection types are supported by the machine:

Push Button Mode (WPS)

If the wireless LAN router has the above symbol on the package or the button of the device, you can easily

connect b

y pressing the button.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Using the Router Button (Push Button Mode)(P. 57)

WPS PIN Code Mode

If you are using a WPS router that does not support the push button mode, enter the PIN code to connect.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Entering a PIN Code (WPS PIN Code Mode)(P. 58)

* If the wir

eless LAN router is set up to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to connect with WPS. In

this case, use the manual setup method to connect.

Setting Up

Access Point Setup Method

Search for the wireless LAN router from the machine, and enter the network key manually to connect.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Searching for a Router (Access Point Setup Method)(P. 60)

When you connect with the access point setup method, the following authentication and encryption methods

e set:

● WEP authentication method: Open System

● Encryption for WPA/WPA2: AES-CCMP or TKIP is set automatically according to the selected wireless LAN

router.

To specify a different authentication or encryption method, use the manual setup method to connect.

Manual Setup Method

In addition to the SSID and network key, manually enter all the wireless LAN settings such as the authentication

and encryption methods to connect.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method)(P. 62)

◼ Security Standar

The wireless LAN of the machine supports the security standards below. For details on whether your wireless LAN

router supports these standards, see the manual of the wireless LAN router or contact the manufacturer.

● WEP

● WPA-PSK

● WPA2-PSK

● WPA-EAP

● WPA2-EAP

Wireless LAN Router Information Required for Connection

When connecting with the access point setup method or the manual setup method, you must set the information

below.

This information is listed on the main unit of the wireless LAN router. For details, see the manual of the wireless LAN

router or contact the manufacturer.

SSID

This is the name used to identify the wireless LAN router. This may be listed as the access point name or

network name.

Network Key

This is the keyword used for data encryption or the password used for network authentication. This may be

listed as the encryption key, WEP key, WPA/WPA2 passphrase, or pre-shared key (PSK).

Security Standards

These are required when connecting with the manual setup method. Check the following information:

Security Standards

● WEP

● WPA-PSK

● WPA2-PSK

● WPA-EAP

● WPA2-EAP

WEP Authentication Method

● Open System

Setting Up

● Shar

ed Key

Encryption for WPA/WPA2

● TKIP

● AES-CCMP

● IEEE 802.1X Authentication

Setting Up

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Using the Router

Button (Push Button Mode)

84CU-062

If your wir

eless LAN router supports WPS push button mode, you can easily set up a connection simply by using the

operation panel of the machine and the button on the wireless LAN router.

Administrator privileges are required to connect to a wireless LAN.

On the operation panel, press [Wireless LAN Settings] in the [Home] screen.

[Home]

Scr

een(P. 111)

➠ The [Select Network] screen is displayed.

● If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].

System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

● If the message [Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?] appears, press [Yes].

● If the message [Could not nd the access point.] appears, press [Close].

Press [Other Connections].

Press [WPS Push Button Mode].

➠ The machine starts sear

ching for an access point.

After the search for an access point starts, press the button on the wireless LAN

outer within two minutes.

Press the button within two minutes. (Depending on the wireless LAN router, you may have to press and hold

the button.)

* For details on ho

w to operate the button, see the manual of your wireless LAN router.

When [Connected.] appears on the operation panel, press [Close].

➠ When the machine is connected to the wir

eless LAN, [

] appears on the [Home] screen and screen of

each function.

Wait a few minutes.

➠ By default, an IP address is set automatically.

To use a speciﬁc IP address, set this manually.

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 67)

If an Error Message Appears during Operation and a Connection Cannot Be Established

● Pr

ess [Close], and repeat the procedure starting from Step 2.

Setting Up

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Entering a PIN Code

(WPS PIN Code Mode)

84CU-063

When the wir

eless LAN router supports WPS PIN code mode, you can establish a connection by registering a PIN code

generated on the machine to the wireless LAN router. Use a computer to register the PIN code.

Administrator privileges are required to connect to a wireless LAN.

Required Preparations

● Access the wir

eless LAN router from a computer, and enable registration of a WPS PIN code.

* For details on how to register a WPS PIN code, see the manual of your wireless LAN router.

On the operation panel, press [Wireless LAN Settings] in the [Home] screen. [Home]

Screen(P. 111)

➠ The [Select Network] screen is displayed.

● If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

● If the message [Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?] appears, press [Yes].

● If the message [Could not nd the access point.] appears, press [Close].

Press [Other Connections].

Press [WPS PIN Code Mode].

➠ A PIN code is gener

ated.

Once this screen is displayed, you must register the WPS PIN code to the wireless LAN router within 10

minutes.

Access the wireless LAN router from a computer, and register the WPS PIN code to

the r

outer.

When [Connected.] appears on the operation panel, press [Close].

Setting Up

➠ When the machine is connected to the wir

eless LAN, [

] appears on the [Home] screen and screen of

each function.

Wait a few minutes.

➠ By default, an IP address is set automatically.

To use a speciﬁc IP address, set this manually.

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 67)

If an Error Message Appears during Operation and a Connection Cannot Be Established

● Pr

ess [Close], and repeat the procedure starting from Step 2.

Setting Up

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Searching for a Router

(Access Point Setup Method)

84CU-064

Search for a wireless LAN router (access point) to which to connect, and enter the network key.

When you connect with the access point setup method, the follo

wing authentication and encryption methods are

set:

● WEP authentication method: Open System

● Encryption for WPA/WPA2: AES-CCMP or TKIP is set automatically according to the selected wireless LAN router.

To specify a different authentication or encryption method, use the manual setup method to connect.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method)(P. 62)

Administrator privileges are required to connect to a wireless LAN.

Required Preparations

● Pr

epare the information of the wireless LAN router (SSID or network key) to which you want to connect, and

keep it close by.

Wireless LAN Router Information Required for Connection(P. 55)

● When connecting to a wir

eless LAN router supporting WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP for the security standard, set

IEEE 802.1X.

Using IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

On the operation panel, press [Wireless LAN Settings] in the [Home] screen. [Home]

Screen(P. 111)

➠ The [Select Network] screen is displayed.

● If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

● If the message [Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?] appears, press [Yes].

● If the message [Could not nd the access point.] appears, check that the router is discoverable.

Cannot

Connect to Wir

eless LAN(P. 662)

Select the SSID of the wireless LAN to which you want to connect.

➠ The Network Ke

y input screen is displayed.

When selecting the SSID of the wireless LAN router supporting WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP for the security

standard, the message [To connect, the values congured in IEEE 802.1X Settings will be applied.] appears.

Press [OK], and proceed to Step 4.

Setting Up

If you cannot ﬁnd the wireless LAN router to which you want to connect, check that the router is

disco

verable.

Cannot Connect to Wireless LAN(P. 662)

Enter the network key, and press [Apply].

When [Connected.] is displayed on the operation panel, press [Close].

➠ When the machine is connected to the wir

eless LAN, [

] appears on the [Home] screen and screen of

each function.

Wait a few minutes.

➠ By default, an IP addr

ess is set automatically.

To use a speciﬁc IP address, set this manually.

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 67)

If an Error Message Appears during Operation and a Connection Cannot Be Established

● Press [Close], check the information (SSID or network key) of the wireless LAN router to which you want to

connect, and repeat the procedure starting from Step 2.

Setting Up

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details

(Manual Setup Method)

84CU-065

ou can connect to a wireless LAN router by manually entering all information of the router such as the SSID, network

key, and security settings.

Administrator privileges are required to connect to a wireless LAN.

Required Preparations

● Pr

epare the information of the wireless LAN router to which you want to connect, and keep it close by.

Wireless LAN Router Information Required for Connection(P. 55)

● When connecting to a wir

eless LAN router supporting WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP for the security standard, set

IEEE 802.1X.

Using IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

On the operation panel, press [Wireless LAN Settings] in the [Home] screen. [Home]

Screen(P. 111)

➠ The [Select Network] screen is displayed.

● If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

● If the message [Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?] appears, press [Yes].

● If the message [Could not nd the access point.] appears, press [Close].

Press [Other Connections].

Press [Manually Enter Network Name (SSID)].

➠ The SSID input scr

een is displayed.

Enter the SSID, and press [Apply].

➠ The [Security Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the security standard, and set the authentication and encryption.

When using WEP

Press [WEP].

➠ The [802.11 Authentication] scr

een is displayed.

Select the authentication method.

[Open System]

Uses open authentication.

Setting Up

* When you select this authentication method, an authentication error occurs when connected to a

wir

eless LAN router that uses a shared key. The machine setting changes to [Shared Key] at this time, and

an attempt to reconnect to the router is made.

[Shared Key]

Uses an encryption key for the password.

Select an encryption key that is not registered, and press [Register].

➠ The encryption k

ey input screen is displayed.

Enter the network key, and press [Apply].

➠ The encryption k

ey is registered to the [Select Encryption Key] screen.

Select a registered encryption key, and press [Connect].

When Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK

Press [WPA/WPA2-PSK].

➠ The [WP

A/WPA2 Encryption Method] screen is displayed.

Select the encryption method.

➠ The encryption k

ey input screen is displayed.

When you select [Auto], AES-CCMP or TKIP is set automatically according to the wireless LAN router to

which you want to connect.

Enter the network key, and press [Apply].

When Using WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP

ess [WPA/WPA2-EAP]

[OK].

When Not Using a Security Standard

ess [None].

When [Connected.] is displayed on the operation panel, press [Close].

➠ When the machine is connected to the wir

eless LAN, [

] appears on the [Home] screen and screen of

each function.

Wait a few minutes.

➠ By default, an IP addr

ess is set automatically.

To use a specic IP address, set this manually.

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

Setting Up

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 67)

If an Error Message Appears during Operation and a Connection Cannot Be Established

● Pr

ess [Close], check the information of the wireless LAN router to which you want to connect, and repeat the

procedure starting from Step 2.

Setting Up

Setting IPv4 Addresses

84CU-066

The machine

's IPv4 address can either be assigned automatically using DHCP or entered manually.

By default, the IPv4 address is set automatically when connected to a wired or wireless LAN, but you can set it or

change it manually according to your usage environment and purpose.

This section describes how to congure the settings using the operation panel.

You can also set the IPv4 address using Remote UI from a computer after it has been set on the machine.

Managing

the Machine fr

om a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 437)

Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings] [IP Address

Settings].

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

Set the IP address.

When Manually Setting the IP Address

Press [Auto Acquire].

➠ The [IP Addr

ess Settings (Auto Acquire)] screen is displayed.

Set [Auto Acquire] to [Off], and press [Apply]

[OK].

➠ The [IP Address Settings] screen is displayed.

Press [Manually Acquire].

➠ The IP addr

ess input screen is displayed.

Enter the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address, and press [Apply].

When Assigning an IP Address Automatically

Press [Auto Acquire].

➠ The [IP Addr

ess Settings (Auto Acquire)] screen is displayed.

Set [Auto Acquire] to [On].

Congure the Auto Acquir

e setting, as needed.

Setting Up

[Select Protocol]

Normally

, set to [DHCP]. However, when [DHCP] is set in an environment where DHCP cannot be used,

the machine will continue to conrm Auto Acquire in the network, creating unnecessary communication.

When not using DHCP, set this to [Off].

[Auto IP]

Normally, set to [On]. Although priority is given to the IP address allocated with DHCP, if there is no

response from DHCP, Auto IP will be used.

Press [Apply].

Press [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Perform a connection test to check whether the IPv4 address is correctly congured.

Checking the

Network Status and Settings(P

. 88)

Checking the Currently Set IP Address

● On the scr

een in Step 3, press [Check Settings] to check the current IP address setting. If the IP address is

displayed as "0.0.0.0," it is not correctly congured.

If the IP Address Is Changed after Installing the Printer Driver

● In Windows, the required action depends on the port you are using.

- If you are using an MFNP port, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and computer belong

to the same subnet, so no action is required on the computer.

- If you are using a standard TCP/IP port, you must add a new port.

Adding a Port(P. 198)

If you do not kno

w which port is being used, see the following:

Viewing the Printer Port(P. 743)

● In macOS, you must r

e-register the machine on the Mac. For details about registering the machine, see the

manual of the driver at the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

* If you are using DHCP to automatically obtain the IP address of the machine, the IP address may be changed

automatically.

Setting Up

Setting IPv6 Addresses

84CU-067

In an IPv6 environment, you can set the following IPv6 addresses and use them at the same time.

● Link-Local Addr

ess

An address that can only be used within the same link. It cannot be used to communicate with devices beyond

a router.

A link-local address is automatically set when usage of IPv6 addresses is enabled.

● Stateless Address

An address that is generated automatically using the network prex provided by the router and the MAC

address of the machine.

This address is discarded when the machine is restarted or turned ON.

● Manual Address

An address that is entered manually by specifying the IP address, prex length, and default router address.

● Stateful Address

An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.

You cannot use the operation panel to congure some of the settings.

[IPv6 Settings](P. 480)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Required Preparations

● Set an IPv4 addr

ess to the machine.

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

● In an IPv6 envir

onment, you cannot use the function for scanning originals and saving the data to a

computer.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Network Settings]

[IPv6 Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit IPv6 Settings] scr

een is displayed.

In [IP Address Settings], select the [Use IPv6] checkbox.

Set the IPv6 address to use.

Setting Up

When Using a Stateless Address

Select the [Use Stateless Addr

ess] checkbox.

When Using a Manual Address

Select the [Use Manual Addr

ess] checkbox, and enter the IP address, prex length, and default router

address.

* You cannot enter a multicast address (address starting with "ff").

When Using a Stateful Address

Select the [Use DHCPv6] checkbo

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Perform a connection test to check whether the IPv6 address is correctly congured.

Checking the

Network Status and Settings(P

. 88)

If the IP Address Is Changed after Installing the Printer Driver

● Y

ou must add a new port.

Adding a Port(P. 198)

Setting Up

Conguring Y

our Machine for Your Network

Environment

84CU-069

The size and congur

ation of a network vary depending on the purpose and usage. The machine is equipped with a

variety of technologies to support many environments.

Congure the settings of the machine according to your network environment, as needed.

Manually Conguring the Ethernet Settings(P

. 70)

Conguring DNS(P

. 71)

Conguring SMB

(P. 74)

Conguring WINS

(P. 76)

Registering LDAP Servers(P. 77)

Conguring SNMP

(P. 81)

Conguring SNTP

(P. 84)

Conguring SLP Communication

(P. 86)

◼ See Also

To reduce the threat of unauthorized access and eavesdropping, it is recommended to congure the security settings

according to your network environment.

Protecting the Network(P. 373)

Using the Machine in a Network with IEEE 802.1X Authentication

● When connecting the machine to a network that uses IEEE 802.1X authentication, you must congur

e the

settings on the machine such as the authentication method managed by the authentication server.

Using

IEEE 802.1X

(P. 386)

Setting Up

Manually Conguring the Ethernet Settings

84CU-06A

By default, when the machine connects to a wir

ed LAN, the Ethernet communication mode and Ethernet type are

detected automatically, and these can be used without changes. Depending on the usage environment, you may have

to change the Ethernet settings to suit the settings of peripheral devices.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.

[Ethernet Driver Settings](P. 474)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [Network Settings] [Ethernet Driver Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Ethernet Driver Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Clear the [Auto Detect] checkbox.

Select the communication mode.

Normally, select [Full Duplex]. When the network router is set to half duplex communication, select [Half

Duple

x].

Select the Ethernet type, and click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings are applied.

Setting Up

Conguring DNS

84CU-06E

When using the machine in an envir

onment with Domain Name System (DNS), congure the DNS server information

and DHCP option settings.

In an environment without DNS, you can congure multicast DNS (mDNS) to use the DNS function. mDNS is used by

Bonjour and other software.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.

You cannot use the operation panel to congure some of the settings.

[TCP/IP Settings](P. 479)

Administr

ator privileges are required. Depending on the item to be congured, you may have to restart the machine.

Required Preparations

● When conguring DNS for IPv6, congur

e the setting to use an IPv6 address.

Setting IPv6

Addr

esses(P. 67)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Network Settings]

[IPv4 Settings] or [IPv6 Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit IPv4 Settings] scr

een or [Edit IPv6 Settings] screen is displayed.

In [DHCP Option Settings], congur

e the DHCP option settings.

If you are not conguring the DHCP option settings, pr

oceed to Step 5.

Select the checkboxes of the items to enable.

[Acquir

e Host Name] (IPv4 only)

Obtains a host name (Option 12) from the DHCP server.

[DNS Dynamic Update] (IPv4 only)

The DHCP server automatically updates the information (Option 81) corresponding to the host name in place of

the machine.

[Acquire DNS Server Address]

Obtains a DNS server address (Option 6 for IPv4, Option 23 for IPv6) from the DHCP server.

[Acquire Domain Name]

Obtains a domain name (Option 15 for IPv4, Option 24 for IPv6) from the DHCP server.

[Acquire WINS Server Address] (IPv4 only)

Obtains a WINS server address (Option 44) from the DHCP server.

[Acquire SMTP Server Address] (IPv4 only)

Obtains an SMTP server address (Option 69) from the DHCP server.

[Acquire POP Server Address] (IPv4 only)

Setting Up

Obtains a POP3 server address (Option 70) from the DHCP server.

In [DNS Settings], set the DNS server information.

● For details about the setting information, contact your pr

ovider or network administrator. You can also refer

to the computer settings.

Viewing the Network Connection Information of the Computer(P. 741)

● If you ar

e not conguring the DNS server information, proceed to Step 6.

[Primary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP addr

ess of the DNS server.

* For IPv6, you cannot enter a multicast address (address starting with "ff").

[Secondary DNS Server Address]

When using a secondary DNS server, enter the IP address of that server.

* For IPv6, you cannot enter a multicast address (address starting with "ff").

[Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4] (IPv6 only)

Select the checkbox to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.

To set the IPv6 host name and domain name individually, clear this checkbox, and enter [Host Name] and

[Domain Name].

[Host Name]

Enter the host name to register in the DNS server using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

[Domain Name]

Enter the domain name to which the machine belongs using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

Input example:

example.com

[DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the checkbox to automatically update the DNS records when the corresponding information of the host

name and IP address is changed in a DHCP environment, for example.

To Specify the Type of Address to Register to the DNS Server (IPv6 only)

Depending on the type of address you want to register, select the [Register Manual Address], [Register

Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless Address] checkbox.

To Specify the Interval between Updates

In [DNS Dynamic Update Interval], enter the interval at which to automatically update this information.

In [mDNS Settings], congur

e the mDNS settings.

If you are not conguring the mDNS settings, pr

oceed to Step 7.

For IPv4

o use mDNS, select the [Use mDNS] checkbox, and enter the mDNS name.

For IPv6

To use mDNS, select the [Use mDNS] checkbox, and select whether to use the same mDNS name as IPv4.

● To use the mDNS name set with IPv4 also with IPv6, select the [Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]

checkbox.

● To congure the mDNS name of IPv6 individually, clear the [Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]

checkbox, and enter the mDNS name.

Setting Up

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Setting Up

Conguring SMB

84CU-06F

This machine uses the Server Message Block (SMB) communication pr

otocol to save scanned data to a shared folder,

for example. Depending on the network environment, you may have to set the computer name and workgroup name

of the machine, and congure the SMB client information when connecting to an SMB server.

Setting the Computer Name and Workgroup Name(P. 74)

Conguring an SMB Client(P

. 74)

Setting the Computer Name and Workgroup Name

Set the computer name used to identify the machine in a network and the workgroup name to identify the group that

the machine belongs to.

Congure these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the

settings.

Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [Network Settings] [Computer Name/Workgroup Name Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Computer Name/W

orkgroup Name Settings] screen is displayed.

Enter the computer name and workgroup name of the machine, and click [OK].

Enter using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

In an Environment with WINS

● Select the [Use NetBIOS] checkbo

● You cannot register names that start with an asterisk (*) to the WINS server.

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Conguring an SMB Client

Conﬁgure the settings when connecting to an SMB server (such as the computer with the shared folder) and the

version of SMB to use with the SMB client.

Congure these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the

settings.

Administrator privileges are required.

Setting Up

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Network Settings]

[SMB Client Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit SMB Client Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Conﬁgure the settings when connecting to an SMB server, and click [OK].

[Authentication Type]

Select the checkbo

x according to the authentication protocol of the SMB server.

[Require SMB Signature for Connection]

Select this checkbox to request an SMB packet signature when connecting to the SMB server.

[Require Encryption for Connection]

Select this checkbox to connect only with the SMB server supporting SMB v3.0 encryption communications.

[Timeout]

Enter the wait time until the SMB server responds.

* If the machine times out before saving the scanned data, for example, is completed, lengthen the wait

time.

Click [Network Settings]

[Specied SMB Client V

ersions]

[Edit].

➠ The [Edit Specied SMB Client V

ersions] screen is displayed.

Select the checkbox of the version of the SMB server to which the machine will

connect.

If [Require Encryption for Connection] is selected in the setting when connecting to the SMB server, select the

[3.0] checkbox.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Setting Up

Conguring WINS

84CU-06H

When using the machine in a network envir

onment that uses both NetBIOS and TCP/IP, congure Windows Internet

Name Service (WINS) to convert the NetBIOS name to an IP address.

To enable WINS, specify the WINS server. WINS cannot be used in an IPv6 environment.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.

[WINS Settings](P. 482)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Required Preparations

● Set the computer name and workgr

oup name.

Setting the Computer Name and Workgroup

Name(P

. 74)

● Prepare the IPv4 address of the WINS server and keep it close by.

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Network Settings]

[WINS Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit WINS Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [WINS Resolution] checkbox.

Enter the IPv4 address of the WINS server, and click [OK].

If the IP address of the WINS server is obtained from a DHCP server, the obtained IP address has priority.

Conguring DNS(P

. 71)

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings are applied.

Setting Up

Registering LDAP Servers

84CU-06J

If you ar

e using an LDAP server to search for destinations and perform authentication when sending data, register the

LDAP server information to the machine. You can register up to ve LDAP servers each for searching and for

authentication.

Congure these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the

settings.

Administrator privileges are required.

Required Preparations

● When specifying an LD

AP server with a host name, make sure that a DNS server is available in the network.

● When specifying an LDAP server with an IP address, check whether the DNS server supports forward or

reverse lookup.

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [LDAP Server Settings].

➠ The [LD

AP Server Settings] screen is displayed.

Click [Register New Server] in [LDAP Server (For Search)] or [LDAP Server (For

Authentication)].

➠ The [Register Ne

w LDAP Server (For Search)] screen or [Register New LDAP Server (For Authentication)]

screen is displayed.

Set the server name and server address.

● In [Server Name], enter a name to identify the LD

AP server.

● In [Server Address], enter the IP address or host name of the LDAP Server using single-byte alphanumeric

characters.

Input example: Host name

ldap.example.com

● Click [Check Connection] to check whether the machine can connect to the LDAP server.

Congure the start sear

ch position, TLS use, and port number, as needed.

[Position to Start Search]

Specify the start sear

ch position in the directory information tree (DIT).

● Add "DC=" to each dot-delimited character string in the Active Directory domain name, and separate the

entries with a comma.

Input example: When the domain name is "john.example.com"

Setting Up

DC=john,DC=example,DC=com

● If left blank, the machine automatically starts sear

ch from an arbitrary position.

[Use TLS]

Select this checkbox to encrypt communication with the LDAP server using TLS.

● For an LDAP server for search, this is enabled only when [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected

in [Login Information] in 8 below.

● For an LDAP server for authentication, this is enabled only when [Use] is selected in [Login Information] in

8 below.

[Port Number]

Enter the port number used to communicate with the LDAP server.

Set the time until timeout and attributes, as needed.

LDAP Server for Search

[Sear

ch Timeout]

Enter the time from search start to timeout in seconds.

LDAP Server for Authentication

[Authentication/Attribute Acquisition Timeout]

Enter the time fr

om start of authentication and attribute acquisition to timeout in seconds.

[User Name Attribute]

Enter the attribute name to be compared with a user name entered during authentication using single-byte

alphanumeric characters.

Input example:

sAMAccountName

* This is not required if [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected in [Login Information] in Step 8.

[E-Mail Address Attribute]

Enter the attribute name to be used for obtaining an e-mail address from the authentication server, using

single-byte alphanumeric characters.

Input example:

mail

Congure the login information of the LD

AP server.

LDAP Server for Search

[Login Information]

Specify whether to use the login Information for LD

AP server authentication.

● When [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected, set a user name and password.

● To use data obtained with the Kerberos protocol for the authentication password, select [Use (Security

Authentication)]. The clock of the machine must be synchronized with that of the LDAP server.

● If you specied an IP address for [Server Address] in 5, select as follows according to the support status of

your DNS server:

● If the DNS server supports only forward lookup, select [Do Not Use] or [Use].

● If you select [Use (Security Authentication)], make sure that the DNS server supports reverse lookup.

[Display Authentication Screen When Searching]

Setting Up

Specify whether to display the authentication screen for entering the user name and password when

sear

ching.

● To display the authentication screen, select this checkbox.

● To use the user name and password set here for authentication, clear this checkbox.

[Use Same Authentication Information as When Send Operation Started]

Set whether to use the authentication information for searching if authenticated when using the fax or scan

function.

This checkbox is selected when the [Display Authentication Screen When Searching] checkbox is selected.

[User Name]

Enter the user name of the machine that is registered to the LDAP server.

● When [Use] is selected for [Login Information], enter the user name in the form "(Windows domain name)\

(Windows user name)."

Input example:

example\user1

● When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected for [Login Information], enter the Windows user name.

Input example:

user1

[Set/Change Password]

To set a password, select the checkbox, and enter the password using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

[Domain Name]

When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected for [Login Information], enter the directory tree name in

Active Directory using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

Input example:

example.com

LDAP Server for Authentication

[Login Information]

Select whether to use System Manager ID or data obtained with the Kerber

os protocol for authentication

implemented by the LDAP server.

● To use System Manager ID, select [Use].

● To use data obtained with the Kerberos protocol for the authentication password, select [Use (Security

Authentication)]. The clock of the machine must be synchronized with that of the LDAP server.

● If you specied an IP address for [Server Address] in step 5, select as follows according to the support

status of your DNS server:

● If the DNS server supports only forward lookup, select [Use].

● If you selected [Use (Security Authentication)], make sure that the DNS server supports reverse lookup.

[Use System Manager ID]

When [Use] is selected for [Login Information], select whether to use the System Manager ID for

authentication.

To use the System Manager ID, select the checkbox and set the user name and password. If you clear the

checkbox, logins are anonymous (no user name).

[User Name]

Enter the user name of the machine that is registered to the LDAP server in the form "(Windows domain

name)\(Windows user name)."

Input example:

example\user1

[Set/Change Password]

To set a password, select the checkbox, and enter the password using single-byte alphanumeric

characters.

Setting Up

[Domain Name]

When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected for [Login Information], enter the dir

ectory tree name in

Active Directory using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

Input example:

example.com

Select whether to verify the certicate when encrypting communication with the

AP server using TLS.

● T

o verify the certicate, select the [Conrm TLS Certicate for LDAP Server Access] checkbox in [Conrm TLS

Certicate for LDAP Server Access].

● To add a Common Name (CN) to the verication items, select the [Add CN to Verication Items] checkbox.

Click [OK].

➠ The LD

AP server is registered.

Log out from Remote UI.

Editing Registered Server Information

● T

o edit the registered information, click the server name you want to edit in [Registered LDAP Server] on the

[LDAP Server Settings] screen.

Setting Up

Conguring SNMP

84CU-06K

Simple Network Management Pr

otocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a

network by accessing a Management Information Base (MIB). Congure these settings according to the purpose of

use and environment of the machine.

The machine supports SNMPv1 and SNMPv3. You can also use both at the same time. Trap notication is not

supported.

When SNMP management software is installed on the network, you can use the software to congure, monitor, and

control the machine remotely from a computer. For more information, see the manual of the software you are using.

SNMPv1

SNMPv1 denes the scope of communication using information called a "community name." As the

community name is sent to the network in plain text, the security of the network is vulnerable. To ensure

network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3. When SNMPv1 is disabled, you will not be able to use

some functions such as obtaining information from the machine using the printer driver.

SNMPv3

SNMPv3 communicates using user information for SNMPv3. This protocol enables you to congure the

authentication and encryption in the user information to monitor and control communication devices on the

network with a solid security system.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.

However, the operation panel can only be used to enable or disable SNMPv1 and SnMPv3.

[SNMP Settings](P. 473)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Required Preparations

● T

o congure SNMPv3, you must enable TLS. Using TLS(P. 380)

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [Network Settings] [SNMP Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit SNMP Settings] scr

een is displayed.

In [SNMPv1 Settings], set SNMPv1.

To Enable SNMPv1

Select the [Use SNMPv1] checkbox.

Congure the community

● You can set MIB Access Permission (permission to read/write to MIB objects) for each community.

● When using both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3, it is recommended to set MIB Access Permission to [Read

Only]. When setting SNMPv1 to [Read/Write] (full-access permission), you can perform nearly all

operations, and therefore, you are not able to use the solid security features of SNMPv3.

Setting Up

To Congur

e the Community Name

Select the [Use Community Name 1] or [Use Community Name 2] checkbox, and congure the

community name and MIB Access Permission.

Enter the community name using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

To Congure a Dedicated Community

Dedicated Community is a preset community for Canon Device Management software.

To use Dedicated Community, select the [Use Dedicated Community] checkbox, and congure MIB Access

Permission.

* For details, see the manual of the software you are using.

To Disable SNMPv1

Clear the [Use SNMPv1] checkbo

In [SNMPv3 Settings], congur

e SNMPv3.

To Enable SNMPv3

Select the [Use SNMPv3] checkbox.

In [User Settings 1], [User Settings 2], or [User Settings 3], select the [Enable User] checkbox.

Congure the user.

[User Name]

Enter the user name using single-b

yte alphanumeric characters.

[MIB Access Permission]

Set the read/write permission to MIB objects for each specied user.

To allow both read and write, select [Read/Write].

[Security Settings]

Select whether to enable or disable authentication and encryption.

[Authentication Algorithm]

When [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] is selected in [Security

Settings], select the authentication algorithm according to the usage environment.

To set a password, select the [Set/Change Password] checkbox, and enter the same password in both

[Authentication Password] and [Conrm] using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

[Encryption Algorithm]

When [Authentication On/Encryption On] is selected in [Security Settings], select the encryption algorithm

according to the usage environment.

To set a password, select the [Set/Change Password] checkbox, and enter the same password in both

[Encryption Password] and [Conrm] using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

To Disable SNMPv3

Clear the [Use SNMPv3] checkbo

Setting Up

In [Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings], select whether to obtain

the printer management information.

To regularly obtain printer management information from the machine, such as protocols and ports, select

the [Acquir

e Printer Management Information from Host] checkbox.

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Changing the Port Number

● T

o change the port number of the SNMP server, see the following:

Changing the Port Number(P. 377)

Setting Up

Conguring SNTP

84CU-06L

o obtain time information from the time server on the network, congure Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP).

When SNTP is congured, the time server is checked at specied intervals to adjust the time and maintain the correct

time on the machine.

The machine supports both an NTP server (NTPv3) and SNTP server (SNTPv3 and v4).

Congure these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the

settings.

Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Required Preparations

● The time is adjusted based on the UT

C (Coordinated Universal Time), so specify the time zone setting.

Setting the Date and Time(P. 436)

● Pr

epare the IP address of the NTP or SNTP server and keep it close by.

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Network Settings]

[SNTP Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit SNTP Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Use SNTP] checkbox.

In [NTP Server Name], enter the IP address of the NTP/SNTP server.

When using a DNS server, you can enter the host name or FQDN instead of the IP address.

Input e

xample:

ntp.example.com

In [Polling Interval], enter the interval at which to check the server and adjust the

time.

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Setting Up

Testing Communication with the NTP or SNTP Server

● T

est communication using the following procedure: If the machine is correctly communicating with the

server, [OK] appears in [NTP Server Check Result].

[SNTP Settings] [Check NTP Server].

* This tests the communication status and does not adjust the time.

Setting Up

Conguring SLP Communication

84CU-06R

When using the machine in an envir

onment using a Service Location Protocol (SLP) with software installed to perform

communication, congure the SLP communication settings, as needed.

* See the manual of the software to determine the settings that need to be congured.

Congure these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the

settings.

Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Required Preparations

● Pr

epare the port number used for SLP communication with the software and keep it close by.

● Check the number of routers the SLP communication packets will traverse.

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Network Settings]

[Multicast Discovery Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Multicast Disco

very Settings] screen is displayed.

Select the [Respond to Discovery] checkbox, enter the scope name, and click [OK].

For the scope name, enter the name of the scope to which the machine belongs using single-byte

alphanumeric char

acters.

Click [Network Settings]

[Sleep Mode Notication Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Sleep Mode Notication Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Notify] checkbox.

A notication of the power status of the machine is sent to the software. This helps reduce unneeded

communication during sleep mode and power consumption.

Conguring Sleep Mode Notications

[Port Number]

Enter the port number used for SLP communication with the softwar

[Number of Routers to Traverse]

Enter the maximum number of routers that SLP communication packets can traverse.

[Notication Interval]

Enter the interval at which notications are sent about the power status of the machine.

Setting Up

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Setting Up

Checking the Network Status and Settings

84CU-068

ou can perform a connection test with devices in the network to check whether the machine is correctly connected to

the network.

The IP address of the machine and the MAC address information are needed to use Remote UI and congure the

rewall settings. Check these current settings.

Checking Whether the Machine Can Connect to Network Devices(P. 88)

Viewing the IP address set to the machine(P. 89)

Viewing the MAC Address of the Wired LAN(P. 89)

Viewing the MAC Address and Connection Information of the Wireless LAN(P. 90)

● If the IP addr

ess is displayed as "0.0.0.0," it is not correctly congured. Set the IP address again.

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 67)

● Connecting the machine to a switching hub, for e

xample, may prevent connection to the network even when

the IP address is correctly congured. In this case, set a wait time until machine starts communicating and

try connecting again.

[Wait Time for Conn. at Startup](P. 474)

● Y

ou can print the System Manager Data List to view the network settings.

Printing and Viewing Reports

and Lists(P

. 447)

Checking Whether the Machine Can Connect to Network Devices

In the W

eb browser of the computer connected to the network, enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the machine. If the

Remote UI login screen is displayed, the machine is properly connected to the network.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

When using an IPv4 addr

ess, you can use the following procedure to send a ping command from the operation panel

to check whether the machine can connect to a network device.

Required Preparations

● Pr

epare the IPv4 address of a device in the network to which you want to connect and keep it close by.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen. [Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Preferences]

[Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings] [PING

Command].

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].

System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

Enter the IPv4 address of a network device, and press [Apply].

➠ If the machine is corr

ectly connected to the network, [Received response from the host.] appears.

Setting Up

Viewing the IP address set to the machine

You can view the setting of IP address set to the machine such as the IPv4 address and the IPv6 address.

This section describes how to view the IP address using the operation panel.

You can also check this information using Remote UI from a computer. Managing the Machine from a Computer

(Remote UI)

(P. 437)

On the operation panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen or other

location.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The [Status Monitor] scr

een is displayed.

Press [Network Information]

[IPv4] or [IPv6].

View the setting.

For IPv6, select the item you want to view, and the setting of that item will be displayed.

Viewing the MAC Address of the Wired LAN

ou can view the MAC address set to the machine when the machine is connected to the wired LAN.

This section describes how to view this information using the operation panel.

You can also use Remote UI from a computer to view the MAC address.

Managing the Machine from a Computer

(Remote UI)(P. 437)

Administrator privileges are required.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Preferences] [Network] [Ethernet Driver Settings].

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

View the MAC address.

Setting Up

Viewing the MAC Address and Connection Information of the Wireless LAN

In addition to the MAC address and connection information of the wireless LAN when the machine is connected to the

wireless LAN, you can also view the security settings.

This section describes how to view this information using the operation panel.

You can also check this information using Remote UI from a computer. Managing the Machine from a Computer

(Remote UI)

(P. 437)

Administrator privileges are required.

On the operation panel, press [Wireless LAN Settings] in the [Home] screen.

[Home]

Scr

een(P. 111)

➠ The [Select Network] scr

een is displayed.

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].

System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

Press [Connection Set.]

[Connection Information].

View the MAC address and the settings.

● Pr

ess [Latest Error Information] to display error information related to the wireless LAN connection.

● Press [Security Settings] to display the WEP or WPA/WPA2-PSK details.

Viewing Information with the [Status Monitor] Screen

● Y

ou can also view the wireless LAN status and error information with the following procedure:

On the operation panel, [Home] or other location [Status Monitor] [Network Information]

[Network Connection Type].

Setting Up

Conguring the Fax Settings (Fax Setup Guide)

84CU-06S

When you pr

ess [Fax] in the [Home] screen on the operation panel for the rst time, the screen (Fax Setup Guide) for

setting the items so as to use the fax is displayed. Congure the fax settings using the procedure below by following

the instructions on the screen.

The machine must be restarted to apply the settings congured with the Fax Setup Guide.

Step 1: Starting the Fax Setup Guide(P. 91)

Step 2: Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name(P. 91)

Step 3: Setting the RX Mode(P. 92)

Step 4: Connecting to Telephone Line(P. 93)

Step 1: Starting the Fax Setup Guide

On the operation panel, press [Fax] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The [Fax Setup Guide] scr

een is displayed.

When the [Fax Setup Guide] Screen Is Not Displayed

If the [Fax Setup Guide] scr

een is not displayed after pressing [Fax] in the [Home] screen, or to reset the fax

with the Fax Setup Guide, use the following procedure to display the [Fax Setup Guide].

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Fax Setup Guide].

Press [Set Up Now] [Next].

➠ The [Register Unit T

elephone Number] screen is displayed.

Step 2: Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name

data at the destination.

On the [Register Unit Telephone Number] screen, enter the fax number of the

machine, and pr

ess [Apply].

➠ After the message [Settings congured.] appears, the screen guiding you to register the unit name is

displayed.

Press [Next].

➠ The [Register Unit Name (Fax)] scr

een is displayed.

Enter the name or company name, and press [Apply].

➠ After the message [Settings congur

ed.] appears, the [RX Mode Settings] screen is displayed.

Setting Up

Step 3: Setting the RX Mode

Answer the questions on the screen to select the proper RX mode.

On the [RX Mode Settings] screen, press [Next].

Answer the questions displayed on the screen by pressing [Yes] or [No].

➠ When you have completed answering all the questions, the selected RX mode is displayed on the scr

een.

Check the selected RX mode.

The RX modes operate as follows:

* If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service provided by your telephone

company, [DRPD: Select Fax] is also available for the receiving mode. Changing Fax RX Mode and Setting

the Action when Receiving a Fax(P. 280)

[Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)]

Enables use of both fax and telephone.

● Faxes are automatically received.

● When a telephone call is received, the machine rings. Pick up the handset to answer the call.

[Auto]

Used for fax only.

● Faxes are automatically received.

● Incoming telephone calls cannot be answered.

[Answering Machine]

Enables use of both fax and phone.

● Faxes are automatically received.

● When a telephone call is received, the answering machine function can be used to record messages. You

can answer the call by picking up the handset before recording starts.

* Set the answering machine so that the recording function activates after the machine rings one or two

times.

* When recording your message, it is recommended that you keep about four seconds of silence, or keep

the entire message within 20 seconds.

[Manual]

Enables use of both fax and phone.

● The machine rings when receiving both fax and phone calls.

● If you hear a fax tone when picking up the handset, receive the fax manually. Receiving Faxes(P. 299)

Setting Up

● Y

ou can also congure the setting to receive faxes automatically after the machine rings for a certain

period of time.

[Switch to Auto RX](P. 553)

Press [Apply].

➠ The [Connect T

elephone Line] screen is displayed.

Step 4: Connecting to Telephone Line

Use the supplied telephone cor

d to connect the machine to the telephone line.

When using a telephone, connect it to the machine.

Connect the supplied telephone cord to the telephone line jack (LINE) on the

machine and the telephone line connector on the wall.

Connect the handset or telephone to the external telephone jack (EXT.) on the machine.

● When

connecting a telephone with fax function, be sure to disable the fax auto receive setting on the

telephone.

● Depending on the type of telephone connected to it, the machine may not be able to send or receive faxes

properly.

On the [Connect Telephone Line] screen, press [End].

➠ The scr

een conrming that you want to exit the Fax Setup Guide is displayed.

Press [Yes]

[OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings congur

ed in the Fax Setup Guide are applied, and the type of telephone line is congured

automatically.

If the Type of Telephone Line Is Not Congur

ed Automatically

● Congure the type of telephone line manually.

[Select Line Type](P. 545)

* If you do not kno

w the type of your telephone line, contact your telephone company.

Making an Alert Sound When the Handset Is Not Properly Set on the Cradle

● You can select whether the machine makes an alert sound when the handset of a telephone connected to

the machine is not properly set on the cradle.

Setting Up

the [Off-Hook Alarm] checkbo

x and adjust the volume

[OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur

the settings.

[Off-Hook Alarm](P. 543)

Setting Up

Installing Software and Drivers to the Computer

84CU-06U

Install the r

elated software and drivers to the computer that will use the functions of the machine, such as printing,

remote scanning, and PC faxing.

Install any options to the machine before installing the software and drivers.

Installation Procedure

Check the operating environment via the Canon website for your country/region, and download and install the

latest softwar

e and drivers.

https://global.canon/en/support/

* If the machine is supplied with a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM, you can also use this to install the software and

drivers.

For details about the installation method, see the manual of the software or driver at the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

Precautions and Limitations

Operating Environment

● Depending

on the operating system, your computer may not support some software or drivers. For the

latest information on the supported operating systems, see the Canon website.

https://global.canon/en/support/

● Depending on the model and usage environment, some functions of the software or drivers may not be

available.

When the Firewall Settings of the Machine Are Congured

The computer that will be used with the machine must be allowed to communicate with the machine. If the

computer is not allowed to communicate with the machine, you will not be able to install the software and

drivers or use the functions of the machine.

Setting the Firewall(P. 374)

If the IP Addr

ess of the Machine Is Changed after Installing the Printer Driver

● In Windows, the required action depends on the port you are using.

● If you are using an MFNP port, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and computer

belong to the same subnet, so no action is required on the computer.

● If you are using a standard TCP/IP port, you must add a new port.

Adding a Port(P. 198)

If you do not kno

w which port is being used, see the following:

Viewing the Printer Port(P. 743)

● In

macOS, you must re-register the machine on the Mac. For details about registering the machine, see

the manual of the driver at the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

* If you are using DHCP to automatically obtain the IP address of the machine, the IP address may be

changed automatically.

Using the Functions of the Machine without Installing Software or Drivers (macOS)

● Y

ou can use AirPrint standard equipped in macOS to print and scan data and send faxes from a computer

without installing software or drivers.

Using AirPrint Application to Print and Scan Data and Send

Fax

es(P. 347)

Setting Up

Basic Operations

Basic Operations ...............................................................................................................................................

Turning ON and OFF the Machine ...................................................................................................................... 99

Turning ON the Machine .............................................................................................................................. 100

Turning OFF the Machine ............................................................................................................................. 101

Restarting the Machine ................................................................................................................................ 104

Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep Mode) ................................................................................................... 106

Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................................................... 108

Screens Displayed on the Operation Panel ................................................................................................... 109

[Home] Screen ....................................................................................................................................... 111

[Status Monitor] Screen ......................................................................................................................... 114

How to Operate the Operation Panel ........................................................................................................... 116

Entering Characters ...................................................................................................................................... 119

Customizing the [Home] Screen ................................................................................................................... 121

Rearranging the Buttons and Renaming the Tabs (Remote UI) .............................................................. 123

Logging In to the Machine ................................................................................................................................ 126

Placing Originals ............................................................................................................................................... 128

Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 131

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer .............................................................................................................. 132

Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray ...................................................................................................... 137

Preparations and Orientation for Loading Envelopes ................................................................................... 140

Orientation for Loading Paper with a Logo ................................................................................................... 142

Specifying the Paper Size and Type .............................................................................................................. 144

Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Paper Drawer .......................................................................... 145

Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray .................................................................. 147

Registering a Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray .................................... 149

Registering Non-standard Size Paper (Custom Paper) ........................................................................... 151

Hiding Unused Paper Sizes .................................................................................................................... 152

Using the Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function ......................................................................... 153

Registering Destinations (Address Book) ........................................................................................................ 154

Address Book Function ................................................................................................................................. 155

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Operation Panel) ................................................................. 157

Registering Groups to the Address Book (Operation Panel) ................................................................... 160

Editing and Deleting Destinations in the Address Book (Operation Panel) ............................................. 162

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI) .......................................................................... 164

Registering Groups to the Address Book (Remote UI) ............................................................................ 168

Basic Operations

Specifying Destinations ....................................................................................................................................

170

Specifying Destinations (Address Book) ........................................................................................................ 171

Specifying Destinations (Direct Input) .......................................................................................................... 173

Specifying Destinations (LDAP Server) .......................................................................................................... 174

Specifying Destinations (Address Book on a Mobile Device) ......................................................................... 175

Specifying Destinations (TX Job Log) ............................................................................................................. 176

Inserting and Removing a USB Memory Device .............................................................................................. 177

Registering Frequently Used Settings ............................................................................................................. 179

Registering and Calling Up Favorite Settings ................................................................................................ 180

Changing the Default Settings ...................................................................................................................... 183

Adjusting the Sound Volume ............................................................................................................................ 185

Adjusting the Volume (For Models with a Fax Function) ............................................................................... 186

Adjusting the Volume (For Models without a Fax Function) .......................................................................... 189

[Volume Settings] Screen .............................................................................................................................. 190

Basic Operations

84CU-03U

This chapter describes the basic oper

ations common to all functions of the machine and how to understand the screen

layout.

Managing and Saving Power

You can turn OFF the power to conserve energy or when cleaning and restart the machine to apply the

settings.

You can use sleep mode to reduce power consumption.

Turning ON and OFF the Machine(P. 99)

Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep Mode)(P. 106)

Using the Oper

ational Panel

Use the operation panel to scan, copy, and perform other functions and to congure the settings of the

machine.

Using the Operation Panel(P. 108)

When the login scr

een is displayed, enter the required login information to continue operations.

Logging In to the Machine(P. 126)

Placing Originals and Loading Paper

Place the original on the platen glass or in the feeder when scanning, sending a fax, or cop

ying.

Load printing and copying paper into the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray according to your usage.

Placing Originals(P. 128)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

Registering and Specifying Destinations

es to the Address Book of the machine.

In addition to specifying destinations from the Address Book, you can also directly enter them, use the TX Job

Log, and use other methods to specify them.

Registering Destinations (Address Book)(P. 154)

Specifying Destinations(P. 170)

Using a USB Memory De

vice

When exchanging data between a USB memory device and the machine, handle the device properly to

prevent damage to the device and errors.

Inserting and Removing a USB Memory Device(P. 177)

Customizing Functions and Settings

You can register frequently used settings for each function and change the settings for easier and more

convenient use of the machine.

Registering Frequently Used Settings(P. 179)

Adjusting the Volume (For Models with a Fax Function)(P. 186)

Adjusting the Volume (For Models without a Fax Function)(P. 189)

Basic Operations

Turning ON and OFF the Machine

84CU-03W

Be sur

e to use the power switch to manually turn ON the power of the machine.

In addition to using the power switch, you can turn OFF the power and restart the machine using Remote UI from a

computer.

You can also congure the machine to turn OFF automatically on days and times when not in use.

Turning ON the Machine(P. 100)

Turning OFF the Machine(P. 101)

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

Basic Operations

Turning ON the Machine

84CU-03X

o turn ON the machine, press the power switch on the front.

Make sure that the power plug is inserted into a power outlet.

Press the power switch.

➠ The start scr

een is displayed on the operation panel.

Changing the Screen that Appears at Startup

● After the po

wer is turned ON and the start screen is displayed, the [Home] screen is displayed by default.

You can congure the setting to display another function screen.

[Default Screen After Startup/

Restoration](P. 465)

Basic Operations

100

Turning OFF the Machine

84CU-03Y

In addition to using the po

wer switch on the front of the machine, you can also turn OFF the power using Remote UI

from a remote location. You can also congure the machine to turn OFF automatically on days and times when not in

use.

Turning OFF the machine deletes any data waiting to be printed.

Turning OFF the Machine Using the Power Switch(P. 101)

Turning OFF the Machine Using Remote UI(P. 101)

Setting the Days of the Week and Time to Automatically Turn Off the Machine(P. 102)

● The follo

wing data remains stored without being deleted even if the machine is turned OFF:

- Received data saved in the memory

- Data waiting to be sent

- Reports to be printed automatically after data is sent or received

Turning OFF the Machine Using the Power Switch

Press the power switch.

➠ The oper

ation panel turns off, and the power turns OFF.

It may take a few minutes until the power turns OFF. Do not unplug the power cord until the power turns

OFF.

Turning ON the Machine Again

● W

ait at least 10 seconds after turning OFF the power before turning ON the machine.

Turning OFF the Machine Using Remote UI

Administr

ator privileges are required to turn OFF the machine using Remote UI.

Basic Operations

101

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Device Management]

[Remote Shutdown].

➠ The [Remote Shutdo

wn] screen is displayed.

In [Device Status], check that there are no functions operating, and then click

[Ex

ecute].

➠ The shutdo

wn conrmation message appears.

Click [OK].

➠ A scr

een indicating that the machine is being shut down is displayed, and then the power is turned OFF.

When the power is turned OFF, Remote UI is disconnected.

Setting the Days of the Week and Time to Automatically Turn Off the

Machine

Congur

e these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the

settings.

Administrator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Timer Settings]

[Edit].

➠ The [Edit Timer Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer] checkbox.

Enter a time for each day of the week you want to turn OFF the machine.

Basic Operations

102

If you selected 12-hour format for the time display, select [AM] or [PM] after entering the time.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Cases When the Power Will Not Turn OFF at a Specied Time

● In the follo

wing cases, the power of the machine will not turn OFF at the specied time:

- When the data indicator on the operation panel is lit or blinking

Operation Panel(P. 14)

- When the [Menu] screen is displayed on the operation panel

- When importing or exporting data

- When updating the rmware

● One minute after the specied time, the power will turn OFF or the operation will be retried. The machine

will retry to power OFF up to 10 times at 1-minute intervals. If the machine does not power OFF, the power

will remain ON for that day.

Basic Operations

103

Restarting the Machine

84CU-040

When you mak

e changes to the settings of the machine, you may have to restart the machine to apply the changes

depending on the setting.

When you change the settings using either the operation panel or Remote UI, you can restart the machine using the

power switch or Remote UI.

Restarting the machine deletes any data waiting to be printed.

Restarting the Machine Using the Power Switch(P. 104)

Restarting the Machine Using Remote UI(P. 104)

● The follo

wing data remains stored without being deleted even if the machine is restarted:

- Received data saved in the memory

- Data waiting to be sent

- Reports to be printed automatically after data is sent or received

Restarting the Machine Using the Power Switch

Press the power switch.

➠ The operation panel turns off, and the power turns OFF.

It may take a few minutes until the power turns OFF.

Wait at least 10 seconds after turning OFF the power before pressing the power

switch.

➠ The machine starts up.

Restarting the Machine Using Remote UI

Administr

ator privileges are required to restart the machine using Remote UI.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

Basic Operations

104

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration].

Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Restart Device].

➠ The [Restart De

vice] screen is displayed.

In [Device Status], check that there are no functions operating, and then click

[Ex

ecute].

➠ A restart conrmation message appears.

Click [OK].

➠ A scr

een indicating that the machine is being restarted is displayed, and then the machine is restarted.

When the machine is restarted, Remote UI is disconnected.

Basic Operations

105

Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep Mode)

84CU-041

Sleep mode r

educes power consumption by pausing certain operations inside the machine.

On the operation panel, press [

] to enter sleep mode. Operation Panel(P. 14)

When the machine is in sleep mode, lights yellow-green.

◼ Exiting Sleep Mode

Perform any of the following operations:

● Pr

ess any key on the operation panel.

● Tap the display.

● When a telephone is connected, take the handset off the hook.

◼ Conguring Auto Sleep Time

Auto Sleep Time automatically places the machine into sleep mode if no oper

ations are performed after a certain

period of time or at a specied time. In addition to being able to set the time when the machine enters sleep mode,

you can also congure the machine to exit sleep mode at a specied time.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.

[Timer/Energy Settings](P. 469)

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [Timer Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Timer Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Set Auto Sleep Time or the time to exit sleep mode.

When Setting the Time until Sleep Mode

Enter the time in [Set Time].

* It is r

ecommended to use the default setting to eciently save power.

[Auto Sleep Time](P. 471)

When Entering Sleep Mode at a Specied Time

Select the [Use Auto Sleep Daily Timer] checkbo

x, and enter a time.

If you selected 12-hour format for the time display, select [AM] or [PM] after entering the time.

When Exiting Sleep Mode at a Specied Time

Select the [Use Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings] checkbo

x, and enter a time.

If you selected 12-hour format for the time display, select [AM] or [PM] after entering the time.

Basic Operations

106

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Press if the machine will not be used for a long period of time, such as overnight

● Put the machine into sleep mode as a safety precaution.

● The machine does not enter sleep mode in the follo

wing cases:

- When the data indicator on the operation panel is lit or blinking

Operation Panel(P. 14)

When the [Menu] screen, a paper jam or other error message

, or Direct Connection SSID or network key

display screen is displayed on the operation panel

- When the machine is performing an adjustment, cleaning, or other operation

- When the machine is importing, exporting, or processing data via an external device, such as a USB

memory device, computer, or LDAP server

- When a phone is connected, the handset is off the hook.

- When the incoming fax ring is turned off

The machine may enter sleep mode depending on the message.

● If the machine is not allo

wed to enter sleep mode, it may perform auto calibration to maintain the image

quality. Performing calibration uses the toner cartridge, which may affect its lifetime.

Basic Operations

107

Using the Operation Panel

84CU-042

Use the oper

ation panel to change the settings of the machine and use the scan, copy, and other functions.

Main Instructions

Check how to use the buttons and items displayed on the operation panel, how to enter text, and how to

display the various screens.

Screens Displayed on the Operation Panel(P. 109)

How to Operate the Operation Panel(P. 116)

Entering Characters(P. 119)

Making the [Home] Scr

een Easier to Use

You can add shortcut buttons for frequently used functions and rearrange the buttons.

Customizing the [Home] Screen(P. 121)

Regarding the Handling of the Touch Panel Display

● Do not pr

ess the touch panel display too hard. Doing so may break the touch panel display.

● Do not use an object with a sharp end, such as a mechanical pencil or ballpoint pen. Doing so may scratch

the surface of the touch panel display or break it.

● Placing objects on the display or wiping the display may cause the touch panel to react and lead to a

malfunction.

Basic Operations

108

Screens Displayed on the Operation Panel

84CU-043

The follo

wing are the main screens of the operation panel.

[Home] Screen

This screen is displayed when you press [ ] on the operation panel. By default, the [Home] screen is displayed

after the po

wer is turned ON and immediately after the startup screen closes, and immediately after logging in.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

[Status Monitor] Screen

This screen is displayed when you press [Status Monitor] on the [Home] screen and other locations. Use this

scr

een to check the information of the machine, usage and logs, network settings, and error information.

[Status Monitor] Screen(P. 114)

[Menu] Screen

This screen is displayed when you press [Menu] on the [Home] screen. Use this screen to congur

e the various

settings of the machine.

When the System Manager ID is set, the login screen may be displayed when certain items are selected. Only

users who know the System Manager ID and PIN can log in and change the settings.

Basic Operations

109

Message Display

Messages are displayed on the screen when errors occur and the machine is out of paper or toner in the toner

cartridges.

If a tr

oubleshooting solution is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions to solve the problem.

If a troubleshooting solution is not displayed, check the cause and solution by referring to the message or error

code.

A Message Appears(P. 697)

An Error Code Is Displayed(P. 717)

Display example:

● When an Err

or Occurs

● When a Message Appears at the Bottom of the Scr

een

If the message is too long to display at once, it may be separated into smaller segments and displayed

alternately.

Changing the Screen Display

● Y

ou can change the operation panel display such as by changing the display language and units, and show

or hide messages.

[Display Settings](P. 465)

● Y

ou can invert screen colors and adjust the brightness to make the screen easier to view.

[Accessibility]

. 488)

Clearing the Settings Automatically

● By default, if no operations are performed after a certain period of time, the settings being congured on

the screen are cleared, and the [Home] screen is displayed. You can change the time until the settings are

cleared and the screen that is displayed after.

[Auto Reset Time](P. 470)

[Function After Auto Reset](P. 470)

Basic Operations

110

[Home] Screen

84CU-044

This scr

een is displayed when you press [

] on the operation panel.

The status of the machine and the login information ar

e constantly displayed at the top and bottom of the screen for

quick viewing and operations, as needed.

The function and setting buttons are displayed on separate tabs in the middle of the screen. Select a tab or ick the

screen left or right to change the displayed function and setting buttons. Press these buttons to perform functions and

change settings.

You can rearrange the buttons and change the tab names.

Rearranging the Buttons and Renaming the Tabs

(Remote UI)

(P. 123)

* By default, the [General] to [Custom 6] tabs are displayed.

◼ Status of the Machine and Login Information

[Log Out]

This is displayed when the user is logged in. Pr

ess this to log out after completing operations on the machine.

Logging In to the Machine(P. 126)

[ ]

Displays the logged in user name or Department ID

[

] / [ ]

When connected to a wir

ed LAN, [

] is displayed. When connected to a wireless LAN, [ ] is displayed.

ess this icon to switch between using a wired LAN or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the network.

Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN(P. 52)

[Status Monitor]

ou can check the information of the machine, usage and logs, network settings, and error information.

[Status

Monitor] Scr

een(P. 114)

◼ Function and Setting Buttons

[Copy]

Copies originals. Copying(P. 313)

[Fax]

Fax

es documents.

Faxing(P. 275)

Basic Operations

111

[Scan]

Scans originals. Scanning(P. 235)

[Memory Media Print]

Prints les fr

om a USB memory device.

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)

. 221)

[Secure Print]

Prints data tempor

arily saved in the memory of the machine.

Printing a Document Secured with a

PIN (Secur

e Print)(P. 215)

[ID Card Copy]

Copies the fr

ont and back sides of ID cards.

Copying Both Sides of ID Cards onto One Sheet(P. 324)

[Passport Copy]

Copies multiple passports onto one sheet of paper. Copying Multiple Passports onto One

Sheet(P

. 327)

[Menu]

Congur

e the various settings of the machine.

Settings Menu Items(P. 462)

[Address Book]

es. You can specify destinations

from the Address Book, and call up the send function.

Registering Destinations (Address Book)(P. 154)

Specifying Destinations (Address Book)(P. 171)

[Paper Settings]

Set the paper size and type to use, and r

egister frequently used paper.

Specifying the Paper Size and

ype(P. 144)

[Mobile Portal]

Connect mobile de

vices to the machine.

Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine(P. 341)

[Home Screen Settings]

Add shortcut buttons to the [Home] scr

een and rearrange the buttons.

Customizing the [Home]

Scr

een(P. 121)

[Update Firmware]

Updates the rmwar

e via the Internet.

Updating the Firmware(P. 455)

Basic Operations

112

[Operation Guide]

Vie

w the basic operation guide and troubleshooting methods.

[Wireless LAN Settings]

Connects a computer to the machine via a wir

eless LAN router (access point).

Connecting to a

Wir

eless LAN by Searching for a Router (Access Point Setup Method)(P. 60)

[Toner Delivery Settings]

ou can congure settings for toner replenishment service. Use of the toner replenishment service

requires prior registration with select retailers. This service is only available in certain countries.

Shortcut Button (Scan)

Call up scan settings r

egistered as Favorite Settings. The name of the button varies depending on the

setting.

Adding Shortcut Buttons(P. 121)

Shortcut Button (Fax)

Call up fax settings r

egistered as Favorite Settings. The name of the button varies depending on the

setting.

Adding Shortcut Buttons(P. 121)

Shortcut Button (Copy)

Call up cop

y settings registered as Favorite Settings. The name of the button varies depending on the

setting.

Adding Shortcut Buttons(P. 121)

◼ Application Libr

ary buttons

Application Library enables you to perform operations with one touch.

To use this function, you must click [Application Library] on the Portal Page of Remote UI, and congure the

application. Portal Page of Remote UI(P. 441)

For mor

e information, see the User's Guide of the Application Library.

Application Library

Basic Operations

113

[Status Monitor] Screen

84CU-045

This scr

een is displayed when you press [Status Monitor] on the [Home] screen and other locations.

Use this screen to check the information of the machine, usage and logs, network settings, and error information. You

can also use this screen to remove USB memory devices from the machine.

[Error Information/Notication]

ou can check the information of errors that occur on the machine. Take troubleshooting measures according to the

error details.

A Message Appears(P. 697)

An Error Code Is Displayed(P. 717)

[De

vice Information]

[Paper Information]

Check the remaining amount of paper for each paper source.

[Cartridge Information]

Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges.

Other internal parts may reach the end of their lifetime before the toner runs out.

[Check Counter]

Check the total number of pages printed, faxed, and copied.

Checking the Number of Printed Pages (Check

Counter)(P

. 446)

[Secure Print Memory Usage]

Check to see how much memory is used by the Secure Print data temporarily saved to the memory of the

machine.

[Version Information]

Displays the rmware version information of the machine.

[Serial Number]

Displays the serial number of the machine.

[Copy/Print Job]

Displays the copy or print processing status and log.

Checking the Copy Status and Log(P. 331)

Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 233)

[TX Job]

Displays the status and log of sent and saved scanned data and fax

es.

Checking the Send and Save Status and Log of Scanned Data(P. 272)

Checking Sent and Received Faxes(P. 304)

[RX Job]

Displays the status and log of r

eceived faxes and I-Faxes.

Checking Sent and Received Faxes(P. 304)

Basic Operations

114

[Fax Forwarding Errors]

If a fax could not be forwar

ded but remains in the memory, you can print it or forward it to a different destination, and

view its content.

Checking Faxes that Failed to Be Forwarded(P. 305)

[Network Information]

[IPv4]

Check the IPv4 addr

ess and other settings.

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

[IPv6]

Check the IPv6 addr

ess and other settings.

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 67)

[Network Connection T

ype]

Check whether the machine has a wired or wireless connection.

Displays the connection status and error information when connected by wireless LAN.

[Direct Connection Information]

Displays the connection status when directly connected to a device.

[IEEE 802.1X Error Information]

Displays the details of errors that occur with IEEE 802.1X authentication.

[Rmv. Mem. Media]

Displayed when a USB memory device is connected. Press to remove the USB memory device.

Removing the USB

Memory De

vice(P. 178)

[IP Address]

Displays the IPv4 address of the machine by default. You can also hide this.

[Display IP Address](P. 468)

Basic Operations

115

How to Operate the Operation Panel

84CU-046

The oper

ation panel uses a touchscreen. Directly touch your nger to the buttons and items displayed on the screen to

operate them.

Basic Touchscreen Operations (Tapping, Flicking, and Dragging)(P. 116)

Selecting Tabs and Items(P. 117)

Scrolling the Screen(P. 117)

Set the value using the [+] and [-] buttons or the slider.(P. 118)

To prevent accidental operations or damage to the operation panel, avoid the

follo

wing:

● Pressing too hard with your ngers

● Pressing with a sharp tip, such as a ngernail, ballpoint pen, or pencil

● Operating with wet or dirty hands

● Operating with an object on the display

Basic Touchscreen Operations (Tapping, Flicking, and Dragging)

apping

Gently touch the screen with your ngertip and quickly release. Do this when selecting items and performing

operations.

In the User's Guide, "press" and "select" refer to the tapping operation.

Flicking

ouch the screen and ick your ngertip. The screen moves in the direction you icked your nger. For

example, the [Home] screen moves to the tab in the direction you icked your nger.

Dragging

ve your ngertip while touching the screen, and release it at the desired position. You can scroll lists and

move the area you are touching to a desired position.

Basic Operations

116

Selecting Tabs and Items

When you tap a tab, the screen for the selected tab is displayed.

When you tap an item name or button, the item can be selected. The selected screen is displayed, or the selected

function is performed.

To Cancel a Selection

ag your ngertip touching the screen away from the selected item or button and release it.

To Return to the Previous Screen

Tap [

Scrolling the Screen

When the scroll bar appears on the screen, it indicates that there are items or information that cannot be completely

displayed on the screen. Flick or drag to scroll the screen in the direction you moved your ngertip.

Release your nger from the screen, and in a few seconds, the scroll bar will disappear. Touch the screen to display the

scroll bar again.

Basic Operations

117

Set the value using the [+] and [-] buttons or the slider.

Tap the [+] and [-] buttons to adjust the value. When the slider is displayed as shown below, you can drag it to the left

or right to adjust the value.

Basic Operations

118

Entering Characters

84CU-047

Enter alphanumeric char

acters using the keyboard and numeric keys on the operation panel.

You can also enter characters using a commercial USB keyboard connected to the machine.

Entering Characters Using the Operation Panel(P. 119)

Entering Characters Using a USB Keyboard(P. 120)

Entering Characters Using the Operation Panel

You can enter letters, numbers, and symbols using the operation panel.

The type of characters that you can enter may be limited depending on the item.

If the value input range is limited, the value that you can enter is displayed in parentheses ( ) next to the input eld.

Changing the Character Type

Select [a] or [1/#] for the type of char

acter to enter.

You cannot change the character type for items whose character type is limited.

Entering Characters and Spaces

Tap the character or symbol to enter.

Press [

] or [ ] to show characters that are not visible on the screen.

o enter uppercase characters, tap [

o enter a space, tap [Space]. You can also enter a space by moving the cursor to the end of the characters

and tapping [

Deleting Char

acters

Tap [

] to delete one character.

ap and hold [

] to continuously delete characters.

ving the Cursor

Tap [

] or [ ].

Entering Numbers Using the Numeric Ke

The numeric keys appear for items that only allow numbers.

Tap the numbers on the numeric keys to enter a value.

Basic Operations

119

To delete a number, tap [ ].

When [ ] and [ ] are displayed, you can tap these to move the cursor.

● When [+] and [-] or a slider appears instead of the k

eyboard or numeric keys, tap or drag these to set the

value.

Set the value using the [+] and [-] buttons or the slider.(P. 118)

Entering Characters Using a USB Keyboard

ou can enter characters in the same way as a computer by connecting a commercial USB keyboard to the USB port on

the front or back of the machine.

Front Side(P. 10) / Rear Side(P. 12)

* Y

ou can still enter characters using the operation panel when a USB keyboard is connected to the machine.

The connected USB keyboard can be disconnected from the machine at anytime. You do not need to cancel the

connection rst.

● [Backspace], [Home], [End], and other k

eys may not be usable. Pressing an unusable key does not enter a

character.

● Depending on the display language, some characters may not be entered correctly.

● Depending on the type of USB keyboard, it may not operate properly.

● Y

ou can specify the USB keyboard layout (US layout or UK layout).

[English Keyboard Layout](P. 463)

Basic Operations

120

Customizing the [Home] Screen

84CU-048

ou can quickly select frequently used functions from the [Home] screen of the operation panel.

Adding Shortcut Buttons(P. 121)

Rearranging the Buttons(P. 122)

Adding Shortcut Buttons

You can add buttons to the [Home] screen until it is full.

Add shortcut buttons using the operation panel. You cannot add buttons using Remote UI from a computer.

Administrator privileges are required.

Required Preparations

● Register the settings to become shortcut buttons as Favorite Settings.

Registering and Calling Up

Favorite Settings(P

. 180)

On the operation panel, press [Home Screen Settings] in the [Home] screen. [Home]

Screen(P. 111)

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then click [Log In]. System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

Press [Select Button to Display].

➠ The [Select Button to Display] scr

een is displayed.

Select the function to add as a shortcut button.

Select the checkboxes of the settings you want to assign as shortcut buttons, and

ess [Apply].

➠ A description of the shortcut buttons is displayed.

Press [OK].

Basic Operations

121

➠ The shortcut buttons ar

e added to the [Home] screen.

Deleting Added Shortcut Buttons

● In Step 4, clear the checkbo

xes of the settings you want to delete, and press [Apply].

When the [Home] Screen Is Full and Shortcut Buttons Cannot Be Added

● Delete any unneeded shortcut buttons.

Rearranging the Buttons

ou can rearrange the buttons on the [Home] screen and move buttons to other tabs.

This section describes how to change the display order using the operation panel.

You can also change the display order using Remote UI from a computer. You can also rename tabs using Remote UI.

Rearranging the Buttons and Renaming the Tabs (Remote UI)(P. 123)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Press and hold any button on the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System

Manager ID and PIN(P. 6)

Check the message, and press [Yes].

➠ The [Rearr

ange and Congure Buttons] screen is displayed.

Drag the button you want to rearrange, and release it at the desired location.

When you drag a button to another tab, the button moves to that tab.

Press [Apply].

➠ The location of the buttons on the [Home] scr

een is changed.

Basic Operations

122

Rearranging the Buttons and Renaming the Tabs

(Remote UI)

84CU-0SU

ou can use Remote UI from a computer to reorder the buttons on the [Home] screen and rename the tabs.

Changing the Button Display Order(P. 123)

Renaming the Tabs(P. 124)

Changing the Button Display Order

Administrator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Display Settings].

➠ The [Display Settings] scr

een is displayed.

In [Rearrange and Congur

e Display Settings for Home Screen Buttons], select [Edit

in Button View] or [Edit in List View].

● T

o change the display order by dragging the buttons, click [Edit in Button View].

● To change the display order using the list of button names, click [Edit in List View].

Rearrange the buttons.

When Rearranging the Buttons by Dragging Them

ag the button you want to rearrange, and release it at the desired location.

Basic Operations

123

When Rearranging the Buttons Using the List of Button Names

Click [

] or [ ] next to the name of the button you want to rearrange to move the button up or down.

Click [ ] to move a button to another tab.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Renaming the Tabs

Rename the tabs using Remote UI fr

om a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to rename the tabs.

Administrator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Basic Operations

124

Click [Display Settings]

[Edit] in [Home Screen Tab Names].

➠ The [Edit Home Scr

een Tab Names] screen is displayed.

Select the checkbox of the tab you want to rename, and enter the name.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Basic Operations

125

Logging In to the Machine

84CU-049

When the login scr

een is displayed on the operation panel, enter the required login information to perform

authentication. When authentication is successful, the screen changes, and you can continue operations.

Depending on the set authentication function, the displayed login screen varies.

Logging In (Department ID Management, System Manager ID)(P. 126)

Logging In (Authenticated Sending)(P. 126)

Logging In (Department ID Management, System Manager ID)

When Department ID Management is set up, the following login screen is displayed. Enter the Department ID to log in.

If a PIN is set, enter the PIN.

When the System Manager ID is set, the login screen is displayed for operations that require administrator privileges.

Enter the System Manager ID and PIN to log in.

Enter the Department ID or System Manager ID.

Enter the PIN.

If a PIN is not set, you can skip this step. Proceed to Step 3.

Press [Log In].

➠ When authentication is successful, the [Home] scr

een or other screen is displayed.

When you have completed your operations, press [Log Out].

Logging In (Authenticated Sending)

When authenticated sending (LD

AP Server Authentication) is set, the Login for Authenticated Sending screen is

displayed when performing scan and fax operations. Enter the user name and password managed with the LDAP

server to log in.

Basic Operations

126

Enter the user name and password.

In [Server Name], select the LDAP server to perform authentication.

Press [Log In].

➠ When authentication is successful, the scan or the fax scr

een is displayed.

When you have completed your operations, press [Log Out].

When Logging In with Both Authenticated Sending and Department ID Management

● Depending on the LD

AP server authentication settings, pressing [Log Out] on the operation panel may

display the screen for selecting the authentication used for logging out. To continue operations after

scanning or faxing, log out only from authenticated sending. To end all operations, log out from all

authentication.

Basic Operations

127

Placing Originals

84CU-04A

Place documents, photos, and other printed materials ("

originals") to be scanned, faxed, or copied on the platen glass

or in the feeder.

Determine whether to use the platen glass or feeder depending on the document type and usage.

Platen Glass

Scans originals in a xed position. Originals must be placed one at a time, but this ensures highly accurate

scanning.

You can also place the following originals on the platen glass:

● Books, thick paper, thin paper, and other originals that cannot be placed in the feeder

● Tracing paper, transparencies, and other transparent originals

Placing Originals on the Platen Glass(P. 128)

Feeder

ou can place two or more sheets of originals in the feeder. The placed originals are scanned automatically

one sheet at a time.

For MF753Cdw, both sides of originals can be scanned at the same time.

Placing Originals in the Feeder(P. 129)

Place Dry Originals

● Befor

e placing originals, make sure that any ink, correction uid, or glue on them has completely dried.

Placing Originals on the Platen Glass

For the size of the originals that can be placed on the platen glass, see the basic specications of the machine. Basic

Specications(P

. 25)

Open the feeder.

Place the side of the original to be scanned face down on the platen glass in the

landscape orientation while aligning the corner of the original with the top left

corner of the platen glass.

Basic Operations

128

When scanning tracing paper, transparencies, and other transparent originals, place a sheet of plain white

paper on top.

Gently close the feeder.

When scanning of the original is complete, remove the original from the platen glass.

Placing Originals in the Feeder

When scanning two or mor

e sheets of originals, place only originals of the same size.

For the size of the originals that can be placed in the feeder, see the specications of the feeder.

Feeder

Specications(P

. 28)

To prevent paper jams inside the feeder, do not place the following originals:

● W

rinkled, creased, curled, rolled, or torn paper

● Carbon paper, coated paper, thin translucent paper, thin paper, or transparencies

● Stapled or clipped paper

● Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer

Open the original supply tray.

Spread the slide guides outward until they are slightly farther apart than the width

of the original.

Basic Operations

129

Fan the originals and align the edges.

Fan the originals in small batches, and align the edges by tapping the originals on a at surface a fe

w times.

Place the sides of the originals to be scanned face up in the feeder in the landscape

orientation.

Make sure the placed originals do not exceed the load limit line ( ). If they exceed the load limit line, there

may be misfeeds or a paper jam.

Align the slide guides against the edges of the originals.

Slide guides that are aligned but too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or a paper jam.

When scanning of the originals is complete, remove the ejected originals from below

the feeder.

● Do not add originals or r

emove them during scanning.

● Leaving ejected originals below the feeder may cause a paper jam.

Basic Operations

130

Loading Paper

84CU-04C

o ensure print quality, conrm the usable paper and how to handle and store paper, and prepare the appropriate

paper for use with the machine.

Usable Paper(P. 19) / Precautions When Handling Paper(P. 23)

Load the pr

epared paper in the machine, and then congure the paper size and type settings.

Loading Paper in the Machine

Load paper you usually use into the paper drawer, which can hold large amounts of paper.

To temporarily use paper not loaded in the paper drawer, load it in the multi-purpose tray.

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 132)

Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 137)

When using envelopes or paper with logos, be car

eful of the orientation of the loaded paper and which side

is face up.

Preparations and Orientation for Loading Envelopes(P. 140)

Orientation for Loading Paper with a Logo(P. 142)

Paper Settings

o ensure quality printing and prevent paper jams, the paper size and type must be set correctly according to

the loaded paper.

Specifying the Paper Size and Type(P. 144)

Basic Operations

131

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer

84CU-04E

Load paper you usually use into the paper dr

awer, which can hold large amounts of paper.

The setting method varies depending on the size of the paper to be loaded.

When Loading A4, B5, Legal, or Letter Size Paper

Load paper using the standard size method.

Loading Standard Size Paper(P. 132)

When Loading A5 Size Paper

The setting method varies depending on the orientation of the paper to be loaded.

Landscape orientation (A5)

Portrait orientation (A5R)

Loading Non-standard Size Paper(P. 134)

Loading Standard Size Paper(P. 132)

When Loading Custom Size Paper

Load paper using the non-standar

d size method.

Loading Non-standard Size Paper(P. 134)

● Load paper using the same pr

ocedure even when using the optional Paper Feeder PF-K.

Loading Standard Size Paper

ou can load paper correctly by aligning the paper guides on the paper drawer with the markings.

When using paper with logos, be careful of the orientation of the loaded paper and which side is face up.

Orientation for Loading Paper with a Logo(P. 142)

Pull out the paper drawer, and remove it while lifting the front side.

Align the paper guides with the size of the paper to be loaded.

While pressing the lock release lever, move the paper guide.

Basic Operations

132

Align the projections on the paper guides with the size markings of the paper to be loaded.

Paper guides that are aligned but too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or a paper jam.

When Loading Legal Size Paper

While pressing the lock release lever, extend the paper drawer toward you.

Fan the paper and align the edges.

Fan the paper in small batches, and align the edges by tapping the paper on a at surface a fe

w times.

Load the paper with the print side face up.

● Align the paper with the paper guide on the fr

ont side of the paper drawer.

Basic Operations

133

● Mak

e sure the loaded paper does not exceed the load limit line (

). If it exceeds the load limit line, there

may be misfeeds or a paper jam.

When Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-sided Printing)

Flatten the edge of the paper to remove any curls, and load the paper with the back (unprinted) side face up.

● You can use only paper printed with this machine.

● You cannot print on a side that has been previously printed on.

● If the printouts look faded, adjust the image quality. [Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)](P. 495)

Load the paper drawer into the machine.

➠ By default, the Paper Settings conrmation scr

een is displayed.

[Notify to Check Paper Settings]

. 569)

When you are using legal size paper, the paper drawer is extended from the machine and is not fully housed.

Set the paper size and type, as needed.

Setting the Paper Size and Type for the

Paper Dr

awer(P. 145)

By default, the paper size and type of the paper drawer are set to LTR and Plain 2. When paper of a different

size or type is loaded, change the paper settings.

Loading Non-standard Size Paper

ou can load paper correctly by aligning the paper guides on the paper drawer with the paper.

When using envelopes or paper with logos, be careful of the orientation of the loaded paper and which side is face up.

Preparations and Orientation for Loading Envelopes(P. 140)

Orientation for Loading Paper with a Logo(P. 142)

Pull out the paper drawer, and remove it while lifting the front side.

Slide the paper guides to the outside.

While pressing the lock release lever, move the paper guides.

Basic Operations

134

When Loading Paper Longer than A4 Size

While pressing the lock release lever, extend the paper drawer toward you.

Fan the paper and align the edges.

Fan the paper in small batches, and align the edges by tapping the paper on a at surface a fe

w times.

Load the paper with the print side face up.

● Load the paper against the r

ear edge of the paper drawer.

● Make sure the loaded paper does not exceed the load limit line (

). If it exceeds the load limit line, there

may be misfeeds or a paper jam.

When Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-sided Printing)

Flatten the edge of the paper to remove any curls, and load the paper with the back (unprinted) side face up.

● Y

ou can use only paper printed with this machine.

● You cannot print on a side that has been previously printed on.

● If the printouts look faded, adjust the image quality.

[Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)](P. 495)

Align the paper guides with the width and length of the paper.

Basic Operations

135

● While pr

essing the lock release lever, align the paper guides with the width and length of the paper.

● Paper guides that are aligned but too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or a paper jam.

Load the paper drawer into the machine.

➠ By default, the Paper Settings conrmation scr

een is displayed.

[Notify to Check Paper Settings]

. 569)

When you are using paper that is longer than A4 size, the paper drawer is extended from the machine and is

not fully housed.

Set the paper size and type.

Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Paper

awer(P. 145)

By default, the paper size and type of the paper drawer are set to LTR and Plain 2. When paper of a different

size or type is loaded, change the paper settings.

Basic Operations

136

Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray

84CU-04F

o temporarily use paper not loaded in the paper drawer, load it in the multi-purpose tray.

You can load paper correctly by aligning the paper guides on the multi-purpose tray with the paper.

When using envelopes or paper with logos, be careful of the orientation of the loaded paper and which side is face up.

Preparations and Orientation for Loading Envelopes(P. 140)

Orientation for Loading Paper with a Logo(P. 142)

Do Not Remove the Paper Drawer

● If the paper dr

awer is removed, the machine cannot print even when paper is loaded in the multi-purpose

tray. If you try to print with the paper drawer removed, an error message appears.

Open the cover while holding both sides.

Pull out the paper tray.

Spread the paper guides apart.

While pressing the lock release lever, move the paper guides.

Fan the paper and align the edges.

Basic Operations

137

Fan the paper in small batches, and align the edges by tapping the paper on a at surface a fe

w times.

Load the paper with the print side face up.

● Insert the paper until the edge of the paper is against the paper tr

ay.

● Make sure the loaded paper does not exceed the load limit line (

). If it exceeds the load limit line, there

may be misfeeds or a paper jam.

When Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-sided Printing)

Flatten the edge of the paper to remove any curls, and load the paper with the back (unprinted) side face up.

● Y

ou can use only paper printed with this machine.

● You cannot print on a side that has been previously printed on.

● You cannot load more than one sheet of paper. Load each sheet separately to print.

● If the printouts look faded, adjust the image quality.

[Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)](P. 495)

Align the paper guides with the width of the paper.

● While pr

essing the lock release lever, align the paper guides with the width of the paper.

● Paper guides that are aligned but too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or a paper jam.

Set the paper size and type.

Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose

ray(P. 147)

By default, when the machine detects paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray, the screen for setting the

paper size and type is displayed on the oper

ation panel. Set the paper size and type each time you load

paper.

Basic Operations

138

When Loading A5 Size Paper

● Set the paper size accor

ding to the orientation of the loaded paper.

Landscape orientation (A5)

Portrait orientation (A5R)

Basic Operations

139

Preparations and Orientation for Loading Envelopes

84CU-04H

As envelopes have a differ

ent shape and thickness from regular paper, preparations must be made before loading

envelopes.

Envelopes can be printed only on the front side (non-glued side). When loading envelopes, pay attention to the

orientation and which side is face up.

Preparations before Loading Envelopes(P. 140)

Orientation of Envelopes (Paper Drawer)(P. 141)

Orientation of Envelopes (Multi-purpose Tray)(P. 141)

● For the gener

al procedure of loading envelopes, see the following:

When loading in the paper drawer

Loading Non-standard Size Paper(P. 134)

When loading in the multi-purpose tr

Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 137)

Preparations before Loading Envelopes

Align the envelopes r

egardless of the number of envelopes to be loaded.

Close the ap of each envelope.

Flatten them to remove any air, and make sure the edges are pressed tightly.

Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes, and atten any curls.

Basic Operations

140

Align the edges of the envelopes on a at surface.

➠ The envelopes ar

e ready to be loaded.

Orientation of Envelopes (Paper Drawer)

Load the envelopes No. 10 (C

OM10), Monarch, ISO-C5, or DL in portrait orientation with the front side (non-glued side)

face up and the long side of the envelope parallel with the long side of the paper drawer. Load the envelope with the

ap closed and on the left side.

Orientation of Envelopes (Multi-purpose Tray)

Insert the envelopes No. 10 (C

OM10), Monarch, ISO-C5, or DL from the short side with the front side (non-glued side)

face up. Insert the envelope with the ap closed and on the left side.

Basic Operations

141

Orientation for Loading Paper with a Logo

84CU-04J

When loading paper with a logo, pay attention to the orientation and which side is face up.

By default, the orientation the paper is to be loaded and the side to print on vary depending on whether you want to

print on one or both sides.

Printing on One Side of Paper with a Logo(P. 142)

Printing on Both Sides of Paper with a Logo(P. 142)

● For the gener

al procedure of loading paper, see the following:

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 132)

Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 137)

● Y

ou can congure the settings so that the orientation the paper is to be loaded and the side to print on do

not change depending on whether you want to print on one or both sides. When this setting is congured,

load the paper using the 2-sided printing method.

[Switch Paper Feed Method](P. 507)

Printing on One Side of Paper with a Logo

Load the paper with the logo side (side to be printed) face up.

Paper with logo in portr

ait orientation

Paper with logo in landscape orientation

Printing on Both Sides of Paper with a Logo

Load the paper with the logo side (side to be printed rst) face do

wn.

Basic Operations

142

Paper with logo in portrait orientation

Paper with logo in landscape orientation

Basic Operations

143

Specifying the Paper Size and Type

84CU-04K

o ensure quality printing and prevent paper jams, the paper size and type must be set correctly according to the

loaded paper.

You can register frequently used paper settings and hide unneeded paper settings to simplify the paper settings.

Settings Required after Loading the Paper

Set the paper size and type according to the loaded paper.

Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Paper Drawer(P. 145)

Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 147)

If you always use the same paper in the multi-purpose tr

ay, you can register the paper to use so you do not

have to congure the settings each time.

Registering a Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 149)

Simplifying the Paper Settings

ou can register and set the paper size for easier settings.

Registering Non-standard Size Paper (Custom Paper)(P. 151)

Hiding Unused Paper Sizes(P. 152)

Using Appr

opriate Paper

You can congure the settings to automatically select the paper source with the appropriate paper when

printing.

Using the Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function(P. 153)

Basic Operations

144

Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Paper Drawer

84CU-04L

By default, the paper size and type of the paper dr

awer are set to LTR and Plain 2. When paper of a different size or

type is loaded, change the paper settings.

This section describes how to congure the settings using the operation panel.

You can also congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

Managing the Machine from a Computer

(Remote UI)

(P. 437)

On the operation panel, press [Paper Settings] in the [Home] screen.

[Home]

Scr

een(P. 111)

Select the paper drawer whose setting you want to change.

Select the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer.

You can scroll the screen to view paper sizes (such as envelopes) not displayed on the screen.

When A5 Size Paper Is Loaded

When paper is loaded in the landscape orientation, select [A5]. When paper is loaded in the portr

ait

orientation, select [A5R].

Landscape orientation (A5)

Portrait orientation (A5R)

Basic Operations

145

When Non-standard Size (Custom Size) Paper Is Loaded

Press [Custom].

Enter the values in [X] and [Y], and press [Apply].

Select [X] or [Y], and enter the length of each side using [+] and [-], with / to move the cursor

between the digits for inputting whole numbers and fractions.

When frequently used non-standard sizes are registered, you can call these up by pressing [S1] to [S3].

If a Set Paper Size Is Not Displayed

ess [Other Sizes], and select the paper size from the displayed list.

Select the type of the paper loaded in the paper drawer.

➠ The paper size and type ar

e set.

● Y

ou can change the paper size displayed on the screen in Step 3.

Hiding Unused Paper Sizes(P. 152)

Basic Operations

146

Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose

ray

84CU-04R

When paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tr

ay, the following screen is displayed on the operation panel. Set the

paper size and type according to the loaded paper.

* If the paper size and type of the multi-purpose tray have been registered in advance, the above screen is not

displayed. Registering a Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 149)

This section describes ho

w to congure the settings using the operation panel.

You can also congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

Managing the Machine from a Computer

(Remote UI)

(P. 437)

Select the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray.

You can scroll the screen to view paper sizes (such as envelopes) not displayed on the screen.

When A5 Size Paper Is Loaded

When paper is loaded in the landscape orientation, select [A5]. When paper is loaded in the portr

ait

orientation, select [A5R].

Landscape orientation (A5)

Portrait orientation (A5R)

When Non-standard Size (Custom Size) Paper Is Loaded

Press [Custom].

Enter the values in [X] and [Y], and press [Apply].

Basic Operations

147

Select [X] or [Y], and enter the length of each side using [+] and [-], with / to move the cursor

between the digits for inputting whole numbers and fractions.

When frequently used non-standard sizes are registered, you can call these up by pressing [S1] to [S3].

If a Set Paper Size Is Not Displayed

ess [Other Sizes], and select the paper size from the displayed list.

Select the type of paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray.

➠ The paper size and type ar

e set.

● Y

ou can change the paper size displayed on the screen in Step 1.

Hiding Unused Paper Sizes(P. 152)

Basic Operations

148

Registering a Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for

the Multi-purpose T

ray

84CU-04S

By default, when paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tr

ay, the screen for setting the paper size and type is displayed

on the operation panel.

If you always use the same paper in the multi-purpose tray, you can register the paper size and type. This prevents the

paper settings screen from being displayed, saving you the trouble of conguring the settings.

When Using Paper of a Size or Type Different from the Registered Paper

After canceling the registration in Step 3, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray. When the screen for

setting the paper size and type is displayed on the operation panel, congure the settings according to the

paper to be used.

Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 147)

This section describes ho

w to register the settings using the operation panel.

You can also register the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

Managing the Machine from a Computer

(Remote UI)

(P. 437)

On the operation panel, press [Paper Settings] in the [Home] screen.

[Home]

Scr

een(P. 111)

Select the multi-purpose tray.

Select the paper size to register.

You can scroll the screen to view paper sizes (such as envelopes) not displayed on the screen.

When Registering A5 Size Paper

When paper is loaded in the landscape orientation, select [A5]. When paper is loaded in the portr

ait

orientation, select [A5R].

Landscape orientation (A5)

Portrait orientation (A5R)

Basic Operations

149

When Registering Non-standard Size (Custom Size) Paper

Press [Custom].

Enter the values in [X] and [Y], and press [Apply].

Select [X] or [Y], and enter the length of each side using [+] and [-], with / to move the cursor

between the digits for inputting whole numbers and fractions.

When frequently used non-standard sizes are registered, you can call these up by pressing [S1] to [S3].

If the Paper Size to Register Is Not Displayed

ess [Other Sizes], and select the paper size from the displayed list.

To Cancel the Registered Paper

ess [Specify When Loading Paper]. You do not need to perform Step 4.

When paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray, the screen for setting the paper size and type is displayed on

the operation panel.

Select the paper type to register.

➠ The paper size and type ar

e registered.

● Y

ou can change the paper size displayed on the screen in Step 3.

Hiding Unused Paper Sizes(P. 152)

Basic Operations

150

Registering Non-standard Size Paper (Custom Paper)

84CU-04U

Custom paper is non-standar

d size paper whose side lengths can be freely dened within the range supported by the

machine.

You can register sizes when frequently using specic non-standard size paper. You can call up the paper on the size

input screen, saving you the trouble of entering the size.

You can register up to three custom sizes.

This section describes how to register the settings using the operation panel.

You can also register the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

Managing the Machine from a Computer

(Remote UI)

(P. 437)

On the operation panel, press [Paper Settings] in the [Home] screen.

[Home]

Scr

een(P. 111)

Press [Register Custom Paper].

➠ The [Register Custom Paper] scr

een is displayed.

Select from [S1] to [S3].

The size is registered to the selected number.

Enter the lengths for [X] and [Y].

Select [X] or [Y], and enter the length of each side using [+] and [-], with / to move the cursor between

the digits for inputting whole numbers and fr

actions.

Press [Name] to change the display name of [S1] to [S3].

Press [Apply].

➠ The custom paper is r

egistered.

Basic Operations

151

Hiding Unused Paper Sizes

84CU-04W

The paper settings scr

een displays the registered frequently used paper sizes. If unused paper sizes are displayed, you

can hide these for each paper source to make it easier to select a paper size.

To select a hidden paper size, press [Other Sizes] on the paper settings screen.

Use the operation panel to congure the settings. You cannot congure the settings using Remote UI from a

computer.

On the operation panel, press [Paper Settings] in the [Home] screen.

[Home]

Scr

een(P. 111)

Press [Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes].

➠ The [Select Fr

equently Used Paper Sizes] screen is displayed.

Select a paper source.

Clear the checkboxes of the paper sizes to hide, and click [Apply].

➠ Paper sizes whose checkbo

xes are cleared are not displayed on the paper settings screen.

Basic Operations

152

Using the Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function

84CU-04X

If you print without specifying the paper sour

ce, the machine automatically selects the paper source according to the

size of the paper to be printed. In addition, if the machine runs out paper while printing, it automatically selects

another paper source loaded with the same size paper to continue printing.

You can use the appropriate paper source by setting the paper source that is selected automatically for each function,

such as the copy, print, and fax reception functions.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Paper Source Auto Selection](P. 506)

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Common Settings]

[Edit].

➠ The [Edit Common Settings] scr

een is displayed.

In [Paper Source Auto Selection], set the paper source to be selected automatically to

[On].

● Congur

e this setting for each function. For printing reports and lists and printing from memory media, set

the paper source to [Other] to apply this setting.

● For each function, one of the paper drawers must be set for automatic selection. If the multi-purpose tray

only is set for automatic selection, the setting cannot be completed.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Basic Operations

153

Registering Destinations (Address Book)

84CU-04Y

es to the Address Book of the machine.

Address Book Function

By registering destinations to the Address Book, you can save the trouble of entering the information of

destinations each time you send or save data. The Addr

ess Book has a function for easily specifying

destinations. Use this function when displaying the Address Book screen or specifying destinations.

Address Book Function(P. 155)

Destinations that Can Be Register

● E-mail addr

ess (e-mail, I-Fax)

● File save locations (shared folder, FTP server)

● Fax number

How to Register Destinations

You can register a destination by entering a name, e-mail address, fax number, and other information, or by

using the TX Job Log or user information fr

om the LDAP server.

You can register destinations either with the operation panel or Remote UI, but the types of destinations that

can be registered and the registration method vary.

Registering Using the Operation Panel

Use the operation panel to register destinations from the TX Job Log or LDAP server.

You cannot use the operation panel to register le save locations (shared folder or FTP server).

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Operation Panel)(P. 157)

Registering Using Remote UI

Use Remote UI to r

egister le save locations (shared folder or FTP server).

You cannot use Remote UI to register destinations from the TX Job Log or LDAP server.

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 164)

◼ See Also

Importing and Exporting the Addr

ess Book

You can share and back up data in the Address Book.

Importing and Exporting the Address Book and Settings(P. 452)

eventing Unauthorized Use of the Address Book

To prevent unauthorized adding of new entries to the Address Book and editing of existing entries, you can

set a PIN and restrict the method for adding new entries.

Restricting Address Book Registration and Editing(P. 420)

Basic Operations

154

Address Book Function

84CU-050

ou can specify destinations registered in the Address Book by calling up the Address Book in the [Home] screen or

the scan or fax screen on the operation panel.

When registering destinations, select the function to quickly specify the destination.

You can also eciently specify destinations from the Address Book screen, such as by grouping destinations or

displaying them by type.

Function to Quickly Specify a Destination

When registering destinations, select and register either of the following:

● Favorites

and display only the destinations registered to Favorites on the Address Book screen, making it easier to

search for the desired destination.

You can register up to 19 destinations to Favorites.

● Coded Dial

destination.

You can register up to 281 destinations with Coded Dial numbers.

Registering a Group of Multiple Destinations

You can register multiple registered e-mail address or fax number destinations as a group to Favorites or

Coded Dial. This saves you the trouble of specifying multiple destinations individually when sending data.

You can register up to 299 groups.

You can register only the same type of destinations for one group.

Registering Groups to the Address Book (Operation Panel)(P. 160)

Registering Groups to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 168)

Classifying b

y Index

You can display the initials of the names and types of destinations (such as e-mail or fax) set at the time of

registration by classifying them by index.

◼ Address Book Screen

When you call the Address Book from the [Home] screen or scan or fax screen, the following screen is displayed.

List of Registered Destinations

The types of destinations ar

e indicated with the following symbols, and the destination information, such as

the name, e-mail address, and fax number, are displayed:

[

]: E-mail

[ ]: I-Fax

[ ]: File save location (shared folder or FTP server)

[ ]: Fax

● [ ] is displayed for group destinations.

Basic Operations

155

● [ ] is displayed next to the destination type symbol for destinations registered to Favorites.

Inde

This is displayed at the bottom of the screen. You can lter destinations displayed in the list by selecting their

type or the initials of a name.

● Tap [

] or [ ] or ick the scr

een left or right to change the index display.

● To display all destinations registered to the Address Book, select [All].

● When specifying the destinations to be displayed by initials of the name, select [A-Z], [0-9], or [ABC] to [YZ].

Destination Operation Items

These are displayed on the right side of the screen. Press to register, edit, or delete a destination, or to

specify a destination to which to send or save data.

● For items other than [Register Dest.], select the checkbox of a destination, and then perform the

operation.

● When you call the Address Book from the [Home] screen, check the destination and press [Apply] to

display the scan or fax screen with the specied destination entered.

Basic Operations

156

Registering Destinations to the Address Book

(Oper

ation Panel)

84CU-051

You can register destinations to the Address Book using the operation panel.

ou can use the following methods to register e-mail addresses (e-mail, I-Fax) and fax numbers:

● Register destinations by directly entering their information.

● Register destinations by calling up the TX Job Log.

● Register destinations by searching for user information managed with an LDAP server.

Required Preparations

● If you ar

e using an LDAP server, register the LDAP server to be used for searching for destinations to the

machine.

Registering LDAP Servers(P. 77)

On the operation panel, press [Address Book] in the [Home] screen. [Home]

Screen(P. 111)

Press [Register Dest.].

➠ The [Destination T

ype] screen is displayed.

If the [Address Book PIN] screen is displayed, enter the PIN, and press [Apply].

Select the destination type.

When registering group destinations, see the following.

Registering Groups to the Address Book (Operation Panel)(P. 160)

Enter the destination information.

Basic Operations

157

You can register a destination without entering its name, but by entering the name, you can search for it by

its initials when specifying the destination.

When Directly Entering the Destination

● Pr

ess [Name] and enter the name, and then press [Apply].

● For destination information, press [E-Mail Address], [I-Fax Address], or [Fax Number], enter that information,

and then press [Apply].

● When entering an international destination in [Fax Number], enter the international access number, country

code, and fax number in that order. If you are unable to connect, press [Pause] in between the numbers to

add a pause. You can change the pause time.

[Set Pause Time](P. 544)

When Entering the Destination by Calling Up the TX Job Log

● Pr

ess [Name] and enter the name, and then press [Apply].

● For the TX Job Log, press [Recall Settings], and select a destination. The destination is entered in the

registration screen of the Address Book.

When Entering the Destination by Searching an LDAP Server

Press [LDAP Server].

Select the LDAP server.

Select the search item, and specify the search string.

● Enter the string to sear

ch for, and press [Apply].

● You can specify multiple search items.

Select [Search Method], and select the search conditions.

● To search for users who meet all items specied in Step 3, select [Using All Conditions Below].

● To search for users who meet any of the items specied in Step 3, select [Using Some Conditions

Below].

Press [Start Search].

➠ The users who meet the search conditions are displayed.

Basic Operations

158

When the authentication screen is displayed, enter the user name and password of the machine that is

egistered to the LDAP server, and press [Apply].

Select the user to register to the Address Book.

➠ The name and destination are entered in the registration screen of the Address Book.

Set the fax sending details, as needed.

If a fax number was registered in Step 4, set the details when a send error occurs or it takes time to send a

fax to that number.

If you r

egistered something other than a fax number, this step is not required. Proceed to Step 6.

Press [Fax Number] [Set Details].

Set the items, and press [Apply].

[ECM TX] *1

When an err

or occurs for an image being sent, the machine corrects the image so as not to send a

distorted image.

[TX Speed] *1

If it takes time to start sending a fax, such as when there is a poor phone line connection, the machine

lowers the communication start speed.

[Long Distance]

If a communication error occurs when sending a fax to an international destination, select [International

(1)]. If the error does not improve, select [International (2)] and [International (3)] in that order.

If this is not set here, the settings that appear when selecting [Menu] in the [Home] screen and then selecting

[Function Settings] are applied.

[ECM TX](P. 544)

[TX Start Speed](P. 545)

Press [Register As], and select [Favorites] or [Coded Dial].

When [Coded Dial] is selected, select an unregistered number, or press [Use Numeric Keys] and enter a

thr

ee-digit Coded Dial number.

Press [Apply].

➠ The destination is r

egistered to the Address Book.

Registering a Destination from the TX Job Log of a Scan or Fax Job

● In addition to calling up the TX Job Log from the Address Book, you can also register destinations from the

TX Job Log of a scan or fax job to the Address Book.

Checking the Send and Save Status and Log of Scanned Data(P. 272)

Checking the Status and Log for Sent and Received Faxes(P. 304)

Basic Operations

159

Registering Groups to the Address Book (Operation

Panel)

84CU-052

ou can register a group of multiple destinations to the Address Book using the operation panel.

You can register only the same type of destinations for a group. You cannot register le save locations (shared folder

or FTP server) to a group.

Required Preparations

● Register the destinations to be added to a gr

oup to the Address Book of the machine.

Registering

Destinations to the Addr

ess Book (Operation Panel)(P. 157)

On the operation panel, press [Address Book] in the [Home] screen. [Home]

Screen(P. 111)

Press [Register Dest.].

➠ The [Destination T

ype] screen is displayed.

If the [Address Book PIN] screen is displayed, enter the PIN, and press [Apply].

Press [Group].

➠ The [Gr

oup] screen is displayed.

Press [Name] and enter the name, and then press [Apply].

You can register a destination without entering its name, but by entering the name, you can search for it by

its initials when specifying the destination.

Press [Destination]

[Add].

Select the checkboxes of the destinations to add to the group, and press [Apply].

● Select the inde

x at the bottom of the screen of the Address Book to lter and display the destinations.

● You can select multiple destinations at the same time.

Basic Operations

160

Check that the destinations to be added to the group are correct, and then press

[Apply].

To view the information of a destination, select the checkbox of the destination, and press [Details].

* Y

ou cannot view the information by selecting the checkboxes of multiple destinations.

Press [Register As], and select [Favorites] or [Coded Dial].

When [Coded Dial] is selected, select an unregistered number, or press [Use Numeric Keys] and enter a

thr

ee-digit Coded Dial number.

Press [Apply].

➠ The gr

oup is registered to the Address Book.

Basic Operations

161

Editing and Deleting Destinations in the Address Book

(Oper

ation Panel)

84CU-053

ou can edit information of destinations registered in the Address Book or delete unused destinations.

On the operation panel, press [Address Book] in the [Home] screen.

[Home]

Scr

een(P. 111)

Select the checkbox of the destination to edit or delete.

● Select the inde

x at the bottom of the screen of the Address Book to lter and display the destinations.

● When deleting destinations, you can select the checkboxes of multiple destinations and delete them at the

same time.

● To view the information of a destination, select the checkbox of the destination, and press [Details].

* You cannot view the information by selecting the checkboxes of multiple destinations.

Edit or delete the destination.

When Editing a Destination

Press [Edit].

If the [Addr

ess Book PIN] screen is displayed, enter the PIN, and press [Apply].

Edit the item, and press [Apply].

➠ The edited information is applied.

When Deleting a Destination

Press [Delete].

If the [Addr

ess Book PIN] screen is displayed, enter the PIN, and press [Apply].

Press [Yes].

➠ The destination is deleted.

Basic Operations

162

● If the destination in the Addr

ess Book is specied with "Favorite Settings," the edit or delete operation is also

applied to "Favorite Settings."

Registering and Calling Up Favorite Settings(P. 180)

Basic Operations

163

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote

UI)

84CU-054

ou can register destinations to the Address Book using Remote UI from a computer.

Use Remote UI to register le save locations (shared folder or FTP server).

Administrator privileges are required to register destinations using Remote UI.

Required Preparations

● When r

egistering a shared folder as a destination, prepare the following information and keep it close by:

- Name or IP address of the computer with the shared folder

Viewing the System Information of the Computer(P. 739)

Viewing the Network Connection Information of the Computer(P. 741)

Path to the shared folder

- User name and password used for accessing the shared folder (if Restrict Access is set)

● When registering an FTP server as a destination, prepare the following information and keep it close by:

- IP address of the FTP server

- Path to the folder where to save the data.

- User name and password used for accessing the FTP server (if Restrict Access is set)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Address Book]. Portal Page of Remote

UI(P

. 441)

Click [Favorites] or [Coded Dial].

Click an item displayed as [Not Registered].

➠ The [Register Ne

w Destination] screen is displayed.

If the [Enter PIN] screen is displayed, enter the Address Book PIN, and then click [OK].

Basic Operations

164

Select the destination type, and click [OK].

● When r

egistering le save locations (shared folder or FTP server), select [File].

● When registering group destinations, see the following.

Registering Groups to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 168)

Set the destination information.

You can register a destination without entering its name, but by entering the name, you can search for it by

its initials when specifying the destination.

When Registering E-Mail Addresses (E-mail, I-Fax)

Enter the name and e-mail address.

When Registering File Save Locations (Shared Folder, FTP Server)

Enter the name.

Basic Operations

165

Select [Protocol].

When r

egistering a shared folder, select [Windows (SMB)].

In [Host Name], enter the name or IP address of the computer.

Shared Folder

Enter the name or IP address of the computer with the shared folder.

FTP Server

Enter the IP address of the FTP server.

* When using a DNS server, you can enter the host name or FQDN instead of the computer name or IP

address.

Enter the path to the folder.

Shared Folder

Enter the path to the shared folder. Use "\" as a separator.

Input example: when the shared folder path is C:\users\public\share

users\public\share

FTP Server

Enter the path to the folder to which to save the le. Use "/" as a separator. Specifying "/" at the start

creates an absolute path, and omitting this creates a relative path from the current directory of the

user logged into the FTP server.

If there is no folder at the entered path, a folder with the entered name is created when the le is saved

for the rst time.

* However, if there is no parent folder, or you do not have write permission to the parent folder, a

sending error occurs without a folder being created.

Enter the user name and password, as needed.

● If Restrict Access is enabled for the shared folder or FTP server, enter the user name and password

used for accessing the shared folder or FTP server.

● To enter a password, select the [Set Password] checkbox, and then enter the password.

When Registering a Fax Number

Enter the name and fax number.

Set the fax sending details, as needed.

If a send err

or occurs or it takes time to send a fax to a registered fax number, set the fax sending details.

[ECM TX] *1

Basic Operations

166

When this is selected and an error occurs for an image being sent, the machine corrects the image so as

not to send a distorted image.

[Speed] *1

If it tak

es time to start sending a fax, such as when there is a poor phone line connection, the machine

lowers the communication start speed.

[Long Distance]

If a communication error occurs when sending a fax to an international destination, select [International

(1)]. If the error does not improve, select [International (2)] and [International (3)] in that order.

If this is not set here, the setting in [Settings/Registration]

[TX Settings] [Fax TX Settings] is applied.

[ECM TX](P. 544)

[TX Start Speed](P. 545)

Click [OK].

➠ The destination is registered to the Address Book.

Log out from Remote UI.

Editing or Deleting Registered Destinations

● Y

ou can edit the registered information by clicking the destination you want to edit in the screen in Step 4.

● In Step 4, click [Delete] to the right of the destination you want to delete, and the destination will be deleted.

● If the destination in the Address Book is specied with "Favorite Settings," the edit or delete operation is also

applied to "Favorite Settings."

Registering and Calling Up Favorite Settings(P. 180)

Basic Operations

167

Registering Groups to the Address Book (Remote UI)

84CU-055

ou can register a group of multiple destinations to the Address Book using Remote UI from a computer.

You can register only the same type of destinations for a group. You cannot register le save locations (shared folder

or FTP server) to a group.

Administrator privileges are required to register a group using Remote UI.

Required Preparations

● Register the destinations to be added to a gr

oup to the Address Book of the machine.

Registering

Destinations to the Addr

ess Book (Remote UI)(P. 164)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Address Book]. Portal Page of Remote

UI(P

. 441)

Click [Favorites] or [Coded Dial].

Click an item displayed as [Not Registered].

➠ The [Register Ne

w Destination] screen is displayed.

If the [Enter PIN] screen is displayed, enter the Address Book PIN, and then click [OK].

Select [Group], and click [OK].

➠ The [Register Ne

w Destination: Group] screen is displayed.

In [Group], enter the group name.

You can register a group without entering its name, but by entering the name, you can search for it by its

initials when specifying the destination.

In [Member Settings], click [Select from Address Book].

Basic Operations

168

Change the display of the Address Book, as needed.

In [Type], select [Favorites] or [Coded Dial], and click [Display] to change the display of the Address Book.

Select the checkboxes of the destinations to add to the group, and click [OK].

➠ The destinations ar

e added to [Member List] on the [Register New Destination: Group] screen.

You can select multiple destinations at the same time.

Click [OK].

➠ The gr

oup is registered to the Address Book.

Log out from Remote UI.

Basic Operations

169

Specifying Destinations

84CU-056

When sending or saving scanned data or fax

es, specify destinations using the method below.

The method of specifying destinations and the number of destinations that can be specied vary depending on the

function and destination.

Specifying Destinations

When sending scanned data by e-mail or I-Fax, you can specify destinations for the Cc and Bcc elds only fr

the Address Book.

Using the Address Book

Specify a destination registered to the Address Book of the machine.

Specifying Destinations (Address Book)(P. 171)

Dir

ectly Entering a Destination

Enter the destination using the keyboard or numeric keys on the operation panel.

Specifying Destinations (Direct Input)(P. 173)

Using the LD

AP Server

Search for and specify the destination from the user information managed with an LDAP server.

Specifying Destinations (LDAP Server)(P. 174)

Using the Addr

ess Book on a Mobile Device

When sending scanned data by e-mail, you can specify a destination registered to the address book on a

mobile device.

Specifying Destinations (Address Book on a Mobile Device)(P. 175)

Using the TX Job Log

ou can call up the TX Job Log of scan or fax jobs and specify destinations that were specied in the past.

Specifying Destinations (TX Job Log)(P. 176)

Specifying Multiple Destinations

You can specify multiple destinations by repeating the operation of specifying a destination.

wever, you cannot specify multiple le save locations (shared folder or FTP server) as destinations.

When Removing a Specic Destination after Specifying Multiple Destinations

Use the following procedure:

On the scan or fax screen, select [Conrm Destination] select the checkbox of the destination or group to

emove

[Remove from Dest.] [Yes].

If you selected the checkbox of a group, you can press [Details] [Destination] to view the destinations

registered to that group. You cannot individually remove destinations registered to a group.

Conrming Destinations

The screen for conrming whether a specied destination is corr

ect may be displayed depending on the

settings of the machine.

In addition, the method for specifying destinations may be restricted, and sending may be restricted to only

specic destinations.

Preventing Sending Data by Mistake and Leaking Information(P. 404)

Basic Operations

170

Specifying Destinations (Address Book)

84CU-057

When specifying destinations with the Addr

ess Book, use the [Home] screen or the scan or fax screen on the operation

panel.

When specifying destinations by calling up the Address Book from the [Home] screen, use the destination list.

When specifying destinations on the scan or fax screen, in addition to using the destination list, you can also enter the

Coded Dial number to specify a destination.

Specifying Destinations from a List(P. 171)

Specifying Destinations with Coded Dial Numbers(P. 171)

Specifying Destinations from a List

In the [Home] screen or the scan or fax screen, press [Address Book].

➠ The Addr

ess Book is displayed.

For the scan screen, on the [Specify Destination] tab, press [Address Book].

When the [To/Cc/Bcc] screen is displayed

Select the type (T

o, Cc, or Bcc) of destination to be specied.

Select the checkboxes of the destinations to specify, and press [Apply].

➠ The destinations are specied.

When destinations are specied by calling up the Address Book from the [Home] screen, the scan or fax

screen is displayed with the specied destinations entered.

Select the index at the bottom of the screen of the Address Book to lter and display the destinations.

Specifying Destinations with Coded Dial Numbers

ou can enter a three-digit Coded Dial number to specify a destination.

On the [Specify Destination] tab of the scan or fax screen, press [Coded Dial].

➠ The [Enter Coded Dial Number] scr

een is displayed.

When the [To/Cc/Bcc] screen is displayed

Select the type (T

o, Cc, or Bcc) of destination to be specied.

Basic Operations

171

Enter a three-digit Coded Dial number.

➠ The destination is specied.

If you enter

ed an incorrect number, press [

] to clear the numbers.

When the Conrm Destination Scr

een Is Displayed

Check that the destination is correct, and then press [OK].

Basic Operations

172

Specifying Destinations (Direct Input)

84CU-058

o specify a destination not registered to the Address Book or LDAP server, directly enter the destination using the

scan or fax screen of the operation panel.

◼ Using the Scan Screen

On the [Specify Destination] tab of the scan screen, press [Use Keyboard].

Enter an e-mail address, and press [Apply].

➠ The destination is specied.

◼ Using the Fax Scr

een

On the [Enter Dest.] tab of the fax screen, enter a fax number.

● If you enter

ed an incorrect fax number, press [

] to clear the number.

● T

o enter a second and subsequent destinations, press [Next Dest.]. If the [Conrm] screen is displayed, enter

the fax number again, and press [Apply].

● When sending a fax to an international destination, enter the international access number, country code, and

fax number in that order. If you are unable to connect, press [Pause] in between the numbers to add a pause.

You can change the pause time.

[Set Pause Time](P. 544)

Basic Operations

173

Specifying Destinations (LDAP Server)

84CU-059

When user information is managed b

y an LDAP server, you can search for that information using the scan or fax

screen of the operation panel and specify a destination.

When you are logged in with authenticated sending (LDAP server authentication), you can also specify the e-mail

address of the logged-in user.

Required Preparations

● Register the LD

AP server to be used for searching for information to the machine.

Registering LDAP

Servers

(P. 77)

On the [Specify Destination] tab of the scan or fax screen, press [LDAP Server].

When you are logged in with authenticated sending and you want to specify the e-mail address of the

logged-in user, pr

ess [Specify Myself as Destination]. The operations thereafter are not required.

Select the LDAP server.

Select the search item, and specify the search string.

● Enter the string to sear

ch for, and press [Apply].

● You can specify multiple search items.

Select [Search Method], and select the search conditions.

● T

o search for users who meet all items specied in Step 3, select [Using All Conditions Below].

● To search for users who meet any of the items specied in Step 3, select [Using Some Conditions Below].

Press [Start Search].

➠ The users who meet the sear

ch conditions are displayed.

When the authentication screen is displayed, enter the user name and password of the machine that is

registered to the LDAP server, and press [Apply].

Select the checkboxes of the users to specify as destinations, and press [Apply].

➠ The destinations ar

e specied.

Basic Operations

174

Specifying Destinations (Address Book on a Mobile

vice)

84CU-05A

When sending scanned data b

y e-mail, you can specify destinations registered to the Address Book on a mobile device

using the scan screen of the operation panel.

Required Preparations

● Install Canon PRINT Business to the mobile de

vice.

Using a Dedicated Application to Print and Scan

(Canon PRINT Business)

(P. 346)

● Congure the settings to enable the machine to connect to the Address Book on the mobile device.

[Link

Mobile De

vice Addr. Book](P. 539)

On the [Specify Destination] tab of the scan screen, press [Mobile Portal].

Connect to the mobile device. Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine(P. 341)

Send the destination information from the mobile device to the machine.

● For details about sending, see the Canon PRINT Business manual at the online manual site.

● Y

ou can also send the subject, message, and le name entered on the mobile device to the machine.

Conrm the destination information displayed on the scr

een of the machine, and

press [OK].

➠ The destinations are specied.

Basic Operations

175

Specifying Destinations (TX Job Log)

84CU-05C

ou can specify destinations used in the past by calling up the TX Job Log from the scan or fax screen of the operation

panel. You can also apply the scan settings used to send data together with the destinations.

When you call up the TX Job Log, the specied destinations and scan settings are overwritten.

● Y

ou cannot use the TX Job Log when sending from the log is restricted.

Prohibiting the Use of

Destinations in the Send Log(P

. 405)

On the [Specify Destination] tab of the scan or fax screen, press [Recall Settings].

Select the log you want to call up.

➠ The destinations and scan settings of the selected log ar

e applied.

When there are multiple destinations in the log, only the rst destination is displayed, but all of the

destinations are applied.

Change the destinations and scan settings, as needed.

You can change and send the called up destinations and scan settings.

● The TX Job Log is clear

ed in the following cases:

- When the power is turned OFF

- When entry of new destinations is restricted

Sending Only to Registered Destinations(P. 406)

Basic Operations

176

Inserting and Removing a USB Memory Device

84CU-05E

ou can insert a USB memory device into the machine to exchange data between the machine and the USB memory

device.

Use the operation panel to safely remove the USB memory device from the machine.

You can use a USB memory device with a FAT16 (up to 2 GB) or FAT32 (up to 32 GB) le system.

Inserting a USB Memory Device(P. 177)

Removing the USB Memory Device(P. 178)

Saving Data to a USB Memory Device

● Data may not be able to be saved pr

operly depending on the USB memory device.

Unsupported Devices

● USB memory devices with a security function

● USB memory devices that do not conform to USB standards

● USB card readers

● USB memory devices connected via an extension cable

● USB memory devices connected via a USB hub

Handling USB Memory Devices

● Do not remove the USB memory device or subject it to shocks or vibration or turn OFF the machine while

data is being imported or exported.

Inserting a USB Memory Device

Conrm the orientation of the USB memory de

vice, and insert it into the USB port on the front of the machine.

Conrm the Orientation of the USB Memory De

vice before Inserting

● Make sure that the USB memory device is correctly oriented before inserting it into the USB port on the

machine. If you attempt to insert it in the incorrect orientation, the memory device and the machine may be

damaged.

Basic Operations

177

Removing the USB Memory Device

Use the operation panel to eject the USB memory device from the machine. You cannot eject the memory device using

Remote UI from a computer.

Follow the Procedure to Remove the USB Memory Device

● If you do not r

emove the USB memory device while following the procedure, the memory device and the

machine may be damaged.

On the operation panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen or other

location.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The [Status Monitor] screen is displayed.

Press [Rmv. Mem. Media].

Make sure that [The memory media can be safely removed.] is displayed, and then

emove the USB memory device.

Basic Operations

178

Registering Frequently Used Settings

84CU-05F

ou can register frequently used settings and values for each function by using the method below.

Registering Favorite Settings for Ease of Operation

You can register settings according to your purpose and settings you want to recall for the scan, fax, and

copy functions. You can call up registered settings using the shortcut buttons added to the [Home] screen on

the operation panel and the screen of each function.

This saves the trouble of having to repeatedly congure the settings and prevents setting errors.

Registering and Calling Up Favorite Settings(P. 180)

Changing the Default Settings

ou can change the default settings for each function. If the settings are not changed, the initial settings will

be used.

By conguring the settings as standard or to save paper, for example, you can increase work eciency and

reduce costs.

Changing the Default Settings(P. 183)

Basic Operations

179

Registering and Calling Up Favorite Settings

84CU-05H

ou can register settings according to your purpose and settings you want to recall as "Favorite Settings" for the scan,

fax, and copy functions.

You can label the Favorite Setting so as to provide a description of the setting, who will use it, or other information.

You can call up registered settings for quick operation using the shortcut buttons added to the [Home] screen on the

operation panel and the screen of each function. You can also change the settings after calling them up, as needed.

Registering Favorite Settings(P. 180)

Calling Up Registered Favorite Settings(P. 181)

Registering Favorite Settings

When you r

egister scan and fax settings, if the destination is specied while setting the details to be registered, the

destination is also registered to Favorite Settings. Register the settings while making sure that unneeded destinations

are not specied.

You cannot change the destination once registered. To change a registered destination, delete the Favorite Setting,

and then register it again.

Use the operation panel to register Favorite Settings. You cannot register Favorite Settings using Remote UI from a

computer.

This section describes the copy procedure as an example.

On the operation panel, press [Copy] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The cop

y screen is displayed.

Set the details to be registered.

Copying(P. 313)

Press [Other Settings] [Favorite Settings].

Basic Operations

180

Select an item that is not registered, and press [Register].

➠ The information set in Step 2 is displayed.

Check the settings, and click [Register].

● T

o change the settings, select the item to change, and change the setting.

● Press [Name] to change the registered name of the Favorite Setting.

Select whether to add a shortcut button to the [Home] screen.

● When you select [Yes], a message about the shortcut button appears. Press [OK] to add a shortcut button to

the [Home] screen.

● When you select [No], the Favorite Setting is registered but a shortcut button is not added. You can add a

shortcut button to the [Home] screen at a later time. Adding Shortcut Buttons(P. 121)

Calling Up Registered Favorite Settings

When using the scan, fax, or cop

y function, call up the setting according to your purpose from the registered Favorite

Settings.

Basic Operations

181

◼ When Shortcut Buttons Have Been Added to the [Home] Scr

een

Press a shortcut button on the [Home] screen of the operation panel to call up the setting.

◼ Calling Up Favorite Settings from a Function Screen

Use the following procedure to call up a Favorite Setting. This section describes the copy procedure as an example.

On the operation panel, press [Copy] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The cop

y screen is displayed.

Press [Other Settings]

[Favorite Settings].

➠ The [Favorite Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the setting to use, and press [Apply].

➠ The setting is called up.

The cop

y settings are completed, so you can just press [Start] to copy.

Basic Operations

182

Changing the Default Settings

84CU-05J

ou can change the default settings for scan, copy, and other functions called up using the operation panel.

You can also reset the settings to the settings set here by pressing [Reset] on any function screen.

This section describes how to congure the settings using the operation panel.

You can also congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

Managing the Machine from a Computer

(Remote UI)

(P. 437)

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Function Settings].

Select the default setting item you want to change.

Select from the following items according to the function you want to change.

Memory Media Print

[Store/Access Files] [Common Settings] [Access Stored Files Settings] [Change Default Settings

(Memory Media Print)]

Scan (Save to USB Memory Device)

[Store/Access Files] [Common Settings] [Scan and Store Settings] [USB Memory Settings] [Change

Default Settings (USB Memory)]

Scan (Send E-mail)

[Send] [Scan and Send Settings] [E-Mail Settings] [Change Default Settings (E-Mail)]

Scan (Save to Shar

ed Folder or FTP Server)

[Send]

[Scan and Send Settings] [File Settings] [Change Default Settings (File)]

Fax

[Send] [Fax Settings] [Change Default Settings (Fax)]

I-Fax

[Send] [Scan and Send Settings] [I-Fax Settings] [Change Default Settings (I-Fax)]

Cop

[Copy]

[Change Default Settings (Copy)]

Select the setting items to change, and change the default settings.

For details about the setting items of each function, see the following:

[Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)](P. 558)

Basic Operations

183

[USB Memory Settings](P. 557)

[Change Default Settings (E-Mail)](P. 537)

[Change Default Settings (File)](P. 541)

[Change Default Settings (Fax)](P. 543)

[Change Default Settings (I-Fax)](P. 539)

[Change Default Settings (Copy)](P. 511)

Press [Apply].

➠ The default settings ar

e changed.

Restoring Default Settings to the Factory Settings

● On the scr

een in Step 4, press [Initialize]

[Yes].

Basic Operations

184

Adjusting the Sound Volume

84CU-05K

ou can adjust the volume of the sounds emitted by the machine and set whether the machine emits sounds notifying

you of operations and statuses.

The sounds that can be adjusted and the operating procedure vary depending on whether the machine has a fax

function.

Adjusting the Volume (For Models with a Fax Function)(P. 186)

Adjusting the Volume (For Models without a Fax Function)(P. 189)

Basic Operations

185

Adjusting the Volume (For Models with a Fax Function)

84CU-05L

ou can adjust the volume of sounds emitted by the machine.

You can also set whether the machine emits sounds notifying you of operations and statuses.

Adjusting the Fax Volume(P. 186)

Adjusting Other Fax Function Sounds(P. 186)

Setting the Notication Sounds for Oper

ations and Statuses(P. 187)

Adjusting the Fax Volume

You can adjust the volume of the tone emitted when sending and receiving faxes.

This section describes how to adjust the volume using the operation panel.

You can also adjust the volume using Remote UI from a computer. Managing the Machine from a Computer

(Remote UI)

(P. 437)

Press the Sound Volume key (

) on the operation panel. Operation Panel(P. 14)

Drag the slider to the left or right to adjust the volume, and press [Apply].

➠ The volume is adjusted.

● Dragging the slider to the right increases the volume.

● Dragging the slider to the far left mutes the sound.

Adjusting Other Fax Function Sounds

ou can adjust the volume of the incoming fax sound and the sounds notifying you when faxes are successfully sent

and received, and when originals are successfully scanned.

You can also congure the setting to emit a sound only when an error occurs.

This section describes how to adjust the volume using the operation panel.

You can also adjust the volume using Remote UI from a computer.

Managing the Machine from a Computer

(Remote UI)

(P. 437)

Press the Sound Volume key (

) on the operation panel. Operation Panel(P. 14)

➠ The [Fax V

olume] screen is displayed.

Basic Operations

186

Press [Other Volume Set.].

➠ The [V

olume Settings] screen is displayed.

Select the item whose volume you want to adjust.

[Ring Tone]

Adjust the volume of the sound notifying you of incoming faxes.

[TX Done Tone]

Adjust the volume of the sound notifying you that sending of a fax is complete.

[RX Done Tone]

Adjust the volume of the sound notifying you that receiving of a fax is complete.

[Scanning Done Tone]

Adjust the volume of the sound notifying you that scanning of a fax original is complete.

Drag the slider to the left or right to adjust the volume, and press [Apply].

● Dr

agging the slider to the right increases the volume.

● Dragging the slider to the far left mutes the sound.

● To emit a completion sound only when an error occurs, set [Sound Only When Error Occurs] to [On].

Press [Apply]

[Apply].

➠ The volume is adjusted.

Setting the Notication Sounds for Oper

ations and Statuses

You can also set whether the machine emits sounds notifying you of operations and statuses, such as when operating

the operation panel and errors are detected.

This section describes how to congure the settings using the operation panel.

You can also congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

Managing the Machine from a Computer

(Remote UI)

(P. 437)

Press the Sound Volume key (

) on the operation panel. Operation Panel(P. 14)

➠ The [Fax V

olume] screen is displayed.

Basic Operations

187

Press [Other Volume Set.].

➠ The [V

olume Settings] screen is displayed.

Set whether notication sounds ar

e emitted.

[Volume Settings] Screen(P. 190)

To emit notication sounds, select [On].

Press [Apply] [Apply].

➠ The notication sound settings ar

e applied.

Basic Operations

188

Adjusting the Volume (For Models without a Fax

Function)

84CU-05R

ou can also set whether the machine emits sounds notifying you of operations and statuses, such as when operating

the operation panel and errors are detected.

This section describes how to congure the settings using the operation panel.

You can also congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

Managing the Machine from a Computer

(Remote UI)

(P. 437)

Press the Sound Volume key (

) on the operation panel. Operation Panel(P. 14)

➠ The [V

olume Settings] screen is displayed.

Set whether notication sounds ar

e emitted. [Volume Settings] Screen(P. 190)

To emit notication sounds, select [On].

Press [Apply].

➠ The notication sound settings ar

e applied.

Basic Operations

189

[Volume Settings] Screen

84CU-05S

When you pr

ess the Sound Volume key (

) on the operation panel, or the Sound Volume key ( ) [Other Volume

Set.], the [V

olume Settings] screen is displayed.

You can adjust the volume of notication sounds, such as when faxes are successfully sent and received, and set

whether the machine emits sounds notifying you of operations and statuses.

[Ring Tone], [TX Done Tone], [RX Done Tone], [Scanning Done Tone] (For Models with a Fax Function)

ou can adjust the volume of the incoming fax sound and the sounds notifying you when faxes are successfully sent

and received, and when originals are successfully scanned.

[Entry Tone]

Set whether to emit a sound when you press the keys and buttons on the operation panel.

[Invalid Entry Tone]

Set whether to emit a sound when an invalid key is pressed, such as when you enter a value outside the setting range.

[Restock Supplies Tone]

Set whether to emit a sound when the toner cartridges are nearing the end of their lifetime.

[Warning Tone]

Set whether to emit a sound when the machine has a paper jam or other malfunction.

[Job Done Tone]

Set whether to emit a sound when the copy, scan, or other operation on the machine is completed.

[Energy Saver Alert]

Set whether to emit a sound when the machine enters and exits sleep mode.

[Original in Feeder Detection Tone]

Set whether to emit a sound when the machine detects an original that has been placed on the feeder.

Basic Operations

190

Printing

Printing ................................................................................................................................................................

192

Printing Preparations ....................................................................................................................................... 194

Preparing to Print from a Computer ............................................................................................................. 195

Conguring a Printer Port (Windows) .................................................................................................... 198

Setting Up a Print Server .............................................................................................................................. 201

Preparations for Using Universal Print ......................................................................................................... 204

Registering the Machine to Cloud Service .............................................................................................. 205

Registering the Machine to the Computer ............................................................................................. 208

Preparing to Print from a USB Memory Device ............................................................................................. 209

Printing from a Computer ................................................................................................................................ 210

Registering Non-standard Size Paper to the Computer (Custom Size) .......................................................... 213

Printing a Document Secured with a PIN (Secure Print) ................................................................................ 215

Changing the Time Period That Print Data with a PIN (Secure Data) Is Saved ........................................ 218

Enabling Secure Print in a Printer Driver (macOS) .................................................................................. 219

Printing with Universal Print ......................................................................................................................... 220

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print) .......................................................................... 221

Screen for Selecting Files in USB Memory Device ......................................................................................... 223

Memory Media Print Settings ....................................................................................................................... 224

Canceling Printing ............................................................................................................................................. 230

Viewing the Print Job Status and Log ............................................................................................................... 233

Printing

191

Printing

84CU-09Y

ou can print documents and photos from a computer or print les directly from a USB memory device inserted into

the machine.

Printing from a Computer

You can print documents and photos via a printer driver installed on a computer

connected to the machine.

Preparing to Print from a Computer(P. 195)

Printing from a Computer(P. 210)

Setting Up a Print Server

By setting up a print server on a network, you can r

educe the load on the computer that you print from.

In Windows, you can install the printer driver via the print server, which saves you the trouble of

downloading the printer driver to each computer on the network or using a CD/DVD-ROM.

Setting Up a Print Server(P. 201)

Printing with a PIN

When printing fr

om a computer, you can send print data to the machine after setting a PIN.

Printing is not performed until the PIN is entered on the machine, thereby preventing unattended printed

documents and information theft.

Printing a Document Secured with a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 215)

Printing with the Standar

d Functions of the Operating System and Cloud Service

You can print without having to install a dedicated application or printer driver.

Windo

You can use Microsoft's cloud service, Universal Print, to print data. The Universal Print driver is standard in

Windows 10, enabling you to also print from a remote location when the machine is connected to the

Internet.

Preparations for Using Universal Print(P. 204)

Printing with Universal Print(P. 220)

macOS

ou can use AirPrint to print data.

Using AirPrint Application to Print and Scan Data and Send

Fax

es(P. 347)

Chrome OS

Use the print function that is standard in the operating system.

Printing from Chromebook or Other

vice with Chrome OS(P. 353)

Directly Printing from a USB Memory Device

You can print PDF, JPEG, and TIFF les dir

ectly from a USB memory device

inserted into the machine without using a computer.

This is convenient when printing les on a computer without a network

connection or when printing les from an external device.

Preparing to Print from a USB Memory Device(P. 209)

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 221)

◼ See Also

Printing fr

om a Mobile Device

Printing

192

The machine can be operated from a smartphone, tablet, or other mobile device. By using a compatible

application or service, you can easily print photos or documents fr

om a mobile device.

Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 333)

When Results Ar

e Not as Expected

If the color is not reproduced properly or the image position is shifted, adjust the print quality and position

according to the symptoms.

Adjusting the Print Quality and Position(P. 610)

Printing

193

Printing Preparations

84CU-0A0

o print from the machine, you must make printing preparations according to your printing method and usage

environment.

Preparing to Print from a Computer(P. 195)

Setting Up a Print Server(P. 201)

Preparations for Using Universal Print(P. 204)

Preparing to Print from a USB Memory Device(P. 209)

Printing

194

Preparing to Print from a Computer

84CU-0A1

Mak

e the following preparations for the computer that will be used to print.

Step 1: Installing the Driver to the Computer(P. 195)

Step 2: Using a Driver to Set the Department ID and PIN(P. 195)

Step 3: Conguring the Option Settings of the Machine Using the Driver(P

. 195)

Step 1: Installing the Driver to the Computer

Install the printer driver to the computer that will be used to print. Installing Software and Drivers to the

Computer(P

. 95)

Using a Print Server in Windows

Use a print server to install the printer driver.

Double-click the shared printer on the print server, and follow the instructions on the screen to install the

printer driver.

Displaying a Shared Printer in the Print Server(P. 738)

Changing the Port Type and Number (Windows)

● If the machine is congur

ed not to use LPD or RAW, or if the port number was changed, the settings on the

computer may also have to be changed.

Changing the Port Type and Number(P. 200)

If the IP Addr

ess of the Machine Is Changed after Installing the Printer Driver

● In Windows, the required action depends on the port you are using.

- If you are using an MFNP port, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and computer belong

to the same subnet, so no action is required on the computer.

- If you are using a standard TCP/IP port, you must add a new port.

Adding a Port(P. 198)

If you do not kno

w which port is being used, see the following:

Viewing the Printer Port(P. 743)

● In macOS, you must r

e-register the machine on the Mac. For details about registering the machine, see the

manual of the driver at the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

* If you are using DHCP to automatically obtain the IP address of the machine, the IP address may be changed

automatically.

Step 2: Using a Driver to Set the Department ID and PIN

When Department ID Management is enabled on the machine, set the Department ID and PIN b

y specifying the

printer driver.

Setting the Department ID and PIN on a Computer(P. 366)

* Y

ou can skip this step when not using Department ID Management. Proceed to Step 3.

Step 3: Conguring the Option Settings of the Machine Using the Driver

When optional equipment is installed to the machine, you must congur

e the option settings in the printer driver in

advance.

In Windows, normally, the option settings are congured automatically when the printer driver is installed.

Use the following procedure to congure the option settings when the option settings have not been congured at

installation, optional equipment has been installed after installation of the printer driver, or when using macOS.

Printing

195

When Using Windows(P. 196)

When Using macOS(P. 196)

◼ When Using Windo

Administrator privileges are required on each computer.

Log on to the computer using an administrator account.

Click [

] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].

➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Click the printer driver of the machine

[Manage] [Printer properties].

➠ The printer driver pr

operties screen is displayed.

On the [Device Settings] tab, click [

] in [Device information].

➠ The [Conrmation] scr

een is displayed.

Click [Yes].

➠ The option settings ar

e obtained.

Click [OK]

[OK].

➠ The settings are applied.

When [Could not get device information.] Appears

● Specify the option settings manually

. For more information on how to congure the option settings

manually, click [Help] on the [Device Settings] tab to display help.

◼ When Using macOS

Click [

] [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

➠ The [Printers & Scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Select the machine, and click [Options & Supplies].

Printing

196

On the [Utility] tab, click [Open Printer Utility].

➠ The [Oce Printer Utility] scr

een is displayed.

Click [Printer Information].

➠ The option information is obtained, and the [Printer Information] scr

een is displayed.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

When the Option Information Cannot Be Obtained

● Specify the option settings manually

. For details about conguring the option settings manually, see the

manual of the driver at the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

Printing

197

Conguring a Printer Port (Windo

ws)

84CU-0A2

If the IP addr

ess of the machine changed or a printer has been added in Windows, you may not be able to print from a

computer. In this case, use the printer driver to add a new port.

In addition, you cannot print from a computer when the port type or port number of the printer driver differ from that

of the machine setting. In this case, change the setting on the printer driver to match that of the machine.

Adding a Port(P. 198)

Changing the Port Type and Number(P. 200)

Adding a Port

The machine supports two types of ports: "MFNP Port" and "Standard TCP/IP Port." Select and add the port to use

according to your usage environment.

MFNP Port (only for IPv4 environment)

You can only add this port when a printer driver is installed using the installer. The connection is maintained

as long as the machine and computer belong to the same subnet, even if the IP address of the machine is

changed.

Standard TCP/IP Port

This is a standard Windows port. You must add a new port every time the IP address of the machine is

changed. Select this type of port when you cannot add an MFNP port.

Administrator privileges are required on each computer.

Required Preparations

● Pr

epare the following information and keep it close by.

Checking the Network Status and

Settings(P

. 88)

- When adding an MFNP port: the IP address or MAC address of the machine

- When adding a standard TCP/IP port: the IP address or DNS name (host name) of the machine

Log on to the computer using an administrator account.

Click [ ] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].

➠ The [Printers & scanners] screen is displayed.

Click the printer driver of the machine [Manage] [Printer properties].

➠ The printer driver pr

operties screen is displayed.

On the [Ports] tab, click [Add Port].

➠ The [Printer Ports] scr

een is displayed.

Add a new port.

Printing

198

When Adding an MFNP Port

Select [Canon MFNP Port], and click [New Port].

Select [Auto Detect] and the machine, and click [Next].

If the machine is not displayed, click [Refresh]. If the machine is still not displayed, select [IP address] or

[MA

C address], enter the IP address or MAC address of the machine, and then click [Next].

Click [Add].

When Adding a Standard TCP/IP Port

Select [Standard TCP/IP Port], and click [New Port].

➠ The [Add Standar

d TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] screen is displayed.

Click [Next].

Enter the IP address or DNS name (host name), and then click [Next].

The port name is entered automatically, so change it, as needed.

When [Additional port information r

equired] Appears

Take action following the instructions on the screen. To set [Device Type], select [Canon Network Printing

Device with P9100] in [Standard].

Click [Finish].

Printing

199

➠ A ne

w port is added, and the [Printer Ports] screen is displayed.

Click [Close]

[Close].

Changing the Port Type and Number

If the machine is congur

ed not to use LPD or RAW, you must change the type of port on the computer to a protocol

usable on the machine.

If the LPD or RAW port number was changed, the settings on the computer may have to be changed to match the

settings on the machine.

* You do not need to change the port type or number on the computer for WSD ports.

Administrator privileges are required on each computer.

Log on to the computer using an administrator account.

Click [

] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].

➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Click the printer driver of the machine

[Manage] [Printer properties].

➠ The printer driver pr

operties screen is displayed.

On the [Ports] tab, click [Congur

e Port].

➠ The [Congure Port] screen or [Congure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor] screen is displayed.

Set the port type and number.

For an MFNP Port

In [Pr

otocol Type], select [RAW] or [LPR], and change the port number.

For a Standard TCP/IP Port

In [Pr

otocol Type], select [Raw] or [LPR].

● When [Raw] is selected, change the port number.

● When [LPR] is selected, enter "Ip" for [Queue Name].

Click [OK]

[Close].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Printing

200

Setting Up a Print Server

84CU-0A3

By setting up a print server on the network, you can speed up print oper

ations on a computer, thereby reducing the

load on the computer.

In Windows, you can install the printer driver via the print server to save you the trouble of downloading the printer

driver to each computer on the network or using a CD/DVD-ROM.

To set up a print server, enable the print server to print from the machine, and then congure the settings for sharing

the printer.

To use a print server in a domain environment, consult your network administrator..

Enabling the Print Server to Print from the Machine(P. 201)

Conguring the Settings for Sharing the Printer(P

. 201)

Enabling the Print Server to Print from the Machine

Install the printer driver to the computer that will be the print server, and congure the settings according to your

usage environment. Preparing to Print from a Computer(P. 195)

Using a Print Server While Using Department ID Management

ou must install Canon Driver Information Assist Service when installing the printer driver. For more

information, see the manual of the driver at the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

Conguring the Settings for Sharing the Printer

Congur

e the printer sharing settings on the computer that will be the print server so that other computers on the

network can use the print server.

When Using Windows(P. 201)

When Using macOS(P. 203)

◼ When Using Windo

Administrator privileges are required on the computer that will be the print server.

Required Preparations

● Check the oper

ating system (32-bit or 64-bit) of the computer that will be the print server and the operating

system of the computer that will use the print server (the client).

Viewing the System Information of the

Computer(P

. 739)

Log on to the computer that will be the print server, using an administrator account.

Click [ ] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].

➠ The [Printers & scanners] screen is displayed.

Click the printer driver of the machine [Manage] [Printer properties].

Printing

201

➠ The printer driver pr

operties screen is displayed.

On the [Sharing] tab, select the [Share this printer] checkbox, and enter a shared

name.

Install an additional driver, as needed.

If the client computer has an operating system (32-bit or 64-bit) that differs from that of the print server,

install an additional driver.

Click [Additional Drivers].

➠ The [Additional Drivers] scr

een is displayed.

Select the checkbox of the driver to be added, and click [OK].

● If the print server computer has a 32-bit oper

ating system, select the [x64] (driver for 64-bit version)

checkbox.

● If the print server computer has a 64-bit operating system, select the [x86] (driver for 32-bit version)

checkbox.

Click [Browse], specify the folder where the driver is located, and click [OK].

When Specifying the Folder of the Downloaded Driver

● If the print server computer has a 32-bit operating system, specify the [x64] folder with the

decompressed driver

[Driver] folder.

● If the print server computer has a 64-bit oper

ating system, specify the [32BIT] folder with the

decompressed driver

[Driver] folder.

When Specifying the Folder in the Supplied CD/D

VD-ROM

● If the print server computer has a 32-bit operating system, specify [intdrv] in the CD/DVD-ROM

[UFRII] [x64] [Driver] folder.

● If the print server computer has a 64-bit oper

ating system, specify [intdrv] in the CD/DVD-ROM

[UFRII] [32BIT] [Driver] folder.

Install the additional driver while following the instructions on the screen.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Printing

202

◼ When Using macOS

Click [

] [System Preferences] [Sharing].

➠ The [Sharing] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Printer Sharing] checkbox.

In [Printers], select the checkbox of the machine.

Restrict the users that can use the print server, as needed.

By default, all users can use the print server.

o enable specic users to use the print server, click [+] under [Users], and select the users who can use the

print server.

Close the [Sharing] screen.

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Printing

203

Preparations for Using Universal Print

84CU-0J4

Congur

e the machine to be able to use Microsoft's cloud service, Universal Print, and register the machine to each

computer that will be used to print.

You must be a registered user of Microsoft 365 and use Azure Active Directory.

Registering the Machine to Cloud Service(P. 205)

Registering the Machine to the Computer(P. 208)

Printing

204

Registering the Machine to Cloud Service

84CU-0J5

e Active Directory, and set the

members or groups that will use the machine.

Step 1: Registering the Machine to Azure Active Directory(P. 205)

Step 2: Specifying the Members and Groups to Use the Machine(P. 207)

Step 1: Registering the Machine to Azure Active Directory

Congure this setting using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the

settings.

Administrator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [Network Settings] [Universal Print Settings].

➠ The [Universal Print Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Click [Edit] in [Basic Settings].

Select the [Use Universal Print] checkbox, and enter the printer name.

● For the printer name, enter a name to identify the machine, using single-b

yte alphanumeric characters.

● To verify the certicate sent from the server, select the [Verify Server Certicate] checkbox.

To add a Common Name (CN) to the verication items, select the [Add CN to Verication Items] checkbox as

well.

Change Application ID and the URL of Azure Active Directory according to usage

envir

onment.

Click [OK].

➠ The [Universal Print Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Click [Register] in [Registration Status].

➠ The [Information for Registr

ation] screen is displayed.

Printing

205

Wait several seconds, and then click [ ].

Click the link displayed in [URL for Registration].

Click [Universal Print Settings] at the top of the Remote UI screen.

➠ The [Universal Print Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Wait a few minutes, and then click [

➠ When r

egistration is complete, [Registered] is displayed in [Registration Status].

Log out from Remote UI.

Canceling the Registration

● Click [Unr

egister] on the [Universal Print Settings] screen

[OK]. On the Azure Active Directory device

management screen, select the machine and click [Delete].

Printing

206

Step 2: Specifying the Members and Groups to Use the Machine

Display the Universal Print management screen of Azure Active Directory in a Web

owser on a computer.

Select the machine, and click [Share Printer].

To change the name of the machine displayed on the computer, change [Printer Share Name].

Click [Members]

[Add].

From the list, select the members and groups who will use the printer.

Printing

207

Registering the Machine to the Computer

84CU-0J6

egistered to Azure Active Directory, to the computer to be used for Universal Print.

Required Preparations

● Register the machine to Azur

e Active Directory.

Registering the Machine to Cloud Service(P. 205)

Click [

] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Accounts].

➠ The [Your info] screen is displayed.

Click [Access work or school] [Connect].

Follow the on-screen instructions to sign in to your Microsoft 365 account.

Click [Home]

[Devices] [Printers & scanners].

➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Click [Add a printer or scanner].

➠ The printer list scr

een is displayed.

Select the machine and click [Add device].

➠ The machine is r

egistered to the computer.

When Using a Proxy Server

● T

o use Universal Print via a proxy server, you must congure the proxy settings on each computer. For

details, contact the network administrator.

Printing

208

Preparing to Print from a USB Memory Device

84CU-0A4

Congur

e the settings to be able to print data from a USB memory device.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Memory Media Settings](P. 556)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Store/Access Files Settings]

[Memory Media Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Memory Media Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Memory Media Print] checkbox, and click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Selecting an Operation When a USB Memory Device Is Connected

● You can congure the settings to display a screen for selecting and immediately executing an operation

(scanning from a USB memory device or Memory Media Print) when a USB memory device is inserted into

the machine.

Settings] [Edit] in [Display Screen When Memory Media is Connected] select the [Display

Scr

een When Memory Media is Connected] checkbox

[OK]

Using the operation panel, congur

e the settings in the [Home] screen from [Menu]

[Function Settings].

[Screen When Mem. Med. Conn](P. 556)

Printing

209

Printing from a Computer

84CU-0A5

You can print documents from a computer using a printer driver.

By changing the settings on the printer driver, you can print accor

ding to the

document and purpose, such as by using 2-sided printing or adjusting the quality.

This section describes the general procedure for this operation. Check the manual of the application you are using for

detailed oper

ations on how to use it.

Required Preparations

● Install the printer driver on the computer, and congur

e the settings according to your usage environment.

Preparing to Print from a Computer(P. 195)

● If the document or paper to print is a non-standar

d size, register the size to the printer driver.

Registering

Non-standar

d Size Paper to the Computer (Custom Size)(P. 213)

When Using Windows(P. 210)

When Using macOS(P. 211)

◼ When Using Windows

On your computer, open the document you want to print.

In the application used to open the document, select the command to print.

Select the printer driver of the machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].

➠ The [Printing pr

eferences] screen of the printer driver is displayed.

In [Page Size] on the [Basic Settings] tab, select the paper size of the document.

Printing

210

When Printing on Paper of a Size Different from [Page Size]

In [Output Size], select the paper size to print on. The document is enlar

ged or reduced to match the paper

size in [Output Size].

Congure the other print settings, as needed.

Congure 2-sided printing and adjust the image quality and other settings to suit your document and

purpose. For mor

e information, click [Help] on the [Printing preferences] screen to display help.

Click [OK], and click [Print] or [OK].

➠ Printing starts.

● Y

ou can cancel printing on the printing screen or from the printer icon in the Windows notication area.

Canceling Printing from a Computer(P. 230)

● Use [Status Monitor] on the oper

ation panel to view the print job status and log.

Viewing the Print Job

Status and Log(P

. 233)

◼ When Using macOS

On your computer, open the document you want to print.

From the menu in the application used to open the document, click [Print].

➠ The printing dialog bo

x appears.

In [Printer], select the printer driver of the machine.

In [Paper Size] of the print options, select the paper size of the document.

If print options are not displayed, click [Show Details] in the printing dialog box.

When Printing on Paper of a Size Different from [Paper Size]

From the print options pop-up menu, select [Paper Handling].

Printing

211

Select the [Scale to t paper size] checkbo

x, and in [Destination Paper Size], select the paper size to print

on.

The document is enlarged or reduced to match the paper size in [Destination Paper Size].

Congure the other print settings, as needed.

Congure 2-sided printing and adjust the image quality and other settings to suit your document and

purpose. For mor

e information, click [

] in the printing dialog box to display help.

Click [Print].

➠ Printing starts.

● Y

ou can cancel printing from the printer icon in the Dock.

Canceling Printing from a Computer(P. 230)

● Use [Status Monitor] on the oper

ation panel to view the print job status and log.

Viewing the Print Job

Status and Log(P

. 233)

Printing

212

Registering Non-standard Size Paper to the Computer

(Custom Size)

84CU-0A6

Custom size paper is non-standar

d size paper whose side lengths can be freely dened.

If the document or paper to print is a non-standard size, you must register the size to the printer driver in advance.

When Using Windows(P. 213)

When Using macOS(P. 213)

◼ When Using Windo

Click [

] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].

➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Click the printer driver of the machine

[Manage] [Printing preferences].

➠ The [Printing pr

eferences] screen of the printer driver is displayed.

On the [Page Setup] tab, click [Custom Paper Size].

Enter the custom size paper name and paper size, and click [Register].

Click [OK]

[OK].

➠ The custom size paper is r

egistered.

◼ When Using macOS

On your computer, open the document you want to print.

Printing

213

From the menu in the application used to open the document, click [Print].

➠ The printing dialog bo

x appears.

In [Printer], select the printer driver of the machine.

In [Paper Size] of the print options, select [Manage Custom Sizes].

If print options are not displayed, click [Show Details] in the printing dialog box.

Click [+] at the bottom left, double-click [Untitled], and enter the custom size paper

name.

Enter the paper size, and click [OK].

➠ The custom size paper is r

egistered.

Printing

214

Printing a Document Secured with a PIN (Secure Print)

84CU-0A7

With Secur

e Print, you can set a PIN to a document on the computer and send that document to the machine to be

printed. Printing is performed after that PIN is entered on the machine.

Secure Print can prevent unattended printed documents and information theft. You can also conrm the print data

before printing to prevent unwanted printing.

The print data sent with a PIN (secure data) is temporarily saved in the memory of the machine. If printing is not

performed after a set period of time, the secure data is deleted automatically from the memory, and you can no

longer print the data.

Step 1: Sending Secure Data from a Computer(P. 215)

Step 2: Printing Secure Data by Entering a PIN or Password(P. 217)

● Y

ou can change the period of time that the secure data is saved.

Changing the Time Period That Print

Data with a PIN (Secur

e Data) Is Saved(P. 218)

Step 1: Sending Secure Data from a Computer

ou can send secure data from a computer to the machine using a printer driver.

In Windows, you can send encrypted secure data (using Encrypted Secure Print), thereby preventing eavesdropping

during communication. Secure data is encrypted with an alphanumeric password instead of a PIN.

For details about sending secure data using the Encrypted Secure Print function, see the manual of the driver at the

online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

When Using Windows(P. 215)

When Using macOS(P. 216)

◼ When Using Windo

This section describes how to send regular secure data.

Display the [Printing preferences] screen of the printer driver.

Printing from a

Computer(P

. 210)

In [Output Method], select [Secured Print].

➠ The [Information] scr

een is displayed.

Printing

215

Click [Yes].

➠ The [Secur

ed Print Details] screen is displayed.

Enter the user name and PIN, and click [OK].

➠ The [Printing pr

eferences] screen reappears.

Click [OK], and click [Print] or [OK].

➠ The secur

e data is sent to the machine.

◼ When Using macOS

Required Preparations

● Enable Secur

e Print in the settings of the printer registered to the computer.

Enabling Secure Print in a

Printer Driver (macOS)(P

. 219)

Display the printing dialog box, and select the printer driver of the machine.

Printing from a Computer(P. 210)

From the print options pop-up menu, select [Special Features].

If print options are not displayed, click [Show Details] in the printing dialog box.

In [Job Processing], select [Secured Print].

Click [Print].

➠ The [Secur

ed Print] screen is displayed.

Enter the document name, user name, and PIN, and click [OK].

Printing

216

➠ The secur

e data is sent to the machine.

Step 2: Printing Secure Data by Entering a PIN or Password

Print the secure data sent to the machine. If the secure data is left without printing, it will remain in the memory of the

machine, and you may not be able to print other data. Print the sent secure data as soon as possible.

On the operation panel, press [Secure Print] in the [Home] screen.

[Home]

Scr

een(P. 111)

➠ The Secure Print screen is displayed.

If the screen for selecting the user is displayed, select your user name.

Select the checkbox of the secure data to print, and press [Start].

Enter the PIN or password, and press [Apply].

➠ Printing starts.

● If you selected multiple les of secur

e data in Step 2 above, only secure data that matches the entered PIN or

password is printed.

● To cancel printing, use the control panel to cancel printing.

When Canceling Printing with the Operation

Panel(P. 231)

● Use [Status Monitor] to view the print job status and log. Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 233)

● Y

ou can use the following procedure to view the memory usage of saved secure data.

On the operation panel, in the [Home] screen or other location, click [Status Monitor] [Device

Information] [Secure Print Memory Usage].

Printing

217

Changing the Time Period That Print Data with a PIN

(Secur

e Data) Is Saved

84CU-0A8

ou can change the period of time until the print data that was sent with a PIN or password (secure data) and is

temporarily saved in the memory of the machine is deleted.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Secure Print](P. 504)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [Secure Print Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Secur

e Print Settings] screen is displayed.

In [Secure Print Deletion Time], enter the period of time the secure data is saved

(until it is deleted), and click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Printing

218

Enabling Secure Print in a Printer Driver (macOS)

84CU-0A9

o send secure data from a macOS computer to the machine, you must enable Secure Print in the settings of the

printer registered to the computer.

Click [

] [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

➠ The [Printers & Scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Select the machine, and click [Options & Supplies].

On the [Options] tab, select the [Secured Print] checkbox, and click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Printing

219

Printing with Universal Print

84CU-0SW

Universal Print is a service for printing documents via the Micr

osoft cloud. The Universal Print driver is standard with

Windows 10, so there is no need to install a printer driver for each computer. If your device is connected to the

Internet, you can print documents when you are away from the machine.

To use Universal Print, you must be a registered user of Microsoft 365 and use Azure Active Directory.

Required Preparations

● Register the machine to Azur

e Active Directory, and set the members or groups that will use the machine.

Registering the Machine to Cloud Service(P. 205)

● T

o each computer that will use Universal Print, register the machine that is registered to Azure Active

Directory.

Registering the Machine to the Computer(P. 208)

For details about how to print with Universal Print and the supported operating systems, see the Microsoft website.

https://docs.micr

osoft.com/

Printing

220

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media

Print)

84CU-0AA

With Memory Media Print, you can print PDF, JPEG, and TIFF les dir

ectly from a USB

memory device inserted into the machine without using a computer or printer

driver. You can also preview JPEG and TIFF image les on the operation panel before

printing.

This is convenient when printing les on a computer without a network connection

or from an external device.

Required Preparations

● Congur

e the settings to print data from a USB memory device.

Preparing to Print from a USB Memory

vice(P. 209)

Insert a USB memory device into the USB port on the machine.

Inserting and

Remo

ving a USB Memory Device(P. 177)

If the memory media operation screen appears, press [Memory Media Print], and proceed to step 3.

On the operation panel, press [Memory Media Print] in the [Home] screen.

[Home]

Scr

een(P. 111)

➠ The les and folders of the USB memory device are displayed.

Select the checkboxes of the les to print.

Screen for Selecting Files in USB Memory

Device(P. 223)

You can select multiple les.

* Only les in the same folder can be selected at the same time. If you mo

ve the folder, the le selection is

canceled.

* You cannot select both PDF les and image les (JPEG or TIFF les) at the same time.

Press [Apply].

➠ The Memory Media Print settings scr

een is displayed.

Printing

221

Congure the print settings.

Memory Media Print Settings(P. 224)

Press [Start B&W] or [Start Color].

➠ Printing starts.

● T

o print in black and white, press [Start B&W]. To print in color, press [Start Color].

● To cancel printing, use the control panel to cancel printing.

When Canceling Printing with the Operation

Panel

(P. 231)

● Use [Status Monitor] to view the print job status and log.

Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 233)

When printing is completed, remove the USB memory device. Removing the USB

Memory De

vice(P. 178)

Printing

222

Screen for Selecting Files in USB Memory Device

84CU-0AC

Insert the USB memory de

vice into the machine, and in the [Home] screen, press [Memory Media Print] to display the

les and folders in the USB memory device.

Select the checkboxes of the les to print.

o select all displayed les, press [Select All] at the bottom of the screen. If there are both PDF les and image les

(JPEG or TIFF les), a screen for selecting the le type is displayed. Use this screen to select the le type you want to

print.

You can also use the following method to change the display of the le selection screen.

Moving Files to a Folder

Select a folder. To navigate up one level, press [

* Folders and les deeper than ve le

vels are not displayed.

Changing the File Display Method

Press [

], [ ], or [ ] at the top right of the screen to change the way les ar

e displayed.

(Preview)

(Thumbnail)

(Details)

Changing the File Display Order

ou can arrange les by le name or when last updated.

Press [Sort Files] at the bottom of the screen, and select the le display order.

● Y

ou can also change the default le display method and display order settings.

[Default Display Settings](P. 562)

[File Sort Default Settings](P. 562)

Printing

223

Memory Media Print Settings

84CU-0AE

ou can use the Memory Media Print settings screen to select the paper to use, set 2-sided printing, and congure

other settings. You can also display the details settings screen to adjust the image quality and congure other detailed

print settings.

* To start printing, select the color to print by pressing [Start B&W] or [Start Color].

[Paper]

Select the paper to use for printing.

Select the paper sour

ce with the loaded paper to use, and press [Close].

* If the paper loaded in the paper source does not match the setting of the paper size or paper type, you can use

[Change Paper Settings] to change the paper settings.

[Brightness]

Adjust the brightness of the printed image.

Drag the slider to the left or right to adjust the brightness, and then press [Close].

Press [+] to increase the brightness and [-] to lower it.

[Number of Copies]

Specify the number of copies to print.

Use the numeric keys to enter the number of copies, and then press [Close].

[2-Sided Printing]

Use the button to select whether to use 2-sided printing.

Prints on one side.

Prints on both sides of the paper with the same top and bottom orientation on the front and back sides.

Printed pages ar

e opened horizontally when the paper is bound.

Prints on both sides of the paper with the reverse top and bottom orientation on the front and back

sides.

Printed pages ar

e opened vertically when the paper is bound.

[N on 1]

(PDF or JPEG le)

Specify whether to reduce the size of a multiple-page document and arrange the pages on one side of a sheet of

paper.

Printing

224

N on 1 is convenient when you want to save paper by printing on fewer sheets of paper than the original.

Use the button to select the number of pages to be combined.

Pages are not combined.

Combines a 2-page document onto one side of a sheet of paper.

Combines a 4-page document onto one side of a sheet of paper.

Combines an 8-page document onto one side of a sheet of paper. (PDF les only)

* For a PDF le, you can print 9 or 16 pages of a document on one side of a sheet of paper b

y using [N on 1] on

the details settings screen.

[Set PDF Details] Screen(P. 225)

[Set PDF Details]/[Set JPEG/TIFF Details]

Adjust the image quality and congur

e other detailed print settings.

[Set PDF Details] Screen(P. 225)

[Set JPEG/TIFF Details] Screen(P. 228)

Printing with the Same Settings

● Y

ou can change the default Memory Media Print settings.

Changing the Default Settings(P. 183)

[Set PDF Details] Screen

Use this scr

een to congure detailed print settings for PDF les, such as specifying the pages to print and adjusting

the image quality.

To display the screen, press [Set PDF Details] on the Memory Media Print settings screen.

[2-Sided Printing]

Specify whether to use 2-sided printing. When using 2-sided printing, select ho

w printed pages are opened when the

paper is bound.

* This is the same setting as [2-Sided Printing] on the Memory Media Print settings screen.

[N on 1]

Specify whether to r

educe the size of a multiple-page document and arrange the pages on one side of a sheet of

paper.

When combining pages, use the button to select the number of pages to be combined.

Example: When combining a 4-page document onto one side of a sheet of paper

Select [4 on 1].

Printing

225

* This is the same setting as [N on 1] on the Memory Media Print settings screen. However, [9 on 1] and [16 on 1]

e only available for [N on 1] on the [Set PDF Details] screen.

[Print Range]

Print all pages, or specify a range of pages to print. When specifying a range of pages, press [Specied Pages], and

enter the starting and ending pages.

[Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size]

Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the document according to the paper to be used for printing.

* The document is enlarged or reduced while maintaining the aspect ratio.

[Enlarge Print Area]

Specify whether to enlarge the print area to the edge of the paper without providing margins around the paper.

* When [Enlarge Print Area] is set to [On], part of the edge of the printed image may not be printed, or the paper may

be partly smudged.

[Print Comments]

Specify whether to print PDF comments.

When you select [Auto], the document and comments

are printed.

Only comments specied for printing in the PDF le.

[Line Renement]

Specify whether to mak

e the thickness of thin lines in the document uniform.

When you select [On (Slim)], lines are slimmer than with [On], but lines may become too thin or faint.

[Password to Open Document]

When printing a password-protected PDF le, enter the password to open the le.

[Other Settings]

Congure and adjust image quality settings and other detailed print settings.

[Halftones]

Set the printing method when reproducing halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker

areas of an image). For details about the settings, see the following:

[Halftones](P. 522)

[Pure Black Text]

Specify whether to print black te

xt using 1-color black (K) toner.

If you specify [Off] in this setting, documents are printed according to the settings in [Output Prole].

* This applies to black text where the color information is as follows:

● R = G = B = 0%

● C = M = Y = 100%

● C = M = Y = 0%, K = 100%

[Black Overprint]

Specify whether o

verprinting (printing colors on top of each other) is used when black text appears on a color

background or is overlaid on a ﬁgure. For details about the settings, see the following:

[Black Overprint](P. 526)

[RGB Sour

ce Prole]

Select the appropriate prole according to the monitor you are using when printing RGB data. For details about

the settings, see the following:

[RGB Source Pr

ole](P. 526)

[CMYK Simulation Prole]

Select the simulation target when printing CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data to a device-dependent

CMYK color model based on this simulation. For details about the settings, see the following:

[CMYK Simulation Prole](P. 527)

[Use Grayscale Prole]

Specify whether to convert gray data to CMYK data using the grayscale prole of the machine.

Printing

226

* Even if [On] is selected, data is printed using 1-color black (K) toner, depending on the setting of [Output

ole] or [Pure Black Text].

[Output Prole]

Select the appropriate prole for the print data. For details about the settings, see the following:

[Output Pr

ole](P. 527)

[Matching Method]

Select the element to be prioritized when adjusting the color with [RGB Source Prole]. For details about the

settings, see the following:

[Matching Method](P. 528)

[Composite Overprint]

Specify whether to o

verprint CMYK data set for overprinting, as composite output.

Specifying [Off] in this setting prints the image as if overprinting were not speciﬁed.

* Overprinting with special colors is not used, even if [On] is speciﬁed here.

[Grayscale Conversion]

Specify the conversion method when printing color data in black and white. For details about the settings, see

the following:

[Grayscale Conversion](P. 529)

[Print Quality]

Adjust the print quality

, such as the density and resolution, according to the document and purpose of printing.

[Density]

Adjust the toner density for each color during printing.

For more precise adjustment, you can adjust the levels of the three density areas for each color in [Fine

Adjust].

* When [Toner Save] is set to [On], you cannot adjust the toner density.

[Toner Save]

Specify whether to print while saving toner.

To print after checking the layout and appearance, such as before printing a large job, select [On].

[Gradation]

Specify the processing method used to reproduce gradation.

When you select [High 2], printing is performed with ner gradation than with [High 1].

* This setting is only available when [Resolution] is set to [600 dpi].

[Density Fine Adjustment]

Adjusts the density of ne lines and small text. Adjusts the density when ne lines or small text is faded to

give less faded print.

* Adjusting the density also affects the color balance and objects other than lines and text.

* This setting is only available when [Resolution] is set to [1200 dpi].

[Resolution]

Specify the resolution to be used for print data processing.

To print with a higher resolution, specify [1200 dpi] in this setting.

[Special Smoothing Mode]

Specify the mode to print data with a smooth nish. For details about the settings, see the following:

[Special Smoothing Mode](P. 517)

oner Volume Correction]

Adjusts the toner volume for data such as text and lines so as not to exceed the limit value of the machine.

For details about the settings, see the following:

[Toner Volume Correction](P. 517)

[Line Contr

ol]

Specify the processing method used to reproduce lines. For details about the settings, see the following:

[Line Control](P. 518)

Printing

227

[Width Adjustment]

Specify whether to adjust the printing of te

xt and ﬁne lines so that they appear bold.

If you specify [On] in this setting, select what is to be adjusted.

* When you select [On], the printing speed may decrease or the image quality may change.

[Advanced Smoothing]

Specify processing that will produce smoother printed outlines for text and graphics (illustrations created in

an application). For details about the settings, see the following:

[Advanced Smoothing](P. 518)

[Gr

adation Smoothing]

Specify processing that will produce smoother printed gradations in images such as graphics (illustrations

created in an application) and bitmap images. For details about the settings, see the following:

[Gradation Smoothing](P. 519)

[Enhance T

ext for B&W Printing]

When printing a document that includes color text in black and white, specify whether to adjust the text

density to make it easier to read.

* If you specify [Off] in this setting when printing a document that includes light-colored text in black and

white, the text will be printed more faintly and will be more dicult to see than when [On] is specied.

* If the text appears enhanced even when [Off] is specied, specify [Advanced Smoothing] to disable the

smoothing eﬀect.

[Set JPEG/TIFF Details] Screen

Use this scr

een to congure detailed print settings for JPEG and TIFF les, such adjusting the image quality.

To display the screen, press [Set JPEG/TIFF Details] on the Memory Media Print settings screen.

[2-Sided Printing]

Specify whether to use 2-sided printing. When using 2-sided printing, select ho

w printed pages are opened when the

paper is bound.

* This is the same setting as [2-Sided Printing] on the Memory Media Print settings screen.

[N on 1] (

JPEG le)

Specify whether to reduce the size of a multiple-page image and arrange the pages on one side of a sheet of

paper.

When combining pages, use the button to select the number of pages to be combined.

Example: When combining a 4-page image onto one side of a sheet of paper

Select [4 on 1].

* This is the same setting as [N on 1] on the Memory Media Print settings screen.

[Original Type]

Select whether to prioritize smoothness of a photo or clarity of text when printing.

[Halftones]

Printing

228

Set the printing method when reproducing halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker areas of

an image), accor

ding to the image content.

To Print Images with Fine Gradations, Such as Digital Camera Photos

Set to [Gradation]. Reproduces the gradation with a smooth nish.

To Print Images with Fine Lines and Small Text, Such as CAD Images

Set to [Error Diffusion]. Prints ne lines and small text with high resolution.

* When you set to [Error Diffusion], the xing of the toner and stability of the texture may be reduced.

[Matching Method]

Select the correction method of the color tone for printing.

When you select [Vivid Photo], the color tone is corrected to deeper and more vivid colors than with [General].

Printing

229

Canceling Printing

84CU-0AF

ou can cancel printing from a computer. To cancel printing after the print data has been sent to the machine, use the

operation panel or Remote UI.

To cancel printing when using Memory Media Print, use the operation panel or Remote UI.

Canceling Printing from a Computer(P. 230)

Canceling Printing with the Operation Panel or Remote UI(P. 231)

Canceling Printing from a Computer

When Using Windows(P. 230)

When Using macOS(P. 230)

◼ When Using Windo

If the printing screen is displayed, click [Cancel].

If the above screen is not displayed, double-click the printer icon in the Windows notication ar

ea, select the document

to cancel, and click [Document]

[Cancel] [Yes].

If the printer icon is not displayed in the Windows notication ar

ea or the document to be canceled is not displayed,

the print data is sent to the machine after being processed on the computer.

In this case, cancel printing using the operation panel of the machine or Remote UI.

Canceling Printing with the

Oper

ation Panel or Remote UI(P. 231)

◼ When Using macOS

Click the printer icon in the Dock, select the document to cancel, and click [

Printing

230

Canceling Printing with the Operation Panel or Remote UI

When Canceling Printing with the Operation Panel(P. 231)

Canceling Printing with Remote UI(P. 232)

◼ When Canceling Printing with the Oper

ation Panel

Follow the instructions on screen to cancel printing.

Press [Cancel]

[Yes].

If the above screen is not displayed, press [ ] on the operation panel [Yes].

If the job list screen is displayed, select the job to cancel, and press [Cancel] [Yes].

Printing

231

◼ Canceling Printing with Remote UI

ou can cancel printing with [Status Monitor/Cancel]

[Job Status] screen in [Print] of Remote UI. Checking Usage

and Logs with Remote UI

(P. 443)

Printing

232

Viewing the Print Job Status and Log

84CU-0AH

ocesses handled by the machine, including printing, are managed as jobs. By checking the status and log of jobs,

you can determine whether a print job was performed correctly and the cause of errors that occurred.

* If the log is set to not be displayed, you can only check the print job status.

[Display Job Log](P. 568)

This section describes ho

w to view this information using the operation panel.

You can also check this information using Remote UI from a computer.

Checking Usage and Logs with Remote

UI(P

. 443)

On the operation panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen or other

location.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The [Status Monitor] scr

een is displayed.

Press [Copy/Print Job].

Check the print job status and log on the [Copy/Print Job Status] or [Print Job Log]

tab.

Viewing the Print Job Status

On the [Copy/Print Job Status] tab, check the job being processed or waiting to be processed.

Select a job to view its details.

➠ The job details ar

e displayed.

View the le name, user name, and other information.

Depending on the type of char

acters being used, the le name and user name may not be correctly

displayed.

Viewing the Print Job Log

On the [Print Job Log] tab, check the completed print jobs.

Select a job to view its details.

➠ The job details ar

e displayed.

View the le name, user name, and other information.

Depending on the type of char

acters being used, the le name and user name may not be correctly

displayed.

If Print Job Log Displays Error Information

Printing was canceled, or an error occurred.

If a three-digit number starting with "#" (error code) is displayed, you can check the cause and solution

using the error code. An Error Code Is Displayed(P. 717)

Printing

233

Scanning

Scanning ..............................................................................................................................................................

235

Preparations for Scanning ................................................................................................................................ 237

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Computer ........................................................................................... 238

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a USB Memory Device ........................................................................... 240

Preparing to Send Scanned Data by E-mail ................................................................................................... 241

Conguring the Basic Settings for Sending E-mail (Send Function Setting Tool) .................................... 242

Using the Downloaded Send Function Setting Tool ......................................................................... 244

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI) ...................................................... 245

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Shared Folder ..................................................................................... 247

Registering a Shared Folder to the Address Book (Send Function Setting Tool) ..................................... 248

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to an FTP Server ........................................................................................ 250

Conguring FTP PASV Mode .................................................................................................................. 251

Scanning (Saving to a Computer) ..................................................................................................................... 252

Scanning (Saving to a USB Memory Device) .................................................................................................... 254

Scanning (Sending by E-mail) ............................................................................................................................ 256

Scanning (Saving to a Shared Folder or FTP Server) ........................................................................................ 259

Scanning from a Computer (Saving to a Computer) ....................................................................................... 262

Starting MF Scan Utility ................................................................................................................................ 265

Scan Settings ..................................................................................................................................................... 266

Canceling Scanning ........................................................................................................................................... 271

Checking the Send and Save Status and Log of Scanned Data ....................................................................... 272

Scanning

234

Scanning

84CU-000

ou can scan documents, photos, and other printed material ("originals") and convert them into data. This converted

data ("scanned data") can be saved as an image or PDF le and sent using the following methods.

Saving to a Computer

Save scanned data to a computer connected to the machine.

ou can congure the scan settings and save scanned data to a computer using the scanner driver and

application installed on the computer.

The following two methods are available.

Scanning from the Machine

Scan using the format and save destination preset with the application.

This method saves scanned data to a computer b

y just operating the machine

and is convenient when scanning multiple originals.

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Computer(P. 238)

Scanning (Saving to a Computer)(P. 252)

Scanning from a Computer

Scan using the format and save destination specied when scanning.

This method lets you see the scanned data immediately on the computer

scr

een so you can check the image quality and make adjustments.

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Computer(P. 238)

Scanning from a Computer (Saving to a Computer)(P. 262)

* In macOS, you can use the AirPrint function, which is standard in the OS, to scan data from a computer

without having to install a scanner driver or application.

Using AirPrint Application to Print and Scan

Data and Send Fax

es(P. 347)

Saving to a USB Memory Device

You can save scanned data to a USB memory device connected to the machine.

This is convenient when using scanned data on a computer without a network

connection or when on the go.

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a USB Memory Device(P. 240)

Scanning (Saving to a USB Memory Device)(P. 254)

Scanning

235

Sending by E-mail

You can send scanned data by e-mail as an attachment.

Just lik

e when sending a regular e-mail, you can add a subject and message and

specify multiple destinations.

Preparing to Send Scanned Data by E-mail(P. 241)

Scanning (Sending by E-mail)(P. 256)

Saving to a Shared Folder or FTP Server

You can save scanned data to a shared folder on a computer or FTP server.

This is convenient for sharing the scanned data of a paper document on a

network.

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Shared Folder(P. 247)

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to an FTP Server(P. 250)

Scanning (Saving to a Shared Folder or FTP Server)(P. 259)

◼ See Also

Sending Scanned Data by Internet Fax (I-Fax)

You can send scanned data using the Internet Fax (I-Fax) system.

Scanned data is sent by e-mail as an attached TIFF le. This lets you send a fax without using a phone line to

lower communication costs. The destination must support I-Fax to use this feature.

Using Internet Fax (I-Fax)(P. 306)

Scanning

236

Preparations for Scanning

84CU-001

ou must set the scanned data save destination and sending method before scanning.

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Computer(P. 238)

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a USB Memory Device(P. 240)

Preparing to Send Scanned Data by E-mail(P. 241)

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Shared Folder(P. 247)

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to an FTP Server(P. 250)

Scanning

237

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Computer

84CU-002

Mak

e the following preparations for each computer to which to save scanned data.

Step 1: Installing the Driver and Application to the Computer(P. 238)

Step 2: Registering the Machine with a Computer(P. 238)

Step 1: Installing the Driver and Application to the Computer

Install the following driver and application on the computer to which to save scanned data. Installing Software and

Drivers to the Computer(P

. 95)

ScanGear MF

This scanner driver is required to save scanned data to a computer.

When scanning with a computer, you can use this driver to adjust the scan settings while checking the

results.

MF Scan Utility

This is the application for scanning.

Use this to easily scan photos and documents from a computer. You can also change the scan settings for

when performing scanning operations with the machine.

Step 2: Registering the Machine with a Computer

For both of the following cases, you must register the machine with the computer used as the save destination.

● Performing scanning oper

ations with the machine

● Setting a computer connected to a network as the save destination

You do not have to register the machine when scanning from a computer or saving scanned data to a USB-connected

computer.

When Using Windows(P. 238)

When Using macOS(P. 239)

◼ When Using Windo

Click [

] (Canon MF Network Scanner Selector) displayed in the Windows

notication ar

ea.

Select the checkbox for this machine, and click [OK].

Scanning

238

◼ When Using macOS

Use MF Scan Utility to r

egister the machine.

From the OS Applications folder, double-click [Canon MF Utilities]

[Canon MF Scan

Utility].

➠ MF Scan Utility starts.

Click [Canon MF Scan Utility] [Network Scanner Settings].

Click [+] at the bottom left.

Add the machine on each tab according to the connection method.

Connecting with Bonjour

On the [Bonjour] tab, select the Bonjour name, and then click [Add].

Connecting with TCP/IP

On the [IP] tab, enter the IP addr

ess of the machine, and then click [Add].

Restart MF Scan Utility.

➠ The added machine is displayed in [Pr

oduct Name:] on the [Canon MF Scan Utility] main dialog box.

Scanning

239

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a USB Memory

vice

84CU-003

This enables saving of scanned data to a USB memory de

vice.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Memory Media Settings](P. 556)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [Store/Access Files Settings] [Memory Media Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Memory Media Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Store to Memory Media] checkbox, and click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Selecting an Operation When a USB Memory Device Is Connected

● Y

ou can congure the settings to display a screen for selecting and immediately executing an operation

(scanning from a USB memory device or Memory Media Print) when a USB memory device is inserted into

the machine.

Settings] [Edit] of [Display Screen When Memory Media is Connected] select the [Display

Scr

een When Memory Media is Connected] checkbox

[OK]

Using the operation panel, congur

e the settings in the [Home] screen from [Menu]

[Function Settings].

[Screen When Mem. Med. Conn](P. 556)

Scanning

240

Preparing to Send Scanned Data by E-mail

84CU-004

Congur

e the settings of the e-mail server to be used to send e-mail. Depending on the settings, use either of the

following methods to congure the settings from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the

settings.

Conguring the Basic Settings for Sending E-mail (Windows)

Congure the basic settings of the e-mail server. You can also register destination e-mail addresses to

Favorites in the Address Book. Use Send Function Setting Tool to congure the settings.

Conguring the Basic Settings for Sending E-mail (Send Function Setting T

ool)(P. 242)

* Favorites is a list of destinations that can be recalled with [

] in the Address Book. Address Book

Function

(P. 155)

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server

In addition to the basic information of the e-mail server, you can also congure POP authentication before

sending and encryption communication settings. Use Remote UI to congure the settings.

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)(P

. 245)

* Register destination e-mail addresses to the Address Book as needed.

Registering Destinations to the

Addr

ess Book (Operation Panel)(P. 157) /

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI)

. 164)

Scanning

241

Conguring the Basic Settings for Sending E-mail (Send

Function Setting T

ool)

84CU-005

om a computer, congure the basic settings of the e-mail server using the Send Function Setting Tool. You can also

* Favorites is a list of destinations that can be recalled with [

] in the Address Book. Address Book

Function

(P. 155)

Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

If the SMTP port number of the e-mail server is other than 25, you must change the port number setting.

Changing

the Port Number(P

. 377)

Required Preparations

● Connect the computer you ar

e using to congure the settings to the machine over a network.

● Prepare the following information and keep it close by.

- IP address of the machine

Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 88)

E-mail address to register as a destination

- Setting information of the e-mail server (SMTP server name, authentication setting, user name and

password to be used for authentication)

* For details about the setting information, contact your provider or network administrator. Depending on

the usage environment, you can also refer to the information set in the computer e-mail software.

From a Web browser on a computer, access the following URL.

http://<IP address of this machine>/sendsupport_login.html

➠ The [Start Settings] scr

een for the Send Function Setting Tool is displayed.

You can also use the downloaded le to start the Send Function Setting Tool.

Using the Downloaded Send

Function Setting T

ool(P. 244)

When the [Start Settings] Screen of Send Function Setting Tool Is Not Displayed

When a message such as [Cannot continue the settings because the function to perform settings for the

device is restricted.] is displayed and the [Start Settings] screen is not displayed, see the following:

Cannot Access Remote UI or Send Function Setting Tool(P. 692)

Click [Start].

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then click [Logon].

Click [Send to E-mail Settings].

➠ The [Send to E-mail Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Scanning

242

If the [Enter Address Book Password] screen appears, enter the PIN, and then click [OK].

For [Registration], select a Favorites number, and enter the name to be displayed in

the Addr

ess Book.

Previously registered Favorites numbers are not displayed.

For [Send Destination Settings], enter the e-mail address to be registered.

For [SMTP Server Settings], congur

e the e-mail server information.

[SMTP Server]

Enter the SMTP server name (the host name or IP addr

ess) to be used for sending e-mail, using single-byte

alphanumeric characters.

Input example: Host name

smtp.example.com

[SMTP Authentication]

When using SMTP authentication, select [Set], and enter the user name and password for authentication

using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

Click [Next] [Register].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Scanning

243

Using the Downloaded Send Function Setting Tool

84CU-006

ou can use the downloaded Send Function Setting Tool to automatically search for and start the conguration of the

machine.

Required Preparations

● Do

wnload the Send Function Setting Tool from the Canon website for your country/region.

https://global.canon/en/support/

● Double-click the downloaded le to extract the data.

In the extracted Send Function Setting Tool folder, open [SendSetting] [english],

and double-click [SendSetting.exe].

➠ A description of the Send Function Setting Tool is displayed.

Click [Next].

If a dialog box to cancel the Windows r

ewall appears, click [Yes].

From [Device List], select the machine, and click [Next].

If the machine is not displayed in [Device List], click [Search Again]. If the machine is still not displayed, click

[Sear

ch by IP Address], enter the IP address of the machine, and then click [OK].

Click [OK].

➠ The [Start Settings] scr

een of the Send Function Setting Tool is displayed.

Scanning

244

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server

(Remote UI)

84CU-007

Use Remote UI fr

om a computer to congure the information of the e-mail server to use for sending scanned data by

e-mail and for sending and receiving scanned data by I-Fax. You can also congure POP authentication before

sending, SMTP authentication, and encryption communication settings.

Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

If the SMTP port number of the e-mail server is other than 25 and/or the POP3 port number is other than 110, you

must change the port number setting.

Changing the Port Number(P. 377)

Required Preparations

● Connect the computer you ar

e using to congure the settings to the machine over a network.

● Prepare the following information and keep it close by.

- IP address of the machine

Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 88)

E-mail address of the machine

- Setting information of the e-mail server (SMTP/POP3 server name, authentication setting, user name and

password to be used for authentication, encrypted communication setting)

* For details about the setting information, contact your provider or network administrator. Depending on

the usage environment, you can also refer to the information set in the computer e-mail software.

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [TX Settings]

[E-Mail/I-Fax Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit E-Mail/I-Fax Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Enter the basic settings of the e-mail server.

[SMTP Server]

Enter the SMTP server name (the host name or IP address) to be used for sending e-mail and I-Fax, using

single-byte alphanumeric characters.

Input example: Host name

smtp.example.com

[E-Mail Address]

Enter the e-mail address of the machine using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

[POP Server]

When receiving I-Faxes or when using POP authentication before sending (POP before SMTP), enter the POP3

server name (the host name or IP address) using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

Input example: Host name

pop.example.com

Scanning

245

[User Name]

Enter the user name used for authenticating the POP3 server using single-b

yte alphanumeric characters.

[Set/Change Password]

To set a password to use when authenticating the POP3 server, select this checkbox, and enter the

password using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

[POP RX]

Select this checkbox to receive I-Faxes.

[POP Interval]

Enter the interval at which to connect automatically to the POP3 server to receive I-Faxes.

To not receive I-Faxes automatically, enter [0]. In this case, I-Faxes must be manually received.

Receiving I-Faxes(P. 309)

Congure the authentication and encryption settings for sending e-mail and I-Fax

according to your usage environment.

When using POP authentication (POP before SMTP) before sending

Select the [Use POP Authentication Befor

e Sending] checkbox.

To use APOP authentication to encrypt password at authentication, also select the [Use APOP Authentication]

checkbox.

When using SMTP authentication

Select the [Use SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)] checkbo

x, and enter the user name to be used for SMTP

authentication using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

To set a password to use for SMTP authentication, select the [Set/Change Password] checkbox, and enter the

password using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

When encrypting communication with the e-mail server

Select the [Use TLS for SMTP TX] and/or [Use TLS for POP] checkbo

xes.

Congure whether to verify a certicate for TLS encryption communication or whether to add a common

name (CN) to the verication items.

Click [OK].

By clicking [Check SMTP Connection] or [Check POP Connection], you can check the connection with the

SMTP or POP3 server using the curr

ent settings.

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Scanning

246

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Shared Folder

84CU-009

● Cr

eate a shared folder as a save location of the scanned data as needed.

Creating a Shared Folder(P. 736)

● Register the shar

ed folder information to the Address Book

computer using either of the following methods. You must register each shared folder that serves as a save

location. You cannot use the operation panel to register this information.

Using the Send Function Setting Tool (Windows)

Registering a Shared Folder to the Address Book (Send Function Setting Tool)(P. 248)

Using Remote UI

ed folder information to Favorites in the Address Book or Coded Dial.

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 164)

* Favorites is a list of destinations that can be r

ecalled with [

] in the Address Book. Address Book

Function

(P. 155)

* Coded Dial is a destination with a three-digit number that can be directly recalled from the Address Book.

Scanning

247

Registering a Shared Folder to the Address Book (Send

Function Setting T

ool)

84CU-00A

Use the Send Function Setting T

ool from a computer to register the shared folder information to Favorites in the

Address Book.

* Favorites is a list of destinations that can be recalled with [

] in the Address Book. Address Book

Function

(P. 155)

Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Required Preparations

● Connect the computer you ar

e using to congure the settings to the machine over a network.

● Prepare the following information and keep it close by.

- IP address of the machine

Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 88)

Name or IP address of the computer with the shared folder

Viewing the System Information of the Computer(P. 739)

Viewing the Network Connection Information of the Computer(P. 741)

Path to the shared folder

- User name and password used for accessing the shared folder (if Restrict Access is set)

From a Web browser on a computer, access the following URL.

http://<IP address of this machine>/sendsupport_login.html

➠ The [Start Settings] screen of the Send Function Setting Tool is displayed.

You can also use the downloaded le to start the Send Function Setting Tool. Using the Downloaded Send

Function Setting T

ool(P. 244)

Click [Start].

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then click [Logon].

Click [Store to Shared Folder Settings].

➠ The [Stor

e to Shared Folder Settings] screen is displayed.

If the [Enter Address Book Password] screen appears, enter the PIN, and then click [OK].

For [Registration], select a Favorites number, and enter the name to be displayed in

the Addr

ess Book.

Previously registered Favorites numbers are not displayed.

Scanning

248

Enter the shared folder information in [Store Destination Settings].

[Computer Name of Store Destination]

Enter the name or IP addr

ess of the computer with the shared folder.

* When using a DNS server, you can enter the host name or FQDN instead of the computer name or IP

address.

[Shared Folder Name on Store Destination Computer]

Enter the path to the shared folder. Use "\" as a separator.

Input example: when the shared folder path is C:\users\public\share

users\public\share

If there is no folder at the entered path, a folder with the entered name is created when scanned data is

saved for the rst time.

* However, if there is no parent folder, or you do not have write permission to the parent folder, a sending

error occurs without a folder being created.

In [Status of Settings for Shared Folder], specify whether to enable Restrict Access for

the shar

ed folder.

If Restrict Access is enabled for the shared folder, select [Set], and enter the user name and password used

for accessing the shar

ed folder using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

Click [Next]

[Register].

Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Scanning

249

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to an FTP Server

84CU-00C

● Congur

e PASV mode as needed.

Congure PASV mode when there is a rewall between the machine and the FTP server that serves as the save

location of the scanned data.

Conguring FTP P

ASV Mode(P. 251)

● Register FTP server information to the Address Book.

a computer to register the information. You must register each FTP server that serves as a save location. You

cannot use the operation panel to register this information.

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 164)

Scanning

250

Conguring FTP P

ASV Mode

84CU-00E

ASV mode is an FTP communication mode. You must congure PASV mode when there is a rewall between the FTP

server and the machine.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.

[Use FTP PASV Mode](P. 484)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Required Preparations

● Check that P

ASV mode has been congured on the FTP server.

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Network Settings]

[FTP PASV Mode Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit FTP P

ASV Mode Settings] screen is displayed.

Select the [Use FTP PASV Mode] checkbox, and click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Scanning

251

Scanning (Saving to a Computer)

84CU-00F

You can scan an original and save the scanned data to a computer connected to the

machine. By just oper

ating the machine, you can save scanned data to a computer.

The original is scanned and the data is saved according to the settings of MF Scan

Utility installed on the computer.

Required Preparations

● Mak

e preparations such as installing the scanner driver (ScanGear MF) and application (MF Scan Utility) to

the computer used as the save location.

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Computer(P. 238)

● If the ScanGear MF scr

een appears on the computer used as the save location, close the screen.

Place the original.

Placing Originals(P. 128)

On the operation panel, press [Scan] in the [Home] screen. [Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The scan type selection scr

een is displayed.

Press [Computer].

➠ The scr

een to select the computer to be used as the save location is displayed.

When you are using the machine only with a USB-connected computer, the scan screen is displayed.

Proceed to step 5.

Select the scan setting, and press [Start].

➠ Scanning of the original starts.

● The scanned data format, save location on the computer, and other settings ar

e set for each scan setting.

The original is scanned according to the selected scan setting.

● To cancel scanning, press [Cancel]

[Yes]. Canceling Scanning(P. 271)

● When scanning is completed, the destination folder is displayed on the scr

een of the selected computer.

Scanning

252

* By default, a subfolder with the scanning date is created in the [Documents] folder (Windows) or the

[Pictur

es] folder (macOS), and the scanned data is saved to that folder.

When [Scan Next] appears

When an original is placed on the platen glass and is scanned, the scr

een for scanning additional originals is

displayed.

To continue scanning originals, place them on the platen glass, and press [Scan Next].

Press [Finish] to save the scanned data.

* If the size of the original is different, part of the image may be missing, or the image may be scanned

smaller.

Checking or Changing Scan Setting or Save Location

● Y

ou can check and change the scan setting selected in step 5 by using the MF Scan Utility on the computer

used as the save location.

Starting MF Scan Utility(P. 265)

Scanning

253

Scanning (Saving to a USB Memory Device)

84CU-00K

You can scan an original and save the scanned data to a USB memory device

connected to the machine.

This is convenient when using scanned data on a computer without a network

connection or when on the go.

Required Preparations

● The settings enable saving of scanned data to a USB memory de

vice.

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to

a USB Memory De

vice(P. 240)

Place the original.

Placing Originals(P. 128)

Insert a USB memory device into the USB port on the machine. Inserting and

Remo

ving a USB Memory Device(P. 177)

If the memory media operation screen appears, press [USB Scan], and proceed to step 5.

On the operation panel, press [Scan] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The scan type selection scr

een is displayed.

Press [USB Memory].

➠ The scan scr

een is displayed.

Congure the scan settings.

Scan Settings(P. 266)

Scanned data is saved with the following le name.

Scanning

254

Default string (Can be changed. Setting File / Division(P. 269) )

Four-digit number

Press [Start B&W] or [Start Color].

➠ Scanning of the original starts.

● T

o scan the original in black and white, press [Start B&W], and to scan in color, press [Start Color].

● To cancel scanning, press [Cancel]

[Yes]. Canceling Scanning(P. 271)

● When scanning is completed, a folder with the name "SCAN_nn

" (where nn is a number) is created on the

USB memory device, and the scanned data is saved to that folder.

When [Scan Next] appears

After the original is placed on the platen glass and is scanned in PDF or TIFF format, the scr

een for scanning

additional originals is displayed.

To continue scanning originals, place on the platen glass, and press [Scan Next].

Press [Finish] to save the scanned data.

* If the size of the original is different, part of the image may be missing, or the image may be scanned

smaller.

When scanning is completed, remove the USB memory device.

Removing the USB

Memory Device(P. 178)

Scanning

255

Scanning (Sending by E-mail)

84CU-00L

You can scan an original and send the scanned data by e-mail as an attachment.

Just lik

e when sending a regular e-mail, you can add a subject and message and

specify multiple destinations.

Required Preparations

● On the machine, congur

e the settings of the e-mail server to be used to send e-mail.

Preparing to Send

Scanned Data b

y E-mail(P. 241)

Place the original.

Placing Originals(P. 128)

On the operation panel, press [Scan] in the [Home] screen. [Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The scan type selection scr

een is displayed.

Press [E-Mail].

➠ The scan scr

een is displayed.

On the [Specify Destination] tab, specify the destination. Specifying

Destinations

(P. 170)

Use [Address Book] or [Coded Dial] to specify the Cc and Bcc destinations.

If you can only specify [Specify Myself as Destination]

If the destination when sending is r

estricted due to the Authentication Settings for Send Function, you cannot

specify another destination. For details, contact the administrator.

Congure the scan settings on the [Send Settings] tab.

Scan Settings(P. 266)

Scanning

256

● Y

ou can also set the subject and main body of the e-mail on the [Send Settings] tab.

E-mail and I-Fax

Settings(P

. 269)

● Scanned data is sent with the following le name. You can also use the [Send Settings] tab to specify a

custom string and add it to the start.

Setting File / Division(P. 269)

Communications management number

Date sent (in this example, "April 5, 2023, 9:12:34 AM")

File sequence number (if one le, then "001")

Press [Start B&W] or [Start Color].

➠ Scanning of the original starts.

● T

o scan the original in black and white, press [Start B&W], and to scan in color, press [Start Color].

● To cancel scanning, press [Cancel]

[Yes]. Canceling Scanning(P. 271)

● When scanning is completed, the scanned data is sent. Pr

ess [Status Monitor] to view the sending status and

log.

When [Conrm Destination] appears

Check that the destination is corr

ect, and then press [Start Scanning].

When [Scan Next Original] appears

After the original is placed on the platen glass and is scanned in PDF or TIFF format, the scr

een for scanning

additional originals is displayed.

To continue scanning originals, place on the platen glass, and press [Scan Next Original].

When scanning of all documents is completed, press [Start Sending] or [Preview & Send].

* If the size of the original is different, part of the image may be missing, or the image may be scanned

smaller.

When the preview screen appears

ess [Start Sending] after previewing the scanned data.

Scanning

257

If there are pages you do not want to send, open the page and press [Delete Page].

When [SMTP Authentication] appears

Enter the user name and passwor

d to be used for SMTP authentication, and then press [Apply].

When a Sending Error Occurs

● Depending on the e-mail server settings, a notication e-mail may be sent to the e-mail addr

ess set on the

machine when a sending error occurs. If notication e-mails are left in the server, the mailbox may become

full, so it is recommended to periodically empty the mailbox.

Clearing the Mail Box(P. 451)

Scanning

258

Scanning (Saving to a Shared Folder or FTP Server)

84CU-00S

You can scan an original and save the scanned data to a shared folder on a computer

or FTP server.

This is convenient for sharing the scanned data of a paper document on a network.

Required Preparations

● Register the information for accessing the shar

ed folder and/or FTP server to the Address Book of the

machine.

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Shared Folder(P. 247)

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to an FTP Server(P. 250)

Place the original.

Placing Originals(P. 128)

On the operation panel, press [Scan] in the [Home] screen. [Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The scan type selection scr

een is displayed.

Press [File].

➠ The scan scr

een is displayed.

On the [Specify Destination] tab, specify the destination. Specifying

Destinations

(P. 170)

If you can only specify [Specify Myself as Destination]

If the destination when sending is r

estricted due to the Authentication Settings for Send Function, you cannot

specify another destination. For details, contact the administrator.

Congure the scan settings on the [Send Settings] tab.

Scan Settings(P. 266)

Scanning

259

Scanned data is saved with the following le name. Y

ou can also use the [Send Settings] tab to add a

specied custom string to the start.

Setting File / Division(P. 269)

Communications management number

Date saved (in this example, "April 5, 2023, 9:12:34 AM")

File sequence number (if one le, then "001")

Press [Start B&W] or [Start Color].

➠ Scanning of the original starts.

● T

o scan the original in black and white, press [Start B&W], and to scan in color, press [Start Color].

● To cancel scanning, press [Cancel]

[Yes]. Canceling Scanning(P. 271)

● When scanning is completed, the scanned data is saved. Use [Status Monitor] to vie

w the save status and log.

Checking the Send and Save Status and Log of Scanned Data(P. 272)

When [Conrm Destination] appears

Check that the destination is corr

ect, and then press [Start Scanning].

When [Scan Next Original] appears

After the original is placed on the platen glass and is scanned in PDF or TIFF format, the scr

een for scanning

additional originals is displayed.

To continue scanning originals, place on the platen glass, and press [Scan Next Original].

When scanning of all documents is completed, press [Start Sending] or [Preview & Send].

* If the original has different size pages, part of the image may be missing, or the image may be scanned

smaller.

When the preview screen appears

eview the scanned data before press [Start Sending].

If there are pages you do not want to send, open the page and press [Delete Page].

Scanning

260

When [Status Monitor] appears

o view the save status and log, press [Status Monitor].

Checking the Send and Save Status and Log of

Scanned Data

(P. 272)

Pressing [Close] displays the scan screen.

When [File Authentication] appears

Enter the user name and passwor

d to be used to access the shared folder or FTP server, and then press

[Apply].

Scanning

261

Scanning from a Computer (Saving to a Computer)

84CU-00H

You can scan an original and save the scanned data to a computer connected to the

machine. Y

ou can set the format and save location when scanning from a computer.

This method lets you see the scanned data immediately on the computer screen so

you can check the image quality and make adjustments.

Use either of the following applications to perform scanning.

Dedicated application (MF Scan Utility)

Scan easily using the setting to suit your purpose. Send scanned data to a specied application to display it

and send it b

y e-mail. You can also use the ScanGear MF screen to congure advanced settings.

Using a Dedicated Application to Perform Scanning - MF Scan Utility(P. 262)

Other TW

AIN- and WIA-supported Applications

You can also use image processing software, document software, and other applications that support

TWAIN

or WIA

. Scanned data is imported directly to the application for immediate editing and processing.

Check the manual of the application you are using to see if it supports TWAIN or WIA.

Scanning Using Other TWAIN- and WIA-supported Applications(P. 263)

AIN is a standard for connecting a scanner or other image input device to a computer.

WIA is a function that comes standard in Windows.

Using a Dedicated Application to Perform Scanning - MF Scan Utility

After placing an original on the machine, scan using MF Scan Utility on a computer.

Required Preparations

● Install the scanner driver (ScanGear MF) and application (MF Scan Utility) on the computer.

Installing

Softwar

e and Drivers to the Computer(P. 95)

Place the original on the machine. Placing Originals(P. 128)

Start MF Scan Utility on a computer. Starting MF Scan Utility(P. 265)

For [Product Name], select the machine.

Click the button corresponding to the original type and purpose to start scanning.

Scanning

262

Click [ScanGear] to display ScanGear MF and congur

e the advanced scan settings. For more information,

click [

] on ScanGear MF to display help.

When Scanning Cannot Be Performed

● The machine may not be online (scan standb

y mode). On the operation panel, select [Scan] in the [Home]

screen, and press [Remote Scanner] to turn the machine online, and then repeat the operation.

Scanning Using Other TWAIN- and WIA-supported Applications

After placing an original on the machine, scan using other TW

AIN- and WIA-supported application on your computer.

This section describes the general procedure for this operation. Check the manual of the application you are using for

detailed operations on how to use it.

Required Preparations

● Install the scanner driver (ScanGear MF) on the computer.

Installing Software and Drivers to the

Computer(P

. 95)

Place the original on the machine. Placing Originals(P. 128)

On the computer, start the application used to import the scanned data.

In the application, select the command to start the scanning operation.

Select the scanner driver (ScanGear MF or WIA) of the machine, and congur

e the

scan settings.

For more advanced scan settings, select ScanGear MF. For more information, click [

] on ScanGear MF to

display help.

Start scanning.

➠ When scanning is completed, the scanned data is imported to the application.

If the ne

xt pages of the original are not scanned or an error message appears after scanning is completed,

place the originals on the machine one at a time and perform scanning.

Scanning

263

When Scanning Cannot Be Performed

● The machine may not be online (scan standb

y mode). On the operation panel, select [Scan] in the [Home]

screen, and press [Remote Scanner] to turn the machine online, and then repeat the operation.

Scanning

264

Starting MF Scan Utility

84CU-00J

Start MF Scan Utility installed on the computer.

◼ When Using Windo

Click [

] (Start) [Canon] [MF Scan Utility].

◼ When Using macOS

om the OS Applications folder, double-click [Canon MF Utilities]

[Canon MF Scan Utility].

● For mor

e information on the operations and settings of MF Scan Utility, click [Instructions] on the MF Scan

Utility screen to display help.

Scanning

265

Scan Settings

84CU-00U

When scanning with the machine, you can use the [Send Settings] tab on the scanning scr

een to set the original size

and adjust the image quality.

If the scanned data does not appear as expected, you can change the settings and scan again.

* T

o start scanning, select the scanning color (black and white or color) by pressing [Start B&W] or [Start Color].

* To save scanned data to a computer, congure the settings with MF Scan Utility or ScanGear MF installed on the

computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the settings.

Setting the Original Size and Orientation(P. 266)

Adjusting Image Quality(P. 267)

2-Sided Scan Settings(P. 268)

Setting Preview(P. 268)

Skipping Blank Pages(P. 268)

Setting File / Division(P. 269)

E-mail and I-Fax Settings(P. 269)

Registering Favorite Settings

● Y

ou can register frequently used scan settings as Favorite Settings to easily call up these settings as needed

when scanning.

Registering and Calling Up Favorite Settings(P. 180)

● Y

ou can also change the default scan settings.

Changing the Default Settings(P. 183)

Recalling Past Settings - TX Job Log

● Y

ou can use the TX Job Log to recall the scan settings used to send or save scanned data in the past.

Specifying Destinations (TX Job Log)(P. 176)

* TX Job Log is not available when saving scanned data to a USB memory de

vice.

Setting the Original Size and Orientation

Set the size and orientation accor

ding to the original to be scanned.

[Scan Size]

Select the size of the placed original.

Conguring Custom Sizes

Select [Specify Custom Size], enter the dimensions in [X] and [Y], and press [Apply].

When frequently used non-standard sizes are registered, you can call these up by pressing [S1] to [S3].

Registering a Non-standard Size

Scanning

266

Use the following procedure to register sizes when frequently using specic non-standar

d size originals. You

can call up the size on the size input screen, saving you the trouble of entering the size each time.

You can register up to three non-standard sizes.

[Specify Custom Size] [Register Size] select [S1] to [S3] enter the dimensions in [X] and [Y] [Apply]

On the size input screen, press [Name] to change the display name of [S1] to [S3].

Automatically Detecting the Size of the Original

When you select [Auto (L

TR/LGL)], LTR, LGL, and STMT size paper is detected automatically.

When you place the original on the platen glass and press [Start B&W] or [Start Color], the [Scan Size] screen

is displayed. Select the size of the original.

[Orig. Orientation]

Select [Portrait] or [Landscape] to suit the placed original.

[Portrait]

[Landscape]

Adjusting Image Quality

You can adjust the image quality such as when the scanned data image is not clear or the text is dicult to read.

[Density]

Adjust the density to suit the original.

Press [+] to increase the density and [-] to lower it.

[Original Type]

Select the original type.

Scanning is performed using the image quality to suit the content of the original.

[Sharpness]

Adjust the sharpness.

Emphasize the contours and lines to mak

e them clearer, or weaken them to make them softer.

Adjustment example:

● To make blurry text or shapes clearer

Press [+].

● T

o reduce moiré (vertical pattern noise) in pictures

Press [-].

Scanning

267

When the File Format of the Scanned Data Is JPEG

● The image quality varies depending on the compr

ession ratio selected in [Data Size].

Setting File /

Division

(P. 269)

2-Sided Scan Settings

When scanning a 2-sided original, place the original on the feeder, and set [2-Sided Original].

[2-Sided Original]

When scanning a 2-sided original, select [Book T

ype] or [Calendar Type]. Select this according to the top and bottom

orientation of the front and back sides of the placed original.

[Book Type]

[Calendar Type]

Top and bottom have same orientation

Top and bottom have opposite orientation

To cancel scanning of a 2-sided original, select [Off].

Setting Preview

o preview the scanned data before sending or saving it, enable [Preview].

* This setting is not available when saving the scanned data to a USB memory device.

[Preview]

To preview the scanned data before sending or saving it, select [On].

You can preview the scanned data on the operation panel after scanning is completed. You can delete pages you do

not want to send or save.

Skipping Blank Pages

Enable [Skip Blank Orig.] to skip blank pages of an original automatically

* This setting is not available when sending scanned data by I-Fax.

[Skip Blank Orig.]

To automatically delete pages that have been determined to be blank when scanning, select [On].

When both [On (Preview)] and [On (No Preview)] are displayed, select whether to check the preview image of the

scanned data before sending or saving the data.

* When [Skip Blank Orig.] is set to [On], scanning is canceled when all pages of the scanned original are determined to

be blank.

[Adjust Recog Level]

Scanning

268

Adjust the accuracy for detecting blank pages.

Selecting [+] incr

eases the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages.

Setting File / Division

Set the scanned data format and le name.

You can compress data and enable recognition of text in an original. You can also combine multiple originals into one

le or create separate les for each original.

* The scanned data format setting is not available when sending scanned data by I-Fax. The scanned data is sent in

TIFF format.

[File Format]

Select the scanned data format from PDF, JPEG, or TIFF according to your purpose and environment.

Reducing the Data Size

● When using PDF format

Select [PDF (Compact)] or [PDF (Compact/OCR)].

The data size is reduced, but the image quality and the number of sheets that can be scanned at a time

may also be reduced depending on the original type.

● When using JPEG format

Select [JPEG], and set [Data Size] to [Small: Memory Priority].

Enabling Recognition of Text in an Original

Select [PDF (OCR)] or [PDF (Compact/OCR)].

By default, [Orig. Orientation] is detected automatically according to the orientation of text detected when

the PDF is created. [OCR (Text Searchable) Settings](P. 510)

Combining Multiple Originals into One File

Select PDF or TIFF format.

Dividing the Original into Separ

ate Files

● When using PDF format

Select [Set PDF Details]

select PDF format press [Divide into Pages] [On].

● When using TIFF format

ess [Set TIFF Details]

[Divide into Pages] [On].

● When using JPEG format

Select [

JPEG].

[Data Size]

Select the data size when using JPEG format for the scanned data. The compression ratio varies according to the

selected data size.

[Small: Memory Priority]

Increases the compression ratio but lowers the image quality.

[Large: Image Quality Priority]

Lowers the compression ratio but increases the data size.

[File Name]

Specify a string to add to the start of the le name of the scanned data.

E-mail and I-Fax Settings

ou can congure the e-mail settings when sending scanned data by e-mail or I-Fax.

[Subject/Message]

Set the subject and main body of the e-mail.

Scanning

269

[Reply To]

Select an e-mail addr

ess (Reply-To) from the Address Book to be used for e-mail recipients to reply to.

If no e-mail address is selected here, the e-mail address of the machine is used as the Reply-To e-mail address.

* If the e-mail address you want to use is not registered in the Address Book, register it, and then select it.

Address

Book Function

(P. 155)

[Priority]

Select the priority level.

E-mail Sender

● The e-mail addr

ess of the machine becomes the sender e-mail address (From) regardless of the [Reply To]

setting.

● To send the sender's name along with the e-mail address of the machine, use the following procedure to set

the unit name.

under [Unit Name Settings] enter the unit name [OK].

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur

the settings.

[Register Unit Name](P. 537)

● The e-mail sender is the setting shar

ed with the machine.

Scanning

270

Canceling Scanning

84CU-00W

Follo

w the instructions on screen to cancel a scanning operation.

Press [Cancel]

[Yes].

If the above screen is not displayed, press on the operation panel, and then press [Yes].

If the job list screen is displayed, select the job to cancel, and press [Cancel] [Yes].

Scanning

271

Checking the Send and Save Status and Log of Scanned

Data

84CU-00X

ou can check the send or save status and log of data scanned with the machine.

Processes handled by the machine, including sending and saving scanned data, are managed as jobs. By checking the

status and log of jobs, you can determine whether a scan job was performed correctly and the cause of errors that

occur.

* If the log is hidden, you can only check the send and save status.

[Display Job Log](P. 568)

This section describes ho

w to check the status and log using the operation panel.

You can also use Remote UI from a computer to check the status and log.

Checking Usage and Logs with Remote

UI(P

. 443)

On the operation panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen.

[Home]

Scr

een(P. 111)

➠ The [Status Monitor] screen is displayed.

Press [TX Job].

Check the status and log on the [TX Job Status] or [TX Job Log] tab.

Checking the Send and Save Status

On the [TX Job Status] tab, check the job being processed or waiting to be processed.

Select a job to view its details.

➠ The job details ar

e displayed.

Check the number of pages and the destination.

For jobs with multiple destinations, pr

ess [Destination] to display the list of destinations.

Checking the Send and Save Log

On the [TX Job Log] tab, check the completed send and save jobs.

Select a job to view its details.

➠ The job details ar

e displayed.

Check the number of pages and the destination.

For jobs with multiple destinations, pr

ess [Destination] to display the list of destinations.

If Send or Save Log Displays [Error]

Sending or saving was canceled, or an error occurred.

If a three-digit number starting with "#" (error code) is displayed, you can check the cause and solution

using the error code.

An Error Code Is Displayed(P. 717)

Scanning

272

Registering Destinations to the Address Book

● On the scr

een displaying the job details, press [Regst to Add Book] to register the destination to the Address

Book.

* This operation is not available when there are multiple destinations.

Scanning

273

Faxing

Faxing ...................................................................................................................................................................

275

Preparing to Send and Receive Faxes .............................................................................................................. 277

Preparing to Send Faxes from a Computer ................................................................................................... 278

Changing Fax RX Mode and Setting the Action when Receiving a Fax .......................................................... 280

Changing the Fax Number and Unit Name ................................................................................................... 282

Forwarding Faxes and Conguring the Backup Settings ................................................................................ 283

Backing Up Sent Faxes ................................................................................................................................. 284

Auto Forwarding and Backing Up Received Faxes ........................................................................................ 286

Sending Faxes .................................................................................................................................................... 288

Sending a Fax after a Phone Conversation (Manual Sending) ....................................................................... 291

Sending Faxes from a Computer (PC Faxing) ................................................................................................... 293

Securely Sending PC Faxes ........................................................................................................................... 296

Fax Original Scan Settings ................................................................................................................................ 297

Receiving Faxes ................................................................................................................................................. 299

Receiving Faxes via Telephone (Remote RX) ................................................................................................. 300

Changing the Print Settings for Received Faxes ............................................................................................ 301

Canceling Fax Sending ...................................................................................................................................... 303

Checking the Status and Log for Sent and Received Faxes ............................................................................ 304

Using Internet Fax (I-Fax) ................................................................................................................................. 306

Changing the Print Settings of the Received I-Fax ........................................................................................ 310

Faxing

274

Faxing

84CU-032

Faxing is the sending and r

eceiving of documents and photos as black and white images over a telephone line. You

can also send and receive faxes via the Internet without using a phone line.

Sending Faxes

The following two methods are available:

Sending a Fax fr

om the Machine

You can scan a document, photo, or other printed materials (originals) with the

machine, converting it to a black and white image, and then send it.

Sending Faxes(P. 288)

Sent fax

es can also be forwarded or saved automatically to a specic

destination.

Backing Up Sent Faxes(P. 284)

Sending a Fax from a Computer

You can convert a document or photo to a black and white image and send it

via a fax driver installed on a computer connected to the machine.

ou can send a fax in the same way as printing a document or photo from a

computer. To send a fax, you do not need to prepare printed materials.

Preparing to Send Faxes from a Computer(P. 278)

Sending Faxes from a Computer (PC Faxing)(P. 293)

* In macOS, you can use the AirPrint function that is standard in the OS to send data from a computer

without having to install a fax driver.

Using AirPrint Application to Print and Scan Data and Send

Fax

es(P. 347)

Receiving Faxes

When the machine is set to receive faxes automatically, faxes are received without the incoming ringing. If the

machine rings, you can pick up the handset to determine whether it is a call or a fax. If it is a fax, you can

eceive it.

Receiving Faxes(P. 299)

Received fax

es can also be forwarded or saved automatically to a specic destination.

Auto Forwarding and Backing Up Received Faxes(P. 286)

Sending and Receiving Fax

es by Internet Fax

Internet Fax (I-Fax) is a function for sending and receiving faxes via the Internet.

This lets you send a fax without using a phone line to lo

wer communication

costs. When you receive an I-Fax, the received data is printed automatically.

The machines for sending and receiving I-Faxes must support I-Fax technology.

Using Internet Fax (I-Fax)(P. 306)

◼ See Also

Restricting Printing of Received Fax

Faxing

275

You can temporarily save received faxes in the memory of the machine without printing them.

Saving Received Documents in the Machine (Memory Lock)(P. 416)

Faxing

276

Preparing to Send and Receive Faxes

84CU-033

o send and receive faxes with the machine, you must use the operation panel (Fax Setup Guide) to congure the

initial settings. You cannot congure the initial settings using Remote UI from a computer.

Conguring the Fax

Settings (Fax Setup Guide)

(P. 91)

When Sending Faxes from a Computer

You must make the necessary preparations on each computer used to send faxes.

Preparing to Send Faxes from a Computer(P. 278)

o Change the Initial Settings

You can change the settings congured with Fax Setup Guide individually.

Changing Fax RX Mode and Setting the Action when Receiving a Fax(P. 280)

Changing the Fax Number and Unit Name(P. 282)

● The sender

's information, including the sent date and time and fax number of the machine, is printed

together with the fax data at the destination. You can change the print position and the mark added to the

fax number or choose to not print this.

[TX Terminal ID](P. 540)

● T

o automatically forward or save sent and received faxes, you must congure separate settings.

Forwarding Faxes and Conguring the Backup Settings(P

. 283)

Faxing

277

Preparing to Send Faxes from a Computer

84CU-034

Mak

e the following preparations for each computer used to send faxes.

Step 1: Installing the Driver to the Computer(P. 278)

Step 2: Using a Driver to Set the Department ID and PIN(P. 278)

Step 3: Conguring the Settings for Secur

e Sending(P. 278)

Step 4: Test Fax Sending(P. 279)

Step 1: Installing the Driver to the Computer

Install the fax driver to the computer that will be used to send faxes. Installing Software and Drivers to the

Computer(P

. 95)

Step 2: Using a Driver to Set the Department ID and PIN

When Department ID Management is enabled on the machine, set the Department ID and PIN by specifying the

fax driver. Setting the Department ID and PIN on a Computer(P. 366)

* Y

ou can skip this step when not using Department ID Management. Proceed to Step 3.

Step 3: Conguring the Settings for Secure Sending

While sending faxes from a computer can be convenient, there is a risk of sending them to incorrect numbers. To

reduce this risk, it is recommended that you congure the following settings using the fax driver.

When Using Windows(P. 278)

When Using macOS(P. 279)

◼ When Using Windo

Click [

] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].

➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Click the fax driver of the machine

[Manage] [Printing preferences].

➠ The [Printing pr

eferences] screen of the fax driver is displayed.

Congure the settings for secur

e sending.

● Enable conrmation of fax number.

● Set an e

xternal connecting number.

● Keep a TX Job Log.

For more information, click [Help] on the [Printing preferences] screen to display help.

Faxing

278

◼ When Using macOS

Congure the settings to safely send fax

es using the print dialog box (fax driver setting screen).

● Enable conrmation of fax number.

● Set an external connecting number.

For more information, click [

] in the print dialog box to display help.

Step 4: Test Fax Sending

When installation and setup are complete, you can test to see if you can send faxes correctly. Sending Faxes from a

Computer (PC Faxing)(P

. 293)

Faxing

279

Changing Fax RX Mode and Setting the Action when

Receiving a Fax

84CU-035

ou can change the RX mode from the default setting.

When [Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)] is enabled to determine whether the incoming call is a fax, you can also congure

settings such as the ring time.

Use the operation panel to congure the settings. You cannot congure the settings using Remote UI from a

computer.

On the operation panel, press [Fax] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

On the [TX/RX Settings] tab, press [RX Mode].

➠ The [RX Mode] scr

een is displayed.

Select the RX mode.

When Using a Telephone Without Connecting to the Machine

Select [Auto]. Used for fax only

● Faxes are automatically received.

● Incoming telephone calls cannot be answered.

When Connecting a Regular Telephone

When Automatically Receiving Fax

Select [Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)]. Enables use of both fax and phone.

● Faxes are automatically received.

● When a telephone call is received, the machine rings. Pick up the handset to answer the call.

When Manually Receiving Faxes

Select [Manual]. Enables use of both fax and phone.

● The machine rings when receiving both fax and phone calls.

● If you hear a fax tone when picking up the handset, receive the fax manually.

Receiving Faxes(P. 299)

● Y

ou can also congure the setting to receive faxes automatically after the machine rings for a certain

period of time.

[Switch to Auto RX](P. 553)

When Connecting an Answering Machine

Select [Answering Machine]. Enables use of both fax and phone.

● Fax

es are automatically received.

● When a telephone call is received, the answering machine function can be used to record messages. You

can answer the call by picking up the handset before recording starts.

* Set the answering machine so that the recording function activates after the machine rings one or two

times.

* When recording your message, it is recommended that you keep about four seconds of silence, or keep

the entire message within 20 seconds.

Set the ring time and action when receiving a fax, and press [Apply].

Faxing

280

Set this when [Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)] is selected for RX mode. If you selected another RX mode, this step is not

equired.

[Ring Start Time]

Specify the time to determine whether an incoming call is a fax or a phone call. The machine does not ring at

this time.

Reception starts when the machine determines that the call is a fax.

[Incoming Ring Time]

Specify the ring time for incoming calls when it is determined that the call is not a fax.

[Action After Ring]

Select the action to tak

e when the handset is not picked up while ringing.

Select [End] to disconnect the call, or select [Receive] to receive the fax.

Connecting a Telephone

● For details about connecting a telephone, use the pr

ocedure to connect to the telephone line.

Step 4:

Connecting to T

elephone Line(P. 93)

[DRPD: Select Fax]

● If you subscribe to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service provided by your telephone company,

DRPD is also available for the RX mode. This service assigns two or more telephone numbers with distinctive

ring patterns to a single telephone line. You can use one of these numbers for faxes and one for telephone

calls. Select [DRPD: Select Fax], and then select the ring pattern assigned by the telephone company to your

fax number.

● For more information about this service, contact your telephone company.

● You must connect the machine to an external telephone in advance.

Faxing

281

Changing the Fax Number and Unit Name

84CU-036

ou can change the information registered to the machine such as when the fax number changes after a move or you

want to change the name notied to the destination.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Set Line](P. 545)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [TX Settings]

[Fax TX Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Fax TX Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Change the fax number and unit name.

● Enter the fax number in [Unit T

elephone Number] in [Set Line].

● Enter the unit name in [Unit Name] in [Basic Settings].

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Faxing

282

Forwarding Faxes and Conguring the Backup Settings

84CU-037

Fax

es can be forwarded and saved automatically to a specic destination when they are sent and received.

This is convenient when you want to check received faxes from a remote location or you want to back up faxes you

sent or received.

Backing Up Sent Faxes(P. 284)

Auto Forwarding and Backing Up Received Faxes(P. 286)

Forwarding Essential Faxes Only

● Y

ou can also select a specic fax from the RX Job Log and send it to a specic destination.

Checking the

Status and Log for Sent and Received Fax

es(P. 304)

Faxing

283

Backing Up Sent Faxes

84CU-038

You can congur

e the settings to automatically forward and save a sent fax to a destination specied in advance.

The following can be specied as forwarding and save destinations:

● Fax number

● E-mail address (e-mail/I-Fax)

● Shared folder on a computer

● FTP server

For destinations other than a fax number, the fax is forwarded or saved as a black and white PDF le.

* When specifying an I-Fax destination, the destination device must be able to view PDF les.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Archive TX Document](P. 546)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Required Preparations

● When specifying a backup destination other than a fax number, pr

epare the fax to be sent or saved to that

destination.

- The required preparations are the same as when sending and saving scanned data.

Preparing to Send Scanned Data by E-mail(P. 241)

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Shared Folder(P. 247)

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to an FTP Server(P. 250)

When specifying an I-Fax e-mail address as the destination, congure the information of the e-mail server.

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)

(P. 245)

● Register the destination to be specied to the Address Book of the machine.

Registering Destinations

(Addr

ess Book)(P. 154)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [TX Settings]

[Fax TX Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Fax TX Settings] scr

een is displayed.

In [Communication Management Settings], select the [Archive TX Document]

checkbo

x, and click [Select from Address Book].

➠ The [Select fr

om Address Book] screen is displayed.

Select the destination, and click [OK].

➠ The [Edit Fax TX Settings] scr

een reappears.

Faxing

284

Enter any string in [File Name], as needed.

● If you selected a fax number as the destination, this step is not r

equired. Proceed to Step 7.

● If you selected a destination other than a fax number, a PDF le is forwarded or saved with the following le

name.

Communications management number

Date sent (in this example, "April 5, 2023, 9:12:34 AM")

File sequence number (if one le, then "001")

When you enter a string in [File Name], the specied string is appended to the start of the abo

ve le name.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Backing Up Received Faxes

● The abo

ve section describes the settings for forwarding and saving sent faxes. To back up received faxes,

separate settings are required.

Auto Forwarding and Backing Up Received Faxes(P. 286)

Faxing

285

Auto Forwarding and Backing Up Received Faxes

84CU-039

You can congur

e the settings to automatically forward and save a received fax to a destination specied in

advance. You can also specify whether to print the received fax on the machine.

The following can be specied as forwarding and save destinations:

● Fax number

● E-mail address (e-mail/I-Fax)

● Shared folder on a computer

● FTP server

For destinations other than a fax number, the fax is forwarded or saved as a black and white PDF le.

* When specifying an I-Fax destination, the destination device must be able to view PDF les.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Forwarding Settings](P. 554)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Required Preparations

● When specifying a forwar

ding or backup destination other than a fax number, prepare the fax to be sent or

saved to that destination.

- The required preparations are the same as when sending and saving scanned data.

Preparing to Send Scanned Data by E-mail(P. 241)

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Shared Folder(P. 247)

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to an FTP Server(P. 250)

When specifying an I-Fax e-mail address as the destination, congure the information of the e-mail server.

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)

(P. 245)

● Register the destination to be specied to the Address Book of the machine.

Registering Destinations

(Addr

ess Book)(P. 154)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [RX/Forwarding Settings]

[Fax RX Settings] [Edit] in [Forwarding Settings].

➠ The [Edit Forwar

ding Settings] screen is displayed.

Select the [Use Forwarding Function] checkbox, and click [Select from Address Book].

➠ The [Select fr

om Address Book] screen is displayed.

Select the destination, and click [OK].

➠ The [Edit Forwar

ding Settings] screen reappears.

Faxing

286

Set whether to print faxes or save them in memory.

When Printing Faxes on the Machine

In [Print Images], select [On]. T

o print only when forwarding fails, select [Print Only When Error Occurs].

When Saving Faxes that Cannot Be Forwarded to the Memory of the Machine

In [Stor

e Images in Memory], select [Store Only When Error Occurs].

Faxes saved to the memory can be viewed in [Status Monitor].

Checking Faxes that Failed to Be

Forwar

ded(P. 305)

Enter any string in [File Name], as needed.

● If you selected a fax number as the destination, this step is not r

equired. Proceed to Step 8.

● If you selected a destination other than a fax number, a PDF le is forwarded or saved with the following le

name.

Communications management number

Date sent (in this example, "April 5, 2023, 9:12:34 AM")

File sequence number (if one le, then "001")

When you enter a string in [File Name], the specied string is appended to the start of the abo

ve le name.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Backing Up Sent Faxes

● The abo

ve section describes the settings for forwarding and saving received faxes. To back up sent faxes,

separate settings are required.

Backing Up Sent Faxes(P. 284)

Faxing

287

Sending Faxes

84CU-03A

You can scan a document, photo, or other printed materials (originals) with the

machine, converting it to a black and white image, and then send it.

ou can also send a fax after a phone conversation.

Sending a Fax after a Phone

Conversation (Manual Sending)

(P. 291)

Place the original.

Placing Originals(P. 128)

On the operation panel, press [Fax] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The Fax scr

een appears.

Press [Reset].

If the destination setting for the previously sent fax remains, a fax may be sent to an incorrect destination.

Reset the setting befor

e operating.

Specify the destination on the [Enter Dest.] tab, [Specify Destination] tab, or [Address

Book].

Specifying Destinations(P. 170)

Enter the fax number with the numeric keys, or select a registered destination.

On the [TX/RX Settings] tab, congur

e the original scan settings.

Fax Original Scan

Settings(P

. 297)

Faxing

288

Press [Start].

➠ Scanning of the original starts.

● T

o cancel sending of a fax, press [Cancel]

[Yes]. Canceling Fax Sending(P. 303)

● When scanning of the original is completed, the fax is sent. Use [Status Monitor] to vie

w the sending status

and log.

Checking the Status and Log for Sent and Received Faxes(P. 304)

When [Conrm] appears

Enter the fax number again, and pr

ess [Apply].

When [Conrm Destination] appears

Check that the destination is corr

ect, and then press [Start Scanning].

When [Scan Size] appears

Select the size of the placed original.

When [Scan Next] appears

When an original is placed on the platen glass and scanned, the scr

een for scanning additional originals is

displayed.

To scan additional originals, place them on the platen glass, and press [Scan Next].

When scanning of all documents is completed, press [Start Sending] or [Preview & Send].

* If the size of the original is different, part of the image may be missing, or the image may be scanned

smaller.

When the preview screen appears

ess [Start Sending] after previewing the scanned data.

If there are pages you do not want to send, open the page and press [Delete Page].

When [Status Monitor] appears

o view the sending status and log, press [Status Monitor].

Checking the Status and Log for Sent and

Received Fax

es(P. 304)

Pressing [Close] displays the fax screen.

Faxing

289

Select the size of the placed original.

Faxing

290

Sending a Fax after a Phone Conversation (Manual

Sending)

84CU-03C

ou can send a fax after a phone conversation. To make a phone call, an external telephone is required. This section

describes how to send a fax after a phone conversation.

When sending a fax during an incoming call, rst pick up the handset to answer the call, and then perform the steps

below. You do not need to perform Steps 4 and 5 to make a phone call.

● The pages that can be scanned and sent for manual sending ar

e restricted as follows:

- When an original is placed on the feeder, only one side is scanned.

- When an original is placed on the platen glass, only one page of the placed original can be sent.

Place the original.

Placing Originals(P. 128)

On the operation panel, press [Fax] in the [Home] screen. [Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The fax scr

een appears.

On the [TX/RX Settings] tab, congur

e the original scan settings.

Fax Original Scan

Settings(P

. 297)

Pick up the handset.

Specify the destination on the [Enter Dest.] tab, [Specify Destination] tab, or [Address

Book].

Specifying Destinations(P. 170)

Faxing

291

Enter the fax number with the numeric keys or select a registered destination to make a phone call.

After the phone conversation, ask the recipient to set their fax machine to receive

your fax.

When you hear a beep, press [Start], and hang up the handset.

➠ Scanning of the original starts.

● T

o cancel sending of a fax, press [Cancel]

[Yes]. Canceling Fax Sending(P. 303)

● When scanning of the original is completed, the fax is sent. Use [Status Monitor] to vie

w the sending status

and log.

Checking the Status and Log for Sent and Received Faxes(P. 304)

When [Scan Size] appears

Select the size of the placed original.

● The destinations and the settings in Manual Sending ar

e not left in the TX Job Log.

Faxing

292

Sending Faxes from a Computer (PC Faxing)

84CU-03E

You can send a document as a fax from a computer using a fax driver.

As it is easy to send a document, be sur

e to thoroughly check the item you are

sending beforehand.

Securely Sending PC Faxes(P. 296)

This section describes the general procedure for this operation. Check the manual of the application you are using for

detailed oper

ations on how to use it.

Required Preparations

● Install the fax driver to the computer and congur

e the settings according to your usage environment and

purpose.

Preparing to Send Faxes from a Computer(P. 278)

When Using Windows(P. 293)

When Using macOS(P. 294)

◼ When Using Windows

Open the document you are sending on your computer.

In the application used to open the document, select the command to print.

Select the fax driver of the machine, and click [Print].

➠ The [Fax Sending Settings] scr

een of the fax driver appears.

Specify a destination.

● This section describes ho

w to enter a fax number. You can specify a destination registered to the Address

Book from the [Select Destination] tab.

● If an outside line number is required, enter this number before the fax number. If the outside line number

has been set in advance, you do not need to enter it here.

Step 2: Using a Driver to Set the Department

ID and PIN(P

. 278)

When Entering One Fax Number

On the [Enter Destination] tab, enter a fax number. When [Conrm Fax Number] can be entered, enter the

same fax number.

Faxing

293

When Entering Multiple Fax Numbers

In [Select Destination] tab, click [Add Destination].

➠ The [Add Destination] scr

een is displayed.

Enter the destination name and fax number, and click [Add Next Destination].

When [Conrm Fax Number] can be enter

ed, enter the same fax number.

Repeat Step 2, and after entering all destinations, click [OK].

Congure the co

ver sheet, the setting for saving the TX Job Log, and other fax

setting, as needed.

● T

o congure the cover sheet details, click [Cover Sheet].

● To save the TX Job Log to the computer, select the [Store Sent Fax Information and Image] checkbox.

● For more information about the other fax settings, click [Help] on the [Fax Sending Settings] screen to display

help.

Click [Send].

➠ A scr

een conrming the send destination is displayed.

Check that the destination is correct, and click [OK].

➠ The fax is sent via the machine.

● Use [Status Monitor] on the oper

ation panel to view the sending status and log.

Checking the Status and

Log for Sent and Received Faxes(P. 304)

● When sending a fax with the [Store Sent Fax Information and Image] checkbox selected, you can view the log

also from the [Sent Fax Information and Image] tab of the fax driver.

◼ When Using macOS

Open the document you are sending on your computer.

In the application used to open the document, click [Print].

➠ The printing dialog bo

x appears.

Faxing

294

In [Printer], select the fax driver of the machine.

From the print options pop-up menu, select [General Settings].

If print options are not displayed, click [Show Details] in the printing dialog box.

Enter the fax number, and click [Add Destination].

● To specify multiple destinations, repeat this step. You can specify a destination registered to the Address

Book from [Address Book].

● If an outside line number is required, enter this number before the fax number.

Congure the co

ver sheet and other fax settings, as needed.

● T

o set the cover sheet details, select [Cover Sheet] from the pop-up menu of the print option.

● For more information about the other fax settings, click [

] in the printing dialog box to display help.

Click [Print].

➠ The fax is sent via the machine.

Use [Status Monitor] on the oper

ation panel to view the sending status and log.

Checking the Status and

Log for Sent and Received Fax

es(P. 304)

Faxing

295

Securely Sending PC Faxes

84CU-03F

While sending fax

es from a computer can be convenient, there is a risk of sending it to an incorrect number. To reduce

this risk, it is recommended that you check the following when sending faxes.

Checking the Content You Are Sending(P. 296)

Conrming the Destination

(P. 296)

Conrming TX Job Log after Sending

(P. 296)

Checking the Content You Are Sending

Unlike when scanning a document and sending it, you can only check the content to be sent on the screen of the

computer. Therefore, check the content before sending the document.

Checking with Preview

Check that the content to be sent is as intended. If the paper size is not appropriate, part of the document

sticking beyond the paper may be divided and sent separately.

Checking with PDF

You can convert the document into a PDF and then send it to reduce the risk of sending unintended sheets in

an Excel le, for example. When you cannot preview the document with the print function of the application

or you want to send only certain pages of the document, you can check the content to be sent before

sending.

Conrming the Destination

ou can require the user to enter the fax number twice when specifying a destination or require the user to conrm

the destination before sending to reduce the risk of sending a fax to an incorrect destination. For details about the

settings to conrm the destination, see the procedures when preparing to send PC faxes.

Step 3: Conguring the

Settings for Secur

e Sending(P. 278)

Conrming TX Job Log after Sending

When the machine is set to save a TX Job Log, you can check the log to conrm whether the intended content was sent

corr

ectly. For details about the settings to conrm the TX job log after sending PC faxes, see the procedures when

preparing to send PC faxes.

Step 3: Conguring the Settings for Secur

e Sending(P. 278)

Faxing

296

Fax Original Scan Settings

84CU-03H

When sending a fax using the machine, you can use the [TX/RX Settings] tab to adjust the image quality and set 2-

sided scanning.

If the recipient cannot read the text or the sent fax was not as intended, the settings can be adjusted and the fax

esent.

Adjusting Image Quality(P. 297)

2-sided Scan Settings(P. 298)

Setting Preview(P. 298)

Registering Favorite Settings

● Y

ou can register frequently used settings for scanning fax originals to easily call up these settings as needed

when sending.

Registering and Calling Up Favorite Settings(P. 180)

● Y

ou can also change the default settings for scanning fax originals.

Changing the Default

Settings(P

. 183)

Recalling Past Settings (TX Job Log)

● You can use the TX Job Log to recall the settings used to send faxes in the past.

Specifying Destinations

(TX Job Log)

(P. 176)

Adjusting Image Quality

ou can adjust the image quality such as when the fax image is not clear or the text is dicult to read.

[Resolution]

Select the resolution for scanning originals.

The higher the resolution, the sharper the image, but the longer it takes to send the data.

[Density]

Adjust the density to suit the original.

Press [+] to increase the density and [-] to lower it.

[Sharpness]

Adjust the sharpness.

Emphasize the contours and lines to mak

e them clearer, or weaken them to make them softer.

Adjustment example:

● To make blurry text or shapes clearer

Faxing

297

Press [+].

● T

o reduce moiré (vertical pattern noise) in photos

Press [-].

2-sided Scan Settings

When scanning a 2-sided original, place the original on the feeder, and set [2-Sided Original].

* 2-sided scanning is not available when sending a fax after a phone conversation.

[2-Sided Original]

o perform 2-sided scanning, select [Book Type] or [Calendar Type]. Select this according to the top and bottom

orientation of the front and back sides of the placed original.

[Book Type]

[Calendar Type]

Top and bottom have same orientation

Top and bottom have opposite orientation

To cancel scanning of a 2-sided original, select [Off].

Setting Preview

To send the scanned originals after after previewing the data, enable [Preview].

[Preview]

To preview the scanned data before sending it, select [On].

You can preview the scanned data on the operation panel after scanning is completed. You can delete pages you do

not want to send.

Faxing

298

Receiving Faxes

84CU-03J

When the RX mode is set to r

eceive faxes manually, you must perform operations to receive them.

When the RX mode is not set to receive faxes manually, you do not need to perform operations to receive them. When

there is an incoming fax, it is automatically received without ringing and then printed once receiving is completed.

Place A4 or letter size paper in the paper source to prevent the image from being missing or divided.

You can also change the settings to print a received fax on both sides of the paper and print the received date and

time and page number.

Changing the Print Settings for Received Faxes(P. 301)

◼ When the Machine Rings

Receive the fax manually

If a telephone is connected to the machine, you can receive the fax by operating the telephone without operating the

machine.

Receiving Faxes via Telephone (Remote RX)(P. 300)

When the machine rings, pick up the handset.

If it is a phone call, you can take the call.

If you hear a beep, on the operation panel, press [Fax] in the [Home] screen.

[Home]

Screen(P. 111)

➠ The fax screen appears.

Press [Start Receiving], and hang up the handset.

➠ The machine starts r

eceiving the fax. When receiving is completed, the fax is printed automatically.

When a Fax Is Not Received or Printed

Cannot Receive a Fax(P. 685)

o Not Print a Received Fax

● Save the received fax to the memory of the machine or forward it to a specic destination.

Saving Received Documents in the Machine (Memory Lock)(P. 416)

Auto Forwarding and Backing Up Received Faxes(P. 286)

Faxing

299

Receiving Faxes via Telephone (Remote RX)

84CU-03K

Remote RX allo

ws you to use the numeric keys of the telephone connected to the machine to receive faxes by dialing a

predetermined number (Remote RX ID).

The Remote RX ID is set to [25] by default. You can change this to a custom number.

[Remote RX](P. 553)

When the machine rings, pick up the handset of the telephone.

If it is a phone call, you can take the call.

When you hear a beep, dial the Remote RX ID using the numeric keys of the

telephone.

➠ The machine starts r

eceiving the fax. When receiving is completed, the fax is printed automatically.

If you do not hear a set of tones when entering the Remote RX ID, press the tone button (*) of the telephone,

and then enter the Remote RX ID again.

Hang up the handset.

Faxing

300

Changing the Print Settings for Received Faxes

84CU-03L

Received fax

es are printed on one side of the paper by default. You can change the settings to print on both sides of

the paper, and print the received date and time and page number.

Printing on Both Sides(P. 301)

Printing the Received Date and Time and Page Number(P. 301)

Printing on Both Sides

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings. [Print on Both Sides](P. 552)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [RX/Forwarding Settings] [Fax RX Settings] [Edit] in [Basic Settings].

➠ The [Edit Basic Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Print on Both Sides] checkbox.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Printing the Received Date and Time and Page Number

Select whether to print the following information at the bottom of received faxes:

● Reception date and time

● Received r

eception number

● Page number

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Print RX Page Footer](P. 550)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Faxing

301

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [RX/Forwarding Settings]

[Common Settings] [Edit] in [Common Settings].

➠ The [Edit Common Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Add RX Page Footer] checkbox.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Faxing

302

Canceling Fax Sending

84CU-03R

ou can cancel sending of a fax by following the on-screen instructions.

Press [Cancel]

[Yes].

If the above screen is not displayed, press on the operation panel, and then press [Yes].

If a job list screen is displayed, select the job to cancel, and press [Cancel] [Yes].

Faxing

303

Checking the Status and Log for Sent and Received

Fax

84CU-03S

ocesses handled by the machine, including sending and receiving faxes, are managed as jobs. By checking the

status and log of jobs, you can determine whether a job was sent or received correctly and the cause of errors that

occur.

When the settings are congured to save faxes that could not be forwarded, these faxes can be printed on the

machine or forwarded to a different destination instead.

* If the log is set to not be displayed, you can only check the send and receive status.

[Display Job Log](P. 568)

Checking Sent and Received Faxes(P. 304)

Checking Faxes that Failed to Be Forwarded(P. 305)

Checking Sent and Received Faxes

You can check the status and log of sent and received faxes.

You can also check the number of pages of the fax and the fax numbers of the destination and sender, and forward

faxes waiting to be received and printed.

This section describes how to check the status and log using the operation panel.

You can also use Remote UI from a computer to check the status and log. To print faxes saved in the memory, use

Remote UI. Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI(P. 443)

On the operation panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen or other

location.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The [Status Monitor] scr

een is displayed.

Press [TX Job] or [RX Job].

Check the status and log on each tab.

When Checking the Status of Sent and Received Faxes

On the [TX Job Status] and [RX Job Status] tabs, check the jobs being processed or waiting to be

ocessed.

Faxes saved in the memory are displayed in the [RX Job Status] tab as [Waiting to print].

Select a job to view its details.

➠ The job details are displayed.

View the number of pages, the fax numbers of the destination and sender, and other information.

● When ther

e are multiple fax destinations, press [Destination] to display them in a list.

● Press [Forward] to forward faxes waiting to be received or printed to a destination registered in the

Address Book. You cannot forward faxes being received or printed.

When Checking the Log of Sent and Received Faxes

On the [TX Job Log] and [RX Job Log] tabs, check the completed sent and received jobs.

Faxing

304

Select a job to view its details.

➠ The job details ar

e displayed.

View the number of pages and the fax numbers of the destination and sender.

When ther

e are multiple fax destinations, press [Destination] to display them in a list.

When the TX/RX Job Log displays [Error]

Sending or receiving was canceled, or an error occurred.

If a three-digit number starting with "#" (error code) is displayed, you can check the cause and solution

using the error code.

An Error Code Is Displayed(P. 717)

Registering Destinations to the Address Book

● On the scr

een displaying the job details, press [Regst to Add Book] to register the destination to the Address

Book.

* This operation is not available when there are multiple destinations.

Checking Faxes that Failed to Be Forwarded

If a fax could not be forwar

ded but remains in the memory, you can print it or forward it to a different destination, and

view its content.

This section describes how to check the fax content using the operation panel.

You can also use Remote UI from a computer to check the fax content. To preview the fax content, use the Remote UI.

Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI(P. 443)

Required Preparations

● Congur

e the settings to save faxes that could not be forwarded in the memory of the machine.

Auto

Forwar

ding and Backing Up Received Faxes(P. 286)

On the operation panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen. [Home]

Scr

een(P. 111)

➠ The [Status Monitor] scr

een is displayed.

Press [Fax Forwarding Errors].

➠ A list of jobs of fax

es that could not be forwarded is displayed.

Select a job you want to check.

➠ The job details ar

e displayed.

Print or forward the fax to a different destination, and view the fax content.

● T

o print with the machine, press [Print]

[Yes].

● T

o send or save the fax to a destination different from the one set as the forwarding destination, press

[Forward], select the checkbox of a destination registered in the Address Book, and press [Apply].

Faxing

305

Using Internet Fax (I-Fax)

84CU-00R

Internet Fax (I-Fax) is a function for sending and receiving faxes via the Internet.

This lets you send a fax without using a phone line to lo

wer communication costs.

When you receive an I-Fax, the received data is printed automatically.

The machines for sending and receiving I-Faxes must support I-Fax technology.

Sending I-Faxes(P. 306)

Receiving I-Faxes(P. 309)

Sending I-Faxes

ou can scan an original and send the scanned data by I-Fax.

Scanned data is sent by e-mail as an attached TIFF le. Just like when sending a regular e-mail, you can add a subject

and message and specify multiple destinations.

Required Preparations

● On the machine, congur

e the settings of the e-mail server to be used to send I-Faxes.

Conguring

Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)

(P. 245)

Place the original. Placing Originals(P. 128)

On the operation panel, press [Scan] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The scan type selection scr

een is displayed.

Press [I-Fax].

➠ The scan scr

een is displayed.

On the [Specify Destination] tab, specify the destination.

Specifying

Destinations

(P. 170)

Use [Address Book] or [Coded Dial] to specify the Cc and Bcc destinations.

Faxing

306

If you can only specify [Specify Myself as Destination]

If the destination when sending is r

estricted due to the Authentication Settings for Send Function, you cannot

specify another destination. For details, contact the administrator.

Congure the scan settings on the [Send Settings] tab.

Scan Settings(P. 266)

● Y

ou can also set the subject and main body of the e-mail on the [Send Settings] tab.

E-mail and I-Fax

Settings(P

. 269)

● Scanned data is sent with the following le name. You can also use the [Send Settings] tab to specify a

custom string and add it to the start.

Setting File / Division(P. 269)

Communications management number

Date sent (in this example, "April 5, 2023, 9:12:34 AM")

File sequence number (if one le, then "001")

Press [Start].

➠ Scanning of the original starts.

● To cancel scanning, press [Cancel] [Yes]. Canceling Scanning(P. 271)

● When scanning is completed, the scanned data is sent. Use [Status Monitor] to vie

w the sending status and

log.

Checking the Send and Save Status and Log of Scanned Data(P. 272)

When [Conrm Destination] appears

Check that the destination is correct, and then press [Start Scanning].

When [Scan Next Original] appears

When an original is placed on the platen glass and is scanned, the screen for scanning additional originals is

displayed.

To continue scanning originals, place on the platen glass, and press [Scan Next Original].

When scanning of all documents is completed, press [Start Sending] or [Preview & Send].

Faxing

307

* If the size of the original is different, part of the image may be missing, or the image may be scanned

smaller.

When the preview screen appears

eview the scanned data before press [Start Sending].

If there are pages you do not want to send, open the page and press [Delete Page].

When [Status Monitor] appears

o view the sending status and log, press [Status Monitor].

Checking the Send and Save Status and Log

of Scanned Data

(P. 272)

Pressing [Close] displays the scan screen.

When [SMTP Authentication] appears

Enter the user name and passwor

d to be used for SMTP authentication, and then press [Apply].

When a Sending Error Occurs

● Depending on the e-mail server settings, a notication e-mail may be sent to the e-mail addr

ess set on the

machine when a sending error occurs. If notication e-mails are left in the server, the mailbox may become

full, so it is recommended to periodically empty the mailbox.

Clearing the Mail Box(P. 451)

Faxing

308

Receiving I-Faxes

When there is an I-Fax, it is automatically received from the set mail server and then it is printed automatically once

receiving is completed.

You can change the paper size to print and congure the settings to print on both sides of the paper. Changing the

Print Settings of the Received I-Fax

(P. 310)

Required Preparations

● On the machine, congur

e the settings of the e-mail server to be used to receive I-Faxes.

Conguring

Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)

(P. 245)

◼ Manually Receiving I-Fax

If you want to connect to the server before receiving I-Faxes automatically, or if the machine is set to not receive I-

Faxes automatically, you can receive I-Faxes manually.

On the operation panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen.

[Home]

Screen(P. 111)

➠ The [Status Monitor] screen is displayed.

Press [RX Job] [Check I-Fax RX].

➠ The machine connects to the server. When you r

eceive an I-Fax, printing starts automatically.

When an I-Fax Is Not Received or Printed

Cannot Receive a Fax(P. 685)

Faxing

309

Changing the Print Settings of the Received I-Fax

84CU-0U0

Received I-Fax

es are printed on LTR size paper on one side by default. You can change the settings to print on both

sides and on different size paper. You can print the received date and time and page number as well.

Printing on Both Sides and on Different Size Paper(P. 310)

Printing the Received Date and Time and Page Number(P. 310)

Printing on Both Sides and on Different Size Paper

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings. [I-Fax Settings](P. 551)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [RX/Forwarding Settings] [I-Fax Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit I-Fax Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Change the print settings.

[Print on Both Sides]

Select this checkbo

x to print on both sides of the paper.

[RX Print Size]

Select the paper size for printing the received data.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Printing the Received Date and Time and Page Number

Select whether to print the following information at the bottom of received faxes:

● Reception date and time

● Received r

eception number

● Page number

Faxing

310

This section describes how to congur

e the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Print RX Page Footer](P. 550)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [RX/Forwarding Settings]

[Common Settings] [Edit] in [Common Settings].

➠ The [Edit Common Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Add RX Page Footer] checkbox.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Faxing

311

Copying

Copying ................................................................................................................................................................

313

Copy Operations ................................................................................................................................................ 314

Additional Copying Features ............................................................................................................................ 317

Copying Both Sides of ID Cards onto One Sheet .............................................................................................. 324

Copying Multiple Passports onto One Sheet ................................................................................................... 327

Canceling Copy Operations ............................................................................................................................... 330

Checking the Copy Status and Log ................................................................................................................... 331

Copying

312

Copying

84CU-07H

ou can easily copy documents, photos, and other printed materials ("originals") using the copy function of the

machine. In addition to basic copy settings, the machine also has settings for copying according to your original and

purpose. Congure these settings when copying for more ecient operations and to save paper.

Basic Copy Operations

You can set the copy ratio (for enlarging or reducing), number of copies, and other basic settings.

Copy Operations(P. 314)

Cop

ying According to Your Original and Purpose

You can perform 2-sided copying and adjust the image quality and other settings to suit your original and

purpose.

Additional Copying Features(P. 317)

Cop

ying for Specic Operations

You can use the following copy functions quickly from the [Home] screen.

ID Car

d Copy

Copies the front and back sides of a driver's license or other ID card on the

same sheet of paper at 100% magnication. This is convenient, for e

xample,

when copying ID cards at reception.

Copying Both Sides of ID Cards onto One Sheet(P. 324)

Passport Copy

Copies multiple passports together onto one sheet of paper.

Copying Multiple Passports onto One Sheet(P. 327)

◼ See Also

When Results Ar

e Not as Expected

If the color is not reproduced properly or the image position is shifted, adjust the print quality and position

according to the symptoms that occur.

Adjusting the Print Quality and Position(P. 610)

Copying

313

Copy Operations

84CU-07J

This section describes the basic cop

y operations when copying documents, photos, and other printed materials

("originals").

● When cop

ying originals that have text or images extending to the edges without margins, the copy may

printed with an area missing around the edge. For the size of the margin, see the basic specications.

Basic Specications(P

. 25)

Place the original.

Placing Originals(P. 128)

On the operation panel, press [Copy] in the [Home] screen. [Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The cop

y screen is displayed.

Set the Copy Ratio, Paper, and Number of Copies.

[Copy Ratio]

Set the r

atio for enlarging or reducing copies.

Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio According to the Paper Size

Press [Auto], and select the size of the placed original.

The copy ratio is set automatically according to the size of the paper used for copying.

Manually Setting the Copy Ratio

Select a xed copy ratio from the list or enter a custom ratio using the numeric keys, and press [Close].

You can specify a value from 25% to 400% in 1% increments.

Copying

314

[Paper]

Select the paper to use for cop

ying.

Select the paper source with the loaded paper to use or [Auto Select Paper (LTR/LGL)], and press [Close].

* If the paper loaded in the paper source does not match the setting of the paper size or paper type, you can

use [Change Paper Settings] to change the paper settings.

* [Auto Select Paper (LTR/LGL)] automatically selects LTR, and LGL size paper depending on the original size

loaded in the feeder.

* [Auto Select Paper (LTR/LGL)] is not available when no original is loaded in the feeder or when using [N on

1], [Erase Frame], or [ID Card Copy].

* [Auto Select Paper (LTR/LGL)] may not be displayed depending on the model you are using.

[Number of Copies]

Specify the number of copies.

Use the numeric keys to enter the number of copies, and then press [Close].

Congure the other cop

y settings, as needed.

Additional Copying Features(P. 317)

You can perform 2-sided copying and adjust the image quality and other settings to suit your original and

purpose.

Press [Start B&W] or [Start Color].

➠ Cop

ying starts.

● To copy the original in black and white, press [Start B&W]. To copy in color, press [Start Color].

● To cancel copying, press [Cancel]

[Yes]. Canceling Copy Operations(P. 330)

● Use [Status Monitor] to vie

w the copy job status and log.

Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 233)

When [Scan Next] appears

When an original is placed on the platen glass and copied using 2-sided cop

ying or N on 1, the screen is

displayed for scanning the next original.

Place the next original on the platen glass, and press [Scan Next B&W] or [Scan Next Color].

Copying

315

➠ The ne

xt original is scanned, and the same screen is displayed.

Repeat this process until scanning of all originals is completed.

● You can select the color mode (Black & White or Color) for each original. To copy the next original in

black and white, press [Scan Next B&W]. To copy in color, press [Scan Next Color].

● You can also press [Density], [Original Type], and [Color Balance] to change the settings for each

original.

● If the size of the original is different, part of the image may be missing, or the image may be printed

smaller on the paper.

Press [Start Printing].

➠ The scanned originals are printed.

Copying

316

Additional Copying Features

84CU-07K

In addition to basic cop

y settings, the machine also has settings for 2-sided copying, image quality adjustment, and

other settings according to your original and purpose. Use the copy screen to congure these settings.

* To make copies using the ID Card Copy function, you can simply adjust the density and image quality.

Making 2-sided Copies(P. 317)

Copying Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1)(P. 318)

Collating Copies by Page (Collate)(P. 319)

Adjusting the Density(P. 320)

Adjusting the Image Quality(P. 321)

Registering Favorite Settings

● Y

ou can register frequently used copy settings as Favorite Settings to easily call up these settings as needed

when copying.

Registering Favorite Settings(P. 180)

● Y

ou can also change the default copy settings.

Changing the Default Settings(P. 183)

Reserving Cop

ying

● You can scan an original even while the machine is printing. On the printing or waiting screen, press [Close]

or [

], congur

e the copy settings, and then press [Start B&W] or [Start Color]. You can reserve up to 10

copy jobs including the job being printed.

Basic Copy Operations

● For the basic operations when copying, see the following:

Copy Operations(P. 314)

Making 2-sided Copies

ou can copy two 1-sided originals on both sides of one sheet of paper.

You can also copy a 2-sided original on both sides of one sheet of paper, or on two separate sheets of paper.

* 2-sided copying may not be available with some sizes and types of paper.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Use the [2-Sided] button on the copy screen to select the type of 1-sided or 2-sided

cop

ying.

Copying

317

Copies 1-sided originals to separate sheets of paper.

Copies two 1-sided originals on both sides of one sheet of paper.

Copies the front and back of 2-sided originals on both sides of one sheet of paper.

Copies the front and back of 2-sided originals on two separate sheets of paper.

Set the original orientation and opening type, and copy opening type, as needed.

Press [Other Settings]

[2-Sided Printing].

➠ The [2-Sided] scr

een is displayed.

Press [Orig./Fin. Type].

Set the orientation and opening type, and press [Apply].

➠ The [Other Settings] scr

een reappears.

Press [

➠ The cop

y screen is displayed.

Copying Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1)

ou can reduce the size of a multiple-page original and arrange the pages on one sheet of paper when copying.

N on 1 is convenient when you want to save paper by copying on fewer sheets of paper than the original.

* This cannot be set at the same time as Erase Frame.

Use the [N on 1] button on the copy screen to select the number of pages to be

combined.

➠ When N on 1 is set, the curr

ently selected original size is displayed to the right of the button.

To change the setting of the original size, press [Auto] in [Copy Ratio].

Pages are not combined.

Combines a 2-page original onto one sheet of paper.

Copying

318

Combines a 4-page original onto one sheet of paper.

Congure the layout (page or

der) when combining originals, as needed.

Press [Other Settings] on the copy screen

[N on 1].

➠ The [N on 1] scr

een is displayed.

Press [Layout], and select the page order.

➠ The [Scan Size] scr

een is displayed.

Select the size of the placed original.

➠ The [Output Size] scr

een is displayed.

Select the paper source with the loaded paper to use for copying.

➠ The [Other Settings] scr

een reappears.

Press [

➠ The cop

y screen is displayed.

● When combining pages, the cop

y ratio is set automatically according to the following. You can also change

the copy ratio setting manually.

- Number of pages to be combined

- Original size setting

- Size of paper used for copying

● When pages are combined, a margin may be created around the copied images.

Collating Copies by Page (Collate)

When cop

ying multiple copies of a multi-page original, you can collate the copies in the page order of the original. This

is convenient when copying handouts for meetings.

When Copying without Collating

The copies are grouped by the page of the original in the number of specied copies and not collated.

For example, when you are making three copies of a three-page original, the printouts are arranged in the

following order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3.

When Copying with Collating

The copies ar

e collated into sets in the page order of the original.

For example, when you are making three copies of a three-page original, the printouts are arranged in the

following order: 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3.

Copying

319

Press [Other Settings] on the copy screen

[Collate].

➠ The [Sort Files] scr

een is displayed.

Press [On].

➠ The [Other Settings] scr

een reappears.

Press [

➠ The cop

y screen is displayed.

Adjusting the Density

ou can adjust the density to suit the original when copying.

If text or images in the original are too faint or dark, adjust the density of the entire original.

To create clean copies of an original with a colored background or a newspaper, adjust the density of the background.

Press [Density] on the copy screen to adjust the density.

Adjusting the Density of the Entire Original

ag the slider to the left or right to adjust the density.

Press [+] to increase the density and [-] to lower it.

Adjusting the Density of the Background

Press [Adjust Background Density]

[Adjust (Manual)].

➠ The [Adjust Over

all Density] screen is displayed.

Drag the slider to the left or right to adjust the density.

● Pr

ess [+] to increase the density and [-] to lower it.

● Press [Density by Color] to adjust the density of the background by color.

Press [Apply].

Press [Close].

● When you adjust the density of the backgr

ound, parts other than the background may also be affected.

Copying

320

Adjusting the Image Quality

You can adjust the image quality such as when the copied image is not clear or the text is dicult to read. You can also

erase dark borders and shadows that appear around the edges of the original and adjust the color when copying.

* Erase Frame is not available when making copies using the ID Card Copy function.

◼ Selecting the Image Quality for the Original Type

Press [Other Settings] on the copy screen [Original Type].

➠ The [Original T

ype] screen is displayed.

Select the original type.

➠ The [Other Settings] scr

een reappears.

When Copying Originals with Both Text and Photos or Maps with Detailed Lines

Select [T

ext/Photo/Map].

Giving Priority to Speed over Image Quality for Color Copying

Place the original in the feeder, and select [Text/Photo/Map (Speed)].

* Priority is not given to speed for black and white copying. Copying is performed with the same image

quality and speed as that of [Text/Photo/Map].

Giving Priority to Image Quality over Speed

Select [Text/Photo/Map (Quality)], adjust to make text or photos more visible, and press [Apply].

Copying Photos Containing Halftone Dots such as in Magazines

Select [Printed Image].

Copying Originals with Large Volumes of Text such as Research Papers

Select [T

ext].

Press [

➠ The cop

y screen is displayed.

◼ Erasing Dark Borders and Shadows around Edges of the Original (Erase Frame)

This function erases the dark borders and shadows that appear around the edges in the copied image when copying

originals that are smaller than the paper size or thick originals.

* This cannot be set at the same time as N on 1.

Press [Other Settings] on the copy screen [Erase Frame].

➠ The [Er

ase Frame] screen is displayed.

Copying

321

Press [On].

➠ The scr

een for specifying the frame width to erase is displayed.

Enter the frame width to erase, and press [Next].

➠ The [Scan Size] scr

een is displayed.

When you are copying at an enlarged or reduced size, the function automatically changes the size of the

frame width to erase to match the copy ratio setting.

Select the size of the placed original.

➠ The [Other Settings] scr

een reappears.

Press [

➠ The cop

y screen is displayed.

◼ Adjusting the Sharpness

You can emphasize the contours and lines to make them clearer in the copied image, or weaken them to make them

softer.

Press [Other Settings] on the copy screen [Sharpness].

➠ The [Sharpness] scr

een is displayed.

Drag the slider to the left or right to adjust the sharpness.

Adjustment example:

● T

o Make Blurry Text or Shapes Clearer

Press [+].

● T

o reduce moiré (vertical pattern noise) in photos

Press [-].

Copying

322

Press [Apply].

➠ The [Other Settings] scr

een reappears.

Press [

➠ The cop

y screen is displayed.

◼ Adjusting the Color

You can adjust the levels of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black to copy with colors more faithful to the original or clearer

than the original.

Press [Other Settings] on the copy screen

[Color Balance].

➠ The [Color Balance] scr

een is displayed.

Drag the slider to the left or right for each color to adjust the color levels.

Adjustment example:

Press [Fine Adjust] to adjust the levels of the three density areas for each color.

Press [Apply].

➠ The [Other Settings] scr

een reappears.

Press [ ].

➠ The cop

y screen is displayed.

Copying

323

Copying Both Sides of ID Cards onto One Sheet

84CU-07L

You can use the ID Card Copy function to copy the front and back sides of a driver's

license or other ID car

d on the same sheet of paper at 100% magnication. This can

be quickly performed from the [Home] screen on the operation panel and is

convenient, for example, when copying ID cards at reception.

Place the ID card on the platen glass.

Open the feeder.

Place the front of the ID card face down on the platen glass in the portrait orientation while aligning the

corner of the ID car

d with the top left corner of the platen glass.

Place the ID card slightly away from the edge of the platen glass.

Gently close the feeder.

On the operation panel, press [ID Card Copy] in the [Home] screen.

[Home]

Scr

een(P. 111)

➠ The copy screen is displayed.

Set the paper size and type and number of copies.

Copying

324

[Paper]

Select the paper to use for cop

ying.

Select the paper source with the loaded paper to use, and press [Close].

* If the paper loaded in the paper source does not match the setting of the paper size or paper type, you can

use [Change Paper Settings] to change the paper settings.

[Number of Copies]

Specify the number of copies.

Use the numeric keys to enter the number of copies, and then press [Close].

* When you make copies using the ID Card Copy function, the copy ratio is xed at 100%.

Adjust the density and image quality, as needed.

Adjusting the Density(P. 320)

Adjusting the Image Quality(P. 321)

Press [Start B&W] or [Start Color].

➠ The fr

ont of the ID card is scanned.

To copy the back of the ID card in black and white, press [Start B&W]. To copy in color, press [Start Color].

When [Scan Next] is displayed, turn over the ID card and place it on the platen glass.

Place the back of the ID card face down in the same way as the front.

Press [Scan Next B&W] or [Scan Next Color].

Copying

325

➠ The back of the ID car

d is scanned and copying starts.

● You can copy the back with a different color mode (Black & White or Color) from that of the front. To copy the

back in black and white, press [Scan Next B&W]. To copy in color, press [Scan Next Color].

● To cancel copying, press [Cancel]

[Yes]. Canceling Copy Operations(P. 330)

● Use [Status Monitor] to vie

w the copy job status and log.

Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 233)

Copying

326

Copying Multiple Passports onto One Sheet

84CU-07R

You can use the Passport Copy function to copy multiple passports together onto

one sheet of paper. This can be quickly performed fr

om the [Home] screen on the

operation panel.

Place a passport on the platen glass.

Open the feeder.

Place the page to be scanned face down while aligning the corner of the passport with the top left corner

of the platen glass, as sho

wn.

Gently close the feeder.

On the operation panel, press [Passport Copy] in the [Home] screen.

[Home]

Scr

een(P. 111)

➠ The [Passport Cop

y] screen is displayed.

Select a combination of the number of passports and whether to use 2-sided

printing.

[2 on 1 (2-Sided)]

Combines two passports onto one side of a sheet of paper by copying with 2-sided printing. Copies four

passports onto both sides of a sheet of paper with 2-sided printing.

[4 on 1 (2-Sided)]

Combines four passports onto one side of a sheet of paper by copying with 2-sided printing. Copies eight

passports onto both sides of a sheet of paper with 2-sided printing.

[2 on 1]

Combines two passports onto one side of a sheet of paper.

Copying

327

[4 on 1]

Combines four passports onto one side of a sheet of paper.

Select the paper source with the loaded paper to use for copying.

➠ The cop

y screen is displayed.

Set the number of copies.

Press [Number of Copies], use the numeric keys to enter the number of copies, and then press [Close].

* When you use Passport Cop

y to make copies, the copy ratio is set automatically according to the size of the

paper used for copying and the number of passports to combine. You can also press [Copy Ratio] to change

the copy ratio manually.

* You can press [Paper] to change the paper source (paper used for copying) selected in 4.

Congure the other cop

y settings, as needed.

Additional Copying Features(P. 317)

● Y

ou can adjust the density and image quality.

● You can change the number of passports to combine (N on 1) and the 2-sided copy settings selected in 3.

Press [Start B&W] or [Start Color].

➠ The rst passport is scanned.

o copy the rst passport in black and white, press [Start B&W]. To copy in color, press [Start Color].

When [Scan Next] is displayed, place the next passport on the platen glass, and press

[Scan Ne

xt B&W] or [Scan Next Color].

➠ The ne

xt passport is scanned, and the same screen is displayed.

Repeat this process until scanning of all passports is completed.

Copying

328

● Y

ou can select the color mode (Black & White or Color) for each passport. To copy the next passport in black

and white, press [Scan Next B&W]. To copy in color, press [Scan Next Color].

● You can also press [Density] and [Color Balance] to change the settings for each passport.

Press [Start Printing].

➠ The scanned passports ar

e printed.

● To cancel copying, press [Cancel]

[Yes]. Canceling Copy Operations(P. 330)

● Use [Status Monitor] to vie

w the copy job status and log.

Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 233)

Copying

329

Canceling Copy Operations

84CU-07S

Follo

w the instructions on screen to cancel a copy operation.

Press [Cancel]

[Yes].

If the above screen is not displayed, on the operation panel, press [Yes].

If the job list screen is displayed, select the job to cancel, and press [Cancel] [Yes].

Copying

330

Checking the Copy Status and Log

84CU-07U

ocesses handled by the machine, including copying, are managed as jobs. By checking the status and log of jobs,

you can determine whether a copy job was performed correctly and the cause of errors that occur.

* If the log is set to not be displayed, you can only check the copy status.

[Display Job Log](P. 568)

This section describes ho

w to view this information using the operation panel.

You can also check this information using Remote UI from a computer.

Checking Usage and Logs with Remote

UI(P

. 443)

On the operation panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen or other

location.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The [Status Monitor] scr

een is displayed.

Press [Copy/Print Job].

Check the status and log on the [Copy/Print Job Status] or [Copy Job Log] tab.

Checking the Copy Status

On the [Copy/Print Job Status] tab, check the job being processed or waiting to be processed.

Select a job to view its details.

➠ The job details ar

e displayed.

Check the number of originals, number of copies, and other settings.

Checking the Copy Job Log

On the [Copy Job Log] tab, check the completed copy jobs.

Select a job to view its details.

➠ The job details ar

e displayed.

Check the number of printed pages, number of copies, and other items.

If Cop

y Job Log Displays [Error]

Copying was canceled, or an error occurred.

If a three-digit number starting with "#" (error code) is displayed, you can check the cause and solution

using the error code. An Error Code Is Displayed(P. 717)

Copying

331

Linking with Mobile Devices

Linking with Mobile Devices ....................................................................................................................

333

Preparations for Linking with Mobile Devices ................................................................................................ 335

Preparations for Direct Connection .............................................................................................................. 336

Preparations for Using AirPrint ..................................................................................................................... 338

Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine ................................................................................................... 341

Connecting a Mobile Device via Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) ....................................................... 342

Connecting a Mobile Device Directly to the Machine (Direct Connection) ..................................................... 343

Using a Dedicated Application to Print and Scan (Canon PRINT Business) ................................................... 346

Using AirPrint Application to Print and Scan Data and Send Faxes ............................................................... 347

Printing from an Android Device ...................................................................................................................... 351

Printing from Chromebook or Other Device with Chrome OS ........................................................................ 353

Linking with Mobile Devices

332

Linking with Mobile Devices

84CU-07W

The machine can be oper

ated from a smartphone, tablet, or other mobile device. By using a compatible application or

service, you can easily print photos or documents through a mobile device and save data scanned with the machine to

the same device.

The applications and services that are available vary depending on the mobile device you are using.

iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, Mac

Canon PRINT Business (iPhone, iPad only)

Dedicated Canon application. Enables printing and scanning. It also supports Department ID Management.

Using a Dedicated Application to Print and Scan (Canon PRINT Business)(P. 346)

AirPrint

This function is standar

d in Apple operating systems. You can print from applications that support AirPrint

instead of having to install a dedicated application or driver.

In addition, you can use AirPrint to print from a Mac. You can also scan data and send faxes with a Mac.

Preparations for Using AirPrint(P. 338)

Using AirPrint Application to Print and Scan Data and Send Faxes(P. 347)

Andr

oid Devices

Canon PRINT Business

Dedicated Canon application. Enables printing and scanning. It also supports Department ID Management.

Using a Dedicated Application to Print and Scan (Canon PRINT Business)(P. 346)

Canon Print Service

Dedicated Canon plugin. Enables printing fr

om any application. It also supports Department ID

Management.

Using a Dedicated Plugin to Print (Canon Print Service)(P. 351)

Mopria

® Print Service

Common plugin for Mopria

certied printers and multifunction machines. Enables printing from any

application without having to install a dedicated plugin or application for individual manufacturers.

Using a Common Plugin to Print (Mopria® Print Service)(P. 351)

Chr

omebook or Other Device with Chrome OS

You can use the function standard equipped in the Chrome operating system to print without having to install a

dedicated application or printer driver.

Printing from Chromebook or Other Device with Chrome OS(P. 353)

When Applying a Security Policy

● When [Restrict IPP Port (Port Number: 631)] or [Restrict mDNS Port (Port Number: 5353)] is enabled, you

cannot use AirPrint and Mopria

Print Service.

Security Policy Items(P. 430)

Using the Address Book on a Mobile Device

● When sending scanned data b

y e-mail with the machine, you can use Canon PRINT Business to specify a

destination registered to the Address Book on a mobile device.

Specifying Destinations (Address Book

on a Mobile De

vice)(P. 175)

Linking with Mobile Devices

333

◼ See Also

Managing the Machine fr

om a Mobile Device (Remote UI)

You can use Remote UI from a Web browser on a mobile device. With Remote UI, you can check the

operation status of the machine, change the machine settings, and register destinations to the Address

Book. For details about starting and operating Remote UI, see the instructions for using Remote UI on a

computer.

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 437)

* Some display items ar

e omitted in the mobile version of Remote UI. To check all items, tap [PC Version] at

the bottom of the screen and switch to the computer version of Remote UI.

Linking with Mobile Devices

334

Preparations for Linking with Mobile Devices

84CU-07X

o directly connect a mobile device to the machine or to use AirPrint, you must rst congure the settings on the

machine.

Preparations for Direct Connection(P. 336)

Preparations for Using AirPrint(P. 338)

Linking with Mobile Devices

335

Preparations for Direct Connection

84CU-07Y

Enable the Dir

ect Connection function on the machine. If the machine is not connected to a network, you need to

check the Network Connection Type settings.

Enabling the Direct Connection Function(P. 336)

Checking the Network Connection Type of the Machine(P. 337)

Enabling the Direct Connection Function

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.

[Direct Connection Settings](P. 472)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [Network Settings] [Direct Connection Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Dir

ect Connection Settings] screen is displayed.

Select the [Use Direct Connection] checkbox.

Congure the Dir

ect Connection function, as needed.

When connecting multiple mobile devices at the same time, you must specify the SSID and network key.

To Terminate the Connection Automatically

Select the [T

erminate Direct Connection Session] checkbox, and enter the time period of the direct

connection until it is terminated. When multiple mobile devices are connected, they will be disconnected

after the time period elapses since the last started connection.

To Change the IP Address for Connection

In [IP Addr

ess for Direct Connection], enter any IP address.

To specify the SSID and Network Key (When Connecting Multiple Mobile Devices at the

Same Time)

By default, the SSID and network k

ey of the machine are automatically assigned a random character string

each time direct connection is performed.

To specify the SSID and network key manually, in [Access Point Mode Settings], select the [Specify SSID to

Use] or [Specify Network Key to Use] checkbox, and enter an SSID or network key using single-byte

alphanumeric characters.

To Allow Mobile Devices to Always Connect to the Machine

By default, you must use the operation panel to put the machine into waiting state when you want to

establish a direct connection.

Linking with Mobile Devices

336

To allow mobile devices to always connect to the machine, in [Access Point Mode Settings], specify the SSID

and network k

ey, and select the [Always Keep Enabled If SSID/Network Key Is Specied] checkbox in [Keep

Connection Enabled].

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Checking the Network Connection Type of the Machine

If the machine is not connected to a network (wir

ed or wireless LAN), check that the network connection type is set to

wired LAN.

If the machine is connected to a network, you do not have to check this.

On the operation panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen or other

location.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The [Status Monitor] scr

een is displayed.

Press [Network Information]

[Network Connection Type].

➠ The [Network Connection T

ype] screen is displayed.

Check that [Wired LAN] is displayed.

If the connection type is set to wired LAN, you can establish a direct connection even if the machine is not

connected to a network.

When [Wireless LAN] Is Displayed in [Connection Type]

When the machine is not connected to a wir

eless LAN, a direct connection cannot be established. Connect

the machine to a wireless LAN or switch the connection type to wired LAN.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 54)

Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN(P. 52)

Linking with Mobile Devices

337

Preparations for Using AirPrint

84CU-080

Set the basic information that is r

equired to use AirPrint. Congure the settings related to the functions and security

that will be used, according to your usage and environment.

Setting the Basic Information of AirPrint(P. 338)

Setting the Functions and Security to Be Used with AirPrint(P. 339)

When Using Department ID Management

● Department IDs cannot be set with AirPrint. T

o use AirPrint while using Department ID Management,

congure the settings so as not to restrict the following operations:

Enabling Department ID

Management(P

. 364)

- Printing and sending faxes from a computer with an unknown Department ID

- Scanning and saving data to a computer

Setting the Basic Information of AirPrint

Congur

e these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the

settings.

Administrator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration].

Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Network Settings]

[AirPrint Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit AirPrint Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Use AirPrint] checkbox, and enter the printer name.

● For the printer name, enter a name to identify the machine, using single-b

yte alphanumeric characters.

● If mDNS of IPv4 is set, the mDNS name is entered for the printer name. If you change the printer name, the

mDNS name is also changed.

* When you change the set printer name or mDNS name, the Mac that was connected to the machine may

no longer be able to connect to it. In this case, you must register the machine on the Mac.

Enter the location and longitude and latitude of the machine, as needed.

If the location of the machine is set in [Settings/Registration]

[Device Management] [Device Information

Settings], the same character string is entered in the location. When you change the location in AirPrint

Settings, the location in Device Information Settings is also changed.

Linking with Mobile Devices

338

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

● When the AirPrint function is enabled, the following network settings are also enabled:

- [Use HTTP](P. 484)

- [IPP Print Settings](P. 484)

- [mDNS Settings](P. 482)

- [Network Link Scan Settings](P. 485)

Setting the Functions and Security to Be Used with AirPrint

AirPrint uses the following protocols:

● IPP (printing and sending fax

es)

● Network Link Scan (scanning)

The protocol to use varies with the function. Therefore, you can restrict the available functions by disabling the

protocols. In addition, you can congure the settings to encrypt communication with TLS and congure IPP

authentication when using a protocol.

Congure these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the

settings.

Administrator privileges are required.

Required Preparations

● When encrypting communication with TLS, specify the k

ey and certicate to use for TLS encrypted

communication.

Using TLS(P. 380)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Network Settings]

[IPP Print Settings] or [Network Link Scan Settings]

[Edit].

➠ The [Edit IPP Print Settings] scr

een or [Edit Network Link Scan Settings] screen is displayed.

Congure the IPP or Network Link Scan settings.

Linking with Mobile Devices

339

When Restricting the Functions to Use

Clear the [Use IPP Printing] or [Use Network Link Scan] checkbo

xes.

● When you clear the [Use IPP Printing] checkbox, printing and sending faxes with AirPrint are no longer

possible.

● When you clear the [Use Network Link Scan] checkbox, scanning is no longer possible with AirPrint.

When Encrypting Communication with TLS

Select the [Allo

w Only When Using TLS] or [Use TLS] checkbox.

When Setting IPP Authentication

Select the [Use Authentication] checkbo

x, and set the user name to be used for IPP authentication using

single-byte alphanumeric characters.

To set a password, select the [Set/Change Password] checkbox, and enter the same password in both

[Password] and [Conrm] using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

Printing or sending faxes with AirPrint now requires authentication, and only users who know the user name

and password of IPP authentication can use these functions.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Linking with Mobile Devices

340

Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine

84CU-081

o use the machine from a mobile device, you must connect it to the machine using either of the following methods:

Connecting via Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)

Connect a mobile device to the machine via a wireless LAN router in the same way as you connect a

computer to the machine. By conguring a mobile device to connect automatically to the wireless LAN

router, you do not need to manually connect it next time.

Connecting a Mobile Device via Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)(P. 342)

Connecting Directly (Direct Connection)

Connect a mobile de

vice directly to the machine via Wi-Fi. You can directly connect to the machine without

using wireless LAN. You must manually connect the mobile device each time you use the machine.

Preparations for Direct Connection(P. 336)

Connecting a Mobile Device Directly to the Machine (Direct Connection)(P. 343)

Linking with Mobile Devices

341

Connecting a Mobile Device via Wireless LAN Router

(LAN Connection)

84CU-082

Connect a mobile de

vice to the machine via a wireless LAN router in the same way as you connect a computer to the

machine. By conguring a mobile device to connect automatically to the wireless LAN router, you do not need to

manually connect it next time.

Required Preparations

● Connect the machine to the network using wir

eless or wired LAN.

Setting Up the Network(P. 50)

* When using a wir

ed LAN, check that a wireless LAN router is connected to the same network.

● Set an IPv4 address to the machine.

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

Connect the mobile device to either of the following wireless LAN routers:

● A wir

eless LAN router connected to the machine

● (When the machine is connected to a wired LAN) A wireless LAN router on the network connected to the

machine

For details about how to connect a mobile device to a wireless LAN router, see the manual of the mobile device.

Linking with Mobile Devices

342

Connecting a Mobile Device Directly to the Machine

(Dir

ect Connection)

84CU-083

Connect a mobile de

vice directly to the machine via Wi-Fi. You can directly connect it to the machine without using

wireless LAN. You must manually connect the mobile device each time you use the machine.

By default, only one mobile device can be directly connected to the machine at any one time.

To establish a direct connection, you must use the operation panel to put the machine into waiting state and then

connect it using either of the follo

wing methods:

Manually Conguring the Wi-Fi Settings

Search for the machine on the mobile device, and enter the network key

manually to connect.

Scanning QR Codes with Canon PRINT Business

Use Canon PRINT Business to easily connect by simply scanning the QR code

displayed on the scr

een of the machine with a mobile device.

Required Preparations

● Mak

e preparations such as enabling the Direct Connection function on the machine.

Preparations for

Dir

ect Connection(P. 336)

● To connect by scanning the QR code, install Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device.

On the operation panel, press [Mobile Portal] in the [Home] screen. [Home]

Screen(P. 111)

➠ The [Mobile Portal] screen is displayed.

On the [Direct Connection] tab, press [Connect].

Linking with Mobile Devices

343

➠ The machine enters waiting state for Dir

ect Connection.

Within 5 minutes of pressing [Connect], you must directly connect the mobile device.

When [Disconnect] Is Displayed

● Y

ou can skip this step when [Connect from the device you want to connect.] is displayed. Proceed to Step 3.

● When [Maximum number of wireless devices connected using Direct Connection has been reached.] is

displayed, you cannot connect a new mobile device until a connected mobile device is disconnected. To

disconnect a connected mobile device, press [Disconnect]

[Yes].

* By default, only one mobile de

vice can be directly connected to the machine at any one time.

Directly connect the mobile device.

Manually Conguring the Wi-Fi Settings

Check the SSID and network key of the machine displayed on the [Direct Connection] tab.

In the Wi-Fi settings of the mobile device, select the SSID of the machine, and enter the network key.

For details about how to congure the Wi-Fi settings, see the manual of the mobile device.

Scanning QR Codes with Canon PRINT Business

On the [Direct Connection] tab, press [QR Code].

➠ A QR code is displayed.

On the mobile device, start Canon PRINT Business, and scan the QR code.

For details about scanning a QR code, see Help in Canon PRINT Business.

When [Connected.] appears on the operation panel, press [Close].

➠ The [Mobile Portal] scr

een reappears.

Linking with Mobile Devices

344

By default, only one mobile device can be directly connected to the machine at any one time. [Maximum

number of wir

eless devices connected using Direct Connection has been reached.] is displayed on the

screen.

When you have completed your operations on the mobile device, press [Disconnect]

on the [Dir

ect Connection] tab.

➠ The direct connection is terminated.

If multiple mobile devices are connected, all devices are disconnected.

● Y

ou may not be able to connect to the Internet with Direct Connection depending on the mobile device.

● The power-saving effect of sleep mode decreases when using Direct Connection.

● The IP address of the mobile device is set automatically. If you set the IP address manually, communication

using Direct Connection may not be performed correctly.

Checking a Mobile Device Connected to the Machine

● On the [Dir

ect Connection] tab, press [Connection Info] to display the information of the mobile device

connected to the machine with Direct Connection.

If the Direct Connection Is Automatically Disconnected

● The direct connection is automatically terminated in the following cases:

- When the Direct Connection Termination is set

- When no data is sent or received between the mobile device and the machine for a while

- When the wireless LAN connection of the machine is terminated

Linking with Mobile Devices

345

Using a Dedicated Application to Print and Scan (Canon

PRINT Business)

84CU-084

ou can use the dedicated Canon application Canon PRINT Business to print and scan.

It also supports Department ID Management. Even when printing with an unknown Department ID is restricted, you

can print by setting a Department ID.

Compatible Operating Systems and Download Site

See the Canon website.

https://global.canon/gomp/

Usage

● Connect a mobile device to the machine.

Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine(P. 341)

● Register the machine to Canon PRINT Business.

When the mobile de

vice is connected to the machine via LAN, the IP address information of the machine or

displaying of the QR code is required to register the machine to Canon PRINT Business. You can view the IP

address and display the QR code with [Home] screen

[Mobile Portal] [LAN Connection] tab.

● For details about r

egistering the machine, printing, and scanning, see the Help menu item in the application.

Linking with Mobile Devices

346

Using AirPrint Application to Print and Scan Data and

Send Fax

84CU-085

AirPrint is a print function standar

d in Apple operating systems. You can print from applications that support AirPrint

instead of having to install a dedicated application or driver.

In addition, you can use AirPrint to print from a Mac. You can also scan data and send faxes with a Mac.

When Using an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch(P. 347)

When Using a Mac(P. 348)

When Using Department ID Management on the Machine

● You cannot use AirPrint when the following operations are restricted: Enabling Department ID

Management(P

. 364)

- Printing and sending faxes from a computer with an unknown Department ID

- Scanning and saving data to a computer

When Using an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch

Use AirPrint to print fr

om an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch connected to the machine via LAN or direct connection.

Operating Environment

You can use AirPrint with the following iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch models:

● iPhone: 3GS or later

● iPad: All models

● iPod touch: Third generation or later

Required Preparations

● Set the machine to enable use of AirPrint.

Preparations for Using AirPrint(P. 338)

● Connect the machine to an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch. Connecting a Mobile Device to the

Machine(P

. 341)

Open the data to be printed on the iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch.

In the application with the data to be printed open, tap [ ].

Linking with Mobile Devices

347

➠ The menu options ar

e displayed.

Tap [Print].

➠ The print options ar

e displayed.

If print options are not displayed, the application does not support AirPrint. In this case, you cannot use

AirPrint to print data.

Tap [Printer], and select the machine.

Congure the print settings.

The available settings and usable paper sizes vary depending on the application you are using.

Tap [Print].

➠ Printing starts.

Use [Status Monitor] on the oper

ation panel to view the print job status and log.

Viewing the Print Job

Status and Log(P

. 233)

When Using a Mac

ou can use AirPrint to print and scan data and send faxes from a Mac connected to the network on the same LAN as

the machine or a Mac connected to the machine via USB.

Operating Environment

You can use AirPrint on a Mac with the following operating systems installed:

● Printing: Mac OS X 10.7 or later

● Scanning: OS X 10.9 or later

● Sending faxes: OS X 10.9 or later

When printing fr

om a Mac connected to the machine via USB, OS X 10.9 or later.

When scanning with TLS encrypted communication, OS X 10.11 or later.

Required Preparations

● Set the machine to enable use of AirPrint.

Preparations for Using AirPrint(P. 338)

● Connect the machine to a Mac. Setting Up the Network(P. 50)

When connecting via USB

, connect to the USB port for computer connection on the back of the machine with

a USB cable.

Rear Side(P. 12)

● In [System Pr

eferences]

[Printers & Scanners] on the Mac, click [+] to register the machine.

Using AirPrint to Print Data(P. 349)

Using AirPrint to Scan Data(P. 349)

Using AirPrint to Send Faxes(P. 350)

Linking with Mobile Devices

348

◼ Using AirPrint to Print Data

Open the document you want to print on your Mac.

In the application used to open the document, click [Print].

➠ The printing dialog bo

x appears.

In [Printer], select the machine.

Congure the print settings.

The available settings and usable paper sizes vary depending on the application you are using.

Click [Print].

➠ Printing starts.

Use [Status Monitor] on the oper

ation panel to view the print job status and log.

Viewing the Print Job

Status and Log(P

. 233)

◼ Using AirPrint to Scan Data

Place the original on the machine.

Placing Originals(P. 128)

On your Mac, Click [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

➠ The [Printers & Scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Select the machine.

On the [Scan] tab, click [Open Scanner].

➠ The [Scanner] scr

een is displayed.

Congure the scan settings.

Click [Scan].

➠ Scanning starts.

Linking with Mobile Devices

349

When Scanning Cannot Be Performed

● The machine may not be online (scan standb

y mode). On the operation panel, select [Scan] in the [Home]

screen, and press [Remote Scanner] to turn the machine online, and then repeat the operation.

◼ Using AirPrint to Send Fax

Open the document you are sending on your Mac.

From the menu in the application used to open the document, click [Print].

➠ The printing dialog bo

x appears.

In [Printer], select the machine.

Select the printer whose name ends with "Fax."

In [To], enter the fax number.

Click [Fax].

➠ The fax is sent via the machine.

Use [Status Monitor] on the oper

ation panel to view the sending status and log.

Checking the Status and

Log for Sent and Received Faxes(P. 304)

Linking with Mobile Devices

350

Printing from an Android Device

84CU-086

Install a plugin on a mobile de

vice to enable printing from an application that has a print function.

This machine supports Canon plugins as well as Mopria

, which is supported by various manufacturers.

Using a Dedicated Plugin to Print (Canon Print Service)(P. 351)

Using a Common Plugin to Print (Mopria® Print Service)(P. 351)

Using a Dedicated Plugin to Print (Canon Print Service)

ou can use the dedicated Canon plugin Canon Print Service to print from any application.

It also supports Department ID Management. Even when printing with an unknown Department ID is restricted, you

can print by setting a Department ID.

Compatible Operating Systems and Download Site

See the Canon website.

https://global.canon/psmp/

Usage

● Connect a mobile device to the machine.

Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine(P. 341)

● Register the machine to Canon Print Service.

When

the mobile device is connected to the machine via LAN, the IP address information of the machine is

required to register the machine to Canon Print Service. You can view the IP address with [Home] screen

[Mobile Portal] [LAN Connection] tab.

● For

details about registering the machine and the printing method, see the Canon Print Service manual in

"Mobile Apps" at the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

Using a Common Plugin to Print (Mopria

Print Service)

The machine supports Mopria

Print Service, a plugin that enables printing fr

om any application on a Mopria

certied printer or multifunction machine.

You can print on a Mopria

certied printer available from various manufacturers, which is convenient when printing

on the go, without having to install a dedicated application or plugin.

Usage

● Connect a mobile de

vice to the machine.

Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine(P. 341)

● For details about ho

w to print and Mopria

certied printers, see the following website:

https://mopria.org/

When Using Department ID Management on the Machine

● Y

ou cannot use Mopria

Print Service to print when printing from a computer with an unknown Department

ID is restricted.

Enabling Department ID Management(P. 364)

Linking with Mobile Devices

351

● By using Mopria

Scan, you can dir

ectly import scanned data to an Android device.

Linking with Mobile Devices

352

Printing from Chromebook or Other Device with

Chr

ome OS

84CU-087

ou can use a Chromebook or other device equipped with Chrome OS to print without having to install a dedicated

application or printer driver.

Printing from a Chrome OS Device

● Printing fr

om a Chrome OS device may not be supported depending on your country or region.

When Using Department ID Management on the Machine

● You cannot print from a device equipped with Chrome OS when printing from a computer with an unknown

Department ID is restricted.

Enabling Department ID Management(P. 364)

Usage

● Connect a Chr

omebook to the machine.

Connecting a Mobile Device via Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)(P. 342)

When

connecting via USB, connect to the USB port for computer connection on the back of the machine

with a USB cable.

Rear Side(P. 12)

● For details about ho

w to print using the Chromebook, see Chromebook Help.

https://support.google.com/chromebook/answer/7225252

Linking with Mobile Devices

353

Security

Security ................................................................................................................................................................

356

Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator ............................................................................ 357

Authenticating Users and Managing Groups .................................................................................................. 359

Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with Department ID (Department ID Management) ............... 360

Registering a Department ID and PIN ................................................................................................... 362

Enabling Department ID Management .................................................................................................. 364

Setting the Department ID and PIN on a Computer ............................................................................... 366

Conrming Usage by Department ID ..................................................................................................... 369

Performing User Authentication with an LDAP Server When Sending or Saving Data .................................. 370

Protecting the Network .................................................................................................................................... 373

Setting the Firewall ....................................................................................................................................... 374

Changing the Port Number .......................................................................................................................... 377

Using a Proxy ............................................................................................................................................... 378

Using TLS ...................................................................................................................................................... 380

Using IPSec ................................................................................................................................................... 382

Using IEEE 802.1X ......................................................................................................................................... 386

Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate .............................................................................................. 388

Generating a Key and Certicate ........................................................................................................... 389

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate ... 391

Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate from an SCEP Server ............................. 394

If an Error Is Displayed in the Certicate Issuance Request Status .................................................. 399

Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained from an Issuing Authority ........................ 401

Verifying a Received Certicate with OCSP ............................................................................................. 403

Preventing Sending Data by Mistake and Leaking Information .................................................................... 404

Limiting Available Destinations .................................................................................................................... 405

Conrming the Destination before Sending ................................................................................................. 407

Restricting Fax Sending ................................................................................................................................ 409

Restricting Use of Memory Media ................................................................................................................. 411

Restricting Use from a Mobile Device ........................................................................................................... 413

Restricting Printing ....................................................................................................................................... 414

Restricting Printing from a Computer to Secure Print ............................................................................ 415

Saving Received Documents in the Machine (Memory Lock) .................................................................. 416

Preventing Unauthorized Use .......................................................................................................................... 419

Restricting Address Book Registration and Editing ....................................................................................... 420

Restricting Use of Remote UI ........................................................................................................................ 422

Security

354

Preventing Connection to Computer via USB Port ........................................................................................

424

Conguring LPD, RAW, or WSD ..................................................................................................................... 425

Disabling HTTP Communication ................................................................................................................... 427

Applying a Security Policy ................................................................................................................................. 428

Security Policy Items ..................................................................................................................................... 430

Security

355

Security

84CU-00Y

This machine is an information de

vice that uses communication functions and handles various data. Therefore, it is

important to provide measures to prevent unauthorized access when using the machine in a network environment

and measures against security risks such as sending data by mistake and leaking information.

This machine is equipped with various functions and settings to reduce these threats and vulnerabilities. Congure the

settings and use them appropriately according to your usage environment and conditions for safer operation of the

machine.

Creating an Administrator System

Use an administrator account to manage the machine and congure the settings. Operate the machine using

a system in which only a specic administrator(s) knows the ID and PIN.

Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 357)

Managing Users and Gr

oups

Managing the users and groups that use the machine and performing authentication of its use can prevent

operation by third parties and unauthorized access.

Authenticating Users and Managing Groups(P. 359)

Network Settings

Applying the network security settings accor

ding to the usage environment can reduce the threat of

unauthorized access and eavesdropping.

Protecting the Network(P. 373)

Managing Usage Status

When using the function to send a fax or scanned data, measur

es are needed to prevent sending data by

mistake or leaking information. In addition, using a PIN and setting usage restrictions can help prevent

unauthorized use of the Address Book and Remote UI. Implementing measures that include operations

according to usage status of the machine can improve security.

Preventing Sending Data by Mistake and Leaking Information(P. 404)

Preventing Unauthorized Use(P. 419)

Integr

ated Management Using a Security Policy

Applying a security policy that exists for other devices to this machine can allow for sharing of the

information security level within your organization.

Applying a Security Policy(P. 428)

Security

356

Setting the Department ID and PIN for the

Administr

ator

84CU-010

Set the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN to cr

eate an administrator account.

By creating an administrator account, only those users who know these credentials can log in to System Manager

Mode to view and change important settings.

System Manager ID and PIN(P. 6)

This section describes ho

w to congure the settings using the operation panel.

You can also congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer after the System Manager ID and PIN have been

set on the machine.

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 437)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Management Settings] [User Management] [System Manager Information

Settings].

➠ The [System Manager Information Settings] screen is displayed.

If the login screen appears, enter the currently set System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].

Press [System Manager ID and PIN], enter the System Manager ID, and press [Apply].

Specify any number. You cannot set a System Manager ID consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."

Enter the System Manager PIN, and press [Apply].

Specify any number other than "7654321." You cannot set a PIN consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or

"0000000."

Enter the PIN again, and press [Apply].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

● Do not for

get the System Manager ID and PIN. If you forget your System Manager ID and PIN, contact your

dealer or service representative.

If the Problem Persists(P. 728)

Setting the System Manager Information

● On the [System Manager Information Settings] scr

een, press [System Manager Name] to set the name of the

system manager.

● You can also congure the e-mail address and other system manager information by using Remote UI from

a computer.

- The set information is displayed in [Status Monitor/Cancel]

[Device Information] of Remote UI.

Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI(P. 443)

Security

357

- The set e-mail address becomes the destination that is selected by clicking [Mail to System Manager] on

the Portal page of Remote UI. Portal Page of Remote UI(P. 441)

Clearing the System Manager ID and PIN Settings

● Clear the enter

ed values of the System Manager ID and PIN, and then click [Apply] with the elds left empty.

Security

358

Authenticating Users and Managing Groups

84CU-011

Managing the users and gr

oups that use the machine and performing authentication of its use can prevent operation

by third parties and unauthorized access.

Department ID Management

Use Department ID Management to manage users for all functions of the machine. Only users who know the

Department ID and PIN can use the machine. It is also possible to track usage of the machine by Department

ID to help with managing costs.

Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with Department ID (Department ID Management)

. 360)

LDAP Server Authentication

LDAP server authentication can be used for send and save functions when using an LDAP server.

Performing User Authentication with an LDAP Server When Sending or Saving Data(P. 370)

* Y

ou can also use Department ID Management and LDAP server authentication together at the same time.

Security

359

Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with

Department ID (Department ID Management)

84CU-012

Department ID Management is a function for managing users and gr

oups by allocating a Department ID to each user

or group.

When using Department ID Management, it is recommended to create an administrator account and a system for

management and operation by a specic user.

What You Can Do with Department ID Management(P. 360)

Operation Examples(P. 360)

Department ID Management Procedure(P. 361)

What You Can Do with Department ID Management

By using Department ID Management, you can do the following:

Enhance Security

● Set a PIN for Department ID to require authentication by entering the Department ID and PIN when a user

logs in.

● Restrict operations for an unknown Department ID.

Monitor Device Usage and Manage Costs

● Tally and keep track of the number of printed pages by Department ID.

● Set the maximum number of pages that can be printed by Department ID to control the number of sheets

of paper that can be used.

● Restrict copy, print, scan, or fax functions by Department ID.

Operation Examples

Assign Department IDs to users and groups according to usage environment and purpose. In addition, setting a PIN

to a Department ID can prevent unauthorized access and enable stricter management.

Example 1: Managing individual users by assigning them each a Department ID

Use this method to manage individual users by assigning them each a separate Department ID.

This is useful when ther

e are few people who use the machine and you want to limit the number of pages to be

printed and function access for each user.

Users log in with their own Department ID.

Example 2: Managing users as a group

Use this method to manage multiple users in a group by assigning each group a separate Department ID.

This is useful when ther

e are many people or groups that use the machine, such as oce departments and

school classes.

Security

360

Users log in with the Department ID of the group to which they belong.

Department ID Management Procedure

o use Department ID Management, follow the procedure below.

Administrator privileges are required.

Step 1

Set up Department ID Management.

Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 357)

Registering a Department ID and PIN(P. 362)

Step 2

Start Department ID Management.

Restrict oper

ations for unknown Department IDs, as needed.

Enabling Department ID Management(P. 364)

Step 3

Set the Department ID and PIN on each computer using the machine.

Setting the Department ID and PIN on a Computer(P. 366)

Step 4

Perform Department ID Management.

Conrming Usage b

y Department ID(P. 369)

Security

361

Registering a Department ID and PIN

84CU-013

y a group or user to be managed.

To perform authentication at login, set a PIN.

Limit the number of pages that can be printed and usable functions for each Department ID, as needed.

This section describes how to register a Department ID and PIN using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to register this

information.

[Department ID Management](P. 567)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [User Management] [Department ID Management].

➠ The [Department ID Management] scr

een is displayed.

Click [Register New Department].

➠ The [Register Ne

w Department] screen is displayed.

In [New Department], set the Department ID and PIN.

● Enter numbers in [Department ID].

● T

o set a PIN, select the [Set PIN] checkbox, and enter the same number in [PIN] and [Conrm].

* You cannot set a Department ID or PIN consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."

Congure [Restrict Functions] as needed.

● T

o limit the number of pages that can be printed, select the desired item and enter the maximum number of

pages in [Number of Pages].

● To restrict the usable functions, select the items you want to restrict.

* Select [Restrict Scan] to restrict the following scan functions.

● Saving scanned data to a USB memory device

● Sending e-mails

● Saving scanned data to a shared folder or FTP server

Click [OK].

➠ The r

egistered Department ID is added to [Department ID Page Total] on the [Department ID

Management] screen.

Security

362

Log out from Remote UI.

Editing a Registered Department ID

● T

o edit the registered information, click the Department ID you want to edit in [Department ID Page Total]

on the [Department ID Management] screen.

Security

363

Enabling Department ID Management

84CU-014

After r

egistering a Department ID, congure the settings to enable Department ID Management. Once Department ID

Management is started, a login screen appears when operating the machine.

By default, the following functions can be operated without having to log in.

● Printing and sending faxes from a computer

● Scanning and saving data to a computer

● B&W copying

You can also restrict these operations as needed.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Department ID Management](P. 567)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [User Management] [Department ID Management] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Department ID Management] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Department ID Management] checkbox.

Clear the items for the operations to be restricted, as needed.

To restrict printing and sending faxes from a computer with an unknown Department

Clear the [Allo

w Print Jobs with Unknown IDs] checkbox.

* When this checkbox is cleared, you must set the Department ID on the driver to be able to print or send

faxes from a computer.

Setting the Department ID and PIN on a Computer(P. 366)

To restrict scanned data to be saved to a computer

Clear the [Allo

w Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs] checkbox.

* The Department ID cannot be set on the driver or application for scanned data to be saved to a computer.

Therefore, when this checkbox is cleared, users can no longer save scanned data to the computer during

Department ID Management.

To restrict Black & White copying for an unknown Department ID

Clear the [Allow Black & White Copy Jobs] checkbox.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Security

364

Log out from Remote UI.

Security

365

Setting the Department ID and PIN on a Computer

84CU-015

When r

estricting printing and sending faxes from a computer with an unknown Department ID, you must set the

Department ID and PIN on each computer using the machine. If you want to include printing from a computer in the

usage for each Department ID even when these are not restricted, set the Department ID and PIN for each computer.

When Using Windows(P. 366)

When Using macOS(P. 367)

◼ When Using Windo

Administrator privileges are required on each computer.

Log on to the computer using an administrator account.

Click [

] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].

➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Click the driver of the machine

[Manage] [Printer properties].

➠ The driver pr

operties screen is displayed.

On the [Device Settings] tab, set [User Management] to [Department ID

Management].

Click [Settings] at the bottom right.

➠ The [Department ID/PIN Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Set the Department ID and PIN.

● To set a PIN, select the [Allow PIN Settings] checkbox, and enter a PIN.

● Click [Verify] to conrm that the Department ID and PIN have been entered correctly.

* This is not available when the machine is connected to the computer via the USB or Web Services on

Devices (WSD) port.

Set the authentication process and applicable range, as needed.

Conrming the Department ID and PIN when printing or sending fax

Select the [Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing] and/or [Conrm Department ID/PIN When Sending

Faxes] checkboxes.

Black & White printing without setting a Department ID

Select the [Do Not Use Department ID Management When B&W Printing] checkbo

Security

366

* If this setting is selected while restricting printing from a computer with an unknown Department ID using

the settings on the machine, Black & White printing cannot be performed during Department ID

Management.

When the machine is connected to the computer via the USB or WSD port

Select the [Authenticate Department ID/PIN at De

vice] checkbox.

Click [OK]

[OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

◼ When Using macOS

Click [

] [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

➠ The [Printers & Scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Select the machine, and click [Options & Supplies].

On the [Options] tab, select the [Department ID Management] checkbox, and click

[OK].

On the driver setting screen, set the Department ID and PIN.

You must set the Department ID and PIN each time you print or send a fax.

When using a printer driver

Display the printing dialog box, and select the printer driver of the machine. Printing from a

Computer(P. 210)

From the print options pop-up menu, select [Special Features].

If print options are not displayed, click [Show Details] in the printing dialog box.

Select the [Use Department ID Management] checkbox, and click [Settings].

➠ The [Department ID/PIN Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Enter the Department ID and PIN.

Set the authentication process and applicable range, as needed.

Security

367

Conrming the Department ID and PIN when printing

Select the [Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing] checkbo

Black & White printing without setting a Department ID

Select the [Do Not Use Department ID Management When B&W Printing] checkbox.

* If this setting is selected while restricting printing from a computer with an unknown Department ID

using the settings on the machine, Black & White printing cannot be performed during Department ID

Management.

Click [OK].

When using a fax driver

Display the printing dialog box, and select the fax driver of the machine.

Sending Faxes from a

Computer (PC Faxing)(P

. 293)

From the print options pop-up menu, select [Advanced Settings].

If print options are not displayed, click [Show Details] at the bottom of the screen.

On the [Authentication] tab, select the [Use Department ID Management] checkbox, and enter the

Department ID and PIN.

Security

368

Conrming Usage b

y Department ID

84CU-016

ou can view the number of pages printed and copied for each Department ID when Department ID Management is

enabled.

This section describes how to view this information using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to view this

information.

[Department ID Management](P. 567)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [User Management]

[Department ID Management].

➠ The [Department ID Management] scr

een is displayed.

In [Department ID Page Total], view the usage.

Resetting the count for a specic Department ID only

For the Department ID with the count to r

eset, click [Clear Count]

[OK].

Resetting the count for All Department IDs

Click [Clear All Counts]

[OK].

Log out from Remote UI after viewing the usage.

Security

369

Performing User Authentication with an LDAP Server

When Sending or Saving Data

84CU-017

ou can use LDAP server authentication when using the send and save functions of the machine.

The machine can display a login screen when sending or saving faxes or scanned data to restrict these functions to

only those users managed by an LDAP server.

You can also restrict the send and save destinations and prohibit sending and saving for each function.

For the specications of LDAP server authentication of the machine, see the specications of the authentication

function.

Supported Software and Servers(P. 37)

Congur

e these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the

settings.

Administrator privileges are required.

Required Preparations

● Register the LD

AP server to be used for authentication in the machine.

Registering LDAP Servers(P. 77)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [TX Settings]

[Authentication Settings for Send Function] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Authentication Settings for Send Function] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Use User Authentication] checkbox in [Basic Settings].

During Department ID Management

Set the action when logging out after being logged in with both authentication and Department ID

Management.

o display the screen to select the logout authentication after pressing the logout button, select the [Display

Conrmation Screen When Logging Out] checkbox.

When this checkbox is cleared, you are logged out from both without the screen being displayed.

In [E-Mail/I-Fax Sending Settings], specify whether to allow sending of e-mails and I-

Fax

es.

● When [Do Not Allo

w] is selected, you cannot send scanned data by e-mails or I-Fax.

● When [Only Allow Sending to Myself] is selected, you can only send e-mails and I-Faxes to the e-mail

addresses of the users authenticated with the LDAP server.

When [Allow] or [Only Allow Sending to Myself] is selected

Congur

e the settings to display the authentication screen and specify the sender.

[Authentication Method]

Specify whether to display the authentication scr

een of the SMTP server when sending data.

Security

370

[Display the authentication screen using the same user name as when the sending operation started]

Displays the authentication scr

een using the same user name and password entered on the login screen for

authenticated sending.

[Display the authentication screen without any authentication information]

Displays the authentication screen without a user name and password.

[Use device-specic authentication information and do not display the authentication screen]

Perform SMTP server authentication using the user name and password set in the mail server details without

displaying the authentication screen.

[Specify Authentication User Destination as Sender]

Select this checkbox to set the e-mail address of the user authenticated on the LDAP server as the sender.

When this checkbox is cleared, the e-mail address of the machine set in the details of the mail server becomes

the sender.

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)(P

. 245)

In [File Sending Settings], specify whether to allow saving of scanned data to a

shar

ed folder or FTP server.

● When [Do Not Allo

w] is selected, you cannot save scanned data to a shared folder or FTP server.

● When [Only Allow Sending to Myself or Specied Folder] is selected, you can only save data to a folder

registered in the LDAP server or a folder specied with [Specify Destination Folder].

When [Allow] is selected

Congur

e the settings to display the authentication screen.

[When Sending File to Destination Registered in Address Book]

[Authentication Method]

Specify whether to display the authentication scr

een of the server when sending data.

[Display the authentication screen using the same authentication information as when the sending

operation started]

Displays the authentication screen using the same user name and password entered on the login screen

for authenticated sending.

[Display the authentication screen without any authentication information]

Displays the authentication screen without a user name and password.

[Use the authentication information from the address book and do not display the authentication

screen]

Perform server authentication using the user name and password set in the Address Book without

displaying the authentication screen.

When [Only Allow Sending to Myself or Specied Folder] is selected

Congur

e the settings to display the authentication screen and the settings of the destination folder.

[When Sending File to Myself]

[Authentication Method]

Specify whether to display the authentication scr

een of the server when sending data.

[Use the same authentication information as when the sending operation started]

Performs server authentication using the same user name and password entered on the login screen for

authenticated sending.

To display the authentication screen using the same user name and password when sending data, select

the [Display Authentication Screen] checkbox.

[Display the authentication screen without any authentication information]

Security

371

Displays the authentication screen without a user name and password.

[Specify Destination Folder]

o specify the store location, select this checkbox, and enter [Host Name] and [Folder Path].

When this checkbox is cleared, the store location is set using the authenticated user information registered in

the LDAP server.

[Host Name]

Enter the host name for the shared folder or FTP server to be used as the store location.

[Folder Path]

Enter the path to the store location excluding the host name.

To add a user name authenticated with the LDAP server to the path, select the [Add User Name] checkbox.

In [Fax Sending Settings], specify whether to allow sending of faxes.

When [Do Not Allow] is selected, you cannot use the fax function.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Security

372

Protecting the Network

84CU-018

Connecting the machine to a network allo

ws you link it to computers and mobile devices for more convenient

operations. However, this also creates risks of unauthorized access and eavesdropping over the network.

By conguring the security settings according to your network environment, you can reduce these risks to ensure

safer use of the machine.

Filtering Using the Firewall Settings

Allows communications only with devices that have a specic IP address or MAC address to prevent

unauthorized access.

Setting the Firewall(P. 374)

Port Contr

If the port number being used by a communicating device, such as a computer or server, is changed, change

the setting on the machine too. In addition, if it is clear that there is an unneeded protocol, use of the

protocol is prohibited on the machine and that port is closed to prevent intrusion from the outside.

Changing the Port Number(P. 377)

Using a Pr

oxy Server

Using a proxy server to connect the machine to a network not only facilitates managing communication with

external networks but blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced

security.

Using a Proxy(P. 378)

Encryption of Communication Using TLS

ou can use TLS to encrypt communication when using Remote UI. This reduces the risks of data

eavesdropping and tampering during communication.

Using TLS(P. 380)

Encryption of Communication Using IPSec

Use Internet Pr

otocol Security (IPSec) to encrypt data at the IP protocol level. This reduces the risk of data

eavesdropping and tampering during communication without relying on an application or network

conguration.

Using IPSec(P. 382)

Using the Machine in a Network with IEEE 802.1X Authentication

When connecting the machine to a network that uses IEEE 802.1X authentication, you must congure the

settings on the machine such as the authentication method managed by the authentication server.

Using IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

Managing and Verifying the Key and Certicate

You can generate a key and certicate used to encrypt communication and register a key and certicate

obtained from a certication authority. By conguring the settings to check the revocation status of a

certicate (using OCSP), you can check to see if a certicate received from a certication authority has been

revoked.

Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate(P

. 388)

◼ See Also

For the network settings at setup, see the following.

Conguring Your Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 69)

Security

373

Setting the Firewall

84CU-019

Set up the pack

et-ltering rewall to prevent unauthorized access.

First, as a prerequisite, set whether to allow or block communication with other devices. Next, specify the IP addresses

or MAC addresses of devices you want to block or allow as exceptions.

For the number of addresses that can be specied and the protocols whose communication can be restricted, see the

rewall specications.

Firewall(P. 33)

Setting IP Address Filtering(P. 374)

Setting MAC Address Filtering(P. 375)

● MA

C address ltering is not available when connecting the machine to a wireless LAN.

● Multicast and broadcast addresses are not restricted even when the setting is congured to block the

sending of data from the machine to other devices.

Setting IP Address Filtering

Set IPv4 addr

ess ltering or IPv6 address ltering according to your usage environment.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.

However, the operation panel can only be used to enable or disable the lter.

[Firewall Settings](P. 475)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

● If you set an incorr

ect IP address, you will no longer be able to access Remote UI. If this happens, use the

operation panel to disable the rewall settings, and then use Remote UI to set the IP address again.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Network Settings]

[Firewall Settings].

➠ The [Fir

ewall Settings] screen is displayed.

Click [Edit] for the IP address send or receive lter.

● T

o restrict sending of data from the machine to other devices, click [Edit] for the send lter.

● To restrict receiving of data from other devices, click [Edit] for the receive lter.

Security

374

Select the [Use Filter] checkbox.

➠ The IP addr

ess is enabled.

In [Default Policy], set the ltering pr

erequisites.

As a ltering pr

erequisite, select whether to allow or block communication with other devices.

● In [Addr

ess to Register], enter an IP address, and then click [Add].

● You can also specify a range of IP addresses by using a hyphen (-) or prex length.

Input example:

● One IPv4 address

192.168.0.10

● One IPv6 address

fe80::10

● Specifying a range

192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20

192.168.0.32/27

fe80::1234/64

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Setting MAC Address Filtering

This section describes ho

w to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.

You cannot use the operation panel to congure some of the settings.

[Firewall Settings](P. 475)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

● If you set an incorr

ect MAC address, you will no longer be able to access Remote UI. If this happens, use the

operation panel to disable the rewall settings, and then use Remote UI to set the MAC address again.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Security

375

Click [Network Settings]

[Firewall Settings].

➠ The [Fir

ewall Settings] screen is displayed.

Click [Edit] for the MAC address send or receive lter.

● To restrict sending of data from the machine to other devices, click [Edit] for the send lter.

● To restrict receiving of data from other devices, click [Edit] for the receive lter.

Select the [Use Filter] checkbox.

➠ The MA

C address is enabled.

In [Default Policy], set the ltering pr

erequisites.

As a ltering pr

erequisite, select whether to allow or block communication with other devices.

● In [Addr

ess to Register], enter a MAC address, and then click [Add].

● Enter MAC addresses without separating with hyphens (-) or colons (:).

Input example:

123A456B789C

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Security

376

Changing the Port Number

84CU-01A

ypically, conventional port numbers are used for major protocols, but these port numbers may be changed to

enhance security. As the port numbers must be the same on communicating devices, such as a computer or server,

when the port number is changed, the setting on the machine also needs to be changed.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.

[Port Number Settings](P. 485)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [Network Settings] [Port Number Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Port Number Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Change the port number of the protocol, and click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Protocol Settings

● For the protocol settings and settings of the functions using the protocol, see the following:

LPD/RAW/WSD Conguring LPD

, RAW, or WSD(P. 425)

HTTP

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 427)

Multicast Disco

very

Conguring SLP Communication

(P. 86)

POP3/SMTP

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)(P

. 245)

FTP

Scanning (Saving to a Shared Folder or FTP Server)(P. 259)

SNMP Conguring SNMP(P

. 81)

Changing the Port Number of the Proxy Server or LDAP Server

● To change the port number of the proxy server or LDAP server, see the following:

Using a Proxy(P. 378)

Registering LDAP Servers(P. 77)

Changing the Port Number of the Printer Driver (Windo

ws)

● When the port number of the print protocol (LPD or RAW) is changed on the machine, change the port

number setting on the computer too.

Conguring a Printer Port (Windo

ws)(P. 198)

Security

377

Using a Proxy

84CU-01C

Using a pr

oxy server to connect to a network not only facilitates managing communications with external networks

but blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security.

Congure these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the

settings.

Administrator privileges are required.

Required Preparations

● Pr

epare the address, port number, and authentication information of the proxy server.

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Network Settings]

[Proxy Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Pr

oxy Settings] screen is displayed.

Select the [Use Proxy] checkbox.

Enter the address and port number of the proxy server.

● In [HT

TP Proxy Server Address], enter the IP address and host name.

● In [HTTP Proxy Server Port Number], enter the port number.

Set the applicable range and authentication information according to your usage

envir

onment.

When using a proxy server also specied for communication with de

vices on the same

domain

Select the [Use Proxy within Same Domain] checkbox.

When authentication is required to connect to a proxy server

Select the [Use Pr

oxy Authentication] checkbox, and enter the user name to be used for authentication using

single-byte alphanumeric characters.

To set a password to use for authentication, select the [Set/Change Password] checkbox, and enter the

password using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Security

378

Log out from Remote UI.

Security

379

Using TLS

84CU-01E

ransport Layer Security (TLS) is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over the network. Encrypting

communication with TLS when using Remote UI reduces the risks of data eavesdropping and tampering during

communication.

To use TLS encrypted communication for Remote UI, specify the key and certicate (server certicate) you want to use,

and then enable TLS on Remote UI.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to congure the

settings. However, the operation panel can only be used to enable or disable TLS on Remote UI.

[Remote UI]

. 572)

Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Required Preparations

● Pr

epare the key and certicate to use for TLS encrypted communication.

Managing and Verifying a Key

and Certicate(P

. 388)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

In [Network Settings], click [TLS Settings].

➠ The [TLS Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Specify the key and certicate to use for TLS encrypted communication.

In [Key and Certicate Settings], click [Ke

y and Certicate].

➠ The [Key and Certicate Settings] screen is displayed.

To the right of the key and certicate to use, click [Register Default Ke

y].

● When you click the key name (or certicate icon), the certicate details appear.

● On the certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the certicate is valid.

Set the TLS version and algorithm.

Click [TLS Details]

[Edit].

➠ The [Edit TLS Details] scr

een is displayed.

Set the usable version and algorithm, and click [OK].

Some combinations of versions and algorithms cannot be used. For the supported combinations of

versions and algorithms, see the TLS specications.

TLS(P. 36)

[Allo

wed Versions]

Security

380

Specify the maximum and minimum versions of TLS.

[Algorithm Settings]

Select the checkbo

x of the algorithm to use for TLS.

Enable TLS on Remote UI.

Click [License/Other]

[Remote UI Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Remote UI Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Use TLS] checkbox, and click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

When a Warning Message Appears at Remote UI Startup

● A warning message about the security certicate may appear when starting up Remote UI with TLS enabled.

If ther

e are no problems with the certicate or TLS settings, you can continue operations.

Using TLS to Encrypt Sent and Received E-mails and I-Faxes

● If the SMTP server and POP3 server support TLS, TLS can be used for communication with these servers.

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)(P. 245)

Security

381

Using IPSec

84CU-01F

Use IP Security Pr

otocol (IPSec) to prevent eavesdropping and tampering of IP packets sent and received over an IP

network. This performs encryption at the IP protocol level to ensure security without relying on an application or

network conguration.

IPSec Applicable Conditions and Supported Modes(P. 382)

IPSec Policy Congur

ation(P. 382)

Setting IPSec(P. 382)

IPSec Applicable Conditions and Supported Modes

Packets where IPSec does not apply

● Packets specifying a loopback, multicast, or broadcast address

● IKE packets sent from UDP port 500

● ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicitation and Neighbor Advertisement packets

Operation mode of key exchange protocol (IKE mode)

The IKE mode supported by the machine is only the main mode that is used to encrypt packets. The non-

encrypting aggressive mode is not supported.

Communication mode

The communication mode supported by the machine is only the transport mode, which encrypts only the

part excluding the IP header. Tunnel mode, which encrypts the entire IP packet, is not supported.

Using IPSec together with IP address ltering

The IP address lter settings are applied rst. Setting the Firewall(P. 374)

IPSec Policy Congur

ation

To perform IPSec communication on the machine, you must create an IPSec policy that includes the applicable range

and algorithms for authentication and encryption. The policy is mainly made up of the following items.

Selector

Specify which IP packets to apply IPSec communication. In addition to specifying the IP address of the

machine and communicating devices, you can also specify their port numbers.

IKE

The key exchange protocol supports Internet Key Exchange Version 1 (IKEv1). For the authentication method,

select the pre-shared key method or digital signature method.

● Pre-shared Key Method:

This authentication method uses a common key word, called Shared Key, for communication between the

machine and other devices.

● Digital Signature Method

The machine and the other devices authenticate each other by mutually verifying their digital signatures.

ESP/AH

Specify the settings for ESP/AH, which is the protocol used for IPSec communication. ESP and AH can be used

at the same time. Use Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) for even greater security.

Setting IPSec

Enable the use of IPSec, and then create and register the IPSec policy. If multiple policies have been created, specify

the order in which they are applied.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

Security

382

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congur

e the settings.

However, the operation panel can only be used to enable or disable IPSec.

[Use IPSec](P. 484)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Required Preparations

● Connect the machine dir

ectly to a computer on the same virtual private network (VPN) as the machine.

Conrm the operation conditions, and nish the settings on the computer in advance.

IPSec(P. 33)

● Pr

epare the following according to the IKE authentication method:

- When using the pre-shared key method, enable TLS for Remote UI communication.

Using TLS(P. 380)

When using the digital signature method, prepare the key and certicate to use.

Managing and

erifying a Key and Certicate(P. 388)

● When using PFS, check that PFS is enabled on the communicating device.

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Network Settings]

[IPSec Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit IPSec Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Use IPSec] checkbox, and click [OK].

To only receive packets that meet the policy, clear the [Receive Non-Policy Packets] checkbox.

Click [Register New Policy].

➠ The [Register Ne

w IPSec Policy] screen is displayed.

In [Policy Settings], enter the policy name, and select the [Enable Policy] checkbox.

For the policy name, enter a name to identify the policy using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

In [Selector Settings], set the selector.

[Local Address Settings]

Select the type of IP addr

ess of the machine to which the policy is applied.

● To apply IPSec to all IP packets, select [All IP Addresses].

● To apply IPSec to IP packets sent and received using an IPv4 or IPv6 address, select [IPv4 Address] or [IPv6

Address].

[Remote Address Settings]

Select the type of IP address of the communicating device to which the policy is applied.

● To apply IPSec to all IP packets, select [All IP Addresses].

● To apply IPSec to IP packets sent and received using an IPv4 or IPv6 address, select [All IPv4 Addresses] or

[All IPv6 Addresses].

Security

383

● T

o specify an IPv4 or IPv6 address to which IPSec is applied, select [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual

Settings].

[Addresses to Set Manually]

When [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected, enter the IP address. You can also

specify a range of IP addresses by using a hyphen (-).

Input example:

● One IPv4 address

192.168.0.10

● One IPv6 address

fe80::10

● Range specication

192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20

[Subnet Settings]

When [IPv4 Manual Settings] is selected, you can use a subnet mask to specify the range of IPv4

addresses.

Input example:

255.255.255.240

[Prex Length]

When [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected, you can use a prex length to specify the range of IPv6

addresses. Enter the prex length with a range of 0 to 128.

[Port Settings]

Set the port to which IPSec is applied in [Local Port] on the machine and [Remote Port] on the

communicating device.

● To apply IPSec to all port numbers, select [All Ports].

● To apply IPSec to a specic protocol such as HTTP or WSD, select [Single Port], and enter the port number

of the protocol.

In [IKE Settings], set IKE.

[IKE Mode]

The machine only supports the main mode.

[Authentication Method]

Select the authentication method of the machine.

● When

[Pre-Shared Key Method] is selected, click [Shared Key Settings]

enter

the string to use as the

shared key using single-byte alphanumeric characters

click [OK].

● When

[Digital Signature Method] is selected, click [Key and Certicate]

[Register Default Key] to the right

of the k

ey and certicate to use.

[Validity]

Enter the valid period of IKE SA (ISAKMP SA) to use as the control communication path in minutes.

[Authentication/Encryption Algorithm]

Select the algorithm to use for key exchange.

In [IPSec Network Settings], congur

e the IPSec network settings.

[Use PFS]

Select this checkbo

x to congure PFS for the session key.

[Validity]

Security

384

Specify the valid period of IPSec SA to use as the data communication path by time, size, or both.

● When the [Specify b

y Time] checkbox is selected, enter the valid period in minutes.

● When the [Specify by Size] checkbox is selected, enter the valid period in megabytes.

● When both are selected, the item whose specied value is reached rst is applied.

[Authentication/Encryption Algorithm]

Select this checkbox according to the IPSec header (ESP and AH) to be used and its algorithm.

[ESP Authentication]

When [ESP] is selected, select the authentication algorithm. To perform ESP authentication, select [SHA1].

Otherwise, select [Do Not Use].

[ESP Encryption]

When [ESP] is selected, select the encryption algorithm. If you do not want to specify the algorithm, select

[NULL]. To disable encryption, select [Do Not Use].

[Connection Mode]

The machine only supports the transport mode.

Click [OK].

➠ The ne

wly registered policy is added to [Registered IPSec Policies] on the [IPSec Settings] screen.

When multiple policies are registered

Click [Up] or [Do

wn] to the right of the policy name to set the priority. Higher level policies have priority in

application to IPSec communication.

Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Editing Registered Policies

● T

o edit the registered information, click the policy name you want to edit in [Registered IPSec Policies] on the

[IPSec Settings] screen.

Security

385

Using IEEE 802.1X

84CU-01H

In a network envir

onment with IEEE 802.1X authentication, only client devices (supplicants) authenticated by the

authentication server (RADIUS server) are allowed to connect to the network via the LAN switch (authenticator),

thereby blocking unauthorized access. When connecting the machine to a network that uses IEEE 802.1X

authentication, you must congure the settings on the machine such as the authentication method managed by the

authentication server.

IEEE 802.1X Authentication Methods(P. 386)

Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

IEEE 802.1X Authentication Methods

The follo

wing IEEE 802.1X authentication methods are supported:

TLS

The machine and authentication server authenticate each other by mutually verifying their certicates. This

cannot be used together with another authentication method.

TTLS

This authentication method uses a user name and password for machine authentication and a CA certicate

for the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol, and TTLS can be

used together with PEAP.

PEAP

The required settings are almost the same as those for TTLS, with MSCHAPv2 used as the internal protocol.

Setting IEEE 802.1X

First enable IEEE 802.1X, and then set the authentication method.

This section describes ho

w to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.

However, the operation panel can only be used to enable or disable IEEE 802.1X.

[Use IEEE 802.1X](P. 475)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Required Preparations

● When using TLS as the authentication method, pr

epare the key and certicate issued by the certicate

authority and used for authentication of the machine. Managing and Verifying a Key and

Certicate(P. 388)

* A preinstalled CA certicate or a CA certicate installed from Remote UI is used for server authentication.

● When using TTLS or PEAP as the authentication method, TLS-encrypt communication using Remote UI.

Using TLS(P. 380)

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [Network Settings] [IEEE 802.1X Settings] [Edit].

Security

386

➠ The [Edit IEEE 802.1X Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] checkbox, and enter the login name.

For the login name, enter a name to identify the user (EAP Identity) using single-byte alphanumeric

char

acters.

When verifying the certicate of an authentication server

Select the [V

erify Authentication Server Certicate] checkbox.

When verifying the common name of the certicate, select the [Verify Authentication Server Name] checkbox,

and enter the name of the authentication server to which the user is registered.

Congure the settings accor

ding to the authentication method to be used.

When using TLS

Select the [Use TLS] checkbox.

In [Name of Key to Use], click [Key and Certicate].

➠ The [Ke

y and Certicate Settings] screen is displayed.

To the right of the key and certicate to use, click [Register Default Ke

y].

● Click the key name (or certicate icon) to display the certicate details.

● On the certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the certicate is valid.

When using TTLS or PEAP

Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] checkbox.

When using T

TLS, select the internal protocol to be used.

Use [Use Login Name as User Name] to specify whether to use the login name of IEEE 802.1X

authentication for the user name.

In [User Name/Password Settings], click [Change User Name/Password].

➠ The [Change User Name/Password] screen is displayed.

Set the user name and password, and select the [OK] checkbox.

● Enter the user name using single-b

yte alphanumeric characters.

● To set a password, select the [Change Password] checkbox, and enter the same password in both

[Password] and [Conrm] using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Security

387

Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate

84CU-01J

o encrypt communication with TLS when using Remote UI, or to use TLS as the IEEE 802.1X authentication method, a

key and certicate are required In addition, depending on the communicating device, encrypted communication using

a specied certicate may be requested, thereby requiring a key and certicate.

Managing a Key and Certicate

You can prepare a key and certicate using the follo

wing methods:

Generating a Key and Certicate on the Machine

Generate the key and certicate required for TLS on the machine. You can immediately communicate where

self-signed certicates are allowed.

Generating a Key and Certicate(P

. 389)

Registering a Certicate Issued by a Certicate Authority in a Self-generated Key

When a key is generated on the machine, generate a Certicate Signing Request (CSR), have the certicate

authority issue a certicate, and then register that certicate in the key.

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) and Obtaining and Registering a

Certicate(P

. 391)

Registering a Certicate Obtained from an SCEP Server to a Self-generated Key

When generating a key on the machine, request a Simple Certicate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) server to

issue a certicate, and then register the obtained certicate. You can also request that a certicate be issued

at a specied date and time.

Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr

om an SCEP Server(P. 394)

Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained from an Issuing Authority

authority, without self-generating the key and certicate. You can use a digital certicate that matches the

communicating device and authentication level.

Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained fr

om an Issuing Authority(P. 401)

Verifying a Certicate

You can congur

e the settings to verify the validity of a certicate that the machine receives from a certicate

authority, using the Online Certicate Status Protocol (OCSP).

Verifying a Received Certicate with OCSP(P. 403)

Security

388

Generating a Key and Certicate

84CU-01K

Gener

ate the key and certicate required for TLS-encrypted communication on the machine. A self-signed certicate is

used for the self-generated key.

For the algorithm of the keys and certicates that can be generated with this machine, see the specications of the

self-generated key and self-signed certicate.

Keys and Certicates(P

. 34)

Generate a key and certicate using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to generate a

key and certicate.

Administrator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings] [Generate Key].

➠ The [Gener

ate Key] screen is displayed.

Select [Network Communication], and click [OK].

➠ The [Gener

ate Network Communication Key] screen is displayed.

In [Key Settings], enter the name of the key, and select the signature and key

algorithm.

● Enter the k

ey name using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

● For the key algorithm, select [RSA] or [ECDSA], and select the key length from the pulldown menu. The longer

the key length, the better the security, but this slows down communication processing.

In [Certicate Settings], set the certicate information.

[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]/[Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]

Enter the start and end dates of the certicate validity period.

[Country/Region]

Select [Select Country/Region], and then select the country or r

egion from the pulldown menu, or select

[Enter Internet Country Code], and enter the country code.

[State]/[City]/[Organization]/[Organization Unit]

Enter the items as needed using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

[Common Name]

Enter the name of the certicate subject as needed using single-byte alphanumeric characters. This

corresponds to the Common Name (CN).

Click [OK].

Security

389

➠ The gener

ated key and certicate are added to [Registered Key and Certicate] on the [Key and Certicate

Settings] screen.

Log out from Remote UI.

Viewing and Verifying Detailed Information of a Generated Certicate

● When you click the k

ey name (or certicate icon) in [Registered Key and Certicate] on the [Key and

Certicate Settings] screen, the certicate details appear.

● On the certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the certicate is valid.

When the Key and Certicate Cannot Be Deleted

● You cannot delete a key and certicate being used. Disable the function being used, or delete these after

switching to another key and certicate.

Security

390

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)

and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate

84CU-01L

As a certicate gener

ated on the machine does not have a signature from a certicate authority, the machine may not

be able to communicate depending on the communicating device. In this case, registering a signed certicate issued

by a certicate authority to the key enables communication even with a self-generated key.

For the certicate authority to issue a signed certicate, you must make a request attached with a Certicate Signing

Request (CSR). The machine generates a CSR at the same time it generates a key.

For more information about the keys that can be generated by the machine and the CSR algorithm, see self-generated

key and CSR specications.

Keys and Certicates(P

. 34)

Generating a Key and CSR(P. 391)

Registering a Certicate Issued b

y a Certicate Authority to a Key(P. 392)

Generating a Key and CSR

Generate a key and CSR using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to generate a key and

certicate.

Administrator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings] [Generate Key].

➠ The [Gener

ate Key] screen is displayed.

Select [Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)], and click [OK].

➠ The [Gener

ate Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)] screen is displayed.

In [Key Settings], enter the name of the key, and select the signature algorithm and

ey algorithm.

● Enter the k

ey name using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

● For the key algorithm, select [RSA] or [ECDSA], and select the key length from the pulldown menu. The longer

the key length, the better the security, but this slows down communication processing.

In [Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Settings], set the CSR information.

[Country/Region]

Select [Select Country/Region], and either select the country or r

egion from the pulldown menu, or select

[Enter Internet Country Code] and enter the country code.

[State]/[City]/[Organization]/[Organization Unit]

Security

391

Enter the items as needed using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

[Common Name]

Enter the name of the certicate subject as needed using single-b

yte alphanumeric characters. This

corresponds to the Common Name (CN).

Click [OK].

➠ The [Ke

y and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Details] screen is displayed.

Click [Store in File] to save the CSR le to a computer.

Log out from Remote UI.

Submit the application with CSR le attached to the certicate authority

● When the CSR is gener

ated, the key is registered to the machine, but it cannot be used until the certicate

issued by the certicate authority is registered.

Registering a Certicate Issued b

y a Certicate Authority to a Key

Administrator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Device Management]

[Key and Certicate Settings].

➠ The [Ke

y and Certicate Settings] screen is displayed.

Click the key name (or certicate icon) to which to r

egister the certicate.

Security

392

➠ The [Ke

y and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Details] screen is displayed.

Click [Register Certicate].

In [Specify File], click [Browse], and specify the le of the certicate issued b

y the

certicate authority.

Click [Register].

➠ The icon of the certicate displayed in [Register

ed Key and Certicate] on the [Key and Certicate Settings]

screen changes from [

] to [ ].

Log out from Remote UI.

Viewing and Verifying Detailed Information of a Registered Certicate

● Click the key name (or certicate icon) in [Registered Key and Certicate] on the [Key and Certicate Settings]

screen to display the certicate details.

● On the certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the certicate is valid.

When the Key and Certicate Cannot Be Deleted

● You cannot delete a key and certicate being used. Disable the function being used, or delete these after

switching to another key and certicate.

Security

393

Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a

Certicate fr

om an SCEP Server

84CU-01R

When gener

ating a key on the machine, you can request a Simple Certicate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) server that

manages certicates to issue a certicate. The certicate issued by an SCEP server is registered automatically to the

machine.

For information about the algorithm of the keys that can be generated with this machine and certicates that can be

requested to be issued, see the specications of the self-generated key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR).

Keys

and Certicates(P

. 34)

This machine supports Network Device Enrollment Service (NDES) in Windows Server 2008 R2, 2012 R2, and 2016 for

the SCEP server. Communication using HTTPS is not supported.

To obtain and register a certicate from an SCEP server, congure the settings for communicating with the SCEP

server, and then generate a key and request certicate issuance. You can also request certicate issuance at a

specied date and time.

Conguring the SCEP Server Communication Settings(P

. 394)

Generating a Key and Requesting Certicate Issuance

(P. 395)

Requesting Certicate Issuance at a Specied Date and Time(P

. 396)

Conguring the SCEP Server Communication Settings

Congure the communication settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to

congure the settings.

Administrator privileges are required.

Required Preparations

● Pr

epare the URL and port number of the SCEP server.

* Communication using HTTPS is not supported.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Device Management]

[Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)].

➠ The [Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)] scr

een is displayed.

In [Communication Settings], click [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Communication Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Set the SCEP server information.

[SCEP Server URL]

Security

394

Enter the URL of the connecting SCEP server.

[Port Number]

Enter the port number used to communicate with the SCEP server.

[Communication Timeout]

Enter the time fr

om search start to timeout in seconds.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Generating a Key and Requesting Certicate Issuance

Congur

e the settings for generating a key and requesting the issuance of a certicate using Remote UI from a

computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the settings.

Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted after obtaining a key.

* This method cannot be used to request issuance of a certicate when the setting for requesting issuance of a

certicate at a specied date and time is enabled.

Requesting Certicate Issuance at a Specied Date and

Time(P

. 396)

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Device Management]

[Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)]

[Certicate Issuance Request].

➠ The [Certicate Issuance Request] scr

een is displayed.

Set the items for a key and certicate.

[Key Name]

Enter the k

ey name using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

[Signature Algorithm]

Select the signature algorithm from the pulldown menu.

[Key Length (bit)]

Select the key length from the pulldown menu. The larger the value, the better the security, but this slows

down communication processing.

[Organization]

Enter the organization name using single-byte alphanumeric characters, as needed.

[Common Name]

Enter the name of the certicate subject using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

This is also called the Common Name (CN).

[Challenge Password]

Security

395

When the SCEP server has a password, enter the password for the request data used for the issuance request

using single-b

yte alphanumeric characters.

[Key Usage]

Select the usage of the generated key. If the usage is not decided, select [None].

Click [Issuance Request]

[OK].

➠ The r

equest to issue a certicate is sent to the SCEP server.

When the message that says a certicate is acquir

ed appears, click [Restart].

➠ The machine restarts, and the key and certicate are registered.

Viewing Issuance Request Status and Error Information

● Y

ou can view detailed information on the [Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)] screen.

If a certicate is not issued, an error is displayed in the certicate issuance request status. For details about

the message and how to resolve it, see the following:

If an Error Is Displayed in the Certicate Issuance Request Status(P. 399)

Viewing and Verifying Detailed Information of a Registered Certicate

● In [Settings/Registration] [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings] [Registered Key and

Certicate], click the key name (or certicate icon) to display the certicate details.

● On the certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the certicate is valid.

When the Key and Certicate Cannot Be Deleted

● You cannot delete a key and certicate being used. Disable the function being used, or delete these after

switching to another key and certicate.

Requesting Certicate Issuance at a Specied Date and Time

The request for certicate issuance occurs at the specied date and time. You can also set the request for certicate

issuance to occur regularly.

Congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the

settings.

Administrator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Device Management]

[Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)].

➠ The [Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)] scr

een is displayed.

Security

396

In [Settings for Certicate Issuance Auto Request], click [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Settings for Certicate Issuance Auto Request] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Enable Timer for Certicate Issuance Auto Request] checkbo

x, and enter

the start date and time to request issuance of a certicate.

Set other items at the time of issuance auto request, as needed.

[Auto Adjust Issuance Request Time]

o adjust the certicate issuance request time, select this checkbox.

The start time for issuing a certicate may be adjusted randomly by up to 10 minutes to reduce the load on

the SCEP server.

[Perform Polling When Communication Error Occurs or When Issuance Request Is Deferred]

Check the status of the SCEP server, such as when certicate issuance has been deferred. Select the checkbox

and enter the number of polling retries and interval.

* Polling is not performed and an error occurs in the following cases:

● When the machine has e

xceeded the limit of keys and certicates that can be registered

● When an error occurs in the obtained response data

● When an error occurs in the SCEP server

[Send Periodic Issuance Requests]

The request for certicate issuance occurs automatically and regularly. Select the checkbox and select the

issuance request interval from the pulldown menu.

Enabling this setting resets the start date and time to request issuance of a certicate.

[Automatically Restart Device After Acquiring Certicate]

To restart the machine after obtaining a certicate, select the checkbox.

[Delete Old Key and Certicate]

To overwrite the key and certicate with the same location where the key will be used, select the checkbox.

In [Settings for Key and Certicate T

o Be Issued], set the items for a key and

certicate.

[Key Name]

Enter the k

ey name using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

[Signature Algorithm]

Select the signature algorithm from the pulldown menu.

[Key Length (bit)]

Select the key length from the pulldown menu. The larger the value, the better the security, but this slows

down communication processing.

[Organization]

Enter the organization name using single-byte alphanumeric characters, as needed.

[Common Name]

Enter the name of the certicate subject using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

This is also called the Common Name (CN).

[Challenge Password]

Security

397

When the SCEP server has a password, enter the password for the request data used for the issuance request

using single-b

yte alphanumeric characters.

[Key Usage]

Select the the usage of the generated key. If the usage is not decided, select [None].

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Viewing Issuance Request Status and Error Information

● Y

ou can view detailed information on the [Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)] screen.

If a certicate is not issued, an error is displayed in the certicate issuance request status. For details about

the message and how to resolve it, see the following:

If an Error Is Displayed in the Certicate Issuance Request Status(P. 399)

Viewing and Verifying Detailed Information of a Registered Certicate

● In [Settings/Registration] [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings] [Registered Key and

Certicate], click the key name (or certicate icon) to display the certicate details.

● On the certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the certicate is valid.

When the Key and Certicate Cannot Be Deleted

● You cannot delete a key and certicate being used. Disable the function being used, or delete these after

switching to another key and certicate.

Security

398

If an Error Is Displayed in the Certicate Issuance

Request Status

84CU-0U3

If a certicate is not issued, an err

or is displayed in the certicate issuance request status. Select the message from the

list below, and check how to troubleshoot the problem.

Key and Certicate Registr

ation Limit Error(P. 399)

Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 0: Unrecognized or Unsupported Algorithm)(P. 399)

Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 1: CMS Message Integrity V

erication Failure)(P. 399)

Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 2: Forbidden or Unsupported Transaction)(P. 400)

Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 3: Excessive Time Difference Between CMS signingTime and

System Time)

(P. 400)

Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 4: No Certicate Identied That Matches Pr

ovided Criteria)

(P. 400)

Communication Error (TCP ERROR)(P. 400)

Communication Error (HTTP ERROR <HTTP status code>)(P. 400)

Deferred(P. 400)

● If the pr

oblem persists even after trying the troubleshooting methods, contact the SCEP server

administrator.

Key and Certicate Registr

ation Limit Error

The maximum number of keys and certicates that can be registered to the machine has been reached.

Delete unused keys and certicates.

Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 0: Unrecognized or

Unsupported Algorithm)

The algorithm of the certicate is unkno

wn or is not supported.

Set the [Signature Algorithm] and [Key Length (bit)] of the Certicate Issuance Request Correctly.

Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr

om an SCEP Server(P. 394)

Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 1: CMS Message Integrity

erication Failure)

Certicate integrity check (CMS message signature verication) failed.

Request Certicate Issuance Again.

Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr

om an SCEP Server(P. 394)

Security

399

Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 2: Forbidden or Unsupported

Transaction)

Communication with the SCEP server is not allowed or supported.

Set the Communication Settings of the SCEP Server Correctly.

Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr

om an SCEP Server(P. 394)

Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 3: Excessive Time Difference

Between CMS signingTime and System Time)

The time of the signingTime attribute in the authenticated attribute of CMS (PKCS#7) does not match the time of the

SCEP server.

Check the Date and Time Settings on the Machine.

If the settings are not correct, set the time zone, and then set the current date and time.

Request certicate issuance again.

Setting the Date and Time(P. 436)

Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr

om an SCEP Server(P. 394)

Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 4: No Certicate Identied That

Matches Pr

ovided Criteria)

Unable to identify if the certicate matches the standard.

Contact the SCEP Server Administrator.

Communication Error (TCP ERROR)

Connection to SCEP server failed or timed out.

Set the Communication Settings of the SCEP Server Corr

ectly.

Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr

om an SCEP Server(P. 394)

Communication Error (HTTP ERROR <HTTP status code>)

TP error occurred.

Set the Communication Settings of the SCEP Server Correctly.

Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr

om an SCEP Server(P. 394)

Deferred

SCEP server r

eturned a deferred status.

Wait a Moment, and Request Certicate Issuance.

Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr

om an SCEP Server(P. 394)

Security

400

Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate

Obtained fr

om an Issuing Authority

84CU-01S

Install and r

egister a key and certicate or CA certicate obtained from a digital certicate issuing authority to the

machine before starting to use them.

panel to register these.

Administrator privileges are required.

Required Preparations

● Check the conditions of the k

ey and certicate or CA certicate usable with the machine.

Keys and

Certicates(P

. 34)

● When registering a key and certicate, check the password for the private key set in the le.

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Device Management]

[Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate

Settings].

➠ The [Ke

y and Certicate Settings] screen or [CA Certicate Settings] screen is displayed.

Click [Register Key and Certicate] or [Register CA Certicate].

➠ The [Register Ke

y and Certicate] screen or [Register CA Certicate] screen is displayed.

Install the key and certicate le or CA certicate le.

Click [Install].

Click [Browse] in [Specify File], and specify the le to be installed.

Click [Start Installation].

➠ The installed le is added to [Installed Ke

y and Certicate] on the [Register Key and Certicate] screen

or [Installed CA Certicate] on the [Register CA Certicate] screen.

Registering the key and certicate or CA certicate.

When registering a key and certicate

To the right of the key and certicate le to r

egister, click [Register].

Security

401

➠ The [Enter Private Ke

y Password] screen is displayed.

Enter the key name password using single-byte alphanumeric characters, and click [OK].

➠ The r

egistered key and certicate are added to [Registered Key and Certicate] on the [Key and

Certicate Settings] screen.

When registering a CA certicate

o the right of the CA certicate le to register, click [Register].

➠ The registered CA certicate is added to [Registered CA Certicate] on the [CA Certicate Settings] screen.

Log out from Remote UI.

Viewing and Verifying Detailed Information of a Registered Certicate

● When you click the k

ey name (or certicate icon) in [Registered Key and Certicate] on the [Key and

Certicate Settings] screen, the certicate details appear.

● On the certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the certicate is valid.

Viewing and Verifying Detailed Information of a Registered CA Certicate

● When you click the issued to location in [Registered CA Certicate] on the [CA Certicate Settings] screen, the

CA certicate details appear.

● On the CA certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the CA certicate is valid.

When the Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Cannot Be Deleted

● You cannot delete a key and certicate being used. Disable the function being used, or delete these after

switching to another key and certicate.

● A preinstalled CA certicate cannot be deleted. If a preinstalled CA certicate is not required, click [Disable]

to the right of the CA certicate.

Security

402

Verifying a Received Certicate with OCSP

84CU-01U

Online Certicate Status Pr

otocol (OCSP) is a protocol for inquiring to an OCSP responder (server that supports OCSP)

about the revocation status of a certicate received from a certicate authority.

You can congure the settings to verify the validity of a certicate that the machine receives from a certicate

authority, using the OCSP.

Congure these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the

settings.

Administrator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [Device Management] [OCSP (Online Certicate Status Pr

otocol) Settings]

[Edit].

➠ The [Edit OCSP (Online Certicate Status Pr

otocol) Settings] screen is displayed.

Select the [Use OCSP (Online Certicate Status Pr

otocol)] checkbox.

Set the certicate verication le

vel and the OCSP responder.

[Certicate V

erication Level]

Set whether to validate the certicate even if its revocation status cannot be conrmed, such as when the

machine is unable to connect to an OCSP responder.

[OCSP Responder Settings]

Specify the URL of the OCSP responder.

[Custom URL]

When [Use Custom URL] or [Use Certicate URL (Use Custom URL If Certicate URL Cannot Be Retrieved)] is

selected, enter the URL of the OCSP responder.

[Communication Timeout]

Enter the time from search start to timeout in seconds.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Security

403

Preventing Sending Data by Mistake and Leaking

Information

84CU-01W

Unintentionally sending a fax to the wr

ong destination or leaving a printed document on the machine poses a risk of

information leakage. In addition, while sending a fax from a computer and using memory media and mobile devices

are easy and convenient, these can lead to operation errors and information theft.

You can take measures to prevent sending data by mistake and leaking information, according to the usage status of

the function, to ensure safer use of the machine.

Restricting and Conrming the Destination

You can restrict the destinations to which scanned data and faxes are sent and have a screen conrming the

destination displayed when sending these.

Limiting Available Destinations(P. 405)

Conrming the Destination befor

e Sending(P. 407)

Appropriately Restricting Functions

You can restrict access to part or all of a function when sending a fax or using memory media and mobile

devices.

Restricting Fax Sending(P. 409)

Restricting Use of Memory Media(P. 411)

Restricting Use from a Mobile Device(P. 413)

eventing Unattended Printed Documents and Information Theft

You can store print data sent from a computer or received faxes on the machine without printing them

immediately.

Restricting Printing(P. 414)

◼ See Also

When an LD

AP server is installed, you can apply LDAP server authentication to restrict the users who can use the send

and save functions and the send destinations. You can also prohibit use of functions.

Performing User Authentication with an LDAP Server When Sending or Saving Data(P. 370)

Security

404

Limiting Available Destinations

84CU-01X

ou can prevent sending faxes or scanned data by mistake and leaking data by not allowing users to use destinations

in the send function log and by limiting send destinations to those registered in the Address Book or LDAP server.

Prohibiting the Use of Destinations in the Send Log(P. 405)

Sending Only to Registered Destinations(P. 406)

You cannot limit destinations for faxes sent by computer.

● Even when the use of ne

w destinations or destinations from the send function log is prohibited, users can

send faxes from a computer (PC faxing) to a destination of their choice. To more strictly limit the available

destinations, you must also prohibit the sending of faxes from the computer.

Prohibit Fax Sending from

a Computer(P

. 409)

Prohibiting the Use of Destinations in the Send Log

event specifying destinations in the TX Job Log of scan or fax jobs.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Restrict Resending from Log](P. 535)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [TX Settings]

[Common Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Common Settings] scr

een is displayed.

In [Common Settings], select the [Restrict Resending from Log] checkbox.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Security

405

Sending Only to Registered Destinations

This limits the available send destinations to the following:

● Destinations in the Addr

ess Book.

● Destinations registered to the LDAP server

When this function is enabled, users cannot enter a destination using the numeric keys or register or edit the Address

Book. In addition, the TX Job Log recorded before enabling this function is deleted, leaving only the aforementioned

available destinations in the TX Job Log.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Restrict New Destinations](P. 535)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [TX Settings] [Restrict New Destinations] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Settings for Ne

w Destinations Restrictions] screen is displayed.

Select the [Restrict New Destinations] checkbox.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Security

406

Conrming the Destination befor

e Sending

84CU-01Y

Congur

e the settings to display a screen conrming the destination before an e-mail, fax, or I-Fax is sent. Conrm

that there are no mistakes in the specied destination and entered information to prevent sending by mistake.

Choosing When to Display the Conrmation Screen

● When specifying a destination with a coded dial number

When a destination is specied with a coded dial number, the registered destination and destination name

are displayed on the conrmation screen. When a group is registered to a coded dial number, the group

name and number of destinations are displayed.

● When sending an e-mail, fax, or I-Fax

When you press [Start] to send an e-mail, fax, or I-Fax, a screen conrming the destination is displayed. Set

whether to display this only when sending to multiple destinations (Sequential Broadcast) or whenever

sending a fax, e-mail, or I-Fax.

● When entering a fax number using the numeric keys

When you enter a fax number using the numeric keys and press [Start], a screen appears prompting you

to enter the number again. When you enter a second and subsequent destinations, they are displayed

before the next destination is entered.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Common Settings](P. 535) / [Conrm Enter

ed Fax Number](P. 546)

Administrator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [TX Settings].

➠ The [TX Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Congure the setting so that the scr

een conrming the destination is displayed.

To display the screen when specifying the destination using a coded dial number

Click [Common Settings]

[Edit].

➠ The [Edit Common Settings] scr

een is displayed.

In [Common Settings], select the [Conrm When Using Coded Dial TX] checkbo

Click [OK].

To display the screen when sending an e-mail, fax, or I-Fax

Click [Common Settings]

[Edit].

➠ The [Edit Common Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Security

407

In [Common Settings], select the [Conrm Destination Befor

e Sending] checkbox, and select the item to

display.

Click [OK].

To display the screen when entering a fax number using the numeric keys

Click [Fax TX Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Fax TX Settings] scr

een is displayed.

In [Basic Settings], select the [Conrm Enter

ed Fax Number] checkbox.

Click [OK].

Log out from Remote UI.

Security

408

Restricting Fax Sending

84CU-020

ou can prohibit fax sending from a computer (PC faxing) and the function for collectively sending a fax to multiple

destinations (Sequential Broadcast) to prevent information leakage via fax.

Prohibit Fax Sending from a Computer(P. 409)

Prohibiting Fax Sending to Multiple Destinations(P. 409)

Prohibit Fax Sending from a Computer

You can prohibit users from sending a fax from a fax driver, thereby disabling PC faxing.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings. [Allow Fax Driver TX](P. 546)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [TX Settings] [Fax TX Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Fax TX Settings] scr

een is displayed.

In [Basic Settings], clear the [Allow Fax Driver TX] checkbox.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Prohibiting Fax Sending to Multiple Destinations

This section describes ho

w to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Restrict Sequential Broadcast](P. 546)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

Security

409

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration].

Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [TX Settings]

[Fax TX Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Fax TX Settings] scr

een is displayed.

In [Basic Settings], set [Restrict Sequential Broadcast] to [Reject Sequential

oadcast].

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Security

410

Restricting Use of Memory Media

84CU-024

USB memory de

vices and other memory media can be easy and convenient, but they can also lead to information

leakage. You can prohibit the use of memory media for specic functions or all functions.

Preventing Use of Memory Media When Scanning and Printing(P. 411)

Preventing All Use of Memory Media(P. 411)

● Even if you use this setting to r

estrict the use of memory media, a computer can still be connected to the

USB port on the back of the machine. To also restrict computer connections, see the following.

Preventing Connection to Computer via USB Port(P. 424)

Preventing Use of Memory Media When Scanning and Printing

This section describes ho

w to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Memory Media Settings](P. 556)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration].

Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Store/Access Files Settings]

[Memory Media Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Memory Media Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Clear the checkbox of the functions you want to restrict, and click [OK].

To prevent saving scanned data to memory media

Clear the [Stor

e to Memory Media] checkbox.

To prevent printing data saved in memory media

Clear the [Memory Media Print] checkbox.

Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Preventing All Use of Memory Media

This section describes ho

w to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

Security

411

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congur

e the settings.

[USB Settings](P. 487)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [External Interface Settings]

[Edit].

➠ The [Edit External Interface Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Clear the [Use USB Storage Device] checkbox, and click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Security

412

Restricting Use from a Mobile Device

84CU-0U1

The machine supports the Mopria

plugin, which is supported by various manufacturers.

Mopria

enables printing from any application, such as on a smartphone, or a device equipped with Chrome OS

without having to install a dedicated Canon plugin.

Printing from a mobile device can be easy and convenient, but it can also lead to information leakage. You can also

prohibit use of Mopria

Congure this setting using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to congure the setting.

Administrator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Network Settings]

[Mopria Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Mopria Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Clear the [Use Mopria] checkbox, and click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

● When the Mopria

setting is enabled, the follo

wing network settings are also enabled:

- HTTP

[Use HTTP](P. 484)

IPP printing

[IPP Print Settings](P. 484)

mDNS (IPv4/IPv6)

[mDNS Settings](P. 482)

Network Link Scan

[Network Link Scan Settings](P. 485)

Security

413

Restricting Printing

84CU-021

ou can require users to enter a PIN before printing and congure the machine not to immediately print received

faxes. This can prevent not only unattended printed documents and information theft, but also unneeded printing,

thereby saving paper.

Restricting Printing from a Computer to Secure Print(P. 415)

Saving Received Documents in the Machine (Memory Lock)(P. 416)

◼ See Also

By using the Department ID Management function, you can r

estrict the number of pages that can be printed and the

print function for each Department ID. You can also restrict printing from an unknown Department ID.

Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with Department ID (Department ID Management)(P. 360)

Security

414

Restricting Printing from a Computer to Secure Print

84CU-022

With Secur

e Print, you can set a PIN to a document on the computer and send that document to the machine to be

printed. Printing is performed after that PIN is entered on the machine.

Restricting printing from a computer to Secure Print can prevent unattended printed documents and information

theft. You can also conrm the print data before printing to prevent unwanted printing.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Secure Print](P. 504)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

Click [Secure Print Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Secur

e Print Settings] screen is displayed.

Check that the [Secure Print] checkbox is selected.

Select the [Restrict Printer Jobs] checkbox.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

● For details about printing with Secur

e Print and the time period that Secure Print data is saved, see the

following:

Printing a Document Secured with a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 215)

Changing the Time Period That Print Data with a PIN (Secure Data) Is Saved(P. 218)

Security

415

Saving Received Documents in the Machine (Memory

Lock)

84CU-023

Memory Lock tempor

arily saves received faxes in the memory of the machine without printing them immediately.

Faxes saved in the memory can be printed later, thereby preventing unattended printed documents and information

theft. In addition, unneeded faxes can be deleted without printing to help save paper.

Setting Memory Lock(P. 416)

Viewing and Printing Faxes Saved in the Memory(P. 417)

Setting Memory Lock

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings. [Fax Memory Lock Settings](P. 549)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P. 441)

In [RX/Forwarding Settings], click [Common Settings].

➠ The [Common Settings] scr

een is displayed.

In [Memory Lock Settings], click [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Memory Lock Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Use Memory Lock] checkbox.

Congure the functions r

elated to Memory Lock, as needed.

To enable fax preview

Select the [Use Fax Pr

eview] checkbox.

You can preview the fax on Remote UI. When you enable preview, you can also see the details of the fax and

print with the Memory Lock setting enabled.

* This cannot be set at the same time as [Specify Memory Lock Time].

To print an RX Result Report to provide notication of Memory Lock

Select the [Print Report] checkbox.

* To use this function, RX Result Report must be enabled. Printing and Viewing Reports and Lists(P. 447)

To enable Memory Lock only at a specied time period

Select the [Specify Memory Lock Time] checkbo

x and enter a start and end time.

Security

416

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

● When Memory Lock is disabled, all fax

es saved in the memory are printed automatically. Memory Lock is

disabled in the following cases:

- When the [Use Memory Lock] checkbox is cleared

- When the end time of [Specify Memory Lock Time] has been reached

Viewing and Printing Faxes Saved in the Memory

When you enable pr

eview in Memory Lock, you can see the details of the fax and print with the Memory Lock setting

enabled.

This section describes how to view this information and print using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen to view this information. You cannot use the

operation panel to view some items. In addition, you cannot use the operation panel to print documents.

Checking

the Status and Log for Sent and Received Fax

es(P. 304)

Administrator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Status Monitor/Cancel].

Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

In [RX], click [Job Status].

➠ The [RX: Job Status] scr

een is displayed.

View or print the fax.

● When you click the job number, the [

Job Details] screen is displayed. You can view the reception time and

number of pages, and preview the fax.

Security

417

● When you click [Print All], all fax

es saved in the memory are printed.

Log out from Remote UI after viewing the information or printing.

Security

418

Preventing Unauthorized Use

84CU-025

The machine handles a variety of information including the Addr

ess Book and print data. It also provides various

settings to ensure ecient management and operation. While this information and the settings provide convenience,

they can also lead to information leakage and other security issues if the information and settings can be accessed by

anyone.

You can take measures to restrict access and disable functions according to the usage status of the function, to ensure

safer use of the machine.

Restricting Access to Information and Settings

Restricting users and operations accessing information and settings on the machine can help prevent

unauthorized use and protect condential information.

Restricting Address Book Registration and Editing(P. 420)

Restricting Use of Remote UI(P. 422)

Disabling Unused Functions

ou can disable unused functions to prevent intrusion from the outside.

Preventing Connection to Computer via USB Port(P. 424)

Conguring LPD

, RAW, or WSD(P. 425)

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 427)

◼ See Also

For details about the administr

ator account and how to manage users and groups with access to the machine, see the

following.

Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 357)

Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with Department ID (Department ID Management)(P. 360)

Security

419

Restricting Address Book Registration and Editing

84CU-026

o prevent unauthorized adding of new entries in the Address Book and editing of existing entries, you can set a PIN

and restrict the method for adding new entries.

Restricting Address Book Registration and Editing by Setting a PIN(P. 420)

Prohibiting Registering Fax Sending Log Destinations to Address Book(P. 421)

● T

o better prevent sending data by mistake and information leakage, allow to send only to registered

destinations, and prohibit the adding and editing of entries in the Address Book.

Limiting Available

Destinations

(P. 405)

Restricting Address Book Registration and Editing by Setting a PIN

ou can require the entry of PIN to add a new entry to the Address Book or edit existing entries.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Set Destination] to congure the settings.

[Address Book PIN](P. 564)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration].

Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Address Book PIN]

[Edit].

➠ The [Edit Addr

ess Book PIN] screen is displayed.

Select the [Set/Change PIN] checkbox, and set a PIN.

Enter the same number in [Address Book PIN] and [Conrm].

* Y

ou cannot set a PIN consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Security

420

Clearing the PIN Setting

● Clear the enter

ed values of [Address Book PIN], and then click [OK] with the elds left empty.

Prohibiting Registering Fax Sending Log Destinations to Address Book

ou can restrict the registration of destinations in the fax sending log to Address Book.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the

settings.

[Register Log Dest to Addr Book](P. 547)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration].

Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [TX Settings]

[Fax TX Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit Fax TX Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Restrict Registration of Log Destinations to Address Book] checkbox.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Security

421

Restricting Use of Remote UI

84CU-029

While Remote UI is convenient for oper

ating the machine from a computer, it also poses a risk of third-party access to

the machine.

You can congure the setting to require users to enter a PIN (Remote UI Access PIN) when using Remote UI to prevent

unauthorized access by a third party.

If you do not use Remote UI, it is recommended that you disable the function.

Setting the PIN to Use for Remote UI(P. 422)

Disabling Remote UI(P. 423)

Setting the PIN to Use for Remote UI

ou can restrict the use of Remote UI to only those users who know the Remote UI Access PIN.

This setting is not required when using Department ID Management, as Department ID authentication is performed.

This section describes how to congure the settings using the operation panel.

You can also congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer after the Remote UI Access PIN has been set on

the machine.

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 437)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Management Settings] [License/Other]

[Remote UI Settings] [Restrict

Access].

➠ The [Restrict Access] scr

een is displayed.

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].

System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

Depending on the model, [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmwar

e] may appear.

Set [Restrict Access] to [On], enter the Remote UI Access PIN, and press [Apply].

Enter the same number, and press [Apply].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

When [Management Settings] of the Settings Menu Is Initialized

● Use the settings menu on the oper

ation panel to reset the Remote UI Access PIN.

[Restrict Access]

(P. 572)

Security

422

Disabling Remote UI

You can disable Remote UI to reduce the risk of unauthorized access to the machine via the network.

Use the operation panel to congure the settings. You cannot congure the settings using Remote UI from a

computer.

Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Management Settings] [License/Other]

[Remote UI Settings] [Remote

UI].

➠ The [Remote UI Settings] scr

een is displayed.

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].

System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

Depending on the model, [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmwar

e] may appear.

Set [Use Remote UI] to [Off], and press [Apply]

[OK].

Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Security

423

Preventing Connection to Computer via USB Port

84CU-027

ou can disable the USB port for computer connection on the back of the machine to reduce the risk of an external

connection without going through a network with security measures.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.

[USB Settings](P. 487)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [External Interface Settings]

[Edit].

➠ The [Edit External Interface Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Clear the [Use as USB Device] checkbox, and click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

● Even if you use this setting to r

estrict the use of the rear USB port, memory media can still be connected to

the USB port on the front of the machine. To also restrict USB connection of memory media, see the

following.

Restricting Use of Memory Media(P. 411)

Security

424

Conguring LPD

, RAW, or WSD

84CU-0U2

Select whether to use any of the pr

otocols below on the machine when printing or scanning documents from a

computer.

You are recommended to disable any protocols you will not be using.

When using LPD or RAW, you can congure the time until reception of print data is canceled.

LPD

This protocol is not dependent on the hardware, operating system, or other platform. It is commonly used in

TCP/IP network environments.

RAW

This is Windows' proprietary print data type protocol. It is used as standard in a Windows environment.

WSD

This protocol enables automatic detection of network-connected printers and scanners in a Windows

environment.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.

[TCP/IP Settings](P. 479)

Administr

ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Network Settings].

Congure LPD

, RAW, or WSD.

When Conguring LPD

Click [LPD Settings]

[Edit].

➠ The [Edit LPD Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Set whether to use LPD.

When not using LPD

, clear the [Use LPD Printing] checkbox, and proceed to step 5.

Enter the time in [RX Timeout].

Enter the time in minutes from the start of reception standby, after print data reception is canceled, to

the timeout.

When Conguring RA

Click [RAW Settings] [Edit].

➠ The [Edit RAW Settings] screen is displayed.

Set whether to use RAW.

Security

425

When not using RAW, clear the [Use RAW Printing] checkbox, and proceed to step 5.

Enter the time in [RX Timeout].

Enter the time in minutes fr

om the start of reception standby, after print data reception is canceled, to

the timeout.

When Conguring WSD

Click [WSD Settings]

[Edit].

➠ The [Edit WSD Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Set whether to use WSD for each function.

When not using WSD

, clear the checkbox of the function for restricting use of WSD.

Using WSD to Print Data

Select the [Use WSD Printing] checkbox.

The [Use WSD Browsing] checkbox is selected automatically, and WSD is used to obtain the information

of the machine from the computer.

Using WSD to Scan Data

Select the [Use WSD Scanning] checkbox. You can perform scanning from a computer without having to

install a scanner driver.

To be able to specify a computer connected via WSD as the store location when scanning from the

machine, also select the [Use Computer Scanning] checkbox.

When Responding to a Search Request of the Machine by Multicast Discovery

Select the [Use Multicast Discovery] checkbox.

To keep the machine in sleep mode without responding to received multicast discovery packets, clear the

checkbox.

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

➠ The settings are applied.

Adding a WSD Network Device

● Click [ ] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners] [Add printers & scanners], and

perform the oper

ations following the instructions on the screen.

● For details about installing the driver via a WSD network, see the manual of the driver at the online manual

site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

Changing the Port Number

● To change the port number of each protocol, see the following:

Changing the Port Number(P. 377)

Security

426

Disabling HTTP Communication

84CU-028

It is r

ecommended to disable HTTP communication when using only the USB connection or when not using functions

that require HTTP communication, such as Remote UI, WSD printing, and AirPrint.

This section describes how to congure the settings using the operation panel.

You can also congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

Managing the Machine from a Computer

(Remote UI)

(P. 437)

Administrator privileges are required.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [Use HTTP].

➠ The [Use HT

TP] screen is displayed.

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then click [Log In].

System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

Press [Off]

[Yes].

Security

427

Applying a Security Policy

84CU-02A

Canon multifunction machines and printers have a security policy function for collectively conguring and managing

multiple security settings accor

ding to a policy.

You cannot edit the security policy with the machine, but you can apply a security policy that has been edited with

another device or device management software.

Applying a Security Policy to the Machine(P. 428)

Checking the Security Policy Applied to the Machine(P. 429)

Applying a Security Policy to the Machine

You can import a security policy exported from another device or the device management software to the machine

and apply it.

* To export a security policy from an imageRUNNER ADVANCE Series model and apply it to the machine, use the device

management software.

Import the security policy using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to import it.

Administrator privileges are required. When a security policy is imported, the machine restarts automatically.

Do not turn OFF the machine until the import is complete.

● It may tak

e a few minutes until the process is completed. Turning OFF the machine during processing may

cause data corruption or damage the machine.

Do not operate the machine during import.

● Before import, check that the machine is not printing or performing other operations.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Data Management]

[Import].

➠ The [Import] scr

een is displayed.

Click [Browse] in [File Path], and specify the le to be imported.

Import the device conguration information le (*.dcm).

In [Decryption Password], enter the password set at export.

Select the [Settings/Registration] checkbox in [Select Item to Import].

Security

428

Click [Start Importing]

[OK].

➠ The security policy is imported to the machine.

When the import is complete, the machine r

estarts automatically.

Click [OK].

Exporting a Security Policy

● Y

ou can export the security policy applied to the machine and apply it to another device (Canon device that

supports security policy setting).

Importing and Exporting the Address Book and Settings(P. 452)

* T

o export a security policy from the machine and apply it to an imageRUNNER ADVANCE Series model, use

the device management software.

Applying a Password-protected Security Policy

● When applying a security policy that is protected with a password from another device to the machine, the

same password is set for the security policy on the machine. Thereafter, you can only import a security

policy with the same password.

* The security policy exported from the machine is also set with the same password.

Checking the Security Policy Applied to the Machine

ou can check the security policy items and their usage.

Check the security policy using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to check this

information.

Administrator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Security Settings]

[Conrm Security Policy].

➠ The [Conrm Security Policy] scr

een is displayed.

Check the security policy items and their usage.

Security Policy Items(P. 430)

Log out from Remote UI after viewing the usage.

Security

429

Security Policy Items

84CU-02C

ou can check the security policy items and their usage from Remote UI on the [Conrm Security Policy] screen.

The content set on another device or software is applied to the security policy for the machine. Therefore, there may

be function items in the security policy that are not available on the machine, but these do not affect the settings or

operation of the machine.

[Interface](P. 430)

[Network](P. 430)

[Authentication](P. 432)

[Key/Certicate](P

. 433)

[Log] (P. 433)

[Job](P. 433)

[Storage] (P. 433)

[Interface]

[Wireless Connection Policy]

You can disable the wireless connection to prevent unauthorized access.

[Prohibit Use of Direct Connection]

You can prohibit access from mobile devices. [Direct Connection Settings](P. 472)

[Pr

ohibit Use of Wireless LAN]

You can prohibit wireless access via a wireless LAN router or access point.

[Select Wired/Wireless LAN]

. 472)

[USB Policy]

You can disable the USB connection to prevent unauthorized access and data theft.

[Prohibit Use as USB Device]

You can prohibit a computer from connecting to the machine via the USB port.

[USB Settings](P. 487)

[Pr

ohibit Use as USB Storage Device]

You can prohibit the use of USB memory devices with the machine.

[USB Settings](P. 487)

[Network]

[Communication Oper

ational Policy]

Security

430

You can require a signature or certicate verication for safer communication.

[Always V

erify Signatures for SMS/WebDAV Server Functions]

As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.

[Always Verify Server Certicate When Using TLS]

This veries the certicate including Common Nae (CN) when using TLS-encrypted communication.

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)(P

. 245)

Registering LDAP Servers(P. 77)

* This does not apply to communication with an IEEE 802.1X network.

[Pr

ohibit Cleartext Authentication for Server Functions]

You can limit verication information to secure methods only. When you are using the machine as a server,

cleartext authentication and functions using cleartext authentication are not available.

[Dedicated Port Auth.

Method](P

. 474)

* If you are using an older version of the device management software or driver, you may not be able to

connect to the machine. Use an updated version.

[Prohibit Use of SNMPv1]

You can prohibit use of SNMPv1 when obtaining device information from a computer.

[SNMP Settings]

. 473)

[Port Usage Policy]

You can close unused ports to prevent external intrusion.

[Restrict LPD Port (Port Number: 515)]

You can prohibit printing using the LPD protocol.

[LPD Settings](P. 483)

[Restrict RA

W Port (Port Number: 9100)]

You can prohibit printing using the RAW protocol.

[RAW Settings](P. 483)

[Restrict FTP Port (Port Number: 21)]

As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy

[Restrict WSD Port (Port Number: 3702, 60000)]

You can prohibit the use of functions using the WSD protocol.

[WSD Settings](P. 483)

[Restrict BMLinkS Port (Port Number: 1900)]

As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy

[Restrict IPP Port (Port Number: 631)]

You can disable certain print functions that use mobile apps and prohibit related printing.

Linking with

Mobile Devices(P. 333)

[Restrict SMB Port (Port Number: 137, 138, 139, 445)]

As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.

[Restrict SMTP Port (Port Number: 25)]

As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.

[Restrict Dedicated Port (Port Number: 9002, 9006, 9007, 9011-9015, 9017-9019, 9022, 9023, 9025, 20317,

47545-47547)]

You can prohibit the use of dedicated ports. [Use Dedicated Port](P. 474)

[Restrict Remote Oper

ator's Software Port (Port Number: 5900)]

As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.

[Restrict SIP (IP Fax) Port (Port Number: 5004, 5005, 5060, 5061, 49152)]

As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.

[Restrict mDNS Port (Port Number: 5353)]

Security

431

You can disable mDNS settings (IPv4/IPv6) and certain print functions that use a mobile app. This disables

network disco

very and automatic settings using mDNS as well as related printing.

[mDNS Settings](P. 482)

Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 333)

[Restrict SLP Port (Port Number: 427)]

ou can disable response to discovery in Multicast Discovery Settings as well as network discovery and

automatic settings using SLP.

Conguring SLP Communication

(P. 86)

[Restrict SNMP Port (Port Number: 161)]

You can prohibit the use of functions using the SNMP protocol. This prohibits the machine from obtaining

device information from a computer using SNMP and conguring related settings.

[SNMP Settings](P. 473)

[Scan w/Canon PRINT Business](P. 569)

[Authentication]

[Authentication Operational Policy]

As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.

[Prohibit Guest Users to Use Device]

[For

ce Setting of Auto Logout]

[Password Operational Policy]

As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.

[Prohibit Caching of Password for External Servers]

[Display W

arning When Default Password Is in Use]

[Prohibit Use of Default Password for Remote Access]

[Password Settings Policy]

As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.

[Minimum Number of Characters for Password]

[Passwor

d Validity Period]

[Prohibit Use of 3 or More Identical Consecutive Characters]

[Force Use of at Least 1 Uppercase Character]

[Force Use of at Least 1 Lowercase Character]

[Force Use of at Least 1 Digit]

[Force Use of at Least 1 Symbol]

[Lockout Policy]

You can prohibit login for a while when the wrong password is entered a certain number of times in a row.

[Enable Lockout]

This enables Lockout. Set the Lockout threshold and Lockout period separately on the machine.

[Lockout]

. 576)

Security

432

[Key/Certicate]

By preventing weak encryption and encrypting user passwords and keys within a certain hardware, you can protect

sensitive data.

[Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption]

You can prohibit the use of weak encryption. [Encryption Settings](P. 575)

[Pr

ohibit Use of Key/Certicate with Weak Encryption]

You can prohibit the use of keys and certicates with weak encryption.

[Use TPM to Store Password and Key]

As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.

[Log]

As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.

[Force Recording of Audit Log]

[For

ce SNTP Settings]

[Job]

[Printing Policy]

As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy

[Prohibit Immediate Printing of Received Jobs]

[Sending/Receiving Policy]

ou can restrict the use of destinations when sending and the processing methods of received data.

[Allow Sending Only to Registered Addresses]

You can prevent users from specifying new destinations. Users can only send data to destinations registered in

the Address Book.

[Restrict New Destinations](P. 535)

[For

ce Conrmation of Fax Number]

You must conrm the entered fax number.

[Conrm Enter

ed Fax Number](P. 546)

[Prohibit Auto Forwarding]

You can prohibit auto forwarding of faxes.

[Forwarding Settings](P. 554)

[Storage]

As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy

[Force Complete Deletion of Data]

Security

433

Managing the Machine

Managing the Machine ...............................................................................................................................

435

Setting the Date and Time ................................................................................................................................ 436

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ................................................................................... 437

Starting Remote UI ....................................................................................................................................... 438

Portal Page of Remote UI ............................................................................................................................. 441

Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI ................................................................................................... 443

Monitoring the Usage ....................................................................................................................................... 445

Checking the Number of Printed Pages (Check Counter) .............................................................................. 446

Printing and Viewing Reports and Lists ........................................................................................................ 447

Changing the Report and List Print Settings .......................................................................................... 449

Clearing the Mail Box ........................................................................................................................................ 451

Importing and Exporting the Address Book and Settings .............................................................................. 452

Updating the Firmware ..................................................................................................................................... 455

Initializing the Settings and Data .................................................................................................................... 458

Managing the Machine

434

Managing the Machine

84CU-02E

This section describes the management functions that ar

e required to operate the machine.

Monitoring the Operation Status and Usage of the Machine, and Conguring the

Settings

Setting the Date and Time

Set the date and time for the machine. The date and time ar

e used as the reference for the functions using

date and time information, and therefore, they need to be set accurately.

Setting the Date and Time(P. 436)

Checking the Oper

ation Status and Changing the Settings (Remote UI)

You can use a Web browser on a computer to check the operation status of the machine, change the

machine settings, and register destinations to the Address Book. You can manage the machine from a

remote location and eciently perform time-consuming settings and registration on your computer.

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 437)

Monitoring the Usage (Oper

ation Panel)

You can use the operation panel of the machine to check the total number of printed pages and print

communication results, settings, and other reports and lists.

Monitoring the Usage(P. 445)

Managing Servers, V

arious Data, and Firmware

Clearing the Server Mail Box

Delete mail fr

om the server mail box as needed so that the mail box does not become full with notication

mail sent to the e-mail address of the machine.

Clearing the Mail Box(P. 451)

Managing the Addr

ess Book and Settings

You can use the import and export functions to regularly back up the Address Book and settings. In addition,

you can share the Address Book and settings with other devices to save time on registering destinations and

conguring the settings.

Importing and Exporting the Address Book and Settings(P. 452)

Updating the Firmware

Update the rmware to add new functions to the machine and to x bugs. By updating to the latest

rmware, you can use the machine with more stable and comfortable operations.

Updating the Firmware(P. 455)

Initializing the Settings and Data

You can initialize all settings and data when replacing or disposing of the machine. Initializing the machine

prevents access to condential information and unauthorized use by third parties.

Initializing the Settings and Data(P. 458)

◼ See Also

For the settings r

equired to operate the machine, such as the network settings and fax settings, see the following:

Setting Up(P. 45)

Managing the Machine

435

Setting the Date and Time

84CU-02F

Set the date and time for the machine. The date and time set her

e are used as the reference for the functions using

date and time information, and therefore, they need to be set accurately.

This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.

[Timer/Energy Settings](P. 469)

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Timer Settings]

[Edit].

➠ The [Edit Timer Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Enter the current date and time.

Set the time zone according to the region where the machine is used.

Communicating over the Internet is premised on setting the UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) correctly. The

C is a coordinated universal time that is standard for all parts of the world. There is a time difference

depending on the country or region where the machine is used.

Set daylight saving time as needed.

● Select the [Use Daylight Saving Time] checkbo

x if the machine is in a country or region with daylight saving

time, and then set the start and end dates.

Click [OK].

➠ The settings ar

e applied.

Log out from Remote UI.

Managing the Machine

436

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)

84CU-02H

With Remote UI, you can use a W

eb browser on a computer to check the function operation status of the machine,

change the machine settings, and register destinations to the Address Book. You can manage the machine from a

remote location and eciently perform time-consuming settings and registration on your computer.

Remote UI has the following two modes. The functions available with Remote UI vary depending on the mode you

logged in to.

● System Manager Mode

You can use all functions of Remote UI.

● General User Mode

You can monitor usage, view logs, cancel printing, and change some settings.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

Portal Page of Remote UI(P. 441)

Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI(P. 443)

◼ See Also

It is r

ecommended that you set up the following functions to prevent unauthorized use of Remote UI by a third party:

System Manager ID

Set the System Manager ID, which is the exclusive administrator account, so that only users with the ID can

Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 357)

Remote UI Access PIN

If Department ID Management is not set up, congur

e this setting to require PIN entry when logging in to

Remote UI so that only users with the PIN can use Remote UI.

Setting the PIN to Use for Remote UI(P. 422)

Managing the Machine

437

Starting Remote UI

84CU-02J

o use Remote UI, enter the IP address of the machine into a Web browser on a computer, and log in with System

Manager Mode or General User Mode. The functions available with Remote UI vary depending on the mode you

logged in to.

When Department ID Management is set up, you must log in with the Department ID. The mode to which you are

logging in varies depending on the System Manager ID settings.

Required Preparations

● Check the oper

ating environment of Remote UI.

Supported Environment(P. 37)

● Connect the computer you ar

e using to operate Remote UI to the machine over a network.

Setting Up the

Network(P

. 50)

● Check the IP address of the machine.

Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 88)

When Department ID Management Is Not Set Up

● To log in with Remote UI, you must set the Remote UI Access PIN on the machine. Setting the PIN to Use

for Remote UI(P

. 422)

From a Web browser on a computer, access the following URL.

http://<IP address of the machine>/

➠ The Remote UI login scr

een appears.

When Remote UI communication is encrypted, a warning message about the security certicate may

appear. If there are no problems with the certicate or TLS settings, you can continue operations.

When entering an IPv6 address, enclose the IP address in brackets [ ].

Example:

http://[fe80:2e9e:fcﬀ:fe4e:dbce]/

If the Remote UI Login Screen Is Not Displayed

When a message such as [Cannot access Remote UI.] is displayed and the login scr

een is not displayed, see

the following:

Cannot Access Remote UI or Send Function Setting Tool(P. 692)

Enter the items required for login.

When Department ID Management is not set up

Select [System Manager Mode] or [Gener

al User Mode], and enter the required items according to the setting

status.

Managing the Machine

438

[System Manager Mode]

When the System Manager ID is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN. System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

* When logging in with System Manager Mode, you must change the System Manager PIN from the default

setting.

Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 357)

[Gener

al User Mode]

You can log in without entering a user name, but enter a print user name when checking and canceling jobs

waiting to be printed.

* If a user name is not set in the printer driver, the logon user name of the computer that sent the print data

is set automatically.

[Remote UI Access PIN]

When the Remote UI Access PIN is set, enter the PIN.

When Department ID Management is set

Enter the Department ID and PIN.

When the System Manager ID is set

When logging in with System Manager Mode, enter the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN.

When a Department ID other than the System Manager ID is enter

ed, you will log in with General User Mode.

When the System Manager ID is not set

No matter which Department ID is entered, you will log in with System Manager Mode.

System Manager

ID and PIN(P

. 6)

* When logging in with System Manager Mode, you must change the System Manager PIN from the default

setting.

Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 357)

Click [Log In].

➠ The Portal page of Remote UI appears.

Portal Page of Remote UI(P. 441)

When you have completed your operations, click [Log Out].

➠ The login scr

een appears after logging out from Remote UI.

● Do not access other websites when using Remote UI.

Managing the Machine

439

Setting the Time Until the User Is Automatically Logged Out

● The user is automatically logged out fr

om Remote UI if no operations are performed for a certain period of

time. Use the following procedure to set the time until the user is logged out.

[Session Settings] [Edit] enter the time until the user is logged out [OK]

Managing the Machine

440

Portal Page of Remote UI

84CU-02K

When you log in to Remote UI, the Portal page (Remote UI top page) appears. Fr

om here you can check the operations

status of the machine, view various information, and change the settings with button operations.

[Device Name]

Displays the de

vice name set in [Settings/Registration]

[Device Management] [Device Information Settings].

[Pr

oduct Name]/[Product Name (Serial Number)]

Displays the product name of the machine.

Depending on the model, the serial number may also be displayed.

[Location]

Displays the installation location set in [Settings/Registration]

[Device Management] [Device Information

Settings].

[Login User]

Displays the information of the logged in user.

[Log Out]

ou are logged out of Remote UI, and the login screen is displayed.

[Language]

You can change the display language of Remote UI.

* The display languages of the computer and Remote UI must be the same. If the display languages are not the same,

the entered information may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to reference a folder, server, or other

specied destination.

[Mail to System Manager]

Creates e-mail for the administrator indicated in [Settings/Registration]

[User Management] [System Manager

Information].

[Last Updated]

Displays the date and time that the information displayed on the Portal page was last updated.

Click [ ] to the right of the date and time to update these.

Managing the Machine

441

[Device Basic Information]

Displays the curr

ent status and error information of the machine.

When an error occurs, this displays a link to the error information screen.

[Consumables Information]

Displays the paper source information and remaining amount of ink in the toner cartridges.

Click [Check Consumables Details] to display the toner cartridge name.

[Support Link]

Displays a link to support information for this machine that is set in [Settings/Registration]

[License/Other]

[Support Link].

[Status Monitor/Cancel]

Click this to display the [Status Monitor/Cancel] scr

een.

From here, you can check the status and logs of a function, operation status of the machine, and error information.

Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI(P. 443)

[Settings/Registration]

Click this to display the [Settings/Registr

ation] screen.

If you logged in with System Manager Mode, you can change any settings and perform operations such as saving

and importing data.

● The items that can be set in the [Settings/Registration] screen are nearly the same as those of the operation

panel, but some items can only be set with either the operation panel or Remote UI.

Settings Menu

Items(P

. 462)

● Depending on the item, you may have to restart the machine for the settings to be applied. If a restart is

required, a message appears at the top of the screen.

[Address Book]

Click this to display the [Addr

ess Book] screen.

If you logged in with System Manager Mode, you can register and edit destinations in the Address Book.

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 164)

[Application Libr

ary] (System Manager Mode only)

Click this to display the setting screen for the Application Library.

For details about the Application Libr

ary, see the User's Guide of the Application Library.

Application Library

Managing the Machine

442

Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI

84CU-02L

om Status Monitor/Cancel in Remote UI, you can check the status and logs of a function, operation status of the

machine, and error information.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Status Monitor/Cancel]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Select an item to view the status or log.

[Print]

[Job Status]

Displays the status (Printing or Waiting) of printed data.

This displays the status of all print jobs regardless of the Department ID Management setting.

If you entered your user name in [User Name] when you logged in with General User Mode, only the print

job status for that user is visible.

● Click [Job Number] for paused prints and secure prints to display print details and view the user name

and number of printed sheets.

● Click [Cancel] in [Job Operation] to delete the print data for jobs that are printing or waiting.

[Job Log]

Displays the print job log.

[Copy]

[Job Log]

Displays the copy job log.

[TX]

[Job Log]

Displays the TX job log for scan and fax jobs.

[RX]

[Job Status]

Displays the RX job status for fax and I-Fax jobs.

With preview in Memory Lock enabled, you can view the fax details and print the fax when logged in with

System Manager Mode.

Saving Received Documents in the Machine (Memory Lock)(P. 416)

Managing the Machine

443

[Job Log]

Displays the RX job log for fax and I-Fax jobs.

[Forwar

[Forwarding Errors]

Displays information of the data being forwarded that ended with an error.

With preview in Memory Lock enable, you can perform the following operations when logged in with

System Manager Mode.

Saving Received Documents in the Machine (Memory Lock)(P. 416)

● Click [

Job Number] to view details and a preview of the data to be forwarded.

● Click [Delete] to delete the data to be forwarded.

* If data cannot be forwarded but remains in the memory, it can be printed.

Checking Faxes that

Failed to Be Forwar

ded(P. 305)

[Error Information]

Displays information of errors occurring on the machine.

* You can view the same information by clicking the link displayed in [Error Information] on the Portal page.

[Consumables]

Displays the paper size and type of each paper source and the toner cartridge name.

* You can view the same information by clicking [Check Consumables Details] on the Portal page.

[Device Features]

Displays the specications of the machine and the status of optional equipment.

[Device Information]

Displays information of the machine, such as the product name and serial number, as well as the rmware

version and system manager information.

● [Device Name] and [Location] display the information set in [Settings/Registration]

[De

vice

Management]

[Device Information Settings].

● [System

Manager Information] displays the information set in [Settings/Registration]

[User

Management] [System Manager Information].

[Check Counter]

Displays the total number of pages copied and printed to date. Checking the Number of Printed Pages

(Check Counter)

(P. 446)

[Cartridge Log]

Displays a usage record for each color in the toner cartridge.

To change the displayed color, select the color from the pulldown menu, and click [Display].

[Eco Information]

Displays the average number of sheets output and average power consumption per month.

You can change the settings of the following items in [Device Settings Status] to save paper and power.

● [N on 1 in Copy Settings]

● [2-Sided in Copy Settings]

● [Use Fax Preview in Memory Lock Settings]

Saving Received Documents in the Machine (Memory

Lock)(P

. 416)

Log out from Remote UI after viewing the usage.

Managing the Machine

444

Monitoring the Usage

84CU-02R

ou can use the operation panel of the machine to check the total number of copied and printed pages and print

communication results, settings, and other reports and lists.

Checking the Number of Printed Pages (Check Counter)(P. 446)

Printing and Viewing Reports and Lists(P. 447)

◼ See Also

ou can also check the counter using Remote UI from a computer. In Remote UI, you can also check the status and

logs of a function, operation status of the machine, and error information.

Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI(P. 443)

Managing the Machine

445

Checking the Number of Printed Pages (Check Counter)

84CU-02S

ou can display a counter showing the total number of pages copied and printed to date by black & white and color.

The number of printed pages includes received faxes and printed reports and lists.

This section describes how to check the number of printed pages using the operation panel.

You can also check this information using Remote UI from a computer.

Checking Usage and Logs with Remote

UI(P

. 443)

On the operation panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen or other

location.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

➠ The [Status Monitor] scr

een is displayed.

Press [Device Information]

[Check Counter].

Check the number of printed pages.

[101: Total 1]

Displays the total number of pages copied and printed.

[108: Total (Black & White 1)]

Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in black and white.

[230: Copy (Full Color + Single Color/Small)]

Displays the total number of pages copied in color.

[322: Print (Full Color + Single Color/Small)]

Displays the total number of pages printed in color.

Managing the Machine

446

Printing and Viewing Reports and Lists

84CU-02U

ou can print and view reports and lists including machine usage, communication results, and settings.

Types of Reports and Lists(P. 447)

Printing Reports and Lists(P. 448)

2-Sided Printing of Reports and Lists

● Reports and lists ar

e printed on paper on one side by default. You can change the setting to print on both

sides.

Changing the Report and List Print Settings(P. 449)

Types of Reports and Lists

Machine Usage Reports

ou can print and view the following reports related to usage of the machine including power consumption

and status of consumables:

● Eco Report

Displays the number of printed pages and power consumption per month. You can see how to save paper

and power based on this information.

● Consumables Status Report

Displays the status of consumables installed in the machine.

● Cartridge Log Report

Displays a log of toner cartridge usage.

● Department ID Management Report

Displays the number of printed pages and other usage for each Department ID when Department ID

Management is enabled.

Communication Results Reports

You can print and view the following reports related to communication results including sending and

receiving results and saving results.

With the exception of communication management reports, communication results reports cannot be

printed manually. You must congure the settings in advance to print the reports automatically.

Changing

the Report and List Print Settings(P

. 449)

● Communication Management Report

Displays all communication results for faxes and scanned data.

By default, this is printed automatically after every 40 communication events.

You can also congure the settings to print sending and saving results and receiving results in a different

format.

● Fax TX Result Report

Displays the fax sending results.

By default, this is printed automatically only when an error occurs.

This can be set to print part of the original in the report.

* The results reports do not include sending results of faxes sent from a computer.

● E-mail, I-Fax, File Sending Result Report

Displays the sending results of e-mails and I-Faxes and the saving results of e-mails and I-Faxes to the

shared folder and FTP server.

By default, this is printed automatically only when an error occurs.

* When an error occurs during sending or saving, the error code is not displayed in the e-mail, I-Fax, or le

sending result report. To view the error code, print a communication management report.

Managing the Machine

447

● RX Result Report

Displays the r

eceiving results for faxes and I-Faxes.

By default, this is not printed automatically.

Settings Lists

You can print and view the following lists that summarize the registration information and settings of the

machine:

● Address Book List

Displays the destination information registered in the Address Book by [Coded Dial], [Favorites], and

[Group].

● User Data List

Displays the serial number and other machine information as well as the settings that do not require

administrator privileges.

● System Manager Data List

Displays the serial number and other machine information as well as the settings that require

administrator privileges.

● IPSec Policy List

Displays the settings of the IPSec policies registered to the machine.

Printing Reports and Lists

Print reports and lists using the operation panel. You cannot print these using Remote UI from a computer.

Administr

ator privileges are required to print the following reports and lists:

● Department ID Management Report

● System Manager Data List

● IPSec Policy List

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Output Report] [Print List].

➠ The [Print List] screen is displayed.

Select the report or list to print.

➠ A scr

een conrming the paper available for printing is displayed.

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].

System

Manager ID and PIN(P. 6)

To Print Address Book List

Select [Addr

ess Book List], and select the items to print.

Check that printable paper is set in the machine, and press [Start].

➠ The r

eport or list is printed.

Managing the Machine

448

Changing the Report and List Print Settings

84CU-02W

Reports and lists ar

e printed on paper on one side by default. You can change the setting to print on both sides. You

can also change the setting to automatically print communication results reports.

Use the operation panel to congure the settings. You cannot congure the settings using Remote UI from a

computer.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Output Report] [Report Settings].

➠ The [Report Settings] scr

een is displayed.

Change the report and list print settings.

To Print Reports and Lists on Both Sides

Press [Default Settings for Report Output].

➠ The [Default Settings for Report Output] scr

een is displayed.

Set [2-Sided Printing] to [On], and press [Apply].

To Change the Communication Management Report Settings

Press [Communication Management Report].

➠ The [Communication Management Report] screen is displayed.

Congure the r

eport settings.

● To print automatically after every 40 communication events, set [Auto Print (40 Transmissions)] to

[On].

● To congure the settings to print sending and saving results and receiving results in a different

format, set [Separate TX/RX] to [On].

Press [Apply].

To Change the Fax TX Result Report Settings

Press [Fax TX Result Report].

➠ The [Fax TX Result Report] scr

een is displayed.

Select whether to print this report automatically.

● T

o print automatically after each send job, select [On]. To print automatically only when an error

occurs, select [Only When Error Occurs].

Managing the Machine

449

● When [On] or [Only When Err

or Occurs] is selected, in [Include TX Image], select whether to print part

of the original on the report, and press [Apply].

To Change the E-mail, I-Fax, or File Sending Result Report Settings

Press [E-Mail/I-Fax/File TX Result Report].

➠ The [E-Mail/I-Fax/File TX Result Report] scr

een is displayed.

Select whether to print this report automatically.

o print automatically after each send or save job, select [On]. To print automatically only when an error

occurs, select [Only When Error Occurs].

To Change the RX Result Report Settings

Press [RX Result Report].

➠ The [RX Result Report] scr

een is displayed.

Select whether to print this report automatically.

o print automatically after each receive job, select [On]. To print automatically only when an error

occurs, select [Only When Error Occurs].

Managing the Machine

450

Clearing the Mail Box

84CU-02X

When scanned data is sent b

y e-mail and a send error occurs, the mail server may send an error notication e-mail to

the e-mail address of the machine. Delete all mail from the server mail box, as needed, so that the mail box does not

become full with notication mail.

Clear the mail box using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the operation panel to clear the mail box.

Administrator privileges are required.

● When the mail bo

x is cleared, all mail in the e-mail inbox of the server is deleted. Be careful not to delete

needed unread mail.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [TX Settings]

[E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].

➠ The [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings] scr

een is displayed.

In [Clear Mail Box], click [Clear].

Click [OK].

➠ All mail in the mail bo

x on the server is deleted.

Log out from Remote UI.

Managing the Machine

451

Importing and Exporting the Address Book and

Settings

84CU-02Y

ou can write the Address Book and settings to les and save (export) them to a computer. You can also load an

exported le and apply (import) the Address Book and settings to the machine.

You can use the import and export functions to back up the Address Book and settings in case of an accident.

In addition, an exported le can be imported to another device

to enable sharing of the Address Book and settings

with another device without having to register destinations or congure settings.

Some items cannot be imported or exported.

Settings that Can Be Imported and Exported(P. 577)

The Address Book can be applied to other models, but the settings of the machine can only be applied to the same

model.

Exporting the Address Book and Settings(P. 452)

Importing the Address Book and Settings(P. 453)

Do Not Turn OFF the Machine until the Import or Export Is Complete.

● It may tak

e a few minutes until the process is completed. Turning OFF the machine during processing may

cause data corruption or damage the machine.

Do Not Operate the Machine during Import or Export.

● Before import or export, check that the machine is not printing or performing other operations.

Exporting the Address Book and Settings

Select the items to e

xport and write them to a le. When exporting the Address Book, select the le format that suits

your needs.

This section describes how to export the Address Book and settings using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to export. When

exporting from the operation panel, use a USB memory device.

[Import/Export](P. 573)

Administr

ator privileges are required.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Data Management]

[Export].

➠ The [Export] scr

een is displayed.

In [Select Item to Export], select the items to export.

Managing the Machine

452

When Importing the Address Book to a Fax Driver or a Different Model

Select the [Addr

ess Book (ABK)] checkbox.

If a PIN is set for the Address Book, enter the Address Book PIN.

* The Address Book is exported as a Canon Address Book le (*.abk). When this le format is selected, the

settings of the machine cannot be exported at the same time.

When Backing Up or Importing the Address Book to the Same Model

Select the [Addr

ess Book] checkbox.

If a PIN is set for the Address Book, enter the Address Book PIN.

* The data is exported as a device conguration information le (*.dcm). When this le format is selected, the

settings of the machine can be exported at the same time.

When Exporting the Settings of the Machine

Select the [Settings/Registr

ation] checkbox.

When Exporting the Settings of the Application Library

Select the [Application Libr

ary Settings Information] checkbox.

In [Encryption Password], set a password.

● Enter the same passwor

d in [Encryption Password] and [Conrm] using single-byte alphanumeric characters.

● A password is required to import exported data.

● If you selected [Address Book (ABK)] in Step 4, this step is not required. Proceed to Step 6.

Click [Start Exporting] to save the exported data as a le to a computer.

Log out from Remote UI.

Importing the Address Book and Settings

Specify the e

xported le and select the items to be imported.

File formats for import

● Device conguration information le (*.dcm)

● Canon Address Book le (*.abk)

This section describes how to import les using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to import. When

importing from the operation panel, use a USB memory device.

[Import/Export](P. 573)

Administrator privileges are required. Depending on the items to be imported, the machine restarts automatically.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Data Management]

[Import].

➠ The [Import] screen is displayed.

Managing the Machine

453

Click [Browse] in [File Path], and specify the le to be imported.

Enter the decryption password.

When a Device Congur

ation Information File (*.dcm) Is Specied

Enter the password set at export.

When a Canon Address Book File (*.abk) Is Specied

Enter a custom string r

egardless of the the password set at export.

In [Select Item to Import], select the items to import.

Importing the Address Book Data

Select the [Addr

ess Book] checkbox.

If a PIN is set for the Address Book of the machine, enter the Address Book PIN.

* When importing the data, the Address Book currently registered to the machine is overwritten.

When Importing the Settings of the Machine

Select the [Settings/Registr

ation] checkbox.

When Importing the Settings of the Application Library

Select the [Application Libr

ary Settings Information] checkbox.

Click [Start Importing]

[OK].

➠ The selected le is imported to the machine.

When the screen indicating that importing has completed appears, click [OK].

When [Settings/Registration] is selected in Step 6 and the import is complete, the machine restarts

automatically

Log out from Remote UI.

Managing the Machine

454

Updating the Firmware

84CU-030

When functions ar

e added or the software version is upgraded, the rmware of the machine is updated.

Check the version of the rmware, and update the rmware via the Internet or a computer according to the usage

environment of the machine.

: Can be updated : Cannot be updated

Usage environment of the machine Connection via Internet Connection via computer

Wired LAN connection

Wireless LAN connection

USB connection

Use IPv6

* You cannot update the rmwar

e in an IPv6 Environment. Connect the machine to a computer via USB, and update

from the computer.

Checking the Firmware Version(P. 455)

Updating the Firmware via the Internet(P. 456)

Updating the Firmware via a Computer(P. 456)

Checking the Firmware Version

Check the current version of the rmware before updating it, and then check the version after updating to see if the

update was performed correctly.

This section describes how to check the rmware version using the operation panel.

You can also use Remote UI from a computer to check the rmware version. Managing the Machine from a

Computer (Remote UI)(P

. 437)

Administrator privileges are required.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Management Settings] [License/Other]

[Update Firmware].

➠ The [Update Firmwar

e] screen is displayed.

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then click [Log In].

System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

Depending on the model, [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmwar

e] may appear.

Select [Version Information].

➠ Displays the curr

ent version of the rmware.

Managing the Machine

455

Updating the Firmware via the Internet

Use the operation panel to update the rmware via the Internet. You cannot update it using Remote UI from a

computer.

Administrator privileges are required. When the rmware has been updated, the machine restarts automatically.

Required Preparations

● Connect the machine to the Internet.

Setting Up the Network(P. 50)

On the operation panel, press [Update Firmware] in the [Home] screen. [Home]

Screen(P. 111)

➠ The machine accesses the Canon server to see if new rmware is available.

When [This is the latest rmware version.] appears, no update is available.

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then click [Log In]. System

Manager ID and PIN(P. 6)

In the licensing screen, press [Accept].

➠ The rmwar

e update conrmation screen is displayed.

Press [OK].

➠ Do

wnloading of the rmware starts.

When the download is complete, the machine restarts automatically, and the rmware is updated.

● Do not turn OFF the machine until the r

estart is complete.

Updating the Firmware via a Computer

Update the rmwar

e from a computer connected to the machine via wired LAN or USB.

Required Preparations

● Do

wnload the latest rmware from the Canon website for your country/region to the computer performing

the update.

https://global.canon/en/support/

◼ Ho

w to Update from a Computer

See the "User Support Tool Operation Guide" included with the rmware.

Managing the Machine

456

◼ T

o Put the Machine into Update Waiting State (Download Mode)

Use the following procedure.

Use the operation panel to perform this operation. You cannot perform this operation using Remote UI from a

computer.

Administrator privileges are required.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Management Settings] [License/Other]

[Update Firmware].

➠ The [Update Firmwar

e] screen is displayed.

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then click [Log In].

System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

Depending on the model, [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmwar

e] may appear.

Press [Via PC]

[Yes].

➠ Switches the machine to do

wnload mode and puts it into update waiting state.

Managing the Machine

457

Initializing the Settings and Data

84CU-031

ou can initialize the settings and registered data to reset the machine to the factory settings. You can initialize

specied settings and data only or initialize all settings and data.

Initializing Specic Settings and Data

You can initialize the following items separately:

● Settings menu: Initializes the settings of [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

● Key and Certicate: Initializes the settings of the key and certicate as well as CA certicate, and clears

everything except the pre-installed key and certicate.

● Address Book: Clears the destinations registered in the Address Book.

Initializing Specic Settings and Data(P

. 458)

Initializing All Settings and Data

You can reset all settings to the factory settings, and clear all stored data including logs. Initialization is

performed to prevent access to condential information and unauthorized use such as when replacing or

disposing of the machine.

Initializing All Settings and Data(P. 459)

Initializing Specic Settings and Data

This section describes how to initialize settings and data using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then perform initialization from [Preferences] or

[Management Settings]. [Initialize Network Settings](P. 476) / [Data Management](P. 573)

Administr

ator privileges are required. Depending on the item to be initialized, you may have to restart the machine.

Starting Remote UI(P. 438)

On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of

Remote UI(P

. 441)

Click [Data Management].

➠ The [Data Management] scr

een is displayed.

Select the item to initialize.

Initializing the Settings Menu

Click [Initialize Menu], and select the setting to be initialized fr

om [Menu to Initialize].

When Initializing a Key and Certicate

Click [Initialize Ke

y and Certicate].

When Initializing the Address Book

Click [Initialize Addr

ess Book].

If the [Enter PIN] screen appears, enter the Address Book PIN, and then click [OK].

Click [Initialize]

[OK].

Managing the Machine

458

➠ The specied item is initialized.

Log out from Remote UI.

When the Settings Menu Is Initialized

When any of the follo

wing is initialized, restart the machine to apply the initialized settings.

Restarting the

Machine

(P. 104)

● [Preferences]

● [Function Settings]

● [Management Settings]

● [Network Settings]

When Initializing a Key and Certicate

● Functions using a k

ey and certicate such as TLS or IKE of IPSec are disabled. To use these functions again,

you must set the key and certicate, and then enable the function.

When [Management Settings] of the Settings Menu Is Initialized

● This also initializes the Remote UI Access PIN. To use Remote UI, you must set the Remote UI Access PIN

again.

Setting the PIN to Use for Remote UI(P. 422)

Initializing All Settings and Data

Use the oper

ation panel to initialize all settings and data. You cannot initialize these using Remote UI from a computer.

Administrator privileges are required. When these are initialized, the machine restarts automatically.

● Before initialization, check that there is no data being processed or waiting to be processed. This data is

deleted when the initialization is performed.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Management Settings] [Initialize All Data/Settings].

➠ The initialization conrmation scr

een is displayed.

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then click [Log In].

System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

Press [Yes]

[Yes].

➠ All settings and data ar

e initialized.

When initialization is complete, the machine restarts automatically.

Managing the Machine

459

Settings Menu Items

Settings Menu Items ....................................................................................................................................

462

[Preferences] ...................................................................................................................................................... 463

[Display Settings] .......................................................................................................................................... 465

[Timer/Energy Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 469

[Network] ..................................................................................................................................................... 472

[Wireless LAN Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 477

[TCP/IP Settings] .................................................................................................................................... 479

[External Interface] ....................................................................................................................................... 487

[Accessibility] ................................................................................................................................................ 488

[Adjustment/Maintenance] .............................................................................................................................. 489

[Adjust Image Quality] .................................................................................................................................. 490

[Auto Correction Settings] ...................................................................................................................... 493

[Special Processing] ............................................................................................................................... 495

[Maintenance] .............................................................................................................................................. 501

[Function Settings] ............................................................................................................................................ 503

[Common] .................................................................................................................................................... 505

[Paper Feed Settings] ............................................................................................................................. 506

[Print Settings] ....................................................................................................................................... 508

[Scan Settings] ....................................................................................................................................... 509

[Generate File] ....................................................................................................................................... 510

[Copy] ........................................................................................................................................................... 511

[Printer] ........................................................................................................................................................ 513

[Printer Settings] .................................................................................................................................... 514

[PDL Selection (Plug and Play)] .............................................................................................................. 533

[Send] ........................................................................................................................................................... 534

[Common Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 535

[Scan and Send Settings] ....................................................................................................................... 537

[Fax Settings] ......................................................................................................................................... 543

[Receive/Forward] ........................................................................................................................................ 548

[Common Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 549

[I-Fax Settings] ....................................................................................................................................... 551

[Fax Settings] ......................................................................................................................................... 552

[Store/Access Files] ....................................................................................................................................... 556

[Common Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 557

[Set Destination] ................................................................................................................................................ 564

[Management Settings] .................................................................................................................................... 565

Settings Menu Items

460

[User Management] .....................................................................................................................................

567

[Device Management] .................................................................................................................................. 568

[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware] .......................................................................... 571

[Remote UI Settings] .............................................................................................................................. 572

[Data Management] ..................................................................................................................................... 573

[Security Settings] ......................................................................................................................................... 575

[Authentication/Password Settings] ....................................................................................................... 576

Settings that Can Be Imported and Exported .................................................................................................. 577

[Preferences] ................................................................................................................................................ 578

[Adjustment/Maintenance] ........................................................................................................................... 582

[Function Settings] ....................................................................................................................................... 583

[Set Destination] ........................................................................................................................................... 587

[Management Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 588

Settings Menu Items

461

Settings Menu Items

84CU-0U5

This section describes the items available in the settings menu displayed when you pr

ess [Menu] in the [Home] screen

on the operation panel.

From the settings menu, you can run functions and modify the settings according to the machine’s operating

environment or its usage.

Administrator privileges are required to view or change some settings. Note also that the machine may need to be

restarted for changed settings to take effect.

[Preferences](P. 463)

[Adjustment/Maintenance](P. 489)

[Function Settings](P. 503)

[Set Destination](P. 564)

[Management Settings](P. 565)

Support for Importing and Exporting Setting Data

The settings menu items can be used with the Import and Export functions to r

egularly back up your settings

or share them with other machines.

Check this list to see which settings can be imported and exported.

Settings that Can Be Imported and Exported(P. 577)

Menu Route Map (List)

This list sho

ws you the settings menu items and the values set.

Click the icon below to view the corresponding Menu Route Map (PDF).

◼ See Also

If a Login Scr

een Appears

If a System Manager ID has been set, a login screen may appear when certain items are selected. Once you

enter the required information and the login is authenticated, you can view or change the settings.

Logging In to the Machine(P. 126)

If the Machine Must be Restarted

After changing the settings, r

estart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

Settings Not Included in the Menus

The Paper Settings items appear when you pr

ess [Paper Settings] in the [Home] screen.

Specifying the Paper Size and Type(P. 144)

The volume adjustment items appear when you pr

ess the Sound Volume key (

Adjusting the Sound Volume(P. 185)

Conguring Settings from Remote UI

The settings menu items can also be specied from a computer using Remote UI. In Remote UI, specify the

settings from [Settings/Registration] in the Portal page.

The items that can be specied in [Settings/Registration] in Remote UI are almost identical to those in the

operation panel settings menu, but there are also items that can be specied only from the operation panel

or only from Remote UI. Note also that some of the item names differ in Remote UI.

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 437)

Checking the Settings

ou can check a list of the current settings by printing them out.

Printing and Viewing Reports and Lists(P. 447)

Settings Menu Items

462

[Preferences]

84CU-0J8

These ar

e settings used to congure features such as the operation panel screen displays and the network settings

according to the environment in which the machine is used.

* Values in bold red text indicate the default setting for each item.

[Display Settings](P. 463)

[English Keyboard Layout](P. 463)

[Timer/Energy Settings](P. 463)

[Network](P. 463)

[External Interface](P. 463)

[Accessibility](P. 464)

[Display Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences]

Congur

e the operation panel screen displays.

[Display Settings](P. 465)

[English Keyboard Layout]

[Menu] [Preferences]

Specify the layout for a USB k

eyboard connected to the machine.

[USA Layout]

[UK Layout]

[Timer/Energy Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences]

Set the date and time and specify the Ener

gy Saver settings.

[Timer/Energy Settings](P. 469)

[Network]

[Menu] [Preferences]

Congur

e the network environment for the machine.

[Network](P. 472)

[External Interface]

[Menu] [Preferences]

Congur

e the USB connection.

[External Interface](P. 487)

Settings Menu Items

463

[Accessibility]

[Menu] [Preferences]

Congur

e operation panel screen features such as screen color inversion and message display time to make the

screen easier to see.

[Accessibility](P. 488)

Settings Menu Items

464

[Display Settings]

84CU-0J9

Congur

e the operation panel screen displays.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Default Screen After Startup/Restoration]

. 465)

[Home Screen Button Display Settings](P. 465)

[Language](P. 466)

[Remote UI Language](P. 466)

[Notify to Clean Orig. Scan Area](P. 466)

[Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch](P. 467)

[Gram/Pound Switch](P. 467)

[Display Timing for Cart. Prep.](P. 467)

[Display Notif. to Clean Fixing Assembly]

. 467)

[Show Warnings](P. 467)

[Action When Warning](P. 468)

[Display IP Address](P. 468)

[Default Screen After Startup/Restoration]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]

Specify the scr

een displayed after the start screen appears when the machine is turned ON and immediately after an

Auto Reset.

Setting this for the [Status Monitor] enables you to also specify the screen displayed immediately after the [Status

Monitor] screen is closed.

[Home]

[Cop

[Fax]

[Scan]

[Secure Print]

[Status Monitor]

[Home]

[Copy]

[Fax]

[Scan]

[Secure Print]

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Home Screen Button Display Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]

Add shortcut buttons and r

earrange the buttons so that you can run frequently used functions more quickly from the

[Home] screen of the operation panel.

Customizing the [Home] Screen(P. 121)

[Select Button to Display]

[Favorite Cop

y Settings]

[Favorite Fax Settings]

Settings Menu Items

465

[Favorite Scan Settings]

[Set Display Or

der]

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Language]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]

Change the language sho

wn on the operation panel and used in printed reports.

* Depending on your country or region, the [Language] setting may not be available, or its content or default setting

may be different.

[Deutsch]

[English]

[Español]

[Fr

ançais]

[Italiano]

[Português]

[日本語]

[中文(繁體)]

[中文(简体)]

[한국어]

[Remote UI Language]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]

Change the language sho

wn on Remote UI screens.

* Depending on your country or region, the [Remote UI Language] setting may not be available, or its content or

default setting may be different.

[English]

[

Japanese]

[French]

[Spanish]

[German]

[Italian]

[Portuguese]

[Chinese (Simplied)]

[Chinese (Traditional)]

[Korean]

[Notify to Clean Orig. Scan Area]

[Menu]

[Preferences] [Display Settings]

Specify whether a message is displayed to notify you if soiling is detected during feeder use.

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

466

[Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]

Change the units sho

wn on the screen for entering length and width.

[Millimeter]

[Inch]

[Gram/Pound Switch]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]

ou can change the units displayed such as for the paper weight.

* [Gram/Pound Switch] is only displayed when [Select Country/Region] is set to [United States (US)] or [Canada (CA)].

[Gram]

[Pound]

[Display Timing for Cart. Prep.]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]

When the toner in a toner cartridge runs lo

w, a message appears notifying you to prepare a new toner cartridge. To

manually specify when this message appears (the toner level in a cartridge), set [Auto] to [Off] and specify the timing

in [Custom].

When [Auto] is set to [On], the machine automatically decides when to display the message.

[Auto]

[Off]

[Custom]

2 to 20 to 99 (%)

[On]

[Display Notif. to Clean Fixing Assembly]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]

Select whether to notify you b

y displaying a message when the xing assembly requires cleaning.

[Off]

[On]

[1000 to 50000]

[Show Warnings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]

Specify whether a notication message is displayed when a toner cartridge is lo

w on toner.

Settings Menu Items

467

* If the machine is congur

ed to stop printing when a toner cartridge is low on toner, this cannot be set to [Off].

[Action When Warning](P. 468)

* If the machine is congur

ed not to print incoming faxes and I-Faxes when a toner cartridge is low on toner, the

message appears even when this is set to [Off].

[Continue Print. When Cart. Low](P. 549)

[Off]

[On]

[Action When Warning]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]

Specify whether to continue printing when a toner cartridge is lo

w on toner.

If this is set to [Stop Printing], a notication message appears when the toner cartridge runs low on toner.

[Show

arnings](P. 467)

[Low Cartridge Level]

[Continue Printing]

[Stop Printing]

[Display IP Address]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]

Specify whether to display the machine

’s IPv4 address in the [Status Monitor] screen.

[Status Monitor]

Scr

een(P. 114)

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

468

[Timer/Energy Settings]

84CU-0JA

Set the date and time and specify the Ener

gy Saver settings.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Current Date/Time Settings](P. 469)

[Date/Time Settings](P. 469)

[Date Format](P. 470)

[Time Format](P. 470)

[Auto Reset Time](P. 470)

[Function After Auto Reset](P. 470)

[Auto Sleep Time](P. 471)

[Auto Sleep Daily Timer](P. 471)

[Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings](P. 471)

[Current Date/Time Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]

Set the date and time for the machine. The date and time set her

e are used as a reference for the functions that use

date and time information.

Setting the Date and Time(P. 436)

Befor

e conguring this setting, check that the correct time zone is selected.

[Date/Time Settings](P. 469)

* The curr

ent date and time cannot be changed for one hour after Daylight Saving Time is set.

[Date/Time Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]

Set the time zone (UTC

) and Daylight Saving Time accor

ding to the region where the machine is installed.

The UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) is a coordinated universal time that is standard for all parts of the world. Internet-

based communication relies on the UTC being set correctly.

* Depending on your country or region, the [Date/Time Settings] setting may not be displayed, or its content or default

setting may be differ

ent.

* When you change the time zone, the current time setting is automatically changed accordingly.

[Current Date/

Time Settings](P

. 469) .

* If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to which daylight saving time is in effect.

[Time Zone]

[(UT

C-12:00) International Date Line West] to [(UTC) Coordinated Universal Time] to [(UTC+14:00) Kiritimati Island]

[Daylight Saving Time Settings]

[Off]

[On]

[Start Date]: Month, Week, Day

[End Date]: Month, Week, Day

Settings Menu Items

469

[Date Format]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]

Set the or

der in which the year, month, and day are displayed.

* Depending on your country or region, the [Date Format] setting may not be available, or its content or default

setting may be different.

[YYYY MM/DD]

[MM/DD/YYYY]

[DD/MM YYYY]

[Time Format]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]

Set 12 Hour or 24 Hour as the format for displayed time.

[12 Hour (AM/PM)]

[24 Hour]

[Auto Reset Time]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]

If the oper

ation panel is not used for a set period, a function called “Auto Reset Time” automatically restores the

default settings. This setting species whether Auto Reset is invoked.

If you enable Auto Reset, you can then set the time after which it is triggered.

* You can also change the screen that is displayed after an Auto Reset.

[Function After Auto Reset](P. 470)

[Set This Function]

[Off]

[On]

[Set Time]

1 to 2

to 9 (min.)

Situations Where Auto Reset is Not Triggered

● When the Err

or lamp on the operation panel is ashing

Operation Panel(P. 14)

● When the [Menu] scr

een or an error message

is displayed on the operation panel

● When processing of some sort (such as printing or sending and receiving faxes) is in progress

Auto Reset is performed for some messages.

[Function After Auto Reset]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]

Settings Menu Items

470

Set the screen displayed after an Auto Reset.

● T

o view the specied screen, specify the screen in [Default Function]. Specify the displayed screen in [Default

Screen After Startup/Restoration].

[Default Screen After Startup/Restoration](P. 465)

● T

o display the screen for the function being used before the Auto Reset, specify the screen in [Selected

Function].

[Default Function]

[Selected Function]

[Auto Sleep Time]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]

Set the time after which the machine automatically goes into sleep mode. Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep

Mode)(P

. 106)

* Use of the default settings is recommended to achieve the most effective power savings.

1 to 120 (min.)

[Auto Sleep Daily Timer]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]

Congur

e the machine to automatically enter sleep mode at a specied time.

Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep

Mode)(P

. 106)

[Set This Function]

[Off]

[On]

(0:00 to 12:59 AM/PM)

[Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]

Congur

e the machine to automatically exit sleep mode at a specied time.

Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep

Mode)(P

. 106)

[Set This Function]

[Off]

[On]

(0:00 to 12:59 AM/PM)

Settings Menu Items

471

[Network]

84CU-0JC

Specify the settings for the machine

’s network environment.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Select Wired/Wireless LAN](P. 472)

[Wireless LAN Settings](P. 472)

[Direct Connection Settings](P. 472)

[Easy Connection via PC](P. 473)

[TCP/IP Settings](P. 473)

[SNMP Settings](P. 473)

[Use Dedicated Port](P. 474)

[Dedicated Port Auth. Method](P. 474)

[Wait Time for Conn. at Startup](P. 474)

[Ethernet Driver Settings](P. 474)

[Use IEEE 802.1X](P. 475)

[Firewall Settings](P. 475)

[Device Settings Management](P. 476)

[Monitoring Service](P. 476)

[RMT-SW](P. 476)

[Initialize Network Settings](P. 476)

[Select Wired/Wireless LAN]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Set whether to connect the machine to the network using a wir

ed or wireless LAN.

Selecting Wired or Wireless

LAN(P

. 52)

* If you are switching from a wired LAN to a wireless LAN, you can make the change within the procedure for

conguring the wireless LAN.

[Wir

ed LAN]

[Wireless LAN]

[Wireless LAN Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Specify the settings for connecting the machine to a wir

eless LAN and to save energy while the machine is connected

to a wireless LAN.

[Wireless LAN Settings](P. 477)

[Direct Connection Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Specify the settings for using a dir

ect connection and for the connection function.

Enabling the Direct Connection

Function

(P. 336)

[Use Direct Connection]

[Off]

[On]

[Dir

ect Connection Termination]

[Automatically Terminate Session]

[Off]

[On]

[Time Until Session Terminates]

1 to 60 (min.)

Settings Menu Items

472

[Access Point Mode Settings]

[Use Custom SSID]

[Off]

[On]

[SSID]

[Use Custom Network Ke

[Off]

[On]

[Network Key]

[Keep Enabled If SSID/Ntwk Key Spcfd]

[Off]

[On]

[Cong. IP Address For Direct Conn.]

192.168.22.1

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Easy Connection via PC]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Start cableless setup mode.

o congure the network settings using the Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility, select cableless setup mode.

* You can download the Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility from the Canon website for your country/region.

https://global.canon/en/support/

[TCP/IP Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Specify the settings for using the machine on a T

CP/IP network.

[TCP/IP Settings](P. 479)

[SNMP Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Specify the settings for setting up, monitoring, and contr

olling the machine using SNMP management software.

Conguring SNMP

(P. 81)

To ensure compliance with the protocol’s advanced specications (RFC2790) when the machine’s status is being

monitored, set [Format Host Rsrcs. MIB to RFC2790] to [On].

[SNMPv1 Settings]

[Off]

[On]

[SNMPv3 Settings]

[Off]

[On]

[Acquir

e Printer Mngt. Info. from Host]

[Off]

Settings Menu Items

473

[On]

[Format Host Rsr

cs. MIB to RFC2790]

[Off]

[On]

[Use Dedicated Port]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Specify whether to use a dedicated port.

Use a dedicated port for tasks such as printing fr

om a computer, scanning using the MF Scan Utility, and conguring

or browsing the machine’s settings.

[Off]

[On]

[Dedicated Port Auth. Method]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Set the authentication method when using a dedicated port.

If you specify [Mode 2], communication via the dedicated port will be limited to secur

e authentication methods only.

This may mean that you cannot connect to the machine from device management software, drivers or other software.

[Mode 1]

[Mode 2]

[Wait Time for Conn. at Startup]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Set the waiting time until a connection is established when the machine starts up.

If the machine is connected via a de

vice such as a switching hub, you may not be able to connect to the network even

when the setting on the machine is correct. If so, set the waiting time and reconnect.

0 to 300 (sec.)

[Ethernet Driver Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Set the Ethernet communication method. Manually Conguring the Ethernet Settings(P

. 70)

This also allows you to check the MAC address on a wired LAN.

Viewing the MAC Address of the Wired LAN(P. 89)

* If the [Communication Mode] is set to [Half Duple

x], [1000BASE-T] cannot be selected.

[Auto Detect]

[Off]

[Communication Mode]

[Half Duple

[Full Duplex]

[Ethernet Type]

[10BASE-T]

Settings Menu Items

474

[100BASE-TX]

[1000B

ASE-T]

[On]

[MAC Address]

[Use IEEE 802.1X]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Specify whether to use IEEE 802.1X.

Use Remote UI fr

om a computer to set the IEEE 802.1X authentication method.

Using IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

* [Use IEEE 802.1X] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Off]

[On]

[Firewall Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Specify whether to enable an IP addr

ess lter and MAC address lter.

Use Remote UI from a computer to set the default policy for ltering and the exception addresses.

Setting the

Fir

ewall(P. 374)

[IPv4 Address Filter]

[Outbound Filter]

[Off]

[On]

[Inbound Filter]

[Off]

[On]

[IPv6 Addr

ess Filter]

[Outbound Filter]

[Off]

[On]

[Inbound Filter]

[Off]

[On]

[MAC Address Filter]

[Outbound Filter]

[Off]

[On]

[Inbound Filter]

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

475

[Device Settings Management]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Select whether to use the de

vice management software to manage Address Book destinations, settings, and other

data in the machine. For more information, see the manual of the software you are using.

[Off]

[On]

[Monitoring Service]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Check that the machine can communicate with the monitoring server.

Perform this oper

ation to regularly send machine information to the monitoring server. For details, contact your

dealer or service representative.

* [Monitoring Service] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[RMT-SW]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Normally

, use the machine with this set to [Off].

When your service representative carries out device maintenance remotely, he or she may change this to [On].

[Off]

[On]

[Initialize Network Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]

Use this to r

estore the network settings to the factory settings.

Initializing Specic Settings and Data(P

. 458)

Settings Menu Items

476

[Wireless LAN Settings]

84CU-0JE

Specify the settings for connecting the machine to a wir

eless LAN and to save energy while the machine is connected

to a wireless LAN.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Select Network](P. 477)

[Other Connections](P. 477)

[Connection Set.](P. 478)

[Select Network]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings]

Select a wir

eless LAN router (access point) from the displayed list and enter the network key to connect.

Connecting

to a Wir

eless LAN by Searching for a Router (Access Point Setup Method)(P. 60)

[Other Connections]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings]

Connect to the wir

eless LAN by a method other than selecting the wireless LAN router from a list.

[Manually Enter Network Name (SSID)]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings] [Other Connections]

Connect to a wir

eless LAN router by manually entering all the router information, such as the SSID, network key

and security settings.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method)(P. 62)

[Security Settings]

[None]

[WEP]

[Open System]

Encryption k

eys 1 to 4

[Shared Key]

Encryption keys 1 to 4

[WPA/WPA2-PSK]

[Auto]

[AES-CCMP]

[WPA/WPA2-EAP]

[WPS Push Button Mode]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings] [Other Connections]

Connect to a wir

eless LAN by pressing a button on a LAN router that supports WPS push button mode.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Using the Router Button (Push Button Mode)(P. 57)

[WPS PIN Code Mode]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings] [Other Connections]

Settings Menu Items

477

Connect to a wireless LAN router that supports WPS PIN code mode by registering a PIN code generated by the

machine. Use a computer or similar de

vice to register the PIN code.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by

Entering a PIN Code (WPS PIN Code Mode)

(P. 58)

[Connection Set.]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings]

Congur

e the setting to save power when connecting by wireless LAN, and check the wireless LAN connection

information.

[Power Save Mode]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings] [Connection Set.]

Specify whether to periodically set the machine to Po

wer Save Mode according to signals sent from the wireless

LAN router.

[Off]

[On]

[Connection Information]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings] [Connection Set.]

Check data such as the security settings, as well as the wir

eless LAN MAC address and other connection

information.

Viewing the MAC Address and Connection Information of the Wireless LAN(P. 90)

[MAC Address]

[Wir

eless LAN Status]

[Latest Error Information]

[Channel]

[Network Name]

[Security Settings]

[Power Save Mode]

Settings Menu Items

478

[TCP/IP Settings]

84CU-0JF

Specify the settings to use the machine on a T

CP/IP network.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[IPv4 Settings](P. 479)

[IPv6 Settings](P. 480)

[DNS Settings](P. 481)

[WINS Settings](P. 482)

[LPD Settings](P. 483)

[RAW Settings](P. 483)

[WSD Settings](P. 483)

[Use FTP PASV Mode](P. 484)

[IPP Print Settings](P. 484)

[Use HTTP](P. 484)

[Use IPSec](P. 484)

[Network Link Scan Settings](P. 485)

[Port Number Settings](P. 485)

[MTU Size](P. 486)

[IPv4 Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]

Specify the settings to use the machine in an IPv4 envir

onment.

[IP Address Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings]

Set the IPv4 addr

ess either automatically or manually.

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

[Auto Acquire]

[Auto Acquir

[Off]

[On]

[Select Protocol]

[Off]

[DHCP]

[Auto IP]

[Off]

[On]

[Manually Acquire]

[IP Address]: 0.0.0.0

[Subnet Mask]: 0.0.0.0

[Gateway Address]: 0.0.0.0

[Check Settings]

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[DHCP Option Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings]

Specify the settings for using a DHCP server in an IPv4 envir

onment with a Domain Name System (DNS)

implemented.

Conguring DNS(P

. 71)

Settings Menu Items

479

[Acquire Host Name]

[Off]

[On]

[DNS Dynamic Update]

[Off]

[On]

[Acquir

e DNS Server Address]

[Off]

[On]

[Acquire Domain Name]

[Off]

[On]

[Acquire WINS Server Address]

[Off]

[On]

[Acquire SMTP Server Address]

[Off]

[On]

[Acquire POP Server Address]

[Off]

[On]

[PING Command]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings]

ecute a PING command to check whether the machine can connect to devices on the network.

Checking

Whether the Machine Can Connect to Network De

vices(P. 88)

[IPv6 Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]

Specify the settings for using the machine in an IPv6 envir

onment.

You can set multiple IPv6 addresses and use them at the same time.

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 67)

[Use IPv6]

[Off]

[On]

[Stateless Addr

ess Settings]

[Stateless Address Settings]

[Off]

[On]

[Check Settings]

[DHCPv6 Settings]

[Use DHCPv6]

[Off]

Settings Menu Items

480

[On]

[Check Settings]

[DHCP Option Settings]

[Acquir

e DNS Server Address]

[Off]

[On]

[Acquire Domain Name]

[Off]

[On]

[Check IPv6 Settings]

[DNS Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]

Specify the DNS settings when using the machine in an envir

onment with a Domain Name System (DNS) implemented.

Conguring DNS(P

. 71)

The settings for mDNS (multicast DNS) used by functions such as Bonjour are also specied here.

[IPv4 DNS Server Address Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [DNS Settings]

Set the IP addr

ess for an IPv4 DNS server.

[Primary DNS Server]: 0.0.0.0

[Secondary DNS Server]: 0.0.0.0

[DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [DNS Settings]

Specify the host name to be r

egistered for the machine on the DNS server and the name of the domain to which

it belongs.

[IPv4]

[Host Name]

[Domain Name]

[IPv6]

[Use IPv4 Host/Domain]

[Off]

[Host Name]

[Domain Name]

[On]

[DNS Dynamic Update Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [DNS Settings]

Specify whether settings ar

e automatically updated when the correspondence between host names and IP

addresses is changed in environments such as DHCP.

If you enable automatic updating, you can also specify the interval between updates.

[IPv4]

[DNS Dynamic Update]

Settings Menu Items

481

[Off]

[On]

[DNS Dynamic Update Interval]

0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)

[IPv6]

[DNS Dynamic Update]

[Off]

[On]

[Register Manual Addr

ess]

[Off]

[On]

[Register Stateful Address]

[Off]

[On]

[Register Stateless Address]

[Off]

[On]

[DNS Dynamic Update Interval]

0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)

[mDNS Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [DNS Settings]

Specify the mDNS settings to use DNS functions in an envir

onment with no DNS installed.

[IPv4]

[Use mDNS]

[Off]

[On]

[mDNS Name]

[IPv6]

[Use mDNS]

[Off]

[On]

[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]

[Off]

[mDNS Name]

[On]

[WINS Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]

Congur

e WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) when using the machine in a network environment that uses both

NetBIOS and TCP/IP.

Conguring WINS(P

. 76)

[WINS Resolution]

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

482

[WINS Server Address]: 0.0.0.0

[LPD Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]

Specify whether to use the LPD pr

otocol.

Conguring LPD

, RAW, or WSD(P. 425)

If the LPD protocol is used, you can also set the time from the start of reception standby, after print data reception is

canceled, to the timeout.

[Use LPD Printing]

[Off]

[On]

[RX Timeout]

1 to 5

to 60 (min.)

[RAW Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]

Specify whether to use the RA

W protocol.

Conguring LPD

, RAW, or WSD(P. 425)

If the RAW protocol is used, you can also set the time from the start of reception standby, after print data reception is

canceled, to the timeout.

[Use RAW Printing]

[Off]

[On]

[RX Timeout]

1 to 5

to 60 (min.)

[WSD Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]

Specify whether to use the WSD pr

otocol. You can specify this setting for each of the functions that use the WSD

protocol.

Conguring LPD

, RAW, or WSD(P. 425)

[Use WSD Printing]

[Off]

[On]

[Use WSD Br

owsing]

[Off]

[On]

[Use WSD Scanning]

[Off]

[On]

[Use Computer Scanning]

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

483

[Use Multicast Disco

very]

[Off]

[On]

[Use FTP PASV Mode]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]

Specify that P

ASV mode be used if a rewall is installed between the machine and the FTP server.

Conguring FTP

ASV Mode(P. 251)

[Off]

[On]

[IPP Print Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]

Specify whether to use IPP (Internet Printing Pr

otocol). You can use IPP when printing and sending fax with AirPrint.

Setting the Functions and Security to Be Used with AirPrint(P. 339)

When using IPP

, you can also specify whether TLS encryption is used for communication.

[Use IPP Printing]

[Off]

[On]

[Allo

w IPP Printing Only w/TLS]

[Off]

[On]

[Use HTTP]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]

Specify whether to use HT

TP.

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 427)

[Off]

[On]

[Use IPSec]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]

Specify whether to use IPSec (IP Security Pr

otocol).

Use Remote UI from a computer to specify setting such as the IPSec policy, selector, and IKE.

Using IPSec(P. 382)

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

484

[Network Link Scan Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]

Specify whether to use Network Link Scan. Y

ou can use Network Link Scan when scanning documents with AirPrint.

Setting the Functions and Security to Be Used with AirPrint(P. 339)

When using Network Link Scan, you can also specify whether TLS encryption is used for communication.

* Setting [Use Network Link Scan] to [On] enables HT

TP communication.

[Use HTTP](P. 484)

[Use Network Link Scan]

[Off]

[On]

[Use TLS]

[Off]

[On]

[Port Number Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]

Specify the port number for the pr

otocol used in accordance with the port numbers for the computer, server or other

device.

Changing the Port Number(P. 377)

[LPD]

1 to 515 to 65535

[RA

1 to 9100 to 65535

[WSD Multicast Discovery]

1 to 3702 to 65535

[HTTP]

1 to 80 to 65535

[Multicast Discovery]

1 to 427 to 65535

[POP3]

1 to 110 to 65535

[SMTP TX]

1 to 25 to 65535

[FTP]

1 to 21 to 65535

[SNMP]

1 to 161 to 65535

Settings Menu Items

485

[MTU Size]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]

If communication slo

ws down due to the size of the packets sent, use this to change the maximum size for outgoing

packets.

[1300]

[1400]

[1500]

Settings Menu Items

486

[External Interface]

84CU-0JH

Specify the settings for USB connections.

* V

alues in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[USB Settings](P. 487)

[USB Settings]

[Menu] [Preferences] [External Interface]

Specify the settings for using the USB ports and USB memory devices.

● Specify

whether to use the USB port for connecting to the computer in [Use as USB Device].

Preventing

Connection to Computer via USB Port(P

. 424)

● Specify whether to use memory media such as USB memory devices in [Use USB Storage Device].

Preventing

All Use of Memory Media

(P. 411)

[Use as USB Device]

[Off]

[On]

[Use USB Stor

age Device]

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

487

[Accessibility]

84CU-0JJ

Congur

e operation panel screen features such as screen color inversion and message display time to make the

screen easier to see.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Invert Screen Colors](P. 488)

[Brightness](P. 488)

[Message Display Time](P. 488)

[Invert Screen Colors]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Accessibility]

Specify whether light and dark on the oper

ation panel screen are reversed.

Use this setting when the display is still dicult to see even after you have adjusted the brightness.

[Brightness]

. 488)

[Off]

[On]

[Brightness]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Accessibility]

Adjust the brightness of the oper

ation panel screen when it is dicult to see.

5 levels

[Message Display Time]

[Menu] [Preferences] [Accessibility]

Set the number of seconds for which each message is displayed when 2 messages ar

e displayed alternately on the

operation panel screen.

1 to 2 to 5 (sec.)

Settings Menu Items

488

[Adjustment/Maintenance]

84CU-0JK

Use this setting to adjust the print or scanning quality and when cleaning the machine.

[Adjust Image Quality](P. 489)

[Maintenance](P. 489)

[Adjust Image Quality]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance]

Use this setting to adjust the image quality or print position and for special pr

ocessing according to the paper used.

[Adjust Image Quality](P. 490)

[Maintenance]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance]

Carry out maintenance to clean the machine and to contr

ol condensation.

[Maintenance](P. 501)

Settings Menu Items

489

[Adjust Image Quality]

84CU-0JL

Use this setting to adjust the image quality or print position and for special pr

ocessing according to the paper used.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Auto Adjust Gradation](P. 490)

[Auto Correction Settings](P. 490)

[Correct Print Color Mismatch](P. 490)

[Black Text Processing for Color](P. 490)

[Adjust Print Position](P. 491)

[Special Processing](P. 491)

[Remove Streaks from Scan Area](P. 492)

[Auto Adjust Gradation]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

Corr

ect the gradations if they are not reproduced correctly during printing or copying.

Calibrating the

adation(P. 611)

[Full Adjust]

[Quick Adjust]

[Adjust Cop

y Image]

[Auto Correction Settings]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

Specify when to perform Quick Adjust (gr

adation calibration) and Correct Print Color Mismatch automatically and the

operation to be performed during Quick Adjust.

[Auto Correction Settings](P. 493)

[Correct Print Color Mismatch]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

Corr

ect color mismatching when printed images are blurry or the colors are misaligned.

Correcting Color

Mismatch

(P. 616)

[Black Text Processing for Color]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

When you ar

e scanning originals in color, make adjustments to give priority to reproducing color text that is close to

black or making black text easier to see.

Adjusting the Reproducibility of Near Black Color Text(P. 617)

[Feeder]

7 le

vels

[Platen Glass]

7 levels

Settings Menu Items

490

[Adjust Print Position]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

Adjust the print position if te

xt or images are printed off-center or outside the printable range.

Adjusting the Print

Position

(P. 619)

[Multi-Purpose Tray]

[Adjust V

ertically (Front Side)]

-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

[Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)]

-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

[Adjust Vertically (Back Side)]

-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

[Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)]

-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

[Drawer 1]

[Adjust Vertically (Front Side)]

-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

[Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)]

-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

[Adjust Vertically (Back Side)]

-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

[Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)]

-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

[Drawer 2]

[Adjust Vertically (Front Side)]

-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

[Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)]

-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

[Adjust Vertically (Back Side)]

-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

[Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)]

-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Special Processing]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

Use a r

ange of processes to resolve problems that arise due to factors such as the paper type, the material used, or its

condition.

[Special Processing](P. 495)

Settings Menu Items

491

[Remove Streaks from Scan Area]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

Specify whether stained ar

eas are omitted from scanning when streaks are detected during feeder use.

* Note that if soiled areas are not scanned, images and text in soiled areas will also not be scanned. If streak-shaped

unscanned areas appear when scanning originals with this set to [On], clean the feeder.

Cleaning the

Feeder

(P. 596)

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

492

[Auto Correction Settings]

84CU-0JR

Specify when to perform Quick Adjust (gr

adation calibration) and Correct Print Color Mismatch automatically and the

operation to be performed during gradation calibration.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Auto Adjust Image Regularly](P. 493)

[Correct Print Color Mismatch](P. 493)

[Adjust Image According To](P. 493)

[Auto Adjust Image Regularly]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Auto Correction Settings]

Specify that Quick Adjust be automatically performed regularly.

● T

o perform Quick Adjust immediately after turning the machine ON, set this to [When Turning Main Power ON].

● To perform Quick Adjust when the rst print job is completed after the machine is turned ON, set this to [After

Printing First Job].

[Off]

[When T

urning Main Power ON]

[After Printing First Job]

● Y

ou can also perform Quick Adjust manually.

Calibrating the Gradation(P. 611)

[Correct Print Color Mismatch]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Auto Correction Settings]

Specify the timing for when Correct Print Color Mismatch is automatically performed.

● T

o perform Quick Adjust when the rst print job is completed after the machine is turned ON, set this to [After

Printing First Job].

● To perform Quick Adjust immediately after turning the machine ON, set this to [When Turning Main Power ON].

[After Printing First Job]

[When T

urning Main Power ON]

● Y

ou can also perform Correct Print Color Mismatch manually.

Correcting Color Mismatch(P. 616)

[Adjust Image According To]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Auto Correction Settings]

Settings Menu Items

493

When performing gradation calibration regularly, you can set the priority to the toner cartridge lifetime or the

calibr

ation effect.

[Estimate (Consumable Saving Priority)]

[Measur

ement (Image Quality Priority)]

Settings Menu Items

494

[Special Processing]

84CU-0JS

Use a r

ange of processes to resolve problems that arise due to factors such as the paper type, the material used, or its

condition.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Special Paper Processing](P. 495)

[Reduce Ppr. Sticking at Output](P. 496)

[High Humidity Mode](P. 497)

[Low Humidity Mode](P. 497)

[Rdc Condens. (Consec 2-Sd Prt)](P. 497)

[Quiet Mode](P. 497)

[Correct Uneven Gloss](P. 498)

[Prevent Fogging](P. 498)

[Correct Color Mismatch](P. 498)

[Reduce Toner Flaking](P. 498)

[Auto Detect B&W/Color Orig.](P. 498) [Auto Detect

B&W/Color Orig.](P

. 498)

[Rdc. Faint Print After Rplc. Cart.](P. 499)

[Correct Paper Conveyance](P. 499)

[ITB Cleaning Frequency](P. 499)

[Prevent Printing Noise](P. 499)

[Prevent Print Fading/Misalign.](P. 500)

[Reduce Ghosting](P. 500)

[Correct Void](P. 500)

[Correct Void for Rough Paper](P. 500)

[Special Paper Processing]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

Specify special processing for the paper in the following situations:

● If you ar

e using special paper

- To print on the back of printed paper

- For paper with a rough surface

● If the envelope ap is stuck down

● If the paper curls during printing

[Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing] [Special Paper

ocessing]

If you are using paper that has already been printed on, printing on the back side may appear faint. If so,

specifying [On] for that paper source may improve the print results.

* When this is set to [On], if some time has passed since the front side of the paper was printed, or depending

on the operating environment humidity, changes in image quality or paper jams may occur.

[Multi-Purpose Tray]

[Off]

[On]

[Dr

awer 1]

[Off]

[On]

[Drawer 2]

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

495

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Rough Surface Paper Mode]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing] [Special Paper

ocessing]

If you are using paper with a rough surface, printed images may appear faint, particularly where the images

use 2 or more toner colors overlaid. If so, specifying [On] for that paper source may improve the print results.

* Specifying [On] in this setting may lead to slower print speeds or changes in the image quality.

[Multi-Purpose Tray]

[Off]

[On]

[Dr

awer 1]

[Off]

[On]

[Drawer 2]

[Off]

[On]

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Env. Flap Closing Prevention]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing] [Special Paper

ocessing]

Depending on the type of envelope and the operating environment, the envelope ap may stick down during

printing. If so, specifying [On] in this setting may reduce the likelihood of envelope aps sticking down.

* If this is set to [On], the print may be faded because the toner is not fully xed on the paper.

[Off]

[On]

[Paper Curl Correction]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing] [Special Paper

ocessing]

Depending on paper used, the paper may curl during printing. If so, specifying [On] in this setting may alleviate

paper curling.

* Specifying [On] in this setting may lead to faded print or make printing slower.

[Off]

[On]

[Reduce Ppr. Sticking at Output]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

Settings Menu Items

496

In 2-sided color printing involving multiple pages, printed paper sheets may stick together. If so, specifying [On] in this

setting may r

educe the likelihood of paper sheets sticking together.

* Specifying [On] in this setting slows down the print speed for images that are likely to stick together.

[Off]

[On]

[High Humidity Mode]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

Printing in a high-humidity envir

onment may cause uneven print density. If so, specifying [On] may improve the print

results.

* Specifying [On] in this setting may lead to blurred images and/or text in low-humidity environments.

[Off]

[On]

[Low Humidity Mode]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

Printing in a lo

w-humidity environment may lead to blurred images and/or text. If so, specifying [On] may improve the

print results.

* Specifying [On] in this setting may lead to faint or uneven printing in high-humidity environments.

[Off]

[On]

[Rdc Condens. (Consec 2-Sd Prt)]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

In 2-sided printing, water dr

oplets inside the machine may result in images being printed faintly. If so, specifying [On]

in this setting may reduce the amount of condensation inside the machine.

* Specifying [On] in this setting may lead to faded print or make printing slower.

[Off]

[On]

[Quiet Mode]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

If the oper

ation sound during printing is loud, selecting [On] may reduce the operation sound.

* When you select [On], the printing speed will decrease.

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

497

[Correct Uneven Gloss]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

Une

ven gloss may occur at the edges of printed paper. If so, specifying [On] may improve the print results.

* If this is set to [On], the print may be faded because the toner is not fully xed on the paper.

[Off]

[On]

[Prevent Fogging]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

White ar

eas in printed images may appear to be faintly colored throughout. If so, specifying [Mode 1] may correct the

problem. If this does not correct the problem, select [Mode 2] and [Mode 3] in that order.

* When this setting is enabled, the print density may decrease.

[Off]

[Mode 1]

[Mode 2]

[Mode 3]

[Correct Color Mismatch]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

Color mismatching may occur in printed images. If so, specifying [On] in this setting may impr

ove the print results.

* Specifying [On] may reduce the print speed.

[Off]

[On]

[Reduce Toner Flaking]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

Depending on the paper type and oper

ating environment, the toner in printed images may peel off. If so, specifying

[Mode 1] in this setting may improve the print results. If this does not solve the problem, specify [Mode 2].

* Enabling this setting may result in ghosting in blank areas.

[Off]

[Mode 1]

[Mode 2]

[Auto Detect B&W/Color Orig.]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

Settings Menu Items

498

Specify whether to prioritize the print speed or limit the use of the color toner cartridges when printing

documents that include both black and white and color.

● T

o prioritize the print speed, specify [Mode 1] in this setting.

● To limit the use of color toner cartridges, specify [Mode 2] in this setting.

[Mode 1]

[Mode 2]

[Rdc. Faint Print After Rplc. Cart.]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

Print may be faded immediately after installing a ne

w replacement toner cartridge. If so, specifying [On] in this setting

may improve the print results. This setting takes effect the next time a toner cartridge is replaced.

* Specifying [On] will result in a longer delay than usual between replacing toner cartridges and being able to print.

[Off]

[On]

[Correct Paper Conveyance]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

Continuous printing may r

esult in repeated paper jams. In this case, selecting [On] may reduce the frequency of paper

jams.

* When you select [On], the printing speed may decrease.

[Off]

[On]

[ITB Cleaning Frequency]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

If the printed paper is partly smudged, selecting [High] may impr

ove the print results.

* When you select [High], the printing speed may decrease.

[Standar

[High]

[Prevent Printing Noise]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

During black and white printing, the machine may mak

e a sound as if there is friction. In this case, selecting [Mode 1]

may reduce the sound. If that does not work, select [Mode 2].

* When this setting is enabled, the printing speed may decrease.

[Off]

[Mode 1]

Settings Menu Items

499

[Mode 2]

[Prevent Print Fading/Misalign.]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

The position of the printed image may be shifted, or the image may appear faded. In this case, selecting [On] may

impr

ove the print results.

* When you select [On], the printing speed may decrease.

[Off]

[On]

[Reduce Ghosting]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

Ghost images with str

eaks may appear on the printed paper. In this case, selecting [On] may improve the print results.

* When you select [On], the printing speed may decrease.

[Off]

[On]

[Correct Void]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

White spots may appear on the edge of the paper when printing on thin paper. In this case, selecting [On] may

impr

ove the print results.

* When you select [On], the printing may be faded.

[Off]

[On]

[Correct Void for Rough Paper]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]

When you use paper with a r

ough surface, printing may appear uneven. In this case, selecting [On] may improve the

print results.

* When you select [On], the print quality may be affected.

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

500

[Maintenance]

84CU-0JU

Carry out maintenance to clean the machine and contr

ol condensation.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Clean Fixing Assembly](P. 501)

[Clean ITB](P. 501)

[Clean Feeder](P. 501)

[Control Condensation](P. 501)

[Clean Fixing Assembly]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance]

Perform this oper

ation to clean the xing assembly if black streaks appear on printed paper following procedures such

as toner cartridge replacement.

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 599)

[Clean ITB]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance]

If the printout is smudged, the tr

ansfer belt (ITB) inside the machine may be dirty. Perform this operation to clean the

transfer belt.

Cleaning the Transfer Belt(P. 600)

[Clean Feeder]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance]

If wiping and cleaning the feeder does not remedy the problems listed below, perform this operation to clean the

feeder. Cleaning the Feeder with Paper(P. 597)

● Originals become dirty

● Originals fr

equently jam

● Printouts appear smudged after scanning, copying, or sending faxes

[Control Condensation]

[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance]

In envir

onments subject to sudden temperature changes, condensation may form and cause images and/or text to be

faint or blurred. If so, specifying [On] may improve the print results.

During condensation removal, a blank sheet of paper may be output without printing correctly. If you set this to [On],

you can set whether to restrict printing.

* If you set this to [On], you must keep the machine ON to continuously remove the condensation. The Auto Shutdown

Time setting is disabled.

Models with a fax function

[Off]

[On]

[Use Fax Memory Lock]

Settings Menu Items

501

[Use Fax Memory Lock + Do Not Allow Job Printing During Process]

Models without a fax function

[Off]

[On]

[Allo

w Job Printing During Process]

[Do Not Allow Job Printing During Process]

Settings Menu Items

502

[Function Settings]

84CU-0JW

Specify the settings for printing, scanning, faxing, and cop

ying.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Common](P. 503)

[Copy](P. 503)

[Printer](P. 503)

[Send](P. 503)

[Receive/Forward](P. 503)

[Store/Access Files](P. 504)

[Secure Print](P. 504)

[Common]

[Menu] [Function Settings]

Specify the settings for function oper

ation, such as the paper source, printing, and scanning.

[Common](P. 505)

[Copy]

[Menu] [Function Settings]

Specify the settings for cop

ying.

[Copy](P. 511)

[Printer]

[Menu] [Function Settings]

Specify the printer settings.

[Printer](P. 513)

[Send]

[Menu] [Function Settings]

Specify the settings for sending fax

es and scanned data.

[Send](P. 534)

[Receive/Forward]

[Menu] [Function Settings]

Specify the settings for r

eceiving and forwarding e-mails, faxes and I-Faxes.

[Receive/Forward](P. 548)

Settings Menu Items

503

[Store/Access Files]

[Menu] [Function Settings]

Specify the settings for saving scanned data and using USB memory de

vices.

[Store/Access Files](P. 556)

[Secure Print]

[Menu] [Function Settings]

Specify whether to use the Secure Print function, which assigns a PIN for printing. Printing a Document

Secur

ed with a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 215)

● To restrict printing from a computer to Secure Print jobs only, specify [Restrict Printer Jobs] also.

Restricting

Printing fr

om a Computer to Secure Print(P. 415)

● To change the period of time until the print data that was sent with a PIN (secure data) and is temporarily saved

in the memory of the machine is deleted, specify the [Secure Print Deletion Time] setting also.

Changing the

Time Period That Print Data with a PIN (Secur

e Data) Is Saved(P. 218)

[Use Secure Print]

[Off]

[On]

[Restrict Printer Jobs]

[Off]

[On]

[Secur

e Print Deletion Time]

10 to 30 to 240 (min.)

Settings Menu Items

504

[Common]

84CU-0JX

Specify the settings for function oper

ations, such as the paper source, printing and scanning.

[Paper Feed Settings](P. 505)

[Print Settings](P. 505)

[Scan Settings](P. 505)

[Generate File](P. 505)

[Fax Setup Guide](P. 505)

[Paper Feed Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common]

Specify the settings for the paper sour

ce.

[Paper Feed Settings](P. 506)

[Print Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common]

Specify the settings for printing.

[Print Settings](P. 508)

[Scan Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common]

Specify the settings for scanning.

[Scan Settings](P. 509)

[Generate File]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common]

Specify the settings for scan le gener

ation.

[Generate File](P. 510)

[Fax Setup Guide]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common]

Congur

e the settings for faxing by following the instructions on the screen.

Conguring the Fax Settings (Fax

Setup Guide)(P

. 91)

* [Fax Setup Guide] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

Settings Menu Items

505

[Paper Feed Settings]

84CU-0JY

Specify the settings for the paper sour

ce.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Paper Source Auto Selection](P. 506)

[Switch Paper Feed Method](P. 507)

[Paper Source Auto Selection]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Paper Feed Settings]

Specify the settings for each function so that the machine automatically selects the corr

ect paper source for the size of

the paper to be printed.

Using the Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function(P. 153)

[Copy]

[Multi-Purpose T

ray]

[Off]

[On]

[Drawer 1]

[Off]

[On]

[Drawer 2]

[Off]

[On]

[Printer]

[Multi-Purpose Tray]

[Off]

[On]

[Drawer 1]

[Off]

[On]

[Drawer 2]

[Off]

[On]

[Receive/Fax]/[Receive]

[Multi-Purpose Tray]

[Off]

[On]

[Drawer 1]

[Off]

[On]

[Drawer 2]

[Off]

[On]

[Other]

Settings Menu Items

506

[Multi-Purpose Tray]

[Off]

[On]

[Dr

awer 1]

[Off]

[On]

[Drawer 2]

[Off]

[On]

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Switch Paper Feed Method]

[Menu]

[Function Settings] [Common] [Paper Feed Settings]

Specify the settings used when printing on paper with a pr

e-printed logo.

Normally, when such paper is used, you need to change the direction in which the paper is loaded and which side

faces up according to whether printing is 1-sided or 2-sided.

If you set [Print Side Priority] as the paper source for the loaded paper, there is no need to change the direction of the

paper loaded or which side faces up. If you specify [Print Side Priority], always load the paper using the method for 2-

sided printing.

Orientation for Loading Paper with a Logo(P. 142)

* If you specify [Print Side Priority] in this setting, 1-sided printing will be slo

wer. If you are using paper without a pre-

printed logo, or if you are not using 2-sided printing for paper with a pre-printed logo, specify [Speed Priority].

[Multi-Purpose Tray]

[Speed Priority]

[Print Side Priority]

[Dr

awer 1]

[Speed Priority]

[Print Side Priority]

[Drawer 2]

[Speed Priority]

[Print Side Priority]

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

● If you specify [Print Side Priority] for a paper source containing a paper that cannot be used for 2-sided

printing, that setting is disabled and the machine operates using the [Speed Priority] setting.

Settings Menu Items

507

[Print Settings]

84CU-0K0

Specify the settings for printing.

* V

alues in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Auto Delete Suspended Jobs](P. 508)

[Auto Delete Suspended Jobs]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Print Settings]

Specify whether to automatically delete the print or cop

y job when an error occurs and printing stops.

If you specify automatic deletion, you can also specify the time before the job is deleted.

[Set This Function]

[Off]

[On]

[Set Time]

0 to 5

to 240 (min.)

Settings Menu Items

508

[Scan Settings]

84CU-0K1

Specify the settings for scanning.

* V

alues in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Speed/Img Qlty Priority for Scan](P. 509)

[Auto Online](P. 509)

[Auto Oine](P

. 509)

[Speed/Img Qlty Priority for Scan]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Scan Settings]

Select whether to give priority to speed or print quality when scanning originals.

[Speed Priority]

[Image Quality Priority]

[Auto Online]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Scan Settings]

Specify whether the machine automatically goes online (scan standb

y mode) when you are scanning from a computer.

If you specify [Off] in this setting, you must press [Scan]

[Remote Scanner] in the operation panel [Home] screen to

bring the machine online befor

e performing the scan.

[Off]

[On]

[Auto Oine]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Scan Settings]

Specify whether the machine automatically r

everts to oine mode if no scan is performed for a set time after the

machine is brought online (scan standby mode).

If you specify automatic reversion to oine mode, you can also specify the time before the machine goes oine.

[Set This Function]

[Off]

[On]

[Set Time]

1 to 5

to 60 (min.)

Settings Menu Items

509

[Generate File]

84CU-0K2

Specify the settings for scan le gener

ation.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Output File Image Settings](P. 510)

[OCR (Text Searchable) Settings](P. 510)

[Output File Image Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Generate File]

Specify the gamma value used when a scan le is converted to Y

CbCr for transmission.

Setting a gamma value that matches that of the display used by the recipient ensures that image display is faithful to

the original.

[YCbCr TX Gamma Value]

[Gamma 1.0]

[Gamma 1.4]

[Gamma 1.8]

[Gamma 2.2]

● For information on the display

’s gamma value, see the manual for the display.

[OCR (Text Searchable) Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Generate File]

Specify whether the machine automatically detects the original’

s text and its direction when it generates a “searchable

PDF” to allow text searching of the characters in the original.

Specifying [On] in this setting ensures that the generated PDF is displayed with the correct orientation on a computer

or similar device.

[Smart Scan]

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

510

[Copy]

84CU-0K3

Specify the settings for cop

ying.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Change Default Settings (Copy)](P. 511)

[Change Default Settings (Copy)]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Copy]

Change the default settings for cop

ying.

Changing the Default Settings(P. 183)

The values specied her

e are also restored when you press [Reset] in the copy screen.

[Number of Copies]

to 999

[Paper Source]

[Multi-Purpose Tray]

[Drawer 1]

[Drawer 2]

[Auto Select Paper (LTR/LGL)]

[Density]

9 levels

[Adjust Background Density]

[Auto]

[Adjust (Manual)]

9 levels

[Density by Color]

[Red]: 9 levels

[Green]: 9 levels

[Blue]: 9 levels

[Copy Ratio]

Custom Ratio

[100% Direct]

[Auto]

[400% Max]

[200%]

[129% STMT->LTR]

[78% LGL->LTR]

[64% LTR->STMT]

[50%]

[25% Min]

[2-Sided Printing]

[Off]

[1-Sided->2-Sided]

Settings Menu Items

511

[2-Sided->2-Sided]

[2-Sided->1-Sided]

[Orig./Fin. Type]

[N on 1]

[Off]

[2 on 1]

[4 on 1]

[Layout]

[Original Type]

[Text/Photo/Map (Speed)]

[Text/Photo/Map]

[Text/Photo/Map (Quality)]

[Printed Image]

[Text]

[Collate]

[Off]

[On]

[Erase Frame]

[Off]

[On]

[Sharpness]

7 levels

[Color Balance]

Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black

17 levels

[Fine Adjust]

[Yellow]/[Magenta]/[Cyan]/[Black]

[High]: 17 levels

[Medium]: 17 levels

[Low]: 17 levels

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

Settings Menu Items

512

[Printer]

84CU-0K4

Specify the printer settings.

[Printer Settings](P. 513)

[PDL Selection (Plug and Play)](P. 513)

[Printer Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer]

Specify the settings for printer oper

ation and for processing print data.

[Printer Settings](P. 514)

[PDL Selection (Plug and Play)]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer]

Specify which Page Description Language (PDL) to use when connecting the machine to a computer using Plug and

Play

[PDL Selection (Plug and Play)](P. 533)

Settings Menu Items

513

[Printer Settings]

84CU-0SX

Specify the settings for printer oper

ation and for processing print data.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing](P. 514)

[Copies](P. 515)

[2-Sided Printing](P. 515)

[Default Paper](P. 515)

[Paper Size Override](P. 515)

[Print Quality](P. 516)

[Layout](P. 520)

[Auto Skip Error](P. 521)

[Timeout](P. 521)

[Personality](P. 521)

[Color Mode](P. 522)

[Compressed Image Output](P. 522)

[Prioritize MP Tray](P. 522)

[UFR II](P. 522)

[Imaging Settings](P. 524)

[PDF](P. 524)

[XPS](P. 530)

If the Operation Panel and Printer Driver Have the Same Settings

● Priority is given to the printer driver settings. The oper

ation panel settings are valid for operating systems

such as UNIX printing where printer drivers cannot be used and when printing from mobile devices.

[Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

Specify for each paper sour

ce whether the printer driver settings are given priority over the paper size and type

specied in [Paper Settings] in the [Home] screen.

If you specify [On] in this setting, the machine will print from the paper source specied by the printer driver,

regardless of the paper setting on the machine.

Also, if [On] is specied here and the size of the paper loaded differs markedly from that specied in the printer driver

settings, you can specify whether printing proceeds anyway or printing is stopped and an error message is displayed.

* Note that specifying [On] in this setting when the paper loaded in the machine does not match the paper specied

by the printer driver could lead to paper jams or printing errors.

* Several sheets of paper may be printed even if the machine is congured to cancel printing when an error message

is displayed.

[Multi-Purpose Tray]

[Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing]

[Off]

[On]

[Action When Size Mismatch]

[For

ce Output]

[Display Error]

[Drawer 1]

[Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing]

[Off]

[On]

[Action When Size Mismatch]

Settings Menu Items

514

[For

ce Output]

[Display Error]

[Drawer 2]

[Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing]

[Off]

[On]

[Action When Size Mismatch]

[Force Output]

[Display Error]

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Copies]

[Menu]

[Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

Specify the number of copies to be printed.

1 to 999

[2-Sided Printing]

[Menu]

[Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

Specify whether to print on both sides of the paper.

[Off]

[On]

[Default Paper]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

Specify the paper size and type to be used when printing fr

om a mobile device or an OS that does not support the

printer driver.

See below for the papers that can be specied.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

[Paper Size Override]

[Menu]

[Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

Specify whether the machine substitutes A4 size paper for Letter size paper and vice-versa when printing.

Specifying [On] in this setting means that if, for e

xample, printing on A4 size paper is specied on the computer and

there is only Letter size paper loaded, the job is printed on Letter size paper instead.

* Print settings are specied in an application or printer driver, but this setting can only be specied on the operation

panel.

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

515

[Print Quality]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

Adjust print quality settings such as the density and r

esolution according to the document being printed and the

purpose.

[Density]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]

Adjust the toner density used when printing each color.

For mor

e precise adjustment, you can adjust the levels of the three density areas for each color in [Fine Adjust].

* Note that you cannot adjust the toner density if [Toner Save] is set to [On].

[Toner Save](P. 516)

* [Density] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black

17 le

vels

[Fine Adjust]

[Yellow]/[Magenta]/[Cyan]/[Black]

[High]/[Medium]/[Low]

17 levels

[Toner Save]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]

Specify whether to save toner when printing.

Specify [On] in this setting when you only want to check the layout or other nishing prior to the nal print,

such as befor

e printing a very large job.

[Off]

[On]

[Gradation]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]

Specify the pr

ocessing method used to reproduce gradations.

Specify [High 2] to print with ner gradations than the [High 1] setting.

* This setting is only enabled when [Resolution] is set to [600 dpi].

[Resolution](P. 517)

[High 1]

[High 2]

[Density Fine Adjustment]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]

Adjust the density for ne lines or small te

xt. If ne lines and small text appear faded, adjusting the density will

alleviate the fading.

* Note that adjusting the density will also affect the color balance and objects other than lines and text.

* This setting is only enabled when [Resolution] is set to [1200 dpi].

[Resolution](P. 517)

Settings Menu Items

516

5 levels

[Resolution]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]

Specify the r

esolution used to process print data.

To print with a higher resolution, specify [1200 dpi] in this setting.

[1200 dpi]

[600 dpi]

[Special Smoothing Mode]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]

Specify the mode for printing data such as text, gur

es, and images with smoother outlines.

This is normally set to [Mode 1], which is the best setting for various types of printing. However, if the print

results are not satisfactory, try another mode.

● Specify [Mode 1] for smooth printing of outlines on darkly colored text or gures.

● Specify [Mode 2] for smooth printing of gure outlines and internal halftones.

● Specify [Mode 3] for smooth printing of darkly colored text and lines against a colored background.

● Specify [Mode 4] for smooth printing of images such as photos or the outlines of gures and text.

● Specify [Mode 5] for evenly balanced printing of images and halftones.

● Specify [Mode 6] for smooth printing over the entire document.

[Mode 1]

[Mode 2]

[Mode 3]

[Mode 4]

[Mode 5]

[Mode 6]

● If [Halftones] is set to [Err

or Diffusion], all the settings will give the same print results except for

[Mode 5].

[Halftones](P. 522) ([UFR II])

[Halftones](P. 524) ([Imaging Settings])

[Halftones](P. 528) ([PDF])

[Halftones](P. 530) ([XPS])

● If [Resolution] is set to [1200 dpi], all the settings will give the same print r

esults except for [Mode 6].

[Resolution](P. 517)

[Toner Volume Correction]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]

Correct the amount of toner so that it is below the machine’s limit when the amount of toner in the machine

xceeds the limit for text and lines.

● This is normally set to [Standard]. This maintains the resolution of text and lines while ensuring proper color

tones for other types of data.

● To adjust the toner volume to maintain the proper color tones for all types of data, specify [Gradation

Priority] in this setting.

Settings Menu Items

517

● T

o adjust the toner volume to maintain the proper resolution for all types of data, specify [Text Priority] in

this setting.

[Standar

[Gradation Priority]

[Text Priority]

[Line Control]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]

Set the processing method used to reproduce lines.

● T

o draw lines at the same resolution as the text, specify [Resolution Priority] in this setting.

● To draw lines so that the proper colors and gradations are maintained, specify [Gradation Priority] in this

setting.

[Resolution Priority]

[Gr

adation Priority]

[Width Adjustment]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]

Specify whether to adjust the printing of te

xt and ne lines so that they appear bold.

If you specify [On] in this setting, select what is to be adjusted.

* Specifying [On] in this setting may lead to changes in the print speed or in the image quality.

* Depending on the application used, this setting may not be applied.

[Off]

[On]

ext]

[Line]

[Text and Line]

[Advanced Smoothing]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]

Specify smoothing pr

ocessing that will produce smoother printed outlines for text and graphics (illustrations

created in an application).

To enable smoothing, set [Advanced Smoothing] to [Level 1]. To increase the smoothing effect, specify [Level 2].

You can also individually specify whether to apply smoothing to graphics and text.

* If you are printing using a printer driver, set [Advanced Smoothing] to [Printer Default] in the printer driver to

apply the operation panel settings.

[Advanced Smoothing]

[Off]

[Le

vel 1]

[Level 2]

[Apply to Graphics]

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

518

[Apply to Text]

[Off]

[On]

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Gradation Smoothing]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]

Specify smoothing pr

ocessing that will produce smoother printed gradations in images such as graphics

(illustrations created in an application) and bitmap images.

To enable smoothing, set [Gradation Smoothing] to [Level 1]. To increase the smoothing effect, specify [Level 2].

You can also individually specify whether to apply smoothing to graphics and images.

* If you are printing using a printer driver, the [Gradation Smoothing] setting is only applied to graphics data.

The smoothing setting in the operation panel is applied to image data.

[Gradation Smoothing]

[Off]

[Le

vel 1]

[Level 2]

[Apply to Graphics]

[Off]

[On]

[Apply to Images]

[Off]

[On]

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Enhance Text for B&W Printing]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]

When using black and white printing for a document that includes color text, specify whether to adjust the text

density to mak

e it easier to read.

● While this is effective for light-colored text, it has no effect on the following types of data:

- Text data drawn as a graphic or image

- PDF data

● If you specify [Off] in this setting when using black and white printing for a document that includes light-

colored text, the text will be printed more faintly and will be more dicult to see than when [On] is

specied.

● If the text appears enhanced even when [Off] is selected, specify that text smoothing not be used.

[Advanced Smoothing](P. 518)

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

519

[Layout]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

Specify the gutter dir

ection or margin and the print position.

[Binding Location]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Layout]

Specify whether the gutter will be on the long edge or the short edge when the printed document will be

bound using a method such as staples.

Use this setting in conjunction with the [Gutter] setting to adjust the binding position and mar

gins.

[Gutter]

. 520)

● To bind the paper on the long edge, specify [Long Edge] in this setting.

● T

o bind the paper on the short edge, specify [Short Edge] in this setting.

[Long Edge]

[Short Edge]

[Gutter]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Layout]

Offset the print position to adjust the width of the mar

gin that will form the gutter.

Specify the offset width in 0.01" (0.5 mm) increments in the plus (+) or minus (-) offset direction, in accordance

with the edge specied in [Binding Location].

[Binding Location](P. 520)

If [Binding Location] is set to [Long Edge]

Specify the offset width b

y selecting a positive (+) value to bind on the left edge of the paper or a negative (-)

value to bind on the right edge.

Specied as a positive (+) value

Specied as a negative (-) value

If [Binding Location] is set to [Short Edge]

Specify the offset width b

y selecting a positive (+) value to bind on the top edge of the paper or a negative (-)

value to bind on the bottom edge.

Specied as a positive (+) value

Specied as a negative (-) value

-1.90 to 0.00 to +1.90 (inches) or -50.0 to 00.0

to +50.0 (mm)

Settings Menu Items

520

[Offset Short Edge] or [Offset Long Edge]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Layout]

Offset the print position of te

xt and images. Use this setting when the printed text and images are shifted

towards one edge of the paper or when they extend beyond the print range.

Specify the offset width as a positive (+) or negative (-) value in 0.01" (0.5 mm) increments for each paper edge

direction and print side.

To Offset Along the Short Edge (Horizontally)

Specify the adjustment width by selecting a positive (+) value to adjust to the right on the paper or a negative

(-) value to adjust to the left on the paper.

To Offset Along the Long Edge (Vertically)

Specify the adjustment width b

y selecting a positive (+) value to adjust down on the paper or a negative (-)

value to adjust up on the paper.

-2.00 to 0.00 to +2.00 (inches) or -50.0 to 00.0

to +50.0 (mm)

[Auto Skip Error]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

Specify whether to continue printing if an err

or occurs during printing.　

It is recommended that the [Off] setting normally be used so that printing stops when an error occurs.

[Off]

[On]

[Timeout]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

Specify the time fr

om the start of waiting to receive print data until reception times out when print data reception is

interrupted.

5 to 15

to 300 (sec.)

[Personality]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

This should normally be set to [Auto], in which the machine automatically identies the r

eceived print data and

switches to the appropriate operating mode.

If the machine doesn’t switch to the appropriate operating mode for some reason (such as an unknown print data

format), set the operating mode manually.

[Auto]

Settings Menu Items

521

[PDF]

[XPS]

[Imaging]

[Color Mode]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

Specify whether to automatically switch between color printing and black and white printing accor

ding to the print

data, or use black and white printing for all print data.

[Auto (Color/B&W)]

[Black & White]

[Compressed Image Output]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

If the machine runs short of memory during printing, image quality may suffer. Specify whether to continue

printing when this occurs.

● T

o continue printing even with degraded image quality, specify [Output] in this setting.

● To stop printing and display an error when image quality is severely degraded, specify [Display Error].

[Output]

[Display Err

or]

[Prioritize MP Tray]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

Specify whether to give priority to paper feeding fr

om the multi-purpose tray over feeding from the paper drawer

when the machine automatically selects the correct paper source for the size of the paper to be printed.

If you specify [On] in this setting and the same paper is loaded into both the multi-purpose tray and the paper drawer,

paper is fed from the multi-purpose tray.

[Off]

[On]

[UFR II]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

Specify the print data pr

ocessing method used when the UFR II Printer Driver is used.

[Halftones]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [UFR II]

Specify the print method used to r

eproduce halftones (intermediate areas between light and dark areas)

according to the print data content.

To Print Data with Fine Lines and Small Text (such as CAD Data)

Set [Error Diffusion] to [On].

* Only applicable if [Resolution] is set to [600 dpi].

[Resolution](P. 517)

* Specifying [On] in this setting may lo

wer the stability of toner xing and textures.

Settings Menu Items

522

To Print Other Data Types

Set [Err

or Diffusion] to [Off] and specify the respective halftone reproduction method in [Resolution/

Gradation]. This can be set separately for text, graphics (lines or gures), and images (photos).

● Specify [Resolution] for high-resolution printing where text outlines are clear. Suitable for printing data

with text and ne lines.

● Specify [Gradation] for smooth printing of tones and outlines. Suitable for printing data such as gures

that use gradations.

[Error Diffusion]

[Off]

[On]

[Resolution/Gr

adation]

[Text]

[Resolution]

[Gradation]

[Graphics]

[Resolution]

[Gradation]

[Image]

[Resolution]

[Gradation]

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Matching Method]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [UFR II]

Specify whether to adjust the color according to the print data.

● Specify

[General] in this setting to print with the color tones adjusted to suit ordinary documents such as

photos or text documents.

● Specify [Perceptual] in this setting to print with the color tones adjusted to suit bitmap images so that the

printed colors match the colors shown on screen.

● Specify [Colorimetric] in this setting to minimize color aberrations when converting RGB data to CMYK data.

● Specify [Vivid Photo] in this setting to print with the color tones corrected to give more intense and vivid

colors than the [General] setting.

[Gener

al]

[Perceptual]

[Colorimetric]

[Vivid Photo]

[Gray Compensation]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [UFR II]

Specify whether to print black or gr

ay RGB data where R=G=B using 1-color black (K) toner. This can be set

separately for text, graphics (lines or gures), and images (photos).

If [Off] is specied in this setting, black and gray are printed using the four CMYK toner colors.

[Text]

[Off]

Settings Menu Items

523

[On]

[Gr

aphics]

[Off]

[On]

[Image]

[Off]

[On]

[Paper Save]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [UFR II]

Specify whether to disable output for blank pages included in the print data.

[Off]

[On]

[Imaging Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

Specify the print data pr

ocessing method used for printing JPEG or TIFF format image les.

[Halftones]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Imaging Settings]

Specify the print method used to r

eproduce halftones (intermediate areas between light and dark areas)

according to the image content.

To Print Images with Fine Gradations, Such as Digital Camera Photos

Specify [Gradation] in this setting. This reproduces gradations smoothly.

To Print Images with Fine Lines and Small Text, Such as CAD Images

Specify [Error Diffusion] in this setting. Fine lines and small text are printed in high denition.

* Specifying [Error Diffusion] in this setting may lower the stability of toner xing and textures.

[Gr

adation]

[Error Diffusion]

[Matching Method]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Imaging Settings]

Select ho

w to correct the color when printing.

When you select [Vivid Photo], the color tone is corrected to deeper and more vivid colors than with [General].

[Gener

al]

[Vivid Photo]

[PDF]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

Specify the print data pr

ocessing method used for printing PDF format les.

Settings Menu Items

524

[Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Specify whether to enlar

ge or reduce documents to t the paper used for printing.

* If you specify [On] in this setting, documents are enlarged or reduced while maintaining their aspect ratio.

[Off]

[On]

[Enlarge Print Area]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Specify whether to print with the print ar

ea enlarged so that it occupies the entire paper, leaving no margins

around the edges of the paper.

* In some documents, specifying [On] in this setting may lead to images being printed with some of the edges

cut off, or to smudging on some parts of the paper.

[Off]

[On]

[N on 1]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Specify whether to r

educe the size of a multi-page original and print the pages arranged on one sheet of paper.

To print multiple pages on one sheet (N on 1), select the number of pages to be combined.　

Example: To print a 4-page document on one side of the paper

Select [4 on 1].

[Off]

[2 on 1]

[4 on 1]

[6 on 1]

[8 on 1]

[9 on 1]

[16 on 1]

[Print Comments]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Specify whether to print the comments in a PDF le.

If you specify [Auto] in this setting, the document and comments

e printed.

This only applies to comments specied for printing within the PDF le.

[Off]

[Auto]

[Line Renement]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Specify whether to standar

dize the thickness of ne lines in printed documents.

Specifying [On (Slim)] in this setting will produce ner lines than the [On] setting, but may also cause lines to be

too ne or faded.

Settings Menu Items

525

[On]

[On (Slim)]

[Off]

[Pure Black Text]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Specify whether to print black te

xt using 1-color black (K) toner.

If you specify [Off] in this setting, documents are printed according to the settings in [Output Prole].

[Output

ole](P. 527)

* This applies to black text where the color information is as follows:

● R = G = B = 0%

● C = M = Y = 100%

● C = M = Y = 0%, K = 100%

[Off]

[On]

[Black Overprint]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Specify whether o

verprinting (printing colors on top of each other) is used when black text appears on a color

background or is overlaid on a colored gure.

If [Off] is specied

The colored background or gure behind the black text is printed knocked out (left blank) and the black text

is then printed into the knocked-out area.

* Specifying [Off] in this setting may result in black being printed paler or a white border appearing around

the edges of black te

xt.

If [On] is specied

The colored background or gure is printed and the black text is then printed on top of the color.

* You can specify this setting if the setting for black text is to print using 1-color black (K) toner. [Pure Black

ext](P. 526)

* [Black Overprint] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Off]

[On]

[RGB Source Pr

ole]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Specify the color pr

ole for RGB data that is appropriate for the monitor being used.

● Specify [sRGB] in this setting if you are using an sRGB monitor. This adjusts the colors to the industry

standard for ordinary Windows monitors so that printed colors match those shown on the monitor.

Settings Menu Items

526

● T

o ensure no loss in the brightest and darkest areas of the data, specify a value from [Gamma 1.5] to

[Gamma 2.4] in this setting. Higher settings produce darker prints.

● To convert to CMYK data when no RGB input prole is used, specify [None].

[sRGB]

[Gamma 1.5]

[Gamma 1.8]

[Gamma 2.4]

[None]

[CMYK Simulation Pr

ole]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Specify the simulation target used to print CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data to a device-dependent

CMYK color model based on the simulation.

● Specify

[JapanColor(Canon)] in this setting to print with color tones close to the Japanese standard. The

JapanColor prole is applied.

● Specify [U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)] in this setting to print with color tones close to the US standard. The

U.S. Web Coated prole is applied.

● Specify [Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)] in this setting to print with color tones close to the European standard.

The Euro Standard prole is applied.

● Specify [None] to print without using a CMYK simulation prole. CMYK data is then printed using a device-

dependent CMYK color model. Depending on the data, some gradations of dark colors may not be

reproduced.

[JapanColor(Canon)]

.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)]

[Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)]

[None]

[Use Grayscale Pr

ole]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Specify whether to convert gr

ay data to CMYK data using the machine’s grayscale prole.

* Even when [On] is specied in this setting, depending on the [Output Prole] and [Pure Black Text] settings,

the data will be printed in 1-color black (K) toner.

[Output Pr

ole](P. 527)

[Pure Black Text](P. 526)

[Off]

[On]

[Output Pr

ole]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Specify the appropriate pr

ole for the print data. This can be set separately for text, graphics (lines or gures),

and images (photos).

● Specify [Normal] in this setting to print with the color tones adjusted to closely match the monitor display.

● Specify [Photo] in this setting to print with the color tones adjusted to resemble a photo.

● Specify [TR Normal] in this setting to adjust the color tones to closely match the monitor display and

reproduce black and gray areas as 1-color black (K) toner.

Settings Menu Items

527

● Specify [TR Photo] in this setting to adjust the color tones to r

esemble a photo and reproduce black and gray

areas as 1-color black (K) toner.

[Text]

[Normal]

[Photo]

[TR Normal]

[TR Photo]

[Gr

aphics]

[Normal]

[Photo]

[TR Normal]

[TR Photo]

[Image]

[Normal]

[Photo]

[TR Normal]

[TR Photo]

● If any of the follo

wing settings is used, the [Output Prole] setting is ignored.

- [RGB Source Prole] is set to [None].

[RGB Source Pr

ole](P. 526)

- [CMYK Simulation Prole] is set to [None].

[CMYK Simulation Pr

ole](P. 527)

- [Use Grayscale Prole] is set to [Off].

[Use Grayscale Pr

ole](P. 527)

[Matching Method]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Specify which element is to be prioritized during color adjustment in the [RGB Source Pr

ole].

[RGB Source

ole](P. 526)

● When printing photos or bitmap images, specify [Perceptual] in this setting to prioritize color tones.

● When printing artwork and graphs for presentations, specify [Saturation] in this setting to prioritize clarity

and vividness.

● Specify [Colorimetric] in this setting to reproduce RGB color values as accurately as possible within the

scope of the machine to reproduce colors and to minimize color aberrations.

[Per

ceptual]

[Saturation]

[Colorimetric]

[Halftones]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Specify the print method used to r

eproduce halftones (intermediate areas between light and dark areas)

according to the print data content.

To Print Data with Fine Lines and Small Text (such as CAD Data)

Set [Error Diffusion] to [On].

* Only applicable if [Resolution] is set to [600 dpi].

[Resolution](P. 517)

Settings Menu Items

528

* Specifying [On] in this setting may lower the stability of toner xing and te

xtures.

To Print Other Data Types

Set [Error Diffusion] to [Off] and specify the respective halftone reproduction method in [Resolution/

Gradation]. This can be set separately for text, graphics (lines or gures), and images (photos).

● Specify [Resolution] for high-resolution printing where text outlines are clear. Suitable for printing data

with text and ne lines.

● Specify [Gradation] for smooth printing of tones and outlines. Suitable for printing data such as gures

that use gradations.

[Error Diffusion]

[Off]

[On]

[Resolution/Gr

adation]

[Text]

[Resolution]

[Gradation]

[Graphics]

[Resolution]

[Gradation]

[Image]

[Resolution]

[Gradation]

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Brightness]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Adjust the brightness of printed images in 5% incr

ements. The higher the value, the darker the image will be

printed.

* [Brightness] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

85 to 100 to 115 (%)

[Composite Overprint]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Specify whether to o

verprint CMYK data as composite output with overprinting specied.

Specifying [Off] in this setting prints the image as if overprinting were not specied.

* Overprinting with special colors is not used, even if [On] is specied here.

[Off]

[On]

[Grayscale Conversion]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]

Specify the conversion method when printing color data in black and white.

● Specify [sRGB] for black and white printing with smooth gr

adations to represent different colors.

Settings Menu Items

529

● Specify [NTSC] for black and white printing that looks similar to NTSC tele

vision images.

● Specify [Uniform RGB] for uniform black and white printing of RGB over the entire document, based on the

brightness.

* [Grayscale Conversion] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other

settings.

[sRGB]

[NTSC]

[Uniform RGB]

[XPS]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]

Specify the print data pr

ocessing used for printing XPS format les.

[Matching Method]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [XPS]

Specify whether to adjust the color according to the print data.

● Specify

[General] in this setting to print with the color tones adjusted to suit ordinary documents such as

photos or text documents.

● Specify [Perceptual] in this setting to print with the color tones adjusted to suit bitmap images so that the

printed colors match the colors shown on screen.

● Specify [Colorimetric] in this setting to minimize color aberrations when converting RGB data to CMYK data.

● Specify [Vivid Photo] in this setting to print with the color tones corrected to give more intense and vivid

colors than the [General] setting.

[Gener

al]

[Perceptual]

[Colorimetric]

[Vivid Photo]

[Halftones]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [XPS]

Specify the print method used to r

eproduce halftones (intermediate areas between light and dark areas)

according to the print data content.

To Print Data with Fine Lines and Small Text (such as CAD Data)

Set [Error Diffusion] to [On].

* Only applicable if [Resolution] is set to [600 dpi].

[Resolution](P. 517)

* Specifying [On] in this setting may lo

wer the stability of toner xing and textures.

To Print Other Data Types

Set [Error Diffusion] to [Off] and specify the respective halftone reproduction method in [Resolution/

Gradation]. This can be set separately for text, graphics (lines or gures), and images (photos).

● Specify [Resolution] for high-resolution printing where text outlines are clear. Suitable for printing data

with text and ne lines.

● Specify [Gradation] for smooth printing of tones and outlines. Suitable for printing data such as gures

that use gradations.

[Error Diffusion]

Settings Menu Items

530

[Off]

[On]

[Resolution/Gr

adation]

[Text]

[Resolution]

[Gradation]

[Graphics]

[Resolution]

[Gradation]

[Image]

[Resolution]

[Gradation]

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Gray Compensation]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [XPS]

Specify whether to print black or gr

ay RGB data where R=G=B using 1-color black (K) toner. This can be set

separately for text, graphics (lines or gures), and images (photos).

If [Off] is specied in this setting, black and gray are printed using the four CMYK toner colors.

[Text]

[Off]

[On]

[Gr

aphics]

[Off]

[On]

[Image]

[Off]

[On]

[Grayscale Conversion]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [XPS]

Specify the conversion method used when printing color data in black and white. This can be set separately for

xt, graphics (lines or gures), and images (photos).

● Specify [sRGB] for black and white printing with smooth gradations to represent different colors.

● Specify [NTSC] for black and white printing that looks similar to NTSC television images.

● Specify [Uniform RGB] for uniform black and white printing of RGB over the entire document, based on the

brightness.

* [Grayscale Conversion] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other

settings.

[Text]

[sRGB]

[NTSC]

[Uniform RGB]

Settings Menu Items

531

[Gr

aphics]

[sRGB]

[NTSC]

[Uniform RGB]

[Image]

[sRGB]

[NTSC]

[Uniform RGB]

[Paper Save]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [XPS]

Specify whether to disable output for blank pages included in the print data.

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

532

[PDL Selection (Plug and Play)]

84CU-0K6

Specify which Page Description Language (PDL) to use when the machine is connected to a computer using Plug and

Play

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Network](P. 533)

[USB](P. 533)

[Network]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [PDL Selection (Plug and Play)]

Specify the Page Description Language (PDL) to use when the machine is connected to a networked computer

using Plug and Play

● To connect the machine as a fax machine, specify [FAX] in this setting.

● When connecting the machine as a printer, select from the following:

- When connecting as a UFR II printer: [UFR II]

- When connecting as an XPS-compatible UFR II printer: [ UFR II (V4)]

[FAX]

[UFR II]

[UFR II (V4)]

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[USB]

[Menu]

[Function Settings] [Printer] [PDL Selection (Plug and Play)]

Specify the Page Description Language (PDL) to use when the machine is connected to a computer via USB using

Plug and Play

● When connecting the machine as a printer, select from the following:

- When connecting as a UFR II printer: [UFR II]

- When connecting as an XPS-compatible UFR II printer: [ UFR II (V4)]

[UFR II]

[UFR II (V4)]

Settings Menu Items

533

[Send]

84CU-0K7

Specify the settings for sending scanned data and fax

es.

[Common Settings](P. 534)

[Scan and Send Settings](P. 534)

[Fax Settings](P. 534)

[Common Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send]

Specify the settings for r

estricting the transmission of scanned data and faxes, and for displaying a destination

conrmation screen.

[Common Settings](P. 535)

[Scan and Send Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send]

Specify the settings for sending scanned data and I-Fax

es.

[Scan and Send Settings](P. 537)

[Fax Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send]

Specify the settings for sending fax

es.

[Fax Settings](P. 543)

* [Fax Settings] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

Settings Menu Items

534

[Common Settings]

84CU-0K8

Specify the settings for r

estricting the transmission of scanned data and faxes, and for displaying the conrmation

screen when sending data.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Restrict New Destinations](P. 535)

[Restrict Resending from Log](P. 535)

[Conrm When Coded Dial TX]

(P. 535)

[Conrm Dest. Befor

e Sending](P. 535)

[Display Notif. When Job Is Accepted](P. 536)

[Restrict New Destinations]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Common Settings]

Specify whether to r

estrict the destinations that can be specied when sending scanned data and faxes to destinations

that are registered in the Address Book or on the LDAP server.

Limiting Available Destinations(P. 405)

[Off]

[On]

[Restrict Resending from Log]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Common Settings]

Specify whether to pr

ohibit the specication of destinations from the TX Job Log for scan or fax jobs.

Limiting

Available Destinations

(P. 405)

[Off]

[On]

[Conrm When Coded Dial TX]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Common Settings]

Specify whether the r

egistered destination conrmation screen is shown when the destination is specied using a

Coded Dial number

Conrming the Destination befor

e Sending(P. 407)

[Off]

[On]

[Conrm Dest. Befor

e Sending]

[Menu]

[Function Settings] [Send] [Common Settings]

Specify whether a destination conrmation scr

een is shown when you send an e-mail, fax, or I-Fax.

Conrming the

Destination befor

e Sending(P. 407)

[Off]

[On]

[Only for Sequential Br

oadcast]

Settings Menu Items

535

[Display Notif. When Job Is Accepted]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Common Settings]

ocesses handled by the machine, including sending scanned data and faxes are managed as jobs. Select whether to

display the screen for conrming reception as a job after scan or fax operations are performed.

When you select [On], you can display a screen to view the sending status and log.

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

536

[Scan and Send Settings]

84CU-0K9

Specify the settings for sending scanned data and I-Fax

es.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Register Unit Name](P. 537)

[E-Mail Settings](P. 537)

[I-Fax Settings](P. 539)

[File Settings](P. 541)

[Register Unit Name]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Scan and Send Settings]

ed sender names are posted to the destination along with the e-mail address of the machine.

If the sender name is not registered, only the machine’s e-mail address is posted.

[E-Mail Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Scan and Send Settings]

Specify the settings for sending e-mail.

[Change Default Settings (E-Mail)]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Scan and Send Settings] [E-Mail Settings]

Change the default settings for sending scanned data via e-mail. Changing the Default Settings(P. 183) 　

When you pr

ess [Reset] in the e-mail send screen, the settings revert to the values specied here.

[Scan Size]

[Auto (L

TR/LGL)]

[LTR]

[LGL]

[STMT]

[EXEC]

[FOOLSCAP/FOLIO (215.9x330.2 mm)]

[OFICIO (215.9x317.5 mm)]

[LETTER (Government) (203.2x266.7 mm)]

[LEGAL (Government) (203.2x330.2 mm)]

[LEGAL (India) (215.0x345.0 mm)]

[FOOLSCAP (Australia) (206.0x337.0 mm)]

[OFICIO (Brazil) (215.9x355.0 mm)]

[OFICIO (Mexico) (215.9x341.0 mm)]

[A4]

[A5R]

[B5]

[Specify Custom Size]

[File Format]

Settings Menu Items

537

[PDF]

[PDF (Compact)]

[PDF (Compact/OCR)]

[PDF (OCR)]

[Set PDF Details]

[PDF]/[PDF (Compact)]/[PDF (Compact/OCR)]/[PDF (OCR)]

[Divide into Pages]

[Off]

[On]

[

JPEG]

[TIFF]

[Set TIFF Details]

[Divide into Pages]

[Off]

[On]

[Density]

9 levels

[Original Orientation]

[Portrait]

[Landscape]

[Original Type]

[Text]

[Text/Photo]

[Photo]

[2-Sided Original]

[Off]

[Book Type]

[Calendar Type]

[Sharpness]

7 levels

[Data Size]

[Small: Memory Priority]

[Standard]

[Large: Image Quality Priority]

[Preview]

[Off]

[On]

[Skip Blank Orig.]

[Off]

[On (Preview)]

[On (No Preview)]

[Subject/Message]

Settings Menu Items

538

[Subject]

[Message]

[Reply T

[None]

[Specify from Address Book]

[Priority]

[Low]

[Standard]

[High]

May not be displayed or available depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Link Mobile Device Addr. Book]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Scan and Send Settings] [E-Mail Settings]

Specify whether destinations r

egistered in the Address Book on a mobile device can be specied if you are

sending scanned data via e-mail.

Specifying Destinations (Address Book on a Mobile Device)(P. 175) 　

Set [Use Remote UI Access PIN] to [On] to r

equire that a PIN be entered when sending destinations from a

mobile device to the machine as the destination. For this, use the same PIN as Remote UI access PIN.

Setting

the PIN to Use for Remote UI

(P. 422)

[Link Mobile Device Address Book]

[Off]

[On]

[Use Remote UI Access PIN]

[Off]

[On]

[I-Fax Settings]

[Menu]

[Function Settings] [Send] [Scan and Send Settings]

Specify the settings for sending I-Fax

es.

[Change Default Settings (I-Fax)]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Scan and Send Settings] [I-Fax Settings]

Change the default settings for sending I-Fax

es.

Changing the Default Settings(P. 183) 　

When you pr

ess [Reset] in the I-Fax send screen, the settings revert to the values specied here.

[Scan Size]

[Auto (L

TR/LGL)]

[LTR]

[LGL]

[STMT]

[EXEC]

[FOOLSCAP/FOLIO (215.9x330.2 mm)]

[OFICIO (215.9x317.5 mm)]

[LETTER (Government) (203.2x266.7 mm)]

[LEGAL (Government) (203.2x330.2 mm)]

[LEGAL (India) (215.0x345.0 mm)]

Settings Menu Items

539

[FOOLSCAP (Australia) (206.0x337.0 mm)]

[OFICIO (Br

azil) (215.9x355.0 mm)]

[OFICIO (Mexico) (215.9x341.0 mm)]

[A4]

[A5R]

[B5]

[Specify Custom Size]

[Density]

9 levels

[Original Type]

[Text]

[Text/Photo]

[Photo]

[2-Sided Original]

[Off]

[Book Type]

[Calendar Type]

[Sharpness]

7 levels

[Preview]

[Off]

[On]

[Subject/Message]

[Subject]

[Message]

[Reply To]

[None]

[Specify from Address Book]

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[TX Terminal ID]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Scan and Send Settings] [I-Fax Settings]

Specify whether to include sender information such as the tr

ansmission date and time and the machine’s e-mail

address in I-Fax headers.　

If you specify [On in this setting, you can specify the print position for the sender information.　

Set [Print Position] to [Inside Image Area] to align the print position with the top of the text or images on

transmitted pages. To print the sender information beyond the top of the text or images on transmitted pages,

specify [Outside Image Area].

[Add TX Terminal ID]

[Off]

[On]

[Print Position]

[Inside Image Ar

ea]

Settings Menu Items

540

[Outside Image Ar

ea]

[File Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Scan and Send Settings]

Specify the oper

ation settings used for saving scanned data to a shared folder or on the FTP server.

[Change Default Settings (File)]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Scan and Send Settings] [File Settings]

Change the default settings for saving scanned data to a shar

ed folder or FTP server.

Changing the Default

Settings(P

. 183)

When you press [Reset] in the shared folder or FTP server save screen, the settings revert to the values specied

here.

[Scan Size]

[Auto (L

TR/LGL)]

[LTR]

[LGL]

[STMT]

[EXEC]

[FOOLSCAP/FOLIO (215.9x330.2 mm)]

[OFICIO (215.9x317.5 mm)]

[LETTER (Government) (203.2x266.7 mm)]

[LEGAL (Government) (203.2x330.2 mm)]

[LEGAL (India) (215.0x345.0 mm)]

[FOOLSCAP (Australia) (206.0x337.0 mm)]

[OFICIO (Brazil) (215.9x355.0 mm)]

[OFICIO (Mexico) (215.9x341.0 mm)]

[A4]

[A5R]

[B5]

[Specify Custom Size]

[File Format]

[PDF]

[PDF (Compact)]

[PDF (Compact/OCR)]

[PDF (OCR)]

[Set PDF Details]

[PDF]/[PDF (Compact)]/[PDF (Compact/OCR)]/[PDF (OCR)]

[Divide into Pages]

[Off]

[On]

[JPEG]

[TIFF]

[Set TIFF Details]

[Divide into Pages]

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

541

[Density]

9 le

vels

[Original Orientation]

[Portrait]

[Landscape]

[Original Type]

[Text]

[Text/Photo]

[Photo]

[2-Sided Original]

[Off]

[Book Type]

[Calendar Type]

[Sharpness]

7 levels

[Data Size]

[Small: Memory Priority]

[Standard]

[Large: Image Quality Priority]

[Preview]

[Off]

[On]

[Skip Blank Orig.]

[Off]

[On (Preview)]

[On (No Preview)]

May not be displayed or available depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

Settings Menu Items

542

[Fax Settings]

84CU-0KA

Specify the settings for sending fax

es.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

* [Fax Settings] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Change Default Settings (Fax)](P. 543)

[Off-Hook Alarm](P. 543)

[ECM TX](P. 544)

[Set Pause Time](P. 544)

[Auto Redial](P. 544)

[Check Dial Tone Before Send](P. 545)

[Set Line](P. 545)

[TX Start Speed](P. 545)

[Archive TX Document](P. 546)

[Conrm Enter

ed Fax Number](P. 546)

[Allow Fax Driver TX](P. 546)

[Use Addr. Book When On-Hook](P. 546)

[Restrict Sequential Broadcast](P. 546)

[Register Log Dest to Addr Book](P. 547)

[TX Terminal ID](P. 547)

[Auto Adjust VoIP Comm. Speed](P. 547)

[Change Default Settings (Fax)]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

Change the default settings for sending Fax

es.

Changing the Default Settings(P. 183)

When you pr

ess [Reset] in the fax send screen, the settings revert to the values specied here.

[Resolution]

[200 x 100 dpi (Normal)]

[200 x 200 dpi (Fine)]

[200 x 200 dpi (Photo)]

[200 x 400 dpi (Superne)]

[400 x 400 dpi (Ultr

ane)]

[Density]

9 levels

[2-Sided Original]

[Off]

[Book Type]

[Calendar Type]

[Sharpness]

7 levels

[Preview]

[Off]

[On]

[Off-Hook Alarm]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

Adjust the volume of the alarm tone sounded when a telephone is connected and the receiver or handset is left

off the hook.

Settings Menu Items

543

● Dr

agging the slider to the right increases the volume.

● Dragging the slider to the far left mutes the sound.

4 levels

[ECM TX]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

ECM (Error Correction Mode) is a function that conducts checking and correction to ensure that corrupted images

e not sent when an error occurs during image transmission. Here, specify whether the ECM function is used for

transmissions.

● If you use ECM transmission, error checking is carried out by both the sender and recipient during

communication, so the ECM function must also be enabled at the receiving end.

● ECM transmission may slow down communication because error checking and corrections are carried out

during transmission. Note also that even when ECM transmission is enabled, errors may still occur depending

on the state of the phone lines.

● Enable ECM reception on the machine to reduce the number of errors that occur when the machine receives

data.

[ECM RX](P. 552)

[Off]

[On]

[Set Pause Time]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

Specify the number of seconds (wait time) in the pause inserted between numbers.

● T

o send a fax to an overseas destination, enter the international access number, country code, and fax number

in that order. If the call will not connect, insert a pause between the different numbers.

● If you still cannot connect after inserting a pause, change the pause time.

1 to 2 to 15 (sec.)

[Auto Redial]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

Specify whether the machine automatically r

edials if it fails to make a connection for reasons such as the line being

busy.

If you specify Auto Redial, you can also specify the number of redials, the interval between redials, and whether to

redial if a transmission error occurs.

[Use Auto Redial]

[Off]

[On]

[Number of Times to Redial]

1 to 2

to 10 (time(s))

[Redial Interval]

2 to 99 (min.)

[Redial When Error Occurs]

Settings Menu Items

544

[Off]

[On]

[Check Dial Tone Before Send]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

Specify whether to check for a dial tone befor

e dialing when sending a fax.

[Off]

[On]

[Set Line]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

Specify the machine

’s fax number, unit name, and the number of lines.

* The fax number and unit name are sent to the recipient as sender information.

[TX Terminal ID](P. 547)

[Register Unit T

el. Number]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings] [Set Line]

[Register Unit Name]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings] [Set Line]

Changing the Fax Number and Unit Name(P. 282)

[Select Line T

ype]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings] [Set Line]

If the machine is connected to a Private Br

anch Exchange (PBX) or to a line that is shared with a home phone or

business phone, the line type may not be selected automatically. If so, select [Manual] and specify the line type.

* Normally, if you connect the machine to a phone line and restart the machine, the line type is selected

automatically.

Conguring the Fax Settings (Fax Setup Guide)

(P. 91)

[Pulse]

one]

[TX Start Speed]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

It may tak

e some time for transmission to begin due to factors such as a poor phone line connection. If this occurs,

adjust the initial communication speed to a lower level.

[33600 bps]

[14400 bps]

[9600 bps]

[7200 bps]

[4800 bps]

Settings Menu Items

545

[2400 bps]

[Archive TX Document]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

Specify whether the content of sent fax

es is automatically forwarded or saved to a preset destination.

Backing Up

Sent Fax

es(P. 284)

If you specify [On] in this setting, also specify the forwarding or save destination and, if needed, the le name.

[Archive TX Document]

[Off]

[On]

[Ar

chive Address]

[File Name]

[Conrm Enter

ed Fax Number]

[Menu]

[Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

Specify whether a scr

een for re-entering the number appears when you enter a fax number using the numeric keys.

Conrming the Destination befor

e Sending(P. 407)

[Off]

[On]

[Allow Fax Driver TX]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

Specify whether to allo

w faxes to be sent from a computer (PC faxing).

Prohibit Fax Sending from a

Computer(P

. 409)

[Off]

[On]

[Use Addr. Book When On-Hook]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

When sending fax

es manually, specify [Always Allow] to enter a specic number with the numeric keys, and then

specify a destination registered in the Address Book.

[Do Not Allo

w After Num. Key Use]

[Always Allow]

[Restrict Sequential Broadcast]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

Specify whether to pr

ohibit fax transmission to multiple destinations (Sequential Broadcast).

Prohibiting Fax

Sending to Multiple Destinations

(P. 409)

Settings Menu Items

546

[Off]

[On]

[Register Log Dest to Addr Book]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

Specify whether to r

estrict destinations remaining in the TX Job Log so they cannot be registered in the Address Book.

Prohibiting Registering Fax Sending Log Destinations to Address Book(P. 421)

[Allo

[Do Not Allow]

[TX Terminal ID]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

Specify whether to include sender information such as the transmission date and time and the machine’s fax

number in fax headers.

If you specify [On] in this setting, you can also specify the print position for the sender information and mark the

fax number.

● Set

[Print Position] to [Inside Image Area] to align the print position with the top of the text or images on

transmitted pages. To print the sender information beyond the top of the text or images on transmitted pages,

specify [Outside Image Area].

● To post the machine’s fax number as a telephone number, set [Mark Number As] to [Tel].

[Add TX Terminal ID]

[Off]

[On]

[Print Position]

[Inside Image Ar

ea]

[Outside Image Area]

[Mark Number As]

[Fax]

[Tel]

[Auto Adjust VoIP Comm. Speed]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Send] [Fax Settings]

For mor

e secure fax transmission and reception in VoIP communication systems that are prone to communication

errors, specify [On] in this setting.

* Specifying [On] will lower the communication speed.

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

547

[Receive/Forward]

84CU-0KC

Specify the settings for r

eceiving and forwarding e-mail, faxes, and I-Faxes.

[Common Settings](P. 548)

[I-Fax Settings](P. 548)

[Fax Settings](P. 548)

[Common Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward]

Specify the settings for Memory Lock oper

ation with faxes and I-Faxes.

[Common Settings](P. 549)

[I-Fax Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward]

Specify the settings for printing r

eceived I-Faxes.

[I-Fax Settings](P. 551)

[Fax Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward]

Specify the settings for r

eceiving and forwarding faxes.

[Fax Settings](P. 552)

* [Fax Settings] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

Settings Menu Items

548

[Common Settings]

84CU-0KE

Specify the settings for Memory Lock oper

ation with faxes and I-Faxes.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox](P. 549)

[Continue Print. When Cart. Low](P. 549)

[Print RX Page Footer](P. 550)

[Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [Common Settings]

Specify the settings for fax Memory Lock.

* [Set Fax/I-Fax Inbo

x] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Fax Memory Lock Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [Common Settings] [Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox]

Instead of immediately printing r

eceived faxes, you can temporarily save them in the machine’s memory.

Saving Received Documents in the Machine (Memory Lock)(P. 416)

[Use Memory Lock]

[Off]

[On]

[Use Fax Pr

eview]

[Off]

[On]

[Report Print]

[Off]

[On]

[Set Memory Lock Time]

[Off]

[On]

[Memory Lock Time]

[Memory Lock Start Time]

[Memory Lock End Time]

[Continue Print. When Cart. Low]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [Common Settings]

Specify whether to print received faxes and I-Faxes when a toner cartridge is low on toner.

● Printing

when a toner cartridge is low on toner may lead to print results that are faint or faded. For this reason,

this should normally be set to [Off]. When this setting is used and toner is low, received faxes and I-Faxes are

stored in the machine’s memory.

● If [On] is specied in this setting, received faxes and I-Faxes are not stored in the machine’s memory. If this

leads to print results that are too faint to read, you will need to ask the sender to re-send the fax or I-Fax.

Settings Menu Items

549

[Off]

[On]

[Print RX Page Footer]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [Common Settings]

Select whether to print the r

eceived date and time, page number, and other reception information at the bottom of

faxes or I-Faxes.

Changing the Print Settings for Received Faxes(P. 301)

Changing the Print Settings of the Received I-Fax(P. 310)

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

550

[I-Fax Settings]

84CU-0KF

Specify the settings for printing r

eceived I-Faxes.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Print on Both Sides](P. 551)

[RX Print Size](P. 551)

[Print on Both Sides]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [I-Fax Settings]

Specify whether to use 2-sided printing for r

eceived I-Faxes.

[Off]

[On]

[RX Print Size]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [I-Fax Settings]

Specify the paper size for printing r

eceived I-Faxes.

TR]

[LGL]

[FOOLSCAP/FOLIO (215.9x330.2 mm)]

[OFICIO (215.9x317.5 mm)]

[LETTER (Government) (203.2x266.7 mm)]

[LEGAL (Government) (203.2x330.2 mm)]

[LEGAL (India) (215.0x345.0 mm)]

[FOOLSCAP (Australia) (206.0x337.0 mm)]

[OFICIO (Brazil) (215.9x355.0 mm)]

[OFICIO (Mexico) (215.9x341.0 mm)]

[A4]

Settings Menu Items

551

[Fax Settings]

84CU-0KH

Specify the settings for r

eceiving and forwarding faxes.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

* [Fax Settings] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Print on Both Sides](P. 552)

[ECM RX](P. 552)

[Incoming Ring](P. 552)

[Remote RX](P. 553)

[Switch to Auto RX](P. 553)

[RX Start Speed](P. 553)

[Use Reduce RX Size](P. 554)

[Forwarding Settings](P. 554)

[Print on Both Sides]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [Fax Settings]

Specify whether to use 2-sided printing for r

eceived Faxes.

[Off]

[On]

[ECM RX]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [Fax Settings]

ECM (Error Correction Mode) is a function that conducts checking and correction to ensure that corrupted images

e not sent when an error occurs during image reception. Here, specify whether the ECM function is used for

reception.

● If you use ECM reception, error checking is carried out by both the sender and recipient during communication,

so the ECM function must also be enabled at the sender’s end.

● ECM reception may slow down communication because error checking and correction are conducted during

communication. Note also that even when ECM reception is enabled, errors may still occur depending on the

state of the phone lines.

● Enable ECM transmission on the machine to reduce the number of errors that occur when the machine sends

data.

[ECM TX](P. 544)

[Off]

[On]

[Incoming Ring]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [Fax Settings]

Specify whether the machine sounds an incoming ring tone if a fax is r

eceived when the fax RX mode is set to [Auto] or

[Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)].

If you specify [On] in this setting, you can also specify the number of times the incoming ring tone sounds.

Settings Menu Items

552

* Specifying [Off] will prevent the use of sleep mode.

[Use Incoming Ring]

[Off]

[On]

[Number of Rings]

1 to 2

to 99 (time(s))

[Remote RX]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [Fax Settings]

Specify whether a telephone connected to the machine can be used to r

eceive faxes (Remote RX).

Receiving Faxes

via T

elephone (Remote RX)(P. 300)

If you specify [On] in this setting, you can also specify the number used for the external telephone (Remote RX ID).

[Use Remote RX]

[Off]

[On]

[Remote RX ID]

00 to 25 to 99

[Switch to Auto RX]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [Fax Settings]

Specify whether the machine switches to automatic r

eceive mode (Auto RX) after a set period of time if you do not pick

up the receiver for an incoming fax when the fax receive mode is set to [Manual].

If you specify [On] in this setting, you can also specify how long (in seconds) the incoming ring tone sounds before the

machine switches to Auto RX.

[Use Switch to Auto RX]

[Off]

[On]

[Ring Time Until Auto RX]

1 to 15 to 99 (sec.)

[RX Start Speed]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [Fax Settings]

It may tak

e some time for reception to begin due to factors such as a poor phone line connection. If this occurs, adjust

the initial communication speed to a lower level.

[33600 bps]

[14400 bps]

[9600 bps]

[7200 bps]

[4800 bps]

[2400 bps]

Settings Menu Items

553

[Use Reduce RX Size]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [Fax Settings]

Specify whether to reduce images when printing or saving received faxes.

● Set the r

eduction ratio to [Auto] in this setting to reduce images to t the paper size.

● When specifying the reduction ratio, set a value between [97%] and [75%].

● To maintain the aspect ratio in reduced images, set the reduction direction to [Vertical/Horizontal]. To reduce

images in the vertical direction only, specify [Vertical Only].

[Use Reduce RX Size]

[Off]

[On]

[Reduction Ratio]

[Auto]

[97%]

[95%]

[90%]

[75%]

[Reduction Dir

ection]

[Vertical/Horizontal]

[Vertical Only]

[Forwarding Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [Fax Settings]

Specify the settings for forwar

ding faxes.

Auto Forwarding and Backing Up Received Faxes(P. 286)

[Forwar

ding Function]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [Fax Settings] [Forwarding Settings]

Specify whether the content of r

eceived faxes is automatically forwarded or saved to a preset destination.

If you specify [On] in this setting, also specify the forwarding or save destination and, if needed, the le name.

[Use Forwarding Function]

[Off]

[On]

[Forwar

ding Destination]

[File Name]

[Print Images]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [Fax Settings] [Forwarding Settings]

Specify whether to print forwar

ded faxes.

You can also opt to print only faxes that cannot be forwarded.

[Off]

[On]

[Only When Err

or Occurs]

Settings Menu Items

554

[Store Images in Memory]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive/Forward] [Fax Settings] [Forwarding Settings]

Specify whether fax

es that could not be forwarded due to an error are stored in the machine’s memory.

[Off]

[Only When Err

or Occurs]

Settings Menu Items

555

[Store/Access Files]

84CU-0KJ

Specify the settings for saving scanned data and for using a USB memory de

vice.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Common Settings](P. 556)

[Memory Media Settings](P. 556)

[Screen When Mem. Med. Conn](P. 556)

[Common Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Store/Access Files]

Specify the settings for saving to a USB memory de

vice and for Memory Media Print.

[Common Settings](P. 557)

[Memory Media Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Store/Access Files]

Specify the functions that can be used when a USB memory device is plugged into the machine.

● T

o allow scanned data to be saved to a USB memory device, set [Use Scan Function] to [On].

● To allow data in a USB memory device to be printed, set [Use Print Function] to [On].

● To restrict the saving of scanned data and the printing of data in a USB memory device, specify [Off] in the

respective settings.

Restricting Use of Memory Media(P. 411)

[Use Scan Function]

[Off]

[On]

[Use Print Function]

[Off]

[On]

[Screen When Mem. Med. Conn]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Store/Access Files]

ou can congure the settings to display the operation (scanning from a USB memory device or Memory Media Print)

screen when a USB memory device is inserted into the machine.

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

556

[Common Settings]

84CU-0KK

Specify the settings for saving to USB memory de

vices and for Memory Media Print.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Scan and Store Settings](P. 557)

[Access Stored Files Settings](P. 558)

[Scan and Store Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Store/Access Files] [Common Settings]

Specify the settings for functions that save scanned data to a USB memory de

vice.

[USB Memory Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Store/Access Files] [Common Settings] [Scan and Store Settings]

Change the default settings used for saving scanned data to a USB memory de

vice.

Changing the Default

Settings(P

. 183)

When you press [Reset] in the USB memory device save screen, the settings revert to the values specied here.

[Change Default Settings (USB Memory)]

[Scan Size]

[Auto (L

TR/LGL)]

[LTR]

[LGL]

[STMT]

[EXEC]

[FOOLSCAP/FOLIO (215.9x330.2 mm)]

[OFICIO (215.9x317.5 mm)]

[LETTER (Government) (203.2x266.7 mm)]

[LEGAL (Government) (203.2x330.2 mm)]

[LEGAL (India) (215.0x345.0 mm)]

[FOOLSCAP (Australia) (206.0x337.0 mm)]

[OFICIO (Brazil) (215.9x355.0 mm)]

[OFICIO (Mexico) (215.9x341.0 mm)]

[A4]

[A5R]

[B5]

[Specify Custom Size]

[File Format]

[PDF]

[PDF (Compact)]

[PDF (Compact/OCR)]

[PDF (OCR)]

[Set PDF Details]

[PDF]/[PDF (Compact)]/[PDF (Compact/OCR)]/[PDF (OCR)]

[Divide into Pages]

[Off]

Settings Menu Items

557

[On]

[

JPEG]

[TIFF]

[Set TIFF Details]

[Divide into Pages]

[Off]

[On]

[Density]

9 levels

[Original Orientation]

[Portrait]

[Landscape]

[Original Type]

[Text]

[Text/Photo]

[Photo]

[2-Sided Original]

[Off]

[Book Type]

[Calendar Type]

[Sharpness]

7 levels

[Data Size]

[Small: Memory Priority]

[Standard]

[Large: Image Quality Priority]

[Skip Blank Orig.]

[Off]

[On]

May not be displayed or available depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Access Stored Files Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Store/Access Files] [Common Settings]

Specify the settings for printing and displaying les in a USB memory de

vice.

[Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Store/Access Files] [Common Settings] [Access Stored Files Settings]

Change the default settings for Memory Media Print.

Changing the Default Settings(P. 183)

When you pr

ess [Reset] in the Memory Media print screen, the settings revert to the values specied here.

[Paper]

[Multi-Purpose T

ray]

[Drawer 1]

[Drawer 2]

[Auto Select Paper (LTR/LGL)]

Settings Menu Items

558

[Number of Copies]

to 999

[2-Sided Printing]

[Off]

[Book Type]

[Calendar Type]

[Set JPEG/TIFF Details]

[Brightness]

5 levels

[N on 1]

[Off]

[2 on 1]

[4 on 1]

[Original Type]

[Photo Priority]

[Text Priority]

[Halftones]

[Gradation]

[Error Diffusion]

[Matching Method]

[General]

[Vivid Photo]

[Set PDF Details]

[Brightness]

7 levels

[N on 1]

[Off]

[2 on 1]

[4 on 1]

[6 on 1]

[8 on 1]

[9 on 1]

[16 on 1]

[Print Range]

[All Pages]

[Specied Pages]

[Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size]

[Off]

[On]

[Enlarge Print Area]

[Off]

[On]

[Print Comments]

[Off]

[Auto]

[Line Renement]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

559

[On (Slim)]

[Off]

[Other Settings]

[Halftones]

[Err

or Diffusion]

[Off]

[On]

[Resolution/Gradation]

[Text]

[Resolution]

[Gradation]

[Graphics]

[Resolution]

[Gradation]

[Image]

[Resolution]

[Gradation]

[Pure Black Text]

[Off]

[On]

[Black Overprint]

[Off]

[On]

[RGB Source Prole]

[sRGB]

[Gamma 1.5]

[Gamma 1.8]

[Gamma 2.4]

[None]

[CMYK Simulation Prole]

[JapanColor(Canon)]

[U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)]

[Euro Standard v1.00(Canon)]

[None]

[Use Grayscale Prole]

[Off]

[On]

[Output Prole]

[Text]

[Normal]

[Photo]

[TR Normal]

[TR Photo]

[Graphics]

[Normal]

[Photo]

[TR Normal]

[TR Photo]

[Image]

Settings Menu Items

560

[Normal]

[Photo]

[TR Normal]

[TR Photo]

[Matching Method]

[Per

ceptual]

[Saturation]

[Colorimetric]

[Composite Overprint]

[Off]

[On]

[Grayscale Conversion]

[sRGB]

[NTSC]

[Uniform RGB]

[Print Quality]

[Density]

Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black

17 levels

[Fine Adjust]

[Yellow]/[Magenta]/

[Cyan]/[Black]

[High]/[Medium]/[Low]

17 levels

[Toner Save]

[Off]

[On]

[Gradation]

[High 1]

[High 2]

[Density Fine Adjustment]

5 levels

[Resolution]

[1200 dpi]

[600 dpi]

[Special Smoothing Mode]

[Mode 1]

[Mode 2]

[Mode 3]

[Mode 4]

[Mode 5]

[Mode 6]

[Toner Volume Correction]

[Standard]

[Gradation Priority]

[Text Priority]

[Line Control]

[Resolution Priority]

[Gradation Priority]

Settings Menu Items

561

[Width Adjustment]

[Off]

[On]

ext]

[Line]

[Text and Line]

[Advanced Smoothing]

[Off]

[Level 1]

[Level 2]

[Apply to Graphics]

[Off]

[On]

[Apply to Text]

[Off]

[On]

[Gradation Smoothing]

[Off]

[Level 1]

[Level 2]

[Apply to Graphics]

[Off]

[On]

[Apply to Images]

[Off]

[On]

May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.

[Default Display Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Store/Access Files] [Common Settings] [Access Stored Files Settings]

Specify ho

w les in a USB memory device are displayed.

Files in the le selection screen for a USB memory device are displayed as specied here.

Screen for

Selecting Files in USB Memory De

vice(P. 223)

[Preview]

[Thumbnail]

[Details]

[File Sort Default Settings]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Store/Access Files] [Common Settings] [Access Stored Files Settings]

Specify the display or

der for les in a USB memory device.

[Name (Ascending)]

[Name (Descending)]

[Date/Time (Ascending)]

[Date/Time (Descending)]

Settings Menu Items

562

[File Name Display Format]

[Menu] [Function Settings] [Store/Access Files] [Common Settings] [Access Stored Files Settings]

Specify the display format for les in a USB memory de

vice.

● Specify [Short File Name] in this setting to use abbreviated le names in the display. File names are

truncated to a maximum of eight characters. Numbers are added to the ends of le names to distinguish

between les with similar names.

● To show the le names in full, specify [Long File Name] in this setting. Up to 40 characters are shown

unabbreviated.

* The character count for le names does not include the le extension.

[Short File Name]

[Long File Name]

Settings Menu Items

563

[Set Destination]

84CU-0KL

Specify the settings for the Addr

ess Book PIN.

[Address Book PIN](P. 564)

[Address Book PIN]

[Menu] [Set Destination]

Specify that a PIN must be enter

ed to add new entries to the Address Book or edit existing entries.

Restricting

Addr

ess Book Registration and Editing by Setting a PIN(P. 420)

Settings Menu Items

564

[Management Settings]

84CU-0KR

Specify the settings for managing the machine users, the system, and other data.

[User Management](P. 565)

[Device Management](P. 565)

[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware](P. 565)

[Data Management](P. 565)

[Security Settings](P. 565)

[Initialize All Data/Settings](P. 565)

[User Management]

[Menu] [Management Settings]

’s administrator and users.

[User Management](P. 567)

[Device Management]

[Menu] [Management Settings]

Specify and manage the settings for information and oper

ations relating to the machine’s hardware.

[Device Management](P. 568)

[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware]

[Menu] [Management Settings]

Specify and manage the settings for information and oper

ations relating to the machine’s software.

[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware](P. 571)

[Data Management]

[Menu] [Management Settings]

Manage or initialize stor

ed data and the machine’s settings.

[Data Management](P. 573)

[Security Settings]

[Menu] [Management Settings]

Specify and manage the security settings, such as the machine

’s authentication functions and system verication.

[Security Settings](P. 575)

[Initialize All Data/Settings]

[Menu] [Management Settings]

Settings Menu Items

565

Initialize the settings and registered data to reset the machine to the factory settings. Initializing the Settings and

Data(P

. 458)

Settings Menu Items

566

[User Management]

84CU-0KS

's administrator and users.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[System Manager Information Settings](P. 567)

[Department ID Management](P. 567)

[System Manager Information Settings]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [User Management]

Specify a System Manager ID and System Manager PIN to cr

eate a dedicated administrator account.

If needed, you can also specify the administrator's name.

Use Remote UI from a computer to specify other administrator information, such as the e-mail address.

Setting the

Department ID and PIN for the Administr

ator(P. 357)

[System Manager ID and PIN]

[System Manager ID]

[System Manager PIN]

[System Manager Name]

[Department ID Management]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [User Management]

o enhance security and manage function use and costs, assign a Department ID to users and groups that use the

machine.

Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with Department ID (Department ID Management)

. 360)

[Enable Dept. ID Management]

[Off]

[On]

[Allo

w Print Jobs (Unknown IDs)]

[Off]

[On]

[Allow Scan Jobs (Unknown IDs)]

[Off]

[On]

[Allow Black & White Copy Jobs]

[Off]

[On]

[Register/Edit]

[Count Mngt.]

Settings Menu Items

567

[Device Management]

84CU-0KU

Specify and manage settings for information and oper

ations relating to the machine’s hardware.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Device Information Settings](P. 568)

[Select Country/Region](P. 568)

[Display Job Log](P. 568)

[Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)](P. 569)

[Scan w/Canon PRINT Business](P. 569)

[Notify to Check Paper Settings](P. 569)

[Canon Genuine Mode](P. 570)

[Device Information Settings]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Device Management]

Specify a name to identify the machine and the installation location.

The information specied her

e appears in the Remote UI Portal page.

Portal Page of Remote UI(P. 441)

[Device Name]

[Location]

[Select Country/Region]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Device Management]

Specify the country or r

egion where the machine is used. The default setting may vary depending on the setting

selected at initial power-ON.

* Depending on your country or region, the [Select Country/Region] setting may not be available, or its content or

default setting may be different.

[United States (US)]

[Canada (CA)]

[Br

azil (BR)]

[Mexico (MX)]

[Panama (PA)]

[Other]

[Display Job Log]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Device Management]

Specify whether the logs for printing, scanning, faxing, and cop

ying are shown on the Status Monitor screen and in the

communication management reports.

[Status Monitor] Screen(P. 114)

Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI(P. 443)

Printing and Viewing Reports and Lists(P. 447)

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

568

[Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Device Management]

Specify whether a button that accesses sites for purchasing toner cartridges is displayed in Toner Status and

Remote UI. Y

ou can also specify whether Toner Status is used.

● Specify whether to show the button in Remote UI in [Displ. Consmbls. Purchase Btn.].

● Specify whether to use Toner Status in [Toner Status] in the [Toner Status Settings].

● If you opt to use Toner Status, use [Displ. Consmbls. Purchase Btn.] in the [Toner Status Settings] to specify

whether to show the button.

Toner Status sends notication of the remaining amount of toner in the machine to the computer on which the tool is

installed. Download Toner Status from the Canon website for your country/region, and install it on your computer.

https://global.canon/en/support/

* If the machine is supplied with a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM, you can also use this to install Toner Status.

[Displ. Cnsmbls. Purch. Btn.(RUI)]

[Off]

[On]

oner Status Settings]

[Toner Status]

[Off]

[On]

[Displ. Consmbls. Purchase Btn.]

[Off]

[On]

[Scan w/Canon PRINT Business]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Device Management]

Specify whether the machine

’s scanning functions can be used from a mobile device with Canon PRINT Business

installed.

[Off]

[On]

[Notify to Check Paper Settings]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Device Management]

Specify whether the Notify to Check Paper Settings scr

een appears when the paper drawer is loaded into the machine.

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 132)

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

569

[Canon Genuine Mode]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Device Management]

Specify whether to switch to Canon Genuine Mode.

● Normally

, there is no need to change this setting.

● Your Canon service representative may change this setting. If this setting is not displayed, contact the

machine’s administrator.

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

570

[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update

Firmwar

84CU-0KW

Specify and manage the settings for information and oper

ations relating to the machine’s software.

[Remote UI Settings](P. 571)

[Update Firmware](P. 571)

[Remote UI Settings]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [License/Other]/[Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware]

Specify the settings for using Remote UI and for Restrict Access for Remote UI.

[Remote UI Settings](P. 572)

[Update Firmware]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [License/Other]/[Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware]

Check the machine

’s rmware version and update the rmware via the Internet or a computer.

Updating the

Firmwar

e(P. 455)

[Via PC]

[Via Internet]

ersion Information]

[Notication]

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

571

[Remote UI Settings]

84CU-0KX

Specify the settings for using Remote UI and for Restrict Access for Remote UI.

* V

alues in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Remote UI](P. 572)

[Restrict Access](P. 572)

[Remote UI]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [License/Other]/[Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware] [Remote UI Settings]

Specify whether to use Remote UI. Disabling Remote UI(P. 423)

If you opt to use Remote UI, you can also specify whether to use TLS encryption for communication when using

Remote UI. Using TLS(P. 380)

[Use Remote UI]

[Off]

[On]

[Use TLS]

[Off]

[On]

[Restrict Access]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [License/Other]/[Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware] [Remote UI Settings]

When using Remote UI, set this setting to [On], and set the Remote UI Access PIN. Setting the PIN to Use for

Remote UI(P

. 422)

[Off]

[On]

[Remote UI Access PIN]

Settings Menu Items

572

[Data Management]

84CU-0KY

Manage or initialize the data and settings on the machine.

* V

alues in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Import/Export](P. 573)

[Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey Prog.](P. 573)

[Initialize Key and Certicate](P

. 573)

[Initialize Address Book](P. 574)

[Initialize Menu](P. 574)

[Import/Export]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Data Management]

Import or export the Address Book and various settings.

When importing is completed, the machine r

estarts automatically.

● To import or export using the operation panel, use a USB memory device.

Inserting and Removing a USB

Memory De

vice(P. 177)

● To import or export particular items, use Remote UI from a computer.

Importing and Exporting the

Addr

ess Book and Settings(P. 452)

[Import]

[Export]

If the [Address Book PIN] screen appears during import or export

● Enter the Addr

ess Book PIN and press [Apply]. If you skip this step, the Address Book data is not imported or

exported.

[Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey Prog.]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Data Management]

Specify whether to use the Pr

oduct Extended Survey Program (a program for surveying machine usage).

The Product Extended Survey Program is installed at the same time as the drivers. It automatically sends monthly

updates of information on device usage to Canon over a 10-year period. The program does not send personal

information or any information other than that shown above.

[Off]

[On]

[Initialize Key and Certicate]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Data Management]

Settings Menu Items

573

Initialize the key and certicate settings and CA certicate settings, and delete all k

eys and certicates other than pre-

installed ones.

Initializing Specic Settings and Data(P

. 458)

[Initialize Address Book]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Data Management]

Delete the destinations r

egistered in the Address Book.

Initializing Specic Settings and Data(P

. 458)

[Initialize Menu]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Data Management]

Initialize the [Menu] settings in the [Home] scr

een. Select the settings to be initialized.

Initializing Specic Settings

and Data(P

. 458)

[Preferences]

[Adjustment/Maintenance]

[Function Settings]

[Set Destination]

[Management Settings]

[Initialize All]

Settings Menu Items

574

[Security Settings]

84CU-0L0

Specify and manage security settings such as the machine

’s authentication functions and system verication.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Authentication/Password Settings](P. 575)

[Encryption Settings](P. 575)

[Verify System at Startup](P. 575)

[Authentication/Password Settings]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Security Settings]

Congur

e the authentication functions for the machine.

[Authentication/Password Settings](P. 576)

[Encryption Settings]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Security Settings]

Specify whether to r

estrict the use of weak encryption or keys and certicates that use weak encryption.

[Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.]

[Off]

[On]

[Pr

ohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.]

[Off]

[On]

[Verify System at Startup]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Security Settings]

erify that the system and the applications have not been tampered with when starting up the machine or running

applications (Application Library).

If Tampering is Detected

● The machine switches to update standby mode. You need to update the rmware.

Updating the

Firmwar

e(P. 455)

● If applications added to the machine have been tampered with, the affected applications must be re-

installed.

● If the screen remains blank after some time, system recovery may not be possible. Contact your dealer or

service representative.

If the Problem Persists(P. 728)

[Off]

[On]

Settings Menu Items

575

[Authentication/Password Settings]

84CU-0L1

Specify the settings for the machine

’s authentication functions.

* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.

[Authentication Function Settings](P. 576)

[Authentication Function Settings]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Security Settings] [Authentication/Password Settings]

Specify the settings for enhanced security using the authentication functions.

[Lock

out]

[Menu] [Management Settings] [Security Settings] [Authentication/Password Settings] [Authentication

Function Settings]

Specify whether to switch to a state that does not permit login (lock

out) for a set period if authentication fails.

If you use lockout, you can also specify how many consecutive times authentication fails before lockout is

invoked in [Lockout Threshold] and specify the length of the lockout period in [Lockout Period].

* This does not apply to Department ID authentication.

[Enable Lockout]

[Off]

[On]

[Lock

out Threshold]

1 to 10 (time(s))

[Lockout Period]

1 to 60 (min.)

Settings Menu Items

576

Settings that Can Be Imported and Exported

84CU-0L2

ou can view a list of support for importing and exporting the machine's settings.

[Preferences](P. 578)

[Adjustment/Maintenance](P. 582)

[Function Settings](P. 583)

[Set Destination](P. 587)

[Management Settings](P. 588)

● See the follo

wing for information on how to import and export data.

Importing and Exporting the Address Book and Settings(P. 452)

Settings Menu Items

577

[Preferences]

84CU-0L3

Support for importing and e

xporting the [Preferences] is as shown below.

: Can be imported or exported

: Cannot be imported or exported

[Display Settings](P. 578)

[English Keyboard Layout](P. 579)

[Timer/Energy Settings](P. 579)

[Network](P. 579)

[External Interface](P. 581)

[Accessibility](P. 581)

[Display Settings]

Setting Import and Export

[Default Screen After Startup/Restoration]

[Home Screen Button Display Settings]

[Language]

[Remote UI Language]

[Notify to Clean Orig. Scan Area]

[Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch]

[Gram/Pound Switch]

[Display Timing for Cart. Prep.]

[Display Notif. to Clean Fixing Assembly]

[Show Warnings]

[Action When Warning]

[Display IP Address]

Settings Menu Items

578

[English Keyboard Layout]

Setting Import and Export

[English Keyboard Layout]

[Timer/Energy Settings]

Setting Import and Export

[Current Date/Time Settings]

[Date/Time Settings]

[Date Format]

[Time Format]

[Auto Reset Time]

[Function After Auto Reset]

[Auto Sleep Time]

[Auto Sleep Daily Timer]

[Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings]

[Network]

Setting Import and Export

[Select Wired/Wireless LAN]

[Wireless LAN Settings] [Manually Enter Network Name (SSID)]

[WPS Push Button Mode]

[WPS PIN Code Mode]

[Power Save Mode]

Settings Menu Items

579

Setting Import and Export

[Connection Information]

[Direct Connection Settings]

[Easy Connection via PC]

[TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings]

[IPv6 Settings]

[DNS Settings]

[WINS Settings]

[LPD Settings]

[RAW Settings]

[WSD Settings]

[Use FTP PASV Mode]

[IPP Print Settings]

[Use HTTP]

[Use IPSec]

[Network Link Scan Settings]

[Port Number Settings]

[MTU Size]

[SNMP Settings]

[Use Dedicated Port]

[Dedicated Port Auth. Method]

[Wait Time for Conn. at Startup]

[Ethernet Driver Settings]

[Use IEEE 802.1X]

Settings Menu Items

580

Setting Import and Export

[Firewall Settings]

[Device Settings Management]

[Monitoring Service]

[RMT-SW]

[Initialize Network Settings]

The [PING Command] is " ."

[External Interface]

Setting Import and Export

[USB Settings]

[Accessibility]

Setting Import and Export

[Invert Screen Colors]

[Brightness]

[Message Display Time]

Settings Menu Items

581

[Adjustment/Maintenance]

84CU-0L4

Support for importing and e

xporting the [Adjustment/Maintenance] is as shown below.

: Can be imported or exported

: Cannot be imported or exported

[Adjust Image Quality](P. 582)

[Maintenance](P. 582)

[Adjust Image Quality]

Setting Import and Export

[Auto Adjust Gradation]

[Auto Correction Settings]

[Correct Print Color Mismatch]

[Black Text Processing for Color]

[Adjust Print Position]

[Special Processing]

[Remove Streaks from Scan Area]

[Maintenance]

Setting Import and Export

[Clean Fixing Assembly]

[Clean ITB]

[Clean Feeder]

[Control Condensation]

Settings Menu Items

582

[Function Settings]

84CU-0L5

Support for importing and e

xporting the [Function Settings] is as shown below.

: Can be imported or exported

: Cannot be imported or exported

[Common](P. 583)

[Copy](P. 583)

[Printer](P. 583)

[Send](P. 585)

[Receive/Forward](P. 586)

[Store/Access Files](P. 586)

[Secure Print](P. 586)

[Common]

Setting Import and Export

[Paper Feed Settings]

[Print Settings]

[Scan Settings]

[Generate File]

[Fax Setup Guide]

[Copy]

Setting Import and Export

[Change Default Settings (Copy)]

[Printer]

Setting Import and Export

[Printer Settings] [Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing]

[Copies]

Settings Menu Items

583

Setting Import and Export

[2-Sided Printing]

[Default Paper]

[Paper Size Override]

[Print Quality]

[Layout]

[Auto Skip Error]

[Timeout]

[Personality]

[Color Mode]

[Compressed Image Output]

[Prioritize MP Tray]

[UFR II]

[Imaging Settings]

[PDF]

[XPS]

[PDL Selection (Plug and Play)] [Network]

[USB]

The follo

wing items are "

● [RGB Sour

ce Prole]

● [CMYK Simulation Prole]

● [Use Grayscale Prole]

● [Output Prole]

Settings Menu Items

584

[Send]

Setting Import and Export

[Common Settings]

[Scan and Send Settings]

[Fax Settings] [Change Default Settings (Fax)]

[Off-Hook Alarm]

[ECM TX]

[Set Pause Time]

[Auto Redial]

[Check Dial Tone Before Send]

[Set Line]

[TX Start Speed]

[Archive TX Document]

[Conrm Enter

ed Fax Number]

[Allow Fax Driver TX]

[Use Addr. Book When On-Hook]

[Restrict Sequential Broadcast]

[Register Log Dest to Addr Book]

[TX Terminal ID]

[Auto Adjust VoIP Comm. Speed]

Settings Menu Items

585

[Receive/Forward]

Setting Import and Export

[Common Settings]

[I-Fax Settings]

[Fax Settings] [Print on Both Sides]

[ECM RX]

[Incoming Ring]

[Remote RX]

[Switch to Auto RX]

[RX Start Speed]

[Use Reduce RX Size]

[Forwarding Settings]

[Use Forwar

ding Function] and [Forwarding Destination] in [Forwarding Function] are "

[Store/Access Files]

Setting Import and Export

[Common Settings]

[Memory Media Settings]

[Screen When Mem. Med. Conn]

[Secure Print]

Setting Import and Export

[Secure Print]

Settings Menu Items

586

[Set Destination]

84CU-0L6

Support for importing and e

xporting the [Set Destination] is as shown below.

: Can be imported or exported

: Cannot be imported or exported

[Address Book PIN](P. 587)

[Address Book PIN]

Setting Import and Export

[Address Book PIN]

Settings Menu Items

587

[Management Settings]

84CU-0L7

Support for importing and e

xporting the [Management Settings] is as shown below.

: Can be imported or exported

: Cannot be imported or exported

[User Management](P. 588)

[Device Management](P. 588)

[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware](P. 589)

[Data Management](P. 589)

[Security Settings](P. 589)

[Initialize All Data/Settings](P. 589)

[User Management]

Setting Import and Export

[System Manager Information Settings]

[Department ID Management]

The [Count Mngt.] is " ."

[Device Management]

Setting Import and Export

[Device Information Settings]

[Select Country/Region]

[Display Job Log]

[Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)]

[Scan w/Canon PRINT Business]

[Notify to Check Paper Settings]

[Canon Genuine Mode]

Settings Menu Items

588

[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware]

Setting Import and Export

[Remote UI Settings]

[Update Firmware]

[Data Management]

Setting Import and Export

[Import/Export]

[Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey Prog.]

[Initialize Key and Certicate]

[Initialize Address Book]

[Initialize Menu]

[Security Settings]

Setting Import and Export

[Authentication/Password Settings]

[Encryption Settings]

[Verify System at Startup]

[Initialize All Data/Settings]

Setting Import and Export

[Initialize All Data/Settings]

Settings Menu Items

589

Maintenance

Maintenance .....................................................................................................................................................

591

Cleaning the Machine ....................................................................................................................................... 593

Cleaning the Surface of the Machine ............................................................................................................ 594

Cleaning the Platen Glass ............................................................................................................................. 595

Cleaning the Feeder ..................................................................................................................................... 596

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ....................................................................................................................... 599

Cleaning the Transfer Belt ............................................................................................................................ 600

Replacing Consumables .................................................................................................................................... 601

Replacing the Toner Cartridges .................................................................................................................... 602

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables ....................................................................................... 607

List of Consumables ..................................................................................................................................... 608

Adjusting the Print Quality and Position ......................................................................................................... 610

Calibrating the Gradation ............................................................................................................................. 611

Correcting Color Mismatch ........................................................................................................................... 616

Adjusting the Reproducibility of Near Black Color Text ................................................................................. 617

Adjusting the Print Position .......................................................................................................................... 619

Moving the Machine .......................................................................................................................................... 621

Maintenance

590

Maintenance

84CU-06W

o ensure safe and convenient use of the machine, daily maintenance that includes cleaning and replacement of

consumables is required.

If you notice a deterioration in the print quality or frequent paper jams, perform cleaning and adjustment to improve

it.

Performing Maintenance Operations

In addition to performing regular maintenance, operations are required according to the machine status and

print quality

Cleaning

Regularly clean the various parts of the machine. If the original or paper becomes dirty, or the print quality

has deteriorated, clean the parts causing the problem according to the symptoms.

Cleaning the Machine(P. 593)

Replacing Consumables

If a message about consumables appears on the scr

een of the operation panel or Remote UI, or the print

quality deteriorates, replace the consumables.

Replacing Consumables(P. 601)

Adjusting the Print Quality and Position

If the printed color is not r

eproduced properly, the image position is shifted, or the print results are

otherwise not as expected, adjust the print quality and position according to the symptoms that occur.

Adjusting the Print Quality and Position(P. 610)

Changing the Installation Location

When moving the machine, perform the prescribed procedure to prevent accident or damage.

Moving the Machine(P. 621)

Maintenance and Inspections

● The minimum holding period for performance parts for r

epairs and toner cartridges is seven (7) years after

production of the machine model is discontinued.

● If a problem occurs during operation, see the following:

Troubleshooting(P. 625)

If the problem still cannot be resolved or you think the machine needs to be checked, contact your dealer or

service representative. If the Problem Persists(P. 728)

Installation

● If you nd the machine's operation to be noisy in some operating modes or due to your surroundings, we

recommend setting up the machine in a separate location from your oce.

● Water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine if the room where the machine is installed is

heated rapidly, or if the machine is moved from a cool, dry location to a warm, humid location. Using the

machine under these conditions may result in problems such as paper jams, poor print quality, or faults. Let

the machine adjust to the ambient temperature and humidity for at least two hours before use.

● Machines with storage devices such as hard disks may not operate properly when used at high altitudes

(3,280 yards (3,000 meters) above sea level or higher).

◼ See Also

Checking the Requir

ed Troubleshooting Solutions from the Symptoms

Maintenance

591

You can check the required maintenance operations and settings according to the status of the machine and

the err

or description.

Paper Jams(P. 626)

Problems with Printing Results(P. 636)

Paper and Paper Feeding Problems(P. 655)

Vie

wing the Number of Printed Pages and Machine Usage

As a guide to when to perform maintenance, you can view the number of printed pages using the counter

and view the usage of the machine from reports and lists.

Monitoring the Usage(P. 445)

Maintenance

592

Cleaning the Machine

84CU-06X

o ensure ecient use of the machine, regularly clean the various parts and keep them clean.

If the original or paper becomes dirty, or the print quality has deteriorated, clean the parts causing the problem

according to the symptoms.

Parts to Clean on a Regular Basis

Clean the surface (

), platen glass, and the underside of the feeder ( ) frequently.

Cleaning the Surface of the Machine(P. 594)

Cleaning the Platen Glass(P. 595)

Parts to Clean When Symptoms Occur

If the follo

wing symptoms occur, clean the feeder (

) or xing assembly and tr

ansfer belt (

) inside the

machine.

● Original becomes dirty

, paper is jammed, or smudges appear on printouts.

Cleaning the Feeder(P. 596)

● Paper becomes dirty or print quality has deterior

ated.

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 599)

Cleaning the Transfer Belt(P. 600)

Maintenance

593

Cleaning the Surface of the Machine

84CU-06Y

Regularly clean the surface of the machine to k

eep it clean. In addition, remove dust from the ventilation holes to

ensure ecient ventilation and cooling of the inside of the machine.

Turn OFF the power and remove the power cord from the outlet.

Turning OFF the

Machine(P

. 101)

Turning OFF the machine deletes any data waiting to be printed.

Wipe the surface of the machine and the ventilation slots.

● Wipe with a soft cloth soak

ed in water or diluted neutral detergent and wrung out.

● For the location of the ventilation slots, see the part names on the front of the machine.

Front Side(P. 10)

Allow the parts to fully dry.

Plug the power cord into the outlet, and turn ON the machine.

Turning ON the

Machine(P

. 100)

Maintenance

594

Cleaning the Platen Glass

84CU-070

Regularly clean the platen glass and r

ear of the feeder to prevent originals from becoming dirty and printouts from

appearing to be smudged.

If the platen glass or rear of the feeder is dirty, originals can become dirty and printouts can become smudged after

scanning, copying, or sending faxes.

Turn OFF the power and remove the power cord from the outlet.

Turning OFF the

Machine(P

. 101)

Turning OFF the machine deletes any data waiting to be printed.

Open the feeder.

Wipe the platen glass and rear of the feeder.

Wipe with a cloth soaked in water and wrung out. Next, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

Allow the parts to fully dry.

Gently close the feeder.

Plug the power cord into the outlet, and turn ON the machine.

Turning ON the

Machine(P

. 100)

Maintenance

595

Cleaning the Feeder

84CU-071

If the following symptoms occur when using the feeder, wipe clean the feeder:

● Originals become dirty

● Originals fr

equently jam

● Printouts appear smudged after scanning, copying, or sending faxes

If you do not see an improvement after wiping the feeder, use paper to perform cleaning.

Cleaning the Feeder by Wiping(P. 596)

Cleaning the Feeder with Paper(P. 597)

Cleaning the Feeder by Wiping

Wipe the rollers inside the feeder and the feeder original scanning area to remove any adhering graphite powder and

dust.

Turn OFF the power and remove the power cord from the outlet.

Turning OFF the

Machine(P

. 101)

Turning OFF the machine deletes any data waiting to be printed.

Open the original supply tray.

Open the feeder cover.

Wipe the rollers ( ) inside the feeder and surrounding areas.

Maintenance

596

Wipe with a cloth soaked in water and wrung out. Next, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

Close the feeder cover and original supply tray.

Open the feeder.

Wipe the feeder original scanning area.

Wipe with a cloth soaked in water and wrung out. Next, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

Allow the parts to fully dry.

Gently close the feeder.

Plug the power cord into the outlet, and turn ON the machine.

Turning ON the

Machine(P

. 100)

Cleaning the Feeder with Paper

Clean the feeder b

y running paper through the inside.

Maintenance

597

Load 10 sheets of A4 or letter size plain paper into the feeder.

Placing

Originals

(P. 128)

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen. [Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance] [Clean Feeder].

➠ The [Clean Feeder] scr

een is displayed.

Press [Start].

➠ The paper loaded in the feeder is fed to the machine, and cleaning starts.

The paper is output when cleaning is completed.

Maintenance

598

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly

84CU-072

If the printout is smudged, the xing assembly may be dirty

. In this case, you can clean the xing assembly using

paper.

The xing assembly cannot be cleaned when data is waiting to be printed or a toner cartridge has reached the end of

its lifetime.

Required Preparations

● Check that ther

e is enough amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges.

Checking the Remaining

Amount of Consumables

(P. 607)

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen. [Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance] [Clean Fixing Assembly].

➠ The available paper sizes and types ar

e displayed on the conrmation screen.

Check that available paper is loaded, and then press [OK]

[Start].

➠ The paper is fed to the machine, and cleaning starts.

When cleaning is completed, a sheet of paper with a printed image (pattern) is output.

Maintenance

599

Cleaning the Transfer Belt

84CU-073

If the printout is smudged, the tr

ansfer belt (ITB) inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the transfer belt using the

procedure below.

The transfer belt cannot be cleaned when data is waiting to be printed.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance] [Clean ITB].

➠ The [Clean ITB] scr

een is displayed.

Press [Start].

➠ Cleaning is performed.

When cleaning is completed, the message [Finished.] appears, and then the [Maintenance] scr

een is

displayed.

Maintenance

600

Replacing Consumables

84CU-074

If a message about consumables appears on the scr

een of the operation panel or Remote UI, or the print quality

deteriorates, replace the consumables.

You can view the current remaining amount of consumables on the operation panel and Remote UI. For the

consumable item names and number of sheets that can be printed, see the list of consumables.

Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 602)

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 607)

List of Consumables(P. 608)

Maintenance

601

Replacing the Toner Cartridges

84CU-075

Replace the toner cartridges at the appr

opriate time according to messages that appear and a change in print quality.

Before replacing the toner cartridges, check the precautions in Important Safety Instructions.

Manuals of the

Machine(P

. 731)

When to Replace the Toner Cartridges(P. 603)

Before Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 603)

Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 605)

● Do not touch the contacts ( ) inside the machine. Doing so may result in a fault.

● Be sur

e to hold the toner cartridge using the handle.

● Do not scr

atch the drum surface (

) or expose it to light. Also, do not touch the electrical contacts ( ) or

the toner cartridge memory ( ).

Maintenance

602

When to Replace the Toner Cartridges

When a Message Appears on the Scr

een of the Operation Panel or Remote UI

Follow the message on the screen to prepare a new toner cartridge and replace the old one. Print quality

may suffer if you continue using the toner cartridges without replacing them.

For details about the message and how to resolve it, see the following:

A Message Appears(P. 697)

When Print Quality Deterior

ates

If printouts show any of the symptoms below, the toner cartridges are near the end of their lifetime. It is

recommended to replace the toner cartridges even if a message does not appear.

Streaks appear

Printing is uneven

Toner smudges and splatters appear

White spots appear

Partially faded

Colors or stains appear on printouts

Before Replacing Toner Cartridges

Perform the follo

wing procedure before replacing the toner cartridges. The message on the screen may disappear,

and the print quality may improve.

Open the front cover.

Maintenance

603

Pull out the toner cartridge tray.

Pull the toner cartridge straight up and out of the machine.

Shake the toner cartridge ve or six times to e

venly distribute the toner inside the

cartridge.

Be careful not to touch the drum surface on the bottom of the toner cartridge.

Install the toner cartridge.

The bottom of the toner cartridge is unprotected. Be careful not to bump the bottom of the toner cartridge

against the slot fr

ame or other parts when installing.

Maintenance

604

Push in the toner cartridge tray, and close the front cover.

Replacing Toner Cartridges

Open the front cover.

Pull out the toner cartridge tray.

Pull the toner cartridge to be replaced straight up and out of the machine.

Remove the toner cartridge from the packing material.

Maintenance

605

Shake the toner cartridge ve or six times to e

venly distribute the toner inside the

cartridge.

Remove the protective cover of the toner cartridge.

Be careful not to touch the drum surface on the bottom of the toner cartridge.

Install the toner cartridge.

● Install the toner cartridge into the slot with the same color

ed label (

● The bottom of the toner cartridge is unpr

otected. Be careful not to bump the bottom of the toner cartridge

against the slot frame or other parts when installing.

Push in the toner cartridge tray, and close the front cover.

➠ When you close the fr

ont cover, a simple gradation adjustment is performed automatically.

To adjust the gradation more accurately, perform full adjustment manually.

Calibrating the

adation(P. 611)

Maintenance

606

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables

84CU-076

ou can view the percentage of the current remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges in increments of 10%.

Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges, for example, to see if you need to prepare a new toner

cartridge before printing a large volume document.

* The displayed value for the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges is for reference and may not indicate

the actual amount remaining.

This section describes how to view this information using the operation panel.

You can also check this information using Remote UI from a computer.

Managing the Machine from a Computer

(Remote UI)

(P. 437)

On the operation panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen or other

location.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Device Information] [Cartridge Information].

➠ The r

emaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges is displayed by the color.

Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges.

● Y

ou can congure the settings to notify you to prepare a new toner cartridge when the current toner

cartridge reaches a specied amount.

[Display Timing for Cart. Prep.](P. 467)

Maintenance

607

List of Consumables

84CU-077

The item names of the machine consumables and number of sheets that can be printed ar

e shown below.

In addition, precautions must be taken when handling and storing consumables. See also "Important Safety

Instructions."

Manuals of the Machine(P. 731)

For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine Toner, Cartridge and Parts is

ecommended.

◼ T

oner Cartridges

Supplied Toner Cartridges

The average number of sheets that can be printed

with the supplied toner cartridges is sho

wn below.

The aver

age yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19798" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner

cartridge yield for colour printers and multi-function devices that contain printer components" issued by International

Organization for Standardization (ISO)) when printing A4 size plain paper with the default print density setting.

Black

1,200 sheets

Y (Y

ellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan)

1,100 sheets

Replacement Toner Cartridges

The Canon genuine toner cartridges for replacement and average number of sheets that can be printed

shown below.

For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.

The aver

age yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19798" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner

cartridge yield for colour printers and multi-function devices that contain printer components" issued by International

Organization for Standardization (ISO)) when printing A4 size plain paper with the default print density setting.

Canon Cartridge 069

Black

2,100 sheets

Y (Y

ellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan)

1,900 sheets

Canon Cartridge 069 H

Black

7,600 sheets

Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan)

5,500 sheets

Maintenance

608

Store toner cartridges as described below. Storing toner cartridges in an improper location or environment may

cause pr

oblems such as data loss.

● Store unopened until immediately prior to use.

● Do not store toner cartridges upright or upside down.

● Do not store toner cartridges in the following locations:

- Locations exposed to open ames

- Locations exposed to direct sunlight or bright light for ve minutes or more

- Locations exposed to excessively salty air

- Locations heavily exposed to corrosive gases (e.g. aerosol sprays or ammonia)

- Very hot and/or humid locations

- Locations subject to dramatic changes in temperature and humidity likely to cause condensation

- Very dusty locations

- Locations within the reach of children

- Locations close to products affected by magnetism (e.g. oppy disks or disk drives)

● Store the packaging material safely for future use. It will be needed for situations such as storing the

machine with the toner cartridges removed.

● Canon reserves the right to reposition, reshape, add, or remove packaging material without notice.

● Store toner cartridges in the following conditions:

- Storage temperature range: 32 - 95 °F (0 - 35 °C)

- Storage humidity range: 35% to 85% RH (relative humidity, condensation-free)

*1 Even within the approved storage humidity range, water droplets (condensation) may develop inside the toner

cartridge if the temper

atures inside and outside the toner cartridge differ. Condensation will adversely affect the print

quality.

Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges

● Please be awar

e that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit

toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any

malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.

For more information, see https://global.canon/ctc/ .

● The toner cartridges may need to be r

eplaced before reaching the average number of sheets that can be

printed depending on the installation environment, paper size to be printed, and original type.

● Automatic calibration may be performed in response to changes in the environment to maintain image

quality. Automatic calibration may also be performed when the power is turned ON and when recovering

from sleep mode. Performing calibration uses the toner cartridges, which may affect their lifetime.

● The lifetime of color toner cartridges may also be affected by black and white printing. When you print large

volumes in black and white, the number of sheets that can be printed for each color toner cartridge may be

reduced.

Maintenance

609

Adjusting the Print Quality and Position

84CU-078

If the printed color is not r

eproduced properly, the image position is shifted, or the print results are otherwise not as

expected, adjust the print quality and position according to the symptoms that occur.

Gradation is not reproduced.

Calibrating the Gradation(P. 611)

Printed image is blurry. Correcting Color Mismatch(P. 616)

Black or near-black colors are not reproduced. Adjusting the Reproducibility of Near Black Color

ext(P. 617)

Printed position is closer to one side or sticking out. Adjusting the Print Position(P. 619)

Maintenance

610

Calibrating the Gradation

84CU-079

adation is the gradual changing of the color depth and brightness. If the gradation is not reproduced correctly and

the printed data greatly differs from the source data or original, calibrate the gradation (calibration).

Gradation calibration is performed automatically according to usage of the machine and changes in the environment,

but it can also be calibrated manually, as needed.

You cannot perform calibration while printing or scanning or when a toner cartridge has reached the end of its

lifetime.

Gradation can be manually calibrated in three ways: Quick Adjust, Full Adjust, or Adjust Copy Image.

First, try Quick Adjust for easy calibr

ation. If you do not see an improvement, perform Full Adjust to calibrate more

accurately. If you notice symptoms particularly when copying, perform Adjust Copy Image.

Simple Calibration (Quick Adjust)(P. 611)

Calibrating More Accurately (Full Adjust)(P. 612)

Calibrating the Gradation of Copy Images (Adjust Copy Image)(P. 613)

● The toner cartridges ar

e used during calibration.

- Performing frequent calibration affects the lifetime of the toner cartridges, regardless of whether it is

automatic or manual calibration.

- If the color balance of the printed document differs from the source data or original after calibration is

performed, the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges may be low. It is recommended to

check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges, and replace any toner cartridges, as needed.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 607)

Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 605)

● When performing gr

adation calibration regularly, you can set the priority to the toner cartridge lifetime or

the calibration effect.

[Adjust Image According To](P. 493)

Simple Calibration (Quick Adjust)

Use the oper

ation panel to perform Quick Adjust. You cannot perform Quick Adjust using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Auto Adjust Gradation]

[Quick Adjust].

➠ The [Quick Adjust] scr

een is displayed.

Maintenance

611

Press [Start].

➠ Calibr

ation is performed.

When calibration is completed, the message [Finished.] appears, and then the [Auto Adjust Gradation]

screen is displayed.

If the result after performing Quick Adjust is not satisfactory, perform Full Adjust.

Calibrating More

Accur

ately (Full Adjust)(P. 612)

● Y

ou can congure the settings to regularly perform Quick Adjust automatically.

[Auto Adjust Image

Regularly](P

. 493)

Calibrating More Accurately (Full Adjust)

Scan a calibr

ation image (image used for calibration) printed with the machine on the platen glass multiple times to

calibrate the gradation more accurately. The result calibrated here is used until Full Adjust is performed next time.

Use the operation panel to perform Full Adjust. You cannot perform Full Adjust using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Auto Adjust Gradation]

[Full Adjust].

➠ The available paper sizes and types ar

e displayed on the conrmation screen.

Check that available paper is loaded, and then press [OK].

➠ The [Steps] scr

een is displayed.

Check the operating procedure, and press [Start].

➠ The calibr

ation image is printed.

Place the paper with the correction image printed on the platen glass.

Open the feeder.

Place the paper on the platen glass in the landscape orientation while aligning the corner of the paper

with the top left corner of the platen glass.

Maintenance

612

Place the print side of the correction image face down with the black band at the back of the machine.

Gently close the feeder.

Press [Start Scanning].

➠ After the calibr

ation image is scanned, the calibration image is printed on the second sheet.

Remove the rst sheet fr

om the platen glass, and place the second sheet.

Place the second sheet with the printed calibration image on the platen glass in the same way as the rst

sheet. For details about placing originals, see Step 5.

Press [Start Scanning].

➠ The calibr

ation image is scanned, and calibration is performed.

When calibration is completed, the message [Finished.] appears, and then the [Auto Adjust Gradation]

screen is displayed.

Remove the second sheet from the platen glass.

When [Could not perform correction.] Appears

● Check that oper

ations are performed with the procedure above. In particular, check the following:

- In 3, check that available paper is loaded in the paper drawer.

- In 5, check that the calibration image is properly set. Be careful of the print side and the position of the

black band.

● Remove any jammed paper.

Paper Jams(P. 626)

● Check the r

emaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges, and replace any toner cartridges, as needed.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 607)

Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 605)

Calibrating the Gradation of Copy Images (Adjust Copy Image)

Scan a calibr

ation image (image used for calibration) printed with the machine on the platen glass to calibrate the

gradation of the copy image.

Use the operation panel to perform Adjust Copy Image. You cannot perform Adjust Copy Image using Remote UI from

a computer.

Maintenance

613

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Auto Adjust Gradation]

[Adjust Copy Image].

➠ The available paper sizes and types ar

e displayed on the conrmation screen.

Check that available paper is loaded, and then press [OK].

➠ The [Steps] scr

een is displayed.

Check the operating procedure, and press [Start].

➠ The calibr

ation image is printed.

Place the paper with the correction image printed on the platen glass.

Open the feeder.

Place the paper on the platen glass in the landscape orientation while aligning the corner of the paper

with the top left corner of the platen glass.

Place the print side of the correction image face down with the black band at the back of the machine.

Gently close the feeder.

Press [Start Scanning].

➠ The calibr

ation image is scanned, and calibration is performed.

When calibration is completed, the message [Finished.] appears, and then the [Auto Adjust Gradation]

screen is displayed.

Remove the paper with the printed correction image from the platen glass.

When [Could not perform correction.] Appears

● Check that oper

ations are performed with the procedure above. In particular, check the following:

- In 3, check that available paper is loaded in the paper drawer.

Maintenance

614

- In 5, check that the calibration image is properly set. Be careful of the print side and the position of the

black band.

● Remo

ve any jammed paper.

Paper Jams(P. 626)

● Check the r

emaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges, and replace any toner cartridges, as needed.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 607)

Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 605)

Maintenance

615

Correcting Color Mismatch

84CU-07A

Color mismatch r

efers to a slight shift in the print positions of colors. When color mismatch occurs, printed images

appear blurry. If this occurs, correct the color mismatch by performing calibration.

Color mismatch calibration is performed automatically according to usage of the machine and changes in the

environment, but it can also be calibrated manually, as needed.

You cannot perform calibration when a toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.

Use the operation panel to perform calibration. You cannot perform calibration using Remote UI from a computer.

● The toner cartridges ar

e used during calibration.

- Performing frequent calibration affects the lifetime of the toner cartridges, regardless of whether it is

automatic or manual calibration.

- If the color balance of the printed document differs from the source data or original after calibration is

performed, the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges may be low. It is recommended to

check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges, and replace any toner cartridges, as needed.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 607)

Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 605)

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Correct Print Color

Mismatch].

➠ The [Corr

ect Print Color Mismatch] screen is displayed.

Press [Start].

➠ Calibr

ation is performed.

When calibration is completed, the message [Finished.] appears, and then the [Adjust Image Quality]

screen is displayed.

● Color mismatch calibr

ation is automatically performed when the machine is started. You can congure when

at startup to perform calibration.

[Correct Print Color Mismatch](P. 493)

Maintenance

616

Adjusting the Reproducibility of Near Black Color Text

84CU-07C

When scanning originals in color, you can mak

e adjustments with priority given to reproducing near black color text

(color text) or making black text easier to see.

You can make individual adjustments for scanning with the feeder and platen glass.

* When the original type is set to other than [Printed Image] or [Photo] for scanning or copying, this adjustment is

applied.

Scan Settings(P. 266) / Additional Copying Features(P. 317)

Use the oper

ation panel to perform adjustment. You cannot perform adjustment using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Black Text Processing

for Color].

In [Feeder] or [Platen Glass], perform adjustment with priority given to reproducing

either color te

xt or black text.

When Giving Priority to Reproducing Color Text

ve the slider to [

] to make color text appear closer to the color of the original.

When Giving Priority to Visibility of Black Text

ve the slider to [

] to make black text easier to see.

Maintenance

617

Press [Apply].

Maintenance

618

Adjusting the Print Position

84CU-07E

If te

xt or images are printed off-center or outside of the printable range, you can adjust the print position to improve

printing results.

You can specify the adjustment direction and width for each paper source and print side (front and back side).

Use the operation panel to perform adjustment. You cannot perform adjustment using Remote UI from a computer.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Adjust Print Position].

➠ The [Adjust Print Position] scr

een is displayed.

Select the paper source for which you want to adjust the print position.

Select a combination of the adjustment direction and print side.

Example:

When adjusting the print position of the front side of the paper in the vertical direction

Select [Adjust Vertically (Front Side)].

Enter the adjustment value, and press [Apply].

Specify the adjustment direction using + and -, and specify the adjustment width in units of 0.01" (0.1 mm).

Maintenance

619

When Adjusting Vertically

Specify the adjustment width b

y selecting a positive value to adjust down on the paper or a negative value to

adjust up on the paper.

When Adjusting Horizontally

Specify the adjustment width b

y selecting a positive value to adjust to the right on the paper or a negative

value to adjust to the left on the paper.

Maintenance

620

Moving the Machine

84CU-07F

The machine is a heavy object. When mo

ving the machine for cleaning or to change locations, be sure to perform the

procedure below to prevent injury, accident, or damage to the machine.

● If the machine is to be tr

ansported for relocation, removals, etc., take the following steps to prevent damage

and faults during transportation:

- Remove the toner cartridges.

- Securely pack the machine in the original packaging (box) and packing materials.

Turn OFF the machine.

Turning OFF the Machine(P. 101)

Turning OFF the machine deletes any data waiting to be printed.

Unplug the power cord in the order shown.

Unplug all cables and cords connected to the machine.

* The number of connected cables and cords varies depending on the usage environment.

When moving the machine a long distance, remove the toner cartridges to prevent

spilling of toner.

Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 605)

Pull out the paper drawer, and remove it while lifting the front side.

Maintenance

621

Close the front cover, multi-purpose tray, and any other covers or trays.

Grab the lift handles, and lift up the machine to move it.

● The machine is a heavy object. The machine should be carried b

y at least 2 people. For the dimensions and

weight of the machine, see the basic specications.

Basic Specications(P

. 25)

● When the optional Paper Feeder PF-K is installed, remove it and move it separately, rather than lifting it with

the machine.

Gently lower the machine.

For the installation procedure after moving, see "Setup Guide."

Manuals of the Machine(P. 731)

Maintenance

622

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................

625

Paper Jams ......................................................................................................................................................... 626

Paper Jams in the Output Tray and Rear Side ............................................................................................... 628

Paper Jams in a Paper Source ....................................................................................................................... 630

Paper Jams in the Feeder .............................................................................................................................. 633

Paper Jams That Occur Repeatedly ............................................................................................................... 634

Problems with Printing Results ........................................................................................................................ 636

Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear .......................................................................................................... 638

Streaks Appear ............................................................................................................................................. 639

Printing Is Uneven ........................................................................................................................................ 641

Printed Paper Is Blank .................................................................................................................................. 643

Smudge Marks Appear on the Edge of Printouts .......................................................................................... 644

Text or Images Are Blurry ............................................................................................................................. 645

Printouts Have Ghost Images ....................................................................................................................... 646

Printouts Are Faded ...................................................................................................................................... 647

The Edge of the Page Is Not Printed ............................................................................................................. 649

Colors or Stains Appear on the Background of Printouts .............................................................................. 650

White Spots Appear ...................................................................................................................................... 651

Smudge Marks Appear on the Back Side of Printouts ................................................................................... 653

Printouts Are Skewed ................................................................................................................................... 654

Paper and Paper Feeding Problems ................................................................................................................. 655

Paper Creases ............................................................................................................................................... 656

Paper Curls ................................................................................................................................................... 657

Paper Is Not Fed or Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together .......................................................................... 658

Paper Drawer Does Not Fit in the Machine ................................................................................................... 659

Setting Up .......................................................................................................................................................... 660

The Machine Connected via WSD Port Is Not Displayed During Driver Installation ...................................... 661

Cannot Connect to Wireless LAN .................................................................................................................. 662

Network ............................................................................................................................................................. 663

Cannot Switch to Wireless LAN ..................................................................................................................... 664

Cannot Find the Print Server to Connect to .................................................................................................. 665

Cannot Connect to a Shared Printer ............................................................................................................. 666

Cannot Find the IP Address of the Machine .................................................................................................. 667

AirPrint Does Not Work ................................................................................................................................ 668

Troubleshooting

623

Printing and Copying ........................................................................................................................................

669

Cannot Print or Copy .................................................................................................................................... 670

Cannot Print (Wireless LAN) ................................................................................................................... 671

Cannot Print (Wired LAN) ....................................................................................................................... 673

Cannot Print (USB Connection) .............................................................................................................. 674

Cannot Print (via Print Server) ................................................................................................................ 675

Printing Is Slow ............................................................................................................................................. 676

Scanning ............................................................................................................................................................ 677

Cannot Save Scanned Data to a Computer ................................................................................................... 678

Cannot Save Scanned Data to a Shared Folder ............................................................................................. 680

Faxing and Using the Telephone ...................................................................................................................... 682

Cannot Send a Fax ........................................................................................................................................ 683

Cannot Receive a Fax .................................................................................................................................... 685

Machine Does Not Automatically Switch Between Telephone and Fax ......................................................... 687

Cannot Send or Receive a Fax via Optical Line .............................................................................................. 688

Cannot Send a Fax to an International Destination ...................................................................................... 689

Other Party's Telephone or Fax Number Is Not Displayed ............................................................................ 690

Management Functions and Environment Settings ....................................................................................... 691

Cannot Access Remote UI or Send Function Setting Tool ............................................................................. 692

Changing the Volume of the Conrmation Sound and Warning Tone .......................................................... 693

Changing the Time Until Sleep Mode ........................................................................................................... 694

Lost Department ID or PIN for the Administrator ......................................................................................... 695

Checking the Items That Can Be Congured on the Machine and Their Settings ......................................... 696

A Message Appears ........................................................................................................................................... 697

An Error Code Is Displayed ................................................................................................................................ 717

If the Problem Persists ...................................................................................................................................... 728

Troubleshooting

624

Troubleshooting

84CU-0L8

This chapter describes ho

w to troubleshoot problems and answers frequently asked questions.

Select an item to check from the contents or the list below.

You can click [

] at the top of the screen to search for the message or error code (three-digit number starting with #)

that appears on the oper

ation panel, and check how to troubleshoot problems.

◼ Frequently Asked Questions

Lost Department ID or PIN for the Administrator(P. 695)

Cannot Print or Copy(P. 670)

Cannot Send or Receive a Fax via Optical Line(P. 688)

[The memory is full.] Is Displayed on the Operation Panel, and the Operation Cannot Be Performed.(P. 715)

Error Code "#801" Is Displayed(P. 722)

◼ Fr

equently Asked Questions about Operations

I Want to Scan an Original.

Make preparations according to the scanned data save destination and sending method, and then scan the

original.

Scanning(P. 235)

I W

ant to Send Scanned Data by E-mail.

You can scan an original and send the scanned data by e-mail as an attachment.

Scanning (Sending by E-mail)(P. 256)

I W

ant to Forward a Received Fax.

Congure the settings to automatically forward received faxes to a computer or other fax machine.

Auto Forwarding and Backing Up Received Faxes(P. 286)

I W

ant to Send a Fax from a Computer.

You can send a document as a fax from a computer using a fax driver.

Sending Faxes from a Computer (PC Faxing)(P. 293)

I W

ant to Print on an Envelope.

Place the envelope in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray while paying attention to the orientation and

side of the envelope.

Then, set the paper size and type according to the placed envelope.

Next, use the print driver of the computer to set the paper size of the document and the paper size to print,

and then perform printing.

Preparations and Orientation for Loading Envelopes(P. 140)

Specifying the Paper Size and Type(P. 144)

Printing from a Computer(P. 210)

Troubleshooting

625

Paper Jams

84CU-0L9

If paper jams in the machine, [Paper jammed.] appears on oper

ation panel. Press [Next], and follow the displayed

instructions on how to clear the paper jam.

For details about clearing paper jams from various parts of the machine, see below.

Multi-purpose tray and paper drawer

Paper Jams in a Paper Source(P. 630)

Output tray and rear side

Paper Jams in the Output Tray and Rear Side(P. 628)

Feeder

Paper Jams in the Feeder(P. 633)

Do not forcibly remove the jammed paper from the machine.

● For

cibly removing the paper may result in personal injury or damage parts of the machine. If you cannot

remove the paper, contact your dealer or service representative.

If the Problem Persists(P. 728)

When All Paper Jams Have Been Clear

● Immediately remove your hands from the machine and optional equipment so that your clothing and hands

do not get caught in the rollers.

Troubleshooting

626

When clearing paper jams, do not turn the power OFF.

● Data being printed is er

ased when you turn the power OFF.

When the Paper Gets Torn

● Be sure to remove it so that no pieces remain.

Troubleshooting

627

Paper Jams in the Output Tray and Rear Side

84CU-0LA

Use the pr

ocedure below to check the output tray and rear side, and to remove any jammed paper. If the paper tears,

be sure to remove the parts so that no pieces remain.

Gently pull the paper out of the output tray.

Open the rear cover.

Gently pull out the paper.

Lift the 2-sided unit.

Gently pull out the paper.

Troubleshooting

628

Close the rear cover.

➠ The message [Paper jammed.] disappears, and printing r

esumes automatically.

If printing does not resume automatically, try printing again.

If Paper Jams Occur Repeatedly

● Check the status of the machine and paper. Paper Jams That Occur Repeatedly(P. 634)

Troubleshooting

629

Paper Jams in a Paper Source

84CU-0LC

Remo

ve the jammed paper from the location where it occurred. If the paper tears, be sure to remove the parts so that

no pieces remain.

Paper Jams in the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 630)

Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer(P. 632)

Paper Jams in the Multi-purpose Tray

Remove the jammed paper from the multi-purpose tray or inside the machine.

If you cannot remove the paper, do not try to remove it forcibly. Check the operation panel, and remove the jammed

paper from another location.

If there is other paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray, remove that paper.

Remove the paper jammed in the multi-purpose tray.

Gently pull out the paper.

Close the multi-purpose tray.

Remove the paper jammed inside the machine.

Pull out the paper drawer, and remove it while lifting the front side.

Troubleshooting

630

Press the green button.

➠ The tr

ansport guide lowers.

Gently pull out the paper.

Push in the transport guide.

Push it in rmly until you hear a click.

Load the paper drawer into the machine.

Press [Next] on the operation panel. When [Is all of the jammed paper removed?]

appears, pr

ess [Yes].

➠ The message [Paper jammed.] disappears, and printing r

esumes automatically.

If printing does not resume automatically, try printing again.

If the Troubleshooting Method for the Output Tray Appears on the Screen

Remo

ve the jammed paper from the output tray or rear side.

Paper Jams in the Output Tray and Rear

Side(P

. 628)

Troubleshooting

631

If Paper Jams Occur Repeatedly

● Check the status of the machine and paper. Paper Jams That Occur Repeatedly(P. 634)

Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer

Remo

ve the paper loaded in the paper drawer.

If you cannot remove the paper, do not try to remove it forcibly. Check the operation panel, and remove the jammed

paper from another location.

Pull out the paper drawer, and remove it while lifting the front side.

Gently pull out the paper.

Load the paper drawer into the machine.

If the optional Paper Feeder PF-K is installed, remove the paper while following 1 to 3

abo

ve.

Press [Next] on the operation panel. When [Is all of the jammed paper removed?]

appears, pr

ess [Yes].

➠ The message [Paper jammed.] disappears, and printing resumes automatically.

If printing does not resume automatically, try printing again.

If Paper Jams Occur Repeatedly

● Check the status of the machine and paper. Paper Jams That Occur Repeatedly(P. 634)

Troubleshooting

632

Paper Jams in the Feeder

84CU-0LE

Remo

ve the original jammed inside or at the rear side of the feeder. If the original tears, be sure to remove the parts

so that no pieces remain.

If another original is placed in the feeder, remove that original.

Remove the original jammed inside the feeder.

Open the feeder cover.

Gently pull out the original.

Close the feeder cover.

Place the original in the feeder again.

➠ The message [Paper jammed.] disappears, and you can scan the original.

Jobs in which an original jammed ar

e canceled automatically. The job does not resume even if you place

the original again, so execute the job again.

If Paper Jams Occur Repeatedly

● Check the status of the machine and original. Paper Jams That Occur Repeatedly(P. 634)

Troubleshooting

633

Paper Jams That Occur Repeatedly

84CU-0LF

roubleshoot by checking the items below.

Are There Paper Scraps or Foreign Objects Inside the Machine?

Remove any paper scraps or foreign objects. Paper Jams(P. 626)

e You Using Appropriate Paper?

Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

Is Paper Loaded Corr

ectly?

● Fan the paper thor

oughly in small batches so that it is not stuck together.

● Align the edges by tapping the paper on a at surface a few times before loading the paper.

Paper(P

. 131)

● Make sure the loaded paper does not exceed the load limit line (

Paper Drawer

Multi-purpose Tray

● Check that the paper guides ar

e aligned with the markings and are not too loose or too tight.

Paper Drawer

Multi-purpose Tray

Do Paper Jams Occur When Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper?

Flatten the edges of the paper to thoroughly remove any curls.

* When printing on the back side of printed paper, you can only use paper printed with this machine. Do not

use paper printed with another printer or multifunction machine, as this can cause paper jams or damage the

machine.

Does This Occur When Printing Continuously

If so, setting [Correct Paper Conveyance] to [On] may reduce the frequency of paper jams.

Troubleshooting

634

On the [Home] screen of the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image

Quality] [Special Processing] [Correct Paper Conveyance] [On]

* When you select [On], the printing speed may decrease.

Do Paper Jams Occur When Printing on Paper in the Optional Paper Feeder PF-K?

Reinstall Paper Feeder PF-K. For details about installing Paper Feeder PF-K, see "Setup Guide." Manuals of

the Machine(P

. 731)

Troubleshooting

635

Problems with Printing Results

84CU-0LH

If printouts sho

w any of the symptoms below, check how to troubleshoot the problem based on the symptom.

Toner Smudges and Splatters

Appear

(P. 638)

Streaks Appear(P. 639) Printing Is Uneven(P. 641)

Printed Paper Is Blank(P. 643) Smudge Marks Appear on the

Edge of Printouts(P

. 644)

Text or Images Are

Blurry(P

. 645)

Printouts Have Ghost

Images(P

. 646)

Printouts Are Faded(P. 647) The Edge of the Page Is Not

Printed(P

. 649)

Troubleshooting

636

Colors or Stains Appear on the

Backgr

ound of Printouts(P. 650)

White Spots Appear(P. 651) Smudge Marks Appear on the

Back Side of Printouts(P

. 653)

Printouts Are Skewed(P. 654)

Troubleshooting

637

Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear

84CU-0LJ

roubleshoot by checking in the following order:

Step 1: Checking the Paper(P. 638)

Step 2: Checking the Toner Cartridges(P. 638)

Step 3: Checking the Originals(P. 638)

Step 4: Checking the Maintenance Status(P. 638)

Step 1: Checking the Paper

Are You Using Appropriate Paper?

Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

Step 2: Checking the Toner Cartridges

Check the Remaining Amount of Toner in the Toner Cartridges.

Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges, and replace any toner cartridges, as needed.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 607)

Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 602)

* Depending on the usage condition of the machine, the actual r

emaining amount of toner may be lower than

indicated or the parts may be deteriorated. If the condition persists even after replacing the toner cartridge

indicated to have a low amount of toner, it is recommended to replace the other toner cartridges as well.

Step 3: Checking the Originals

e You Copying an Original with a Colored or Stained Background or an Original with

Text or Images Showing Through the Back Side?

Adjusting the density of the background may solve the problem.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Copy] [Density] [Adjust Background Density] [Adjust

(Manual)] adjust the background density.

* Press [Density by Color] to adjust the density of the background by color.

* Parts other than the backgr

ound may also be affected depending on the color of the original.

Step 4: Checking the Maintenance Status

Have You Cleaned the Fixing Assembly?

These symptoms may occur when the xing assembly is dirty

. In this case, clean the xing assembly.

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 599)

Have Y

ou Cleaned the Transfer Belt?

These symptoms may occur when the transfer belt is dirty. In this case, clean the transfer belt. Cleaning the

ransfer Belt(P. 600)

Troubleshooting

638

Streaks Appear

84CU-0LK

roubleshoot by checking in the following order:

Step 1: Checking the Paper(P. 639)

Step 2: Checking the Platen Glass(P. 639)

Step 3: Checking the Toner Cartridges(P. 639)

Step 4: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine(P. 639)

Step 5: Checking the Maintenance Status(P. 640)

Step 1: Checking the Paper

Are You Using Appropriate Paper?

Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

Step 2: Checking the Platen Glass

Is the Platen Glass Dirty?

Clean the platen glass or rear side of the feeder if dirty.

Cleaning the Platen Glass(P. 595)

Cleaning the Feeder(P. 596)

Step 3: Checking the Toner Cartridges

Check the Remaining Amount of Toner in the Toner Cartridges.

Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges, and replace any toner cartridges, as needed.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 607)

Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 602)

* Depending on the usage condition of the machine, the actual r

emaining amount of toner may be lower than

indicated or the parts may be deteriorated. If the condition persists even after replacing the toner cartridge

indicated to have a low amount of toner, it is recommended to replace the other toner cartridges as well.

Step 4: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine

e You Using the Machine in an Environment with Sudden Temperature Changes?

Sudden temperature changes can create condensation, which can result in faded or blurry images and text.

Setting [Contr

ol Condensation] to [On] may solve the problem.

[Home] on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance] [Control

Condensation] [On]

* During condensation removal, a blank sheet of paper may be output without being printed correctly. If you

set this to [On], you can set whether to r

estrict printing.

* If you set this to [On], you must keep the machine ON to continuously remove the condensation. The Auto

Shutdown Time setting is disabled.

Troubleshooting

639

Is the Machine Installed in a Location Subject to Strong Wind Such as from an Air

Conditioner?

If so, adjust the air direction and volume of the air conditioner.

If that does not work, setting [Switch Paper Feed Method] to [Print Side Priority] may impr

ove the problem.

[Home] on the operation panel [Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Paper Feed Settings]

[Switch Paper Feed Method] [Print Side Priority]

* When you select [Print Side Priority], the printing speed for 1-Sided printing will decrease.

Step 5: Checking the Maintenance Status

Have You Cleaned the Fixing Assembly?

These symptoms may occur when the xing assembly is dirty

. In this case, clean the xing assembly.

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 599)

Have Y

ou Cleaned the Transfer Belt?

These symptoms may occur when the transfer belt is dirty. In this case, clean the transfer belt. Cleaning the

ransfer Belt(P. 600)

Troubleshooting

640

Printing Is Uneven

84CU-0U4

roubleshoot by checking in the following order:

Step 1: Checking the Paper(P. 641)

Step 2: Checking the Toner Cartridges(P. 641)

Step 3: Adjusting the Print Quality(P. 641)

Step 4: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine(P. 642)

Step 5: Checking Whether Uneven Gloss Occur at the Edges of Printed Paper(P. 642)

Step 1: Checking the Paper

Are You Using Appropriate Paper?

Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

e You Using Rough Paper?

If you are using paper with a rough surface, printed images may appear faint, particularly where the images

use two or mor

e toner colors overlaid. If so, specifying [On] for the paper source may improve the print results.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing] [Special Paper Processing] [Rough Surface Paper Mode] [On]

* Specifying [On] in this setting may lead to slower print speeds or changes in the image quality.

Step 2: Checking the Toner Cartridges

Check the Remaining Amount of Toner in the Toner Cartridges.

Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges, and replace any toner cartridges, as needed.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 607)

Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 602)

* Depending on the usage condition of the machine, the actual r

emaining amount of toner may be lower than

indicated or the parts may be deteriorated. If the condition persists even after replacing the toner cartridge

indicated to have a low amount of toner, it is recommended to replace the other toner cartridges as well.

Step 3: Adjusting the Print Quality

ry Correcting Print Fading.

Setting [Prevent Print Fading/Misalign.] to [On] may improve the problem.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing] [Prevent Print Fading/Misalign.] [On]

* When you select [On], the printing speed may decrease.

Troubleshooting

641

Step 4: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine

Are You Using the Machine in a Humid Environment?

Setting [High Humidity Mode] to [On] may solve the problem.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing] [High Humidity Mode] [On]

* Setting this to [On] may blur images and text in an environment with low humidity.

e You Using the Machine in an Environment with Sudden Temperature Changes?

Sudden temperature changes can create condensation, which can result in faded or blurry images and text.

Setting [Contr

ol Condensation] to [On] may solve the problem.

[Home] on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance] [Control

Condensation] [On]

* During condensation removal, a blank sheet of paper may be output without being printed correctly. If you

set this to [On], you can set whether to r

estrict printing.

* If you set this to [On], you must keep the machine ON to continuously remove the condensation. The Auto

Shutdown Time setting is disabled.

Is the Machine Installed in a Location Subject to Strong Wind Such as from an Air

Conditioner?

If so, adjust the air direction and volume of the air conditioner.

If that does not work, setting [Switch Paper Feed Method] to [Print Side Priority] may impr

ove the problem.

[Home] on the operation panel [Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Paper Feed Settings]

[Switch Paper Feed Method] [Print Side Priority]

* When you select [Print Side Priority], the printing speed for 1-Sided printing will decrease.

Step 5: Checking Whether Uneven Gloss Occur at the Edges of Printed Paper

Does Une

ven Gloss Occur at the Edges of Printed Paper?

Setting [Correct Uneven Gloss] to [On] may solve the problem.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing] [Correct Uneven Gloss] [On]

* When you select [On], the printouts may be faded.

Troubleshooting

642

Printed Paper Is Blank

84CU-0LL

roubleshoot by checking the following steps:

Step 1: Checking the Original (Copying Only)(P. 643)

Step 2: Checking the Status of the Machine(P. 643)

Step 1: Checking the Original (Copying Only)

Is Original Placed Correctly?

Place the original correctly while paying attention to the orientation of the side to be scanned.

When Placing It on the Platen Glass

Place the original with the side to be scanned face do

wn.

Placing Originals on the Platen Glass(P. 128)

When Placing Originals in the Feeder

Place the original with the side to be scanned face up. Placing Originals in the Feeder(P. 129)

Step 2: Checking the Status of the Machine

Is Condensation Removal Being Performed?

Check the operation panel, and wait for condensation removal to nish.

Troubleshooting

643

Smudge Marks Appear on the Edge of Printouts

84CU-0LR

roubleshoot by checking in the following order:

Are You Using Appropriate Paper?

● Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and r

eplace it with appropriate paper, as needed.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

e You Printing to the Edge of the Paper Without Margins?

This symptom may occur when the margin is set to none in the printer driver. To print with this machine, a

mar

gin of 1/4" (5 mm) (3/8" (10 mm) at the top and bottom of an envelope) is required.

On the [Printing preferences] screen of the printer driver, congure the following setting to provide a margin.

[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]

Have You Cleaned the Fixing Assembly?

These symptoms may occur when the xing assembly is dirty

. In this case, clean the xing assembly.

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 599)

Have Y

ou Cleaned the Transfer Belt?

These symptoms may occur when the transfer belt is dirty. In this case, clean the transfer belt. Cleaning the

ransfer Belt(P. 600)

Troubleshooting

644

Text or Images Are Blurry

84CU-0LS

roubleshoot by checking the following steps:

Step 1: Checking the Paper(P. 645)

Step 2: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine(P. 645)

Step 1: Checking the Paper

Are You Using Appropriate Paper?

Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

Step 2: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine

Are You Using the Machine in an Environment with Sudden Temperature Changes?

Sudden temperature changes can create condensation, which can result in faded or blurry images and text.

Setting [Contr

ol Condensation] to [On] may solve the problem.

[Home] on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance] [Control

Condensation] [On]

* During condensation removal, a blank sheet of paper may be output without being printed correctly. If you

set this to [On], you can set whether to r

estrict printing.

* If you set this to [On], you must keep the machine ON to continuously remove the condensation. The

automatic shutdown setting is disabled.

Are You Using the Machine in an Environment with Low Humidity?

Setting [Low Humidity Mode] to [On] may solve the problem.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing] [Low Humidity Mode] [On]

* Setting this to [On] may reduce the density or create fading in a humid environment.

e You Using the Machine in a Humid Environment?

Setting [High Humidity Mode] to [On] may solve the problem.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing] [High Humidity Mode] [On]

* Setting this to [On] may blur images and text in an environment with low humidity.

Troubleshooting

645

Printouts Have Ghost Images

84CU-0LU

roubleshoot by checking the following steps:

Step 1: Checking the Paper and Toner Cartridges(P. 646)

Step 2: Checking the Occurrence of Ghost Images(P. 646)

Step 3: Checking the Maintenance Status of the Machine(P. 646)

Step 4: Checking the Special Processing Setting(P. 646)

Step 1: Checking the Paper and Toner Cartridges

Are You Using Appropriate Paper?

Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

Have the T

oner Cartridges Reached the End of Their Lifetime?

Parts inside the toner cartridges may have deteriorated. If this symptom occurs, it is recommended to replace

the toner cartridges r

egardless of the remaining amount of toner or messages displayed.

Replacing the

oner Cartridges(P. 602)

Step 2: Checking the Occurrence of Ghost Images

Do Ghost Images Appear with Streaks?

Setting [Reduce Ghosting] to [On] may solve the problem.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing] [Reduce Ghosting] [On]

* When you select [On], the printing speed may decrease.

Step 3: Checking the Maintenance Status of the Machine

Have Y

ou Cleaned the Fixing Assembly?

These symptoms may occur when the xing assembly is dirty

. In this case, clean the xing assembly.

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 599)

Step 4: Checking the Special Processing Setting

Is [Reduce Toner Flaking] Enabled?

If so, setting [Reduce Toner Flaking] to [Off] may improve the problem.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing] [Reduce Toner Flaking] [Off]

Troubleshooting

646

Printouts Are Faded

84CU-0LW

roubleshoot by checking the following steps:

Step 1: Checking the Paper and Toner Cartridges(P. 647)

Step 2: Adjusting the Print Quality(P. 647)

Step 3: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine(P. 647)

Step4: Checking the Special Processing Setting(P. 648)

Step 1: Checking the Paper and Toner Cartridges

Are You Using Appropriate Paper?

● Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and r

eplace it with appropriate paper, as needed.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

● Set the paper size and type corr

ectly according to the loaded paper.

Specifying the Paper Size and

ype(P. 144)

Does the Printed Toner Flake Off Depending on Paper Type or Usage Environment?

If so, setting [Reduce Toner Flaking] to [Mode 1] may improve the problem. If that does not work, select [Mode

2].

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing] [Reduce Toner Flaking] [Mode 1] or [Mode 2]

* When this setting is enabled, ghost images may appear in unprinted areas.

Have the T

oner Cartridges Reached the End of Their Lifetime?

Parts inside the toner cartridges may have deteriorated. If this symptom occurs, it is recommended to replace

the toner cartridges r

egardless of the remaining amount of toner or messages displayed.

Replacing the

oner Cartridges(P. 602)

Step 2: Adjusting the Print Quality

Are Images Shifted or Is Printing Faded Frequently?

Setting [Prevent Print Fading/Misalign.] to [On] may improve the problem.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing] [Prevent Print Fading/Misalign.] [On]

* When you select [On], the printing speed may decrease.

Step 3: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine

e You Using the Machine in an Environment with Sudden Temperature Changes?

Sudden temperature changes can create condensation, which can result in faded or blurry images and text.

Setting [Contr

ol Condensation] to [On] may solve the problem.

Troubleshooting

647

[Home] on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance] [Control

Condensation] [On]

* During condensation removal, a blank sheet of paper may be output without being printed correctly. If you

set this to [On], you can set whether to r

estrict printing.

* If you set this to [On], you must keep the machine ON to continuously remove the condensation. The

automatic shutdown setting is disabled.

Is the Machine Installed in a Location Subject to Strong Wind Such as from an Air

Conditioner?

If so, adjust the air direction and volume of the air conditioner.

If that does not work, setting [Switch Paper Feed Method] to [Print Side Priority] may impr

ove the problem.

[Home] on the operation panel [Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Paper Feed Settings]

[Switch Paper Feed Method] [Print Side Priority]

* When you select [Print Side Priority], the printing speed for 1-Sided printing will decrease.

Step4: Checking the Special Processing Setting

Is [Special Processing] Enabled?

If so, setting [Special Processing] below to [Off] may improve the problem. [Special Processing](P. 495)

● [Env

. Flap Closing Prevention]

● [Paper Curl Correction]

● [Rdc Condens. (Consec 2-Sd Prt)]

● [Correct Uneven Gloss]

● [Correct Void]

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing]

Troubleshooting

648

The Edge of the Page Is Not Printed

84CU-0LX

roubleshoot by checking in the following order:

Are You Using Appropriate Paper?

Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

e the Paper Guides Correctly Aligned with the Paper?

Paper guides that are aligned but too loose or too tight can cause part of the page to not be printed. Check the

paper guides, and align them with the width of the paper. Loading Paper(P. 131)

e You Printing to the Edge of the Paper Without Margins?

This symptom may occur when the margin is set to none in the printer driver. To print with this machine, a

mar

gin of 1/4" (5 mm) (3/8" (10 mm) at the top and bottom of an envelope) is required.

On the [Printing preferences] screen of the printer driver, congure the following setting to provide a margin.

[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]

Troubleshooting

649

Colors or Stains Appear on the Background of Printouts

84CU-0LY

roubleshoot by checking in the following order:

Are White Areas Lightly Colored?

Setting [Prevent Fogging] to [Mode 1] may solve the problem. If that does not work, set the item to [Mode 2]

and [Mode 3] in that or

der.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing] [Prevent Fogging] select the mode.

* When this setting is enabled, the print density may decrease.

Check the Remaining Amount of T

oner in the Toner Cartridges.

Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges, and replace any toner cartridges, as needed.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 607)

Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 602)

* Depending on the usage condition of the machine, the actual r

emaining amount of toner may be lower than

indicated or the parts maybe deteriorated. If the condition persists even after replacing the toner cartridge

indicated to have a low amount of toner, it is recommended to replace the other toner cartridges as well.

Troubleshooting

650

White Spots Appear

84CU-0R0

roubleshoot by checking the following steps:

Step 1: Checking the Paper(P. 651)

Step 2: Checking the Toner Cartridges(P. 651)

Step 3: Checking the Occurrence of White Spots(P. 651)

Step 4: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine(P. 651)

Step 1: Checking the Paper

Are You Using Appropriate Paper?

Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

e You Using Paper That Has Absorbed Moisture?

Check the precautions, and replace the paper with dry paper.

Precautions When Handling Paper(P. 23)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

Step 2: Checking the Toner Cartridges

Check the Remaining Amount of Toner in the Toner Cartridges.

Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges, and replace any toner cartridges, as needed.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 607)

Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 602)

* Depending on the usage condition of the machine, the actual r

emaining amount of toner may be lower than

indicated or the parts may be deteriorated. If the condition persists even after replacing the toner cartridge

indicated to have a low amount of toner, it is recommended to replace the other toner cartridges as well.

Step 3: Checking the Occurrence of White Spots

Do White Spots Occur on the Leading Edge of the Paper?

This symptom may occur when printing on thin paper. Setting [Correct Void] to [On] may solve the problem.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing] [Correct Void] [On]

* When you select [On], the printouts may be faded.

Step 4: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine

Are You Using the Machine in an Environment with Sudden Temperature Changes?

Sudden temperature changes can create condensation, which can result in faded or blurry images and text.

Setting [Contr

ol Condensation] to [On] may solve the problem.

Troubleshooting

651

[Home] on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance] [Control

Condensation] [On]

* During condensation removal, a blank sheet of paper may be output without being printed correctly. If you

set this to [On], you can set whether to r

estrict printing.

* If you set this to [On], you must keep the machine ON to continuously remove the condensation. The

automatic shutdown setting is disabled.

Does the Printed Toner Flake Off Depending on Paper Type or Usage Environment?

If so, setting [Reduce Toner Flaking] to [Mode 1] may improve the problem. If that does not work, select [Mode

2].

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing] [Reduce Toner Flaking] [Mode 1] or [Mode 2]

* When this setting is enabled, ghost images may appear in unprinted areas.

e You Using the Machine in an Environment with Low Humidity?

Setting [Low Humidity Mode] to [On] may solve the problem.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing] [Low Humidity Mode] [On]

* Setting this to [On] may reduce the density or create fading in a humid environment.

Troubleshooting

652

Smudge Marks Appear on the Back Side of Printouts

84CU-0R2

roubleshoot by checking in the following order:

Are You Using Paper That Is Smaller Than the Size of the Print Data?

Replace with paper that is the same size as the print data. Loading Paper(P. 131)

Have Y

ou Cleaned the Fixing Assembly?

These symptoms may occur when the xing assembly is dirty

. In this case, clean the xing assembly.

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 599)

Have Y

ou Cleaned the Transfer Belt?

These symptoms may occur when the transfer belt is dirty. In this case, clean the transfer belt. Cleaning the

ransfer Belt(P. 600)

Troubleshooting

653

Printouts Are Skewed

84CU-0R3

This symptom may occur when the paper guides ar

e aligned but too loose or too tight. Check the paper guides, and

align them with the width of the paper.

Loading Paper(P. 131)

Paper Drawer

Multi-purpose Tray

Troubleshooting

654

Paper and Paper Feeding Problems

84CU-0R4

Check ho

w to troubleshoot the problem based on the symptom.

Paper Creases(P. 656)

Paper Curls(P. 657)

Paper Is Not Fed or Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together(P. 658)

Paper Drawer Does Not Fit in the Machine(P. 659)

Troubleshooting

655

Paper Creases

84CU-0R5

roubleshoot by checking the items below.

Is Paper Loaded Correctly?

● Mak

e sure the loaded paper does not exceed the load limit line (

Paper Drawer

Multi-purpose Tray

● Check that the paper guides ar

e aligned with the markings and are not too loose or too tight.

Paper Drawer

Multi-purpose Tray

Are You Using Paper That Has Absorbed Moisture?

Check the precautions, and replace the paper with dry paper.

Precautions When Handling Paper(P. 23)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

e You Using Appropriate Paper?

Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

Troubleshooting

656

Paper Curls

84CU-0R6

roubleshoot by checking the items below.

Are You Using Appropriate Paper?

● Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and r

eplace it with appropriate paper, as needed.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

● Set the paper size and type corr

ectly according to the loaded paper.

Specifying the Paper Size and

ype(P. 144)

● Setting [Paper Curl Correction] to [On] may improve the problem.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]

[Special Processing] [Special Paper Processing] [Paper Curl Correction] [On]

* When you select [On], this may result in faded printouts and slower printing speeds.

● Setting [Switch Paper Feed Method] to [Print Side Priority] may impr

ove the problem.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Paper Feed

Settings] [Switch Paper Feed Method] [Print Side Priority]

* When you select [Print Side Priority], the printing speed for 1-Sided printing will decrease.

● Load the paper with the side to be printed (paper fr

ont and back) reversed.

* In rare cases, the symptom may worsen depending on the paper used. In this case, print on the original

side of the paper.

Are You Using Paper That Has Absorbed Moisture?

Try the following in the order below:

● Check the pr

ecautions, and replace the paper with dry paper.

Precautions When Handling Paper(P. 23)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

● Change the paper type setting to a thinner paper. Specifying the Paper Size and Type(P. 144)

Troubleshooting

657

Paper Is Not Fed or Two or More Sheets Are Fed

ogether

84CU-0R7

roubleshoot by checking the items below.

Are You Using Appropriate Paper?

Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

Is Paper Loaded Corr

ectly?

● Fan the paper thor

oughly in small batches so that it is not stuck together.

● Align the edges by tapping the paper on a at surface a few times before loading the paper.

Paper(P

. 131)

● Do not load paper of different sizes or types together.

Troubleshooting

658

Paper Drawer Does Not Fit in the Machine

84CU-0R8

The paper dr

awer may be extended.

When you are using paper of A4 size or smaller, decrease the size of the paper drawer while pressing the lock release

lever.

* When you are using paper that is longer than A4 size, the paper drawer is extended from the machine and is not

fully housed.

Troubleshooting

659

Setting Up

84CU-0R9

This is a list of pr

oblems that can occur during setup of the machine. Check how to troubleshoot the problem based on

the symptom.

◼ Problems During Driver Installation

The Machine Connected via WSD Port Is Not Displayed During Driver Installation(P. 661)

◼ Pr

oblems with Wireless LAN and Wired LAN Connection

Cannot Connect to Wireless LAN

Check whether the machine can connect to the network.

Cannot Connect to Wireless LAN(P. 662)

Cannot Connect to Wir

ed LAN

The IP address setting may have failed. Set the IP address again.

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 67)

Cannot Connect to Wir

eless LAN and Wired LAN at the Same Time

You cannot connect the machine to a wireless LAN and wired LAN at the same time. You can connect to USB

and wireless LAN or USB and wired LAN at the same time.

◼ Problems with USB Connection

The Computer Cannot Communicate with the Machine

Try the following:

● Replace the USB cable. If the USB cable is long, replace it with a short cable.

● If you are using a USB hub, connect the machine directly to the computer using a USB cable.

Troubleshooting

660

The Machine Connected via WSD Port Is Not Displayed

During Driver Installation

84CU-0RA

roubleshoot by checking the items below.

Check the Settings of the Machine.

Congure the settings belo

w if they have not been congured.

The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

WSD Printing and Multicast Discovery Settings

Settings] [Edit] select the [Use WSD Printing] and [Use Multicast Discovery] checkboxes [OK] restart

the machine.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congur

e the

settings.

[WSD Settings](P. 483)

Selecting the Page Description Language

Select the page description language (PDL) of the installed driver.

(Plug and Play)] [Edit] select the PDL in [Network] [OK] restart the machine.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur

the settings.

[Network](P. 533)

Check the OS Network Settings.

Congure the settings belo

w if they have not been congured.

In Windows, click [ ] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Network & Internet] [Status] [Change connection

operties]

[Network pr

ole]

[Private]

Check Whether the Driver Is Installed.

Use the following procedure to check whether the driver of the machine is displayed.

In Windows, click [ ] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners] check whether the

driver is displayed.

If the driver is displayed, it is installed. In this case, uninstall the driver, and then reinstall it.

For details about uninstalling and installing drivers, see the driver manual at the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

Troubleshooting

661

Cannot Connect to Wireless LAN

84CU-0RC

roubleshoot by checking the status of the computer, wireless LAN router (access point), and machine with the steps

below.

Step 1: Checking the Status of the Computer and Wireless LAN Router(P. 662)

Step 2: Checking the Status of the Machine and Wireless LAN Router(P. 662)

Step 3: Reconnecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 662)

Step 1: Checking the Status of the Computer and Wireless LAN Router

Have You Congured the Settings of the Computer and Wireless LAN Router?

Congure the r

equired settings if they have not been congured.

Are the Power Cables and Ethernet Cable Connected Correctly?

If any cables are connected incorrectly or disconnected, connect them correctly.

Is the Po

wer of Wireless LAN Router On?

If you cannot establish a connection even if the power is on, turn off the power of the computer and router and

turn it on again.

Step 2: Checking the Status of the Machine and Wireless LAN Router

Is the Power of the Machine ON?

If the power is ON, turn OFF the power and turn it ON again.

Is the Location Appr

opriate?

● The machine and wir

eless LAN router should be installed in a location without walls or other obstructions

between the devices and within range of 164' (50 m).

● Do not install near a microwave oven, cordless telephone, or other device that generates radio waves.

Step 3: Reconnecting to a Wireless LAN

Connect to the wir

eless LAN using the connection type according to your wireless LAN router.

Connecting to a

Wir

eless LAN(P. 54)

Troubleshooting

662

Network

84CU-0RE

This is a list of pr

oblems that can occur with the network. Check how to troubleshoot the problem based on the

symptom.

Cannot Switch to Wireless LAN(P. 664)

Cannot Find the Print Server to Connect to(P. 665)

Cannot Connect to a Shared Printer(P. 666)

Cannot Find the IP Address of the Machine(P. 667)

AirPrint Does Not Work(P. 668)

Troubleshooting

663

Cannot Switch to Wireless LAN

84CU-0RF

Use the network settings to switch fr

om wired LAN connection to wireless LAN connection.

On the operation panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.

[Home] Screen(P. 111)

Press [Preferences] [Network] [Select Wired/Wireless LAN].

If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System

Manager ID and PIN(P

. 6)

Press [Wireless LAN].

➠ The message [Settings congur

ed.] appears.

Connect the machine to the wireless LAN.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 54)

Install the driver to the computer that will use the machine.

When switching the machine from wired LAN connection to wireless LAN connection, any installed drivers

must be uninstalled and then r

einstalled.

For details about uninstalling and installing drivers, see the driver manual at the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

Troubleshooting

664

Cannot Find the Print Server to Connect to

84CU-0RH

roubleshoot by checking the items below.

Are the Print Server and Computer Connected Correctly?

● Check the network settings of the print server and computer, and mak

e sure they are connected correctly.

● If they are connected using an Ethernet cable, make sure the cable is connected correctly.

Is the Print Server Started?

Start the print server if it has not been started.

e there Any Restrictions with Connecting to the Print Server?

Check with the administrator of the print server, and ask for permission, if needed.

Is Network Disco

very Enabled? (Windows)

Enable network discovery if not enabled. Enabling Network Discovery(P. 738)

Troubleshooting

665

Cannot Connect to a Shared Printer

84CU-0RJ

Check if a shar

ed printer is displayed on the network computer.

Displaying a Shared Printer in the Print

Server

(P. 738)

If it is not displayed, contact the network or print server administrator.

Troubleshooting

666

Cannot Find the IP Address of the Machine

84CU-0RK

Vie

w the IP address using the following procedure:

Viewing the IPv4 Address

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Status Monitor] [Network Information] [IPv4] view the

setting.

Viewing the IPv6 Address

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Status Monitor] [Network Information] [IPv6] view the

setting.

If the IP Address Is Displayed as "0.0.0.0"

● A suitable IP addr

ess is not set. Set the IP address again.

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 67)

Troubleshooting

667

AirPrint Does Not Work

84CU-0RL

roubleshoot by checking the items below.

Is the Power of the Machine ON?

If the machine is ON, restart the machine, and try AirPrint again. Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

Does an Err

or Message Appear on the Operation Panel?

Follow the instructions of the error message on the screen to x the pr

oblem.

A Message Appears(P. 697)

When Using a Mac, Is it Corr

ectly Connected to the Machine?

Connect the Mac to the network on the same LAN as the machine. Setting Up the Network(P. 50)

When connecting via USB

, directly connect the Mac to the USB port for computer connection on the back of the

machine with a USB cable.

Rear Side(P. 12)

e You Required to Enter the Department ID and PIN to Print from a Computer? (When

Using Department ID Management on the Machine)

If you are required to enter a Department ID and PIN to print from a computer, the machine blocks printing

om an unknown Department ID, so AirPrint cannot be used. To enable use of AirPrint, cancel blocking of

printing when the Department ID is unknown.

Enabling Department ID Management(P. 364)

Have the Functions Usable with AirPrint Been Restricted?

If the protocol (IPP or Network Link Scan) for use with AirPrint has been disabled to restrict functions, cancel

this r

estriction to enable the use of AirPrint.

Setting the Functions and Security to Be Used with

AirPrint(P

. 339)

Is Bonjour Enabled on Your Apple Device?

Enable Bonjour if it is not enabled. For details, see the manual of your Apple device.

Troubleshooting

668

Printing and Copying

84CU-0RR

This is a list of pr

oblems that can occur when printing and copying. Check how to troubleshoot the problem based on

the symptom.

Cannot Print or Copy(P. 670)

Printing Is Slow(P. 676)

◼ Pr

oblems with Printing Results

If the printing or copying results are not as expected, see the following:

Problems with Printing Results(P. 636)

◼ Fr

equently Asked Questions about Operations

I Want to Print on an Envelope.

Place the envelope in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray while paying attention to the orientation and

side of the envelope.

Then, set the paper size and type according to the placed envelope.

Next, use the printer driver of the computer to set the paper size of the document and the paper size to

print, and then perform printing.

Preparations and Orientation for Loading Envelopes(P. 140)

Specifying the Paper Size and Type(P. 144)

Printing from a Computer(P. 210)

Troubleshooting

669

Cannot Print or Copy

84CU-0RS

roubleshoot by checking the items below.

Has an Error Occurred?

Check the print or copy processing status and log, and if a three-digit number starting with "#" (error code) is

displayed, check ho

w to troubleshoot the problem based on the error code.

Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 233)

Checking the Copy Status and Log(P. 331)

An Error Code Is Displayed(P. 717)

Can Y

ou Print a Test Page?

If you can print a test page, check if the print settings of the application are correct.

Printing a Test Page(P. 744)

Check the Network Status and Settings.

Check the required items according to the usage environment.

Cannot Print (Wireless LAN)(P. 671)

Cannot Print (Wired LAN)(P. 673)

Cannot Print (USB Connection)(P. 674)

Cannot Print (via Print Server)(P. 675)

Troubleshooting

670

Cannot Print (Wireless LAN)

84CU-0RU

roubleshoot by checking the items below.

Check the Wireless LAN Connection Status.

Check the connection status of the machine, and take action according to the status. Viewing the MAC

Addr

ess and Connection Information of the Wireless LAN(P. 90)

If the Machine Is Not Connected to the Wireless LAN

Check the status of the computer and wireless LAN router (access point) and the status of the machine, and

reconnect to the wireless LAN.

Cannot Connect to Wireless LAN(P. 662)

If the Connection Is Poor

Change the follo

wing settings on the wireless LAN router, and try printing:

● Change the channel of the wireless LAN router. If there are multiple wireless LAN routers, separate the

channels by ve or more channels.

● Increase the wireless output of the wireless LAN router if possible.

Are the Machine and Computer Connected to the Same Wireless LAN Router?

● When you ar

e using a computer connected to a wireless LAN, check that the SSID (identier of the wireless

LAN router) of the machine matches that of the computer.

Viewing the MAC Address and Connection Information of the Wireless LAN(P. 90)

Viewing the Network Connection Information of the Computer(P. 741)

● If the SSID of the machine and the computer do not match, congur

e the wireless LAN connection settings

on the machine again, and connect the machine to the SSID to which the computer is connected.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 54)

Is the Printer Port of the Computer Congur

ed Correctly? (Windows)

Change the settings if they have not been congur

ed correctly. If there is no available port, add a new port.

Viewing the Printer Port(P. 743)

Conguring a Printer Port (Windo

ws)(P. 198)

Can You Access Remote UI?

If you cannot access Remote UI, the r

ewall settings of the machine may be incorrect, preventing

communication with the computer.

Use the following procedure to disable the rewall settings with the operation panel, and then use Remote UI to

congure the rewall again.

Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Disable the r

ewall settings.

To Disable IPv4 Address Filter

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Firewall Settings]

[IPv4 Address Filter] [Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter] [Off] [Apply] Restart the machine.

To Disable IPv6 Address Filter

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Firewall Settings]

[IPv6 Address Filter] [Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter] [Off] [Apply] Restart the machine.

To Disable MAC Address Filter

Troubleshooting

671

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Firewall Settings]

[MAC Address Filter] [Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter] [Off] [Apply] Restart the machine.

Congure the r

ewall correctly.

Setting the Firewall(P. 374)

Reinstall the Printer Driver.

Uninstall the installed driver, and then reinstall it.

For details about uninstalling and installing drivers, see the driver manual at the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

e You Using Resident Software?

If you are using resident software, such as security software, disable it and then try printing.

Can Y

ou Print from Another Computer in the Network?

If you cannot print from another computer, contact your dealer or service representative. If the Problem

Persists(P

. 728)

Troubleshooting

672

Cannot Print (Wired LAN)

84CU-0RW

roubleshoot by checking the items below.

Is the Printer Port of the Computer Congured Correctly? (Windows)

Change the settings if they have not been congur

ed correctly. If there is no available port, add a new port.

Viewing the Printer Port(P. 743)

Conguring a Printer Port (Windo

ws)(P. 198)

Can You Access Remote UI?

If you cannot access Remote UI, the r

ewall settings of the machine may be incorrect, preventing

communication with the computer.

Use the following procedure to disable the rewall settings with the operation panel, and then use Remote UI to

congure the rewall again.

Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Disable the r

ewall settings.

To Disable IPv4 Address Filter

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Firewall Settings]

[IPv4 Address Filter] [Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter] [Off] [Apply] Restart the machine.

To Disable IPv6 Address Filter

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Firewall Settings]

[IPv6 Address Filter] [Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter] [Off] [Apply] Restart the machine.

To Disable MAC Address Filter

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Firewall Settings]

[MAC Address Filter] [Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter] [Off] [Apply] Restart the machine.

Congure the r

ewall correctly.

Setting the Firewall(P. 374)

Reinstalling the Printer Driver

Uninstall the installed driver, and then reinstall it.

For details about uninstalling and installing drivers, see the driver manual at the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

e You Using Resident Software?

If you are using resident software, such as security software, disable it and then try printing.

Can Y

ou Print from Another Computer in the Network?

If you cannot print from another computer, contact your dealer or service representative. If the Problem

Persists(P

. 728)

Troubleshooting

673

Cannot Print (USB Connection)

84CU-0RX

roubleshoot by checking the items below.

Check the USB Cable.

● If you ar

e using a long USB cable, replace it with a short USB cable.

● If you still cannot print with a short USB cable, the cable may be damaged. Replace with a new USB cable,

and try printing.

Are You Using a USB Hub?

Connect the machine directly to the computer using a USB cable.

ry Using Another USB Port.

Connect the USB cable to another USB port on your computer.

Is the Printer Port of the Computer Congur

ed Correctly? (Windows)

If the printer port is not congur

ed correctly or there is no available port, reinstall the printer driver. When you

reinstall the driver, the correct port is congured automatically.

Viewing the Printer Port(P. 743)

For details about installing the driver, see the manual of the driver at the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

Is T

wo-way Communication Between the Machine and Computer Enabled? (Windows)

Enable two-way communication if it is not enabled, and restart the computer and machine. Viewing Two-way

Communication

(P. 744)

Is a Setting Preventing the Machine from Establishing a USB Connection to the

Computer?

If usage of the USB port for computer connection on the back of the machine is restricted, cancel this setting.

Preventing Connection to Computer via USB Port(P. 424)

e You Using Resident Software?

If you are using resident software, such as security software, disable it and then try printing.

Can Y

ou Print via USB Connection from Another Computer?

If you cannot print from another computer, contact your dealer or service representative. If the Problem

Persists(P

. 728)

Troubleshooting

674

Cannot Print (via Print Server)

84CU-0RY

roubleshoot by checking the items below.

Can You Print from the Print Server?

If you can print, check the connection between the computer and the print server. Cannot Find the Print

Server to Connect to(P

. 665)

Reinstall the Printer Driver.

Uninstall the installed driver, and then reinstall it.

For details about uninstalling and installing drivers, see the driver manual at the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

Installing in Windo

Use a print server to install the printer driver.

Double-click the shared printer on the print server, and follow the instructions on the screen to install the

printer driver.

Displaying a Shared Printer in the Print Server(P. 738)

e You Using Resident Software?

If you are using resident software, such as security software, disable it and then try printing.

Can Y

ou Print via a Print Server from Another Computer?

If you cannot print from another computer, contact your dealer or service representative. If the Problem

Persists(P

. 728)

Troubleshooting

675

Printing Is Slow

84CU-0S0

It tak

es time until the rst page is printed. The printing speed may be slower after continuous printing or printing on

narrow paper to allow for adjustments of the temperature or image quality of the machine.

In all other cases, an error may have occurred. Troubleshoot by checking the items below.

Check the Paper Orientation.

This symptom may occur depending on the paper orientation. Change the paper orientation if possible.

Loading Paper(P. 131)

Does the Machine Have Sucient Fr

ee Memory?

Check the faxes received in the memory of the machine, and print or forward them as needed, and delete any

unnecessary fax

es.

Viewing and Printing Faxes Saved in the Memory(P. 417)

Is Secur

e Print Enabled?

This symptom may occur when Secure Print is enabled. Use the procedure below to disable Secure Print.

The machine must be r

estarted to apply the settings.

clear the [Secure Print] checkbox [OK] restart the machine.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur

e the

settings.

[Secure Print](P. 504)

Troubleshooting

676

Scanning

84CU-0S1

If you have pr

oblems when scanning, restart the machine and computer.

If the problem persists even after restarting, check the following troubleshooting methods.

Cannot Save Scanned Data to a Computer(P. 678)

Cannot Save Scanned Data to a Shared Folder(P. 680)

◼ Fr

equently Asked Questions about Operations

I Want to Scan an Original.

Make preparations according to the scanned data save destination and sending method, and then scan the

original.

Scanning(P. 235)

I W

ant to Send Scanned Data by E-mail.

You can scan an original and send the scanned data by e-mail as an attachment.

Scanning (Sending by E-mail)(P. 256)

Troubleshooting

677

Cannot Save Scanned Data to a Computer

84CU-0S2

Use the follo

wing steps to check the status of the computer used as the store location and the machine:

Step 1: Checking the Occurrence of the Problem(P. 678)

Step 2: Checking the Status of the Computer(P. 678)

Step 3: Checking the Status of the Machine(P. 678)

Step 4: Checking the Store Location of the Scanned Data(P. 679)

Step 1: Checking the Occurrence of the Problem

Check using the following in the order below:

Does the Problem Occur on All Computers?

If so, check the network status and settings of the machine. If the machine is not connected to a network,

econgure the network settings.

Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 88)

Setting Up the Network(P. 50)

e You Saving Scanned Data to the Computer for the First Time?

If so, make preparations such as installing the scanner driver (ScanGear MF) and application (MF Scan Utility) to

the computer used as the stor

e location.

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a Computer(P. 238)

On the Scr

een for Selecting the Computer to Be Used as the Store Location, Is the

Computer Displayed? (Only When Scanning from the Machine)

If the computer to be used as the store location is not displayed, scanned data communication may be blocked

due to the security softwar

e settings.

For details about the security software settings, contact the software manufacturer.

Step 2: Checking the Status of the Computer

Did You Install and Update the Security Software?

If so, the security may have been strengthened, preventing communication between the machine and

computer.

For a workar

ound, contact the software manufacturer.

Reinstall the Scanner Driver.

Uninstall the installed driver, and then reinstall it.

For details about uninstalling and installing drivers, see the driver manual at the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

Step 3: Checking the Status of the Machine

as the IP Address of the Machine or Other Device Changed?

If so, check whether the machine and other device have the same IP address. If they have the same IP address,

change it to a differ

ent IP address.

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 67)

Troubleshooting

678

Step 4: Checking the Store Location of the Scanned Data

Check the Attributes of the Store Location (Windows).

On the computer, check that the attributes of the store location are not read only.

Right-click the store location, and click [Properties].

➠ The pr

operties screen of the store location is displayed.

On the [General] tab, check that the [Read-only] checkbox in [Attributes] is not selected.

If the checkbox is selected, clear the [Read-only] checkbox.

Troubleshooting

679

Cannot Save Scanned Data to a Shared Folder

84CU-0S3

Use the follo

wing steps to check the status of the shared folder of the store location and the machine:

Step 1: Checking the Occurrence of the Problem(P. 680)

Step 2: Checking the Status of the Computer with the Shared Folder(P. 680)

Step 3: Checking the Status of the Machine(P. 680)

Step 4: Checking the Shared Folder(P. 681)

Step 1: Checking the Occurrence of the Problem

Check using the following in the order below:

Does the Problem Occur with All Shared Folders?

If so, check the network status and settings of the machine. If the machine is not connected to a network,

econgure the network settings.

Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 88)

Setting Up the Network(P. 50)

e You Saving Scanned Data to the Shared Folder for the First Time?

If so, register the information for accessing the shared folder to the Address Book of the machine. Preparing

to Save Scanned Data to a Shar

ed Folder(P. 247)

Step 2: Checking the Status of the Computer with the Shared Folder

Did You Change the Password of the Computer with the Shared Folder?

If so, change the password used to access the shared folder using the information of the shared folder

egistered to the Address Book.

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 164)

Did Y

ou Update Windows?

If so, the security may have been strengthened, preventing communication between the machine and

computer.

If the shar

ed folder on the computer does not have a password, set a password, and register the information

for accessing the shared folder to the Address Book of the machine.

Preparing to Save Scanned Data to a

Shar

ed Folder(P. 247)

Did You Install or Update the Security Software?

If so, the security may have been strengthened, preventing communication between the machine and

computer.

For a workar

ound, contact the software manufacturer.

Step 3: Checking the Status of the Machine

as the IP Address of the Machine or Other Device Changed?

If so, check whether the machine and other device have the same IP address. If they have the same IP address,

change it to a differ

ent IP address.

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 67)

Troubleshooting

680

Step 4: Checking the Shared Folder

Do You Have Permission to Access the Shared Folder?

If you do not have permission to access the shared folder, on the computer, change the permission to enable

saving of scanned data.

When Using Windows

Right-click the shared folder of the store location, and click [Properties].

➠ The pr

operties screen of the shared folder is displayed.

On the [Security] tab, check that [Change] in [Everyone] is set to [Allow].

If not, set [Change] in [Everyone] to [Allow].

When Using macOS

Click [ ] [System Preferences] [Sharing].

➠ The [Sharing] scr

een is displayed.

Select [File Sharing], and in [Shared Folders], select the shared folder of the store location.

Check that [Everyone] in [Users] has the access permission of [Read & Write].

If not, select [Read & Write] from the [Everyone] pop-up menu.

Check the Attributes of the Shared Folder (Windows).

On the computer, check that the attributes of the shared folder are not read only.

Right-click the shared folder of the store location, and click [Properties].

➠ The pr

operties screen of the shared folder is displayed.

On the [General] tab, check that the [Read-only] checkbox in [Attributes] is not selected.

If the checkbox is selected, clear the [Read-only] checkbox.

Troubleshooting

681

Faxing and Using the Telephone

84CU-0S4

This is a list of pr

oblems that can occur when faxing and using the telephone. Check how to troubleshoot the problem

based on the symptom.

Cannot Send a Fax(P. 683)

Cannot Receive a Fax(P. 685)

Machine Does Not Automatically Switch Between Telephone and Fax(P. 687)

Cannot Send or Receive a Fax via Optical Line(P. 688)

Cannot Send a Fax to an International Destination(P. 689)

Other Party's Telephone or Fax Number Is Not Displayed(P. 690)

◼ Fr

equently Asked Questions about Operations

I Want to Forward or Save a Received Fax.

Congure the settings to automatically forward or save received faxes to a computer, other fax machine, or

other destination.

Auto Forwarding and Backing Up Received Faxes(P. 286)

I W

ant to Send a Fax from a Computer.

You can send a document as a fax from a computer using a fax driver.

Sending Faxes from a Computer (PC Faxing)(P. 293)

Troubleshooting

682

Cannot Send a Fax

84CU-0S5

roubleshoot by checking the following steps:

Step 1: Checking the Original(P. 683)

Step 2: Checking the Status of the Machine(P. 683)

Step 3: Checking the Send Status(P. 684)

Step 1: Checking the Original

Is Original Placed Correctly?

Place the original correctly while paying attention to the orientation of the side to be scanned.

When Placing It on the Platen Glass

Place the original with the side to be scanned face do

wn.

Placing Originals on the Platen Glass(P. 128)

When Placing Originals in the Feeder

Place the original with the side to be scanned face up. Placing Originals in the Feeder(P. 129)

Step 2: Checking the Status of the Machine

Is the Data Indicator on the Oper

ation Panel Lit or Blinking?

If so, data is being processed. Data is sent after the data indicator turns off. Operation Panel(P. 14)

Is the T

elephone Cord Connected Correctly?

Check that the supplied telephone cord is connected correctly to the telephone line jack (LINE) on the machine

and the telephone line connector on the wall, and x the connection, as needed.

For details about the connection method, see the pr

ocedure for connecting to the telephone line.

Step 4:

Connecting to T

elephone Line(P. 93)

Are You Talking on a Telephone Connected to the Machine?

Send the fax after the call is completed.

Has an Err

or Occurred?

Check the fax sending status and log, and if a three-digit number (error code) starting with "#" is displayed,

check ho

w to troubleshoot the problem based on the error code.

Checking the Status and Log for Sent and Received Faxes(P. 304)

An Error Code Is Displayed(P. 717)

Troubleshooting

683

Is [The memory is full.] Displayed on the Operation Panel?

If so, scanning of the original cannot be performed due to insucient available memory

Try the following:

● If there is data waiting to be printed or sent, wait until the processing is completed.

● When sending an original with many pages, divide the original and send it.

● Check the faxes received in the memory of the machine, and print or forward them as needed, and delete

any unnecessary faxes.

Viewing and Printing Faxes Saved in the Memory(P. 417)

● Change the set r

esolution to a lower resolution when scanning the original.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Fax] [TX/RX Settings] [Resolution] Select the resolution.

Step 3: Checking the Send Status

Did You Specify a Correct Destination?

A telephone number may have been specied, or the fax number may be incorr

ect. Check that the specied

destination is correct, and send again.

Are You Sending a Fax via Optical Line

The machine conforms to analog line standards, and sending of faxes via optical line cannot be guaranteed. You

may be able to perform oper

ations via optical line, so see the following.

Cannot Send or Receive a Fax via Optical Line(P. 688)

Is the T

ype of Telephone Line Congured Correctly?

The type of telephone line may not be automatically congur

ed correctly. Congure the type of telephone line

manually.

ype], select [Manual]

in [Line], select the type of telephone line [OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur

e the

settings.

[Select Line Type](P. 545)

* If you do not kno

w the type of telephone line, contact your telephone company.

Did You Specify an Overseas Destination?

If so, you may not have been able to connect correctly to the destination. After entering the international access

number or country code, enter the wait time (pause) and lo

wer the communication start speed before sending

the fax.

Cannot Send a Fax to an International Destination(P. 689)

Is the Send Destination Ready to Receive a Fax?

The power of the receiving device may not be turned on, or the RX Mode may not be congur

ed correctly. Have

the other party check these.

Troubleshooting

684

Cannot Receive a Fax

84CU-0S6

roubleshoot by checking the following steps:

Step 1: Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner in the Toner Cartridges(P. 685)

Step 2: Checking the RX Mode Setting(P. 685)

Step 3: Checking the Fax Reception Environment(P. 686)

Step 4: Free Up Memory on the Machine(P. 686)

Step 1: Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner in the Toner Cartridges

If the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges is low, the received data may be saved to the memory of the

machine without being printed to prevent printing text that is dicult to read or images that are dicult to see.

● Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges, and replace any toner cartridges, as needed.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 607)

Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 602)

● T

o print the received data even when the amount of toner in the toner cartridges is low, enable [Continue Printing

When Amount in Cartridge Is Low].

Settings] [Edit] in [Common Settings] select the [Continue Printing When Amount in Cartridge Is Low]

checkbo

[OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur

e the

settings.

[Continue Print. When Cart. Low](P. 549)

* When this setting is enabled, the print r

esult may be light or faded. The received data is not saved to the

memory, so if the printed content is illegible, you may have to request the sender to send the data again.

Step 2: Checking the RX Mode Setting

Is the RX Mode Set Appropriately?

Check that the RX Mode is set according to your fax purpose, and change the setting, as needed. Changing

Fax RX Mode and Setting the Action when Receiving a Fax

(P. 280)

Is the RX Mode Set to [Answering Machine]?

If so, check the following, and connect the telephone correctly:

● An answering machine is connected to the machine.

● The po

wer is turned on with a message recorded properly.

Is the RX Mode Set to [Manual]?

If so, press [Start Receiving] before hanging up the receiver when receiving a fax. Hanging up the receiver

befor

ehand may end the call.

If a telephone is connected to the machine, you can receive the fax by operating the telephone without

operating the machine.

Receiving Faxes via Telephone (Remote RX)(P. 300)

Troubleshooting

685

Step 3: Checking the Fax Reception Environment

Are You Receiving a Fax via an Optical Line?

The machine conforms to analog line standards, and receiving of faxes via optical line cannot be guaranteed.

ou may be able to perform operations via optical line, so see the following:

Cannot Send or Receive a Fax via Optical Line(P. 688)

e You Receiving a Fax from a Fax Information Service?

If so, perform the following operations according to the type of telephone line connected to the machine.

When Using a T

one Dialing Line

Congure the type of telephone line manually, and then call your service provider.

ype], select [Manual]

in [Line], select [Tone] [OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur

the settings.

[Select Line Type](P. 545)

When Using a Pulse Dialing Line

After calling your service pr

ovider, press "

" (Tone) on the numeric keys, and then enter the number to

eceive service.

* If you do not know the type of telephone line, contact your telephone company.

Step 4: Free Up Memory on the Machine

Check the fax

es received in the memory of the machine, and print or forward them as needed, and delete any

unnecessary faxes.

Viewing and Printing Faxes Saved in the Memory(P. 417)

Troubleshooting

686

Machine Does Not Automatically Switch Between

elephone and Fax

84CU-0S7

roubleshoot by checking the items below.

Is the RX Mode Set Appropriately?

● Check that the RX Mode is set accor

ding to your fax purpose, and change the setting, as needed.

Changing

Fax RX Mode and Setting the Action when Receiving a Fax

(P. 280)

● When a regular telephone is connected, set the RX Mode to [Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)].

Is the Ring Start Time Too Short When the RX Mode Is Set to [Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)]?

If the time until ringing starts after receiving a fax is too short, the machine may not be able to determine that it

is a fax and you may hear an incoming ring when the fax is r

eceived. Check the [Ring Start Time] setting, and

increase the time, as needed.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Fax] [TX/RX Settings] [RX Mode] [Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)]

[Ring Start Time] enter a time [Apply]

Is the Line Status of the Sender Good?

If the line status of the sender is poor, the machine may not switch to fax at a fast communication start speed.

Check the [RX Start Speed] setting, and decr

ease the speed, as needed.

Settings] [Edit] in [Basic Settings] in [RX Start Speed], select the speed [OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur

e the

settings.

[RX Start Speed](P. 553)

Does the Machine Have Sucient Fr

ee Memory?

Check the faxes received in the memory of the machine, and print or forward them as needed, and delete any

unnecessary fax

es.

Viewing and Printing Faxes Saved in the Memory(P. 417)

Does the Sender

's Fax Machine Support a Fax Identication Signal (CNG Signal)

If it does not support this signal, the machine will not switch automatically to fax receiving mode. Change the

RX Mode to [Manual] to r

eceive faxes manually.

Changing Fax RX Mode and Setting the Action when

Receiving a Fax(P

. 280)

The fax identication signal (CNG signal) is a beeping sound transmitted by the sending fax machine.

Troubleshooting

687

Cannot Send or Receive a Fax via Optical Line

84CU-0S8

The machine conforms to analog line standar

ds, and sending and receiving of faxes via optical line cannot be

guaranteed. You may be able to perform operations via optical line, so use the following steps:

Check the Optical Line Provider.

Check with the optical line provider that the following two items are guaranteed:

● Call quality equivalent to analog line le

vel

● Guaranteed operation of Super G3 (fax communication standard)

Lower the Communication Start Speed and Check the Sending and Receiving Status.

Use the following procedure to lower the communication start speed in phases and check whether you can

send and r

eceive faxes:

Cannot Send a Fax

[Edit] in [TX Start Speed], select the speed [OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur

the settings.

[TX Start Speed](P. 545)

Cannot Receive a Fax

RX Settings] [Edit] in [Basic Settings] in [RX Start Speed], select the speed [OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur

the settings.

[RX Start Speed](P. 553)

Troubleshooting

688

Cannot Send a Fax to an International Destination

84CU-0S9

roubleshoot by checking the items below.

Enter the Wait Time (Pause).

● When sending a fax to an international destination, enter the international access number, country code, and

fax number of the destination in that or

der. Press [Pause] in between the numbers to add a pause.

● If you still cannot send a fax after entering a pause, change the pause time.

Time], enter the pause time [OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to change

the setting. [Set Pause Time](P. 544)

wer the Communication Start Speed.

Try sending a fax after lowering the communication start speed in phases.

[Edit] in [TX Start Speed], select the speed [OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur

e the

settings.

[TX Start Speed](P. 545)

Troubleshooting

689

Other Party's Telephone or Fax Number Is Not

Displayed

84CU-0SA

roubleshoot by checking the items below.

Is the Machine Connected to a Telephone That Supports Number Display?

The machine does not support number display. When a telephone that supports number display is connected

to the machine, the other party

's number can be displayed on the display of the telephone.

* The other party's number may not be displayed even if a telephone that supports number display is

connected to the machine. For details, see the manual of the telephone.

Is the RX Mode Set to [Auto] or [Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)]?

If so , when the settings are congur

ed so that the machine rings when receiving a fax, the other party's

number can be displayed on a connected telephone that supports number display while the machine is ringing.

[Edit] select the [Use Incoming Ring] checkbox enter the number of rings [OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur

e the

settings.

[Incoming Ring](P. 552)

Troubleshooting

690

Management Functions and Environment Settings

84CU-0SC

This is a list of fr

equently asked questions about management functions. Check the applicable item.

Cannot Access Remote UI or Send Function Setting Tool(P. 692)

Changing the Volume of the Conrmation Sound and W

arning Tone(P. 693)

Changing the Time Until Sleep Mode(P. 694)

Lost Department ID or PIN for the Administrator(P. 695)

Checking the Items That Can Be Congur

ed on the Machine and Their Settings(P. 696)

Troubleshooting

691

Cannot Access Remote UI or Send Function Setting Tool

84CU-0SE

If the message [Cannot access Remote UI.] or [Cannot continue the settings because the function to perform settings

for the de

vice is restricted.] appears and you cannot access Remote UI or Send Function Setting Tool, troubleshoot by

checking the items below.

Set the Remote UI Access PIN.

To access the Remote UI and Send Function Setting Tool, you must set the Remote UI Access PIN.

Administr

ator privileges are required to congure the setting.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Management Settings] [License/Other] or [Remote UI

Settings/Update Firmwar

[Remote UI Settings] [Restrict Access] [On] enter the PIN [Apply]

enter the PIN again [Apply]

* You cannot set a PIN consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."

* A Remote UI PIN is not r

equired when Department ID Management is enabled.

Change the System Manager PIN.

When logging in with System Manager Mode or accessing Send Function Setting Tool, you must change the

System Manager PIN fr

om the default settings.

Administrator privileges are required to change the settings.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Menu] [Management Settings] [User Management] [System

Manager Information Settings] [System Manager ID and PIN] enter the System Manager ID [Apply]

enter the PIN [Apply] enter the PIN again [Apply]

* You cannot set a System Manager ID or PIN consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."

* Only allo

w certain administrators to have access to the System Manager ID and PIN after the settings are

changed.

Troubleshooting

692

Changing the Volume of the Conrmation Sound and

arning Tone

84CU-0SF

The pr

ocedure varies depending on whether the machine has a fax function.

Adjusting the Volume (For Models with a Fax Function)(P. 186)

Adjusting the Volume (For Models without a Fax Function)(P. 189)

Troubleshooting

693

Changing the Time Until Sleep Mode

84CU-0SH

In addition to being able to change the time until the machine enters sleep mode, you can also congur

e a specied

time the machine enters sleep mode.

Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep Mode)(P. 106)

Troubleshooting

694

Lost Department ID or PIN for the Administrator

84CU-0SJ

Contact the administr

ator to check whether the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN were changed from the

default settings.

The System Manager ID and System Manager PIN are not set by default.

* If they have not been changed from the default settings, change them for enhanced security, and allow only certain

administrators to know this information.

Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 357)

● If you still cannot r

ecover your System Manager ID and PIN even after conrming the above information,

contact your dealer or service representative.

If the Problem Persists(P. 728)

Troubleshooting

695

Checking the Items That Can Be Congur

ed on the

Machine and Their Settings

84CU-0SK

ou can print the User Data List and System Manager Data List to check the items that can be congured on the

machine and their settings.

Printing and Viewing Reports and Lists(P. 447)

User Data List

Displays the settings that do not r

equire administrator privileges.

System Manager Data List

Displays the settings that require administrator privileges.

Troubleshooting

696

A Message Appears

84CU-0SL

If a message appears on the oper

ation panel, select the message from the list below, and check how to troubleshoot

the problem.

An error occurred during certicate verication.(P

. 698)

Black & White copying is restricted. Only Color copying is available.(P. 699)

Black & White printing is restricted. Only Color printing is available.(P. 699)

Cannot access the le or folder. W

ait a moment and try again, or check the settings from Remote UI.

(P. 699)

Cannot analyze the authentication server certicate.(P

. 699)

Cannot change the destination type of destinations registered to a group.(P. 699)

Cannot nd the access point.(P

. 700)

Cannot print. A non-Canon or counterfeit cartridge may be inserted.(P. 701)

Cannot print RX data.(P. 701)

Cannot receive the fax. Make sure the fax was sent correctly by the sender.(P. 701)

Cannot recognize the image.(P. 701)

Cannot send because more than one destination is specied.(P

. 701)

Cannot specify group destinations when on-hook.(P. 702)

Cannot specify group destinations, or multiple destinations at the same time.(P. 702)

Cannot use these settings. Sending to the specied destination is r

estricted.(P. 702)

Cartridge communication error. Cannot print. A non-Canon or counterfeit cartridge may be inserted.

. 702)

Cartridge Communication Error Problems resulting from the use of non-Canon cartridges are not covered

under the warr

anty.(P. 702)

Change the authentication password.(P. 703)

Check the authentication settings.(P. 703)

Color copying is restricted. Only Black & White copying is available.(P. 703)

Color printing is restricted. Only Black & White printing is available.(P. 703)

Copying is restricted.(P. 703)

Could not connect.(P. 704)

Could not connect. Check the encryption key.(P. 704)

Could not connect. The maximum number of devices that can connect to the access point has been

eached.(P. 704)

Could not connect using Easy Connection via PC. The device will restart.(P. 704)

Could not connect using the wireless LAN. Turn the main power OFF and ON, then congur

e the settings

again.(P. 705)

Could not connect using WPS. Wait a moment, then congur

e the settings again.(P. 705)

Could not detect any connections from wireless devices.(P. 705)

Could not perform cleaning.(P. 706)

Could not perform correction.(P. 706)

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Cannot analyze the authentication server certicate.

. 706)

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Change the authentication password.(P. 706)

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Check the authentication settings.(P. 707)

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Congur

e the correct authentication information.(P. 707)

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Congur

e the information required for authentication.

(P. 707)

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. No reply from the destination.(P. 707)

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. The authentication server certicate has e

xpired.(P. 707)

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. The authentication server certicate is incorr

ect.(P. 707)

Could not perform Open System authentication. Check the encryption key settings.(P. 708)

Could not perform Shared Key authentication. Check the encryption key settings.(P. 708)

Troubleshooting

697

Direct Connection terminated.(P. 708)

Easy Connection via PC ended due to timeout The device will restart.(P. 708)

End of Cartridge Lifetime(P. 709)

Faxing is restricted.(P. 709)

ITB is near end of lifetime. Replcmt. is not yet needed.(P. 709)

Load paper.(P. 709)

Low Cartridge Level(P. 709)

Memory Full (Secure Print)(P. 710)

Memory Full (Skip Error)(P. 710)

Memory Media Print is restricted.(P. 710)

No reply from the destination.(P. 711)

No response from the host.(P. 711)

Paper jammed.(P. 711)

Paper Settings and Loaded Size Mismatch(P. 711)

Prepare cartridge.(P. 712)

Printing is restricted.(P. 712)

Problems resulting from the use of non-Canon cartridges are not covered under the warranty. The

amount r

emaining in the cartridge cannot be displayed correctly.(P. 712)

Remote scanning is restricted.(P. 713)

Scanning is restricted.(P. 713)

Set the correct authentication information.(P. 713)

Set the information necessary for authentication.(P. 713)

Specifying and registering new destinations is restricted.(P. 713)

The authentication server certicate has e

xpired.(P. 714)

The authentication server certicate is incorr

ect.(P. 714)

The computer is restricted.(P. 714)

The encryption key is not set correctly. Check the encryption key settings.(P. 714)

The fax number has too many digits.(P. 715)

The memory is full.(P. 715)

The memory is full. Enter the original type settings again.(P. 715)

The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled. Do you want to print?(P. 715)

The number of entered characters is incorrect or invalid characters are used.(P. 716)

The USB memory is restricted.(P. 716)

Use Remote UI to set the information necessary for authentication.(P. 716)

● If the pr

oblem persists even after trying the troubleshooting methods, contact your dealer or service

representative.

If the Problem Persists(P. 728)

An error occurred during certicate verication.

An err

or occurred during verication due to an expired certicate or incorrect information.

Install the Correct Key and Certicate or CA Certicate.

Check the expiration date, certication authority, and other information, and then install the key and

certicate or CA certicate.

Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained from an

Issuing Authority(P. 401)

Are the Current Date and Time on the Machine Correct?

Check the date and time settings on the machine. If the settings are not correct, set the time zone, and then

set the current date and time. Setting the Date and Time(P. 436)

Troubleshooting

698

Black & White copying is restricted. Only Color copying is available.

Black and white copying is restricted due to Department ID Management.

For the Department ID and PIN, contact the system administrator.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Restrict Functions] Setting of Your Department ID.

[Department ID Management] select the Department ID to edit clear the [Restrict Black & White Copy]

checkbo

[OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to

change the setting. [Department ID Management](P. 567)

Black & White printing is restricted. Only Color printing is available.

Black and white printing is restricted due to Department ID Management.

For the Department ID and PIN, contact the system administrator.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Restrict Functions] Setting of Your Department ID.

[Department ID Management] select the Department ID to edit clear the [Restrict Black & White Print]

checkbo

[OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to

change the setting. [Department ID Management](P. 567)

Cannot access the le or folder. Wait a moment and try again, or check the

settings from Remote UI.

You do not have permission to access the folder, or the user name or password to be used to access the folder is not

set correctly.

Set the Correct Path to the Folder.

● If Restrict Access is enabled, set the user name and password correctly.

● Use Remote UI to display the Address Book, click the applicable destination, and set the information of the

shared folder correctly. Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 164)

Cannot analyze the authentication server certicate.

The certicate of the authentication server may not be corr

ect, or it may be a format unsupported by the machine.

Check the Certicate of the Authentication Server, and Change the Setting, as Needed.

Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

Cannot change the destination type of destinations registered to a group.

The selected destination is registered to a group, so you cannot change the destination type.

Troubleshooting

699

Delete the Destination from the Group, Change the Destination Type, and Then Register It to the

oup Again.

Delete the destination from the group.

Deleting Using Remote UI

the gr

oup to which the destination is registered

[Edit] select the destination [Delete] [OK]

Deleting Using the Operation Panel

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Address Book] select the group to which the destination is

egistered

[Edit] [Destination] select the destination [Delete] [Yes] [Apply] [Apply]

Change the destination type.

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 164)

Editing and Deleting Destinations in the Address Book (Operation Panel)(P. 162)

Registering Groups to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 168)

Registering Groups to the Address Book (Operation Panel)(P. 160)

Cannot nd the access point.

An error occurred, preventing the machine from detecting the wireless LAN router (access point).

Is Connection Type Congured Correctly?

Select the connection type (WPS) according to the method supported by the wireless LAN router.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Using the Router Button (Push Button Mode)(P. 57)

Did Y

ou Connect Within the Fixed Time?

When connecting by pressing a button on the wireless LAN router, set the connection type on the operation

panel of the machine, and then press the button on the wireless LAN router within one or two minutes.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Using the Router Button (Push Button Mode)(P. 57)

e the SSID and Network Key Congured Correctly?

When entering the wireless LAN router information manually, check the SSID and network key of the wireless

LAN router, and congure the settings correctly on the machine.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by

Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method)(P

. 62)

Are the Machine and Wireless LAN Router Located Appropriately?

● The machine and wireless LAN router should be installed in a location without walls or other obstructions

between the devices and within range of 164' (50 m).

● Do not install near a microwave oven, digital cordless telephone, or other device that generates radio

waves.

Check the Security Settings of the Wireless LAN Router.

For details, see the manual of the wir

eless LAN router or contact the manufacturer.

Troubleshooting

700

Cannot print. A non-Canon or counterfeit cartridge may be inserted.

Printing cannot be performed due to the use of a toner cartridge whose print quality cannot be guaranteed.

Replace with a New Toner Cartridge.

Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 602)

For optimum print quality

, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.

List of

Consumables

(P. 608)

Cannot print RX data.

Received data cannot be printed for some r

eason.

Do the Cause and Solution Appear on the Operation Panel?

If so, follow the instructions on the screen.

Is the Front Cover, Rear Cover, or Feeder Cover Open on the Machine?

Close the covers if they are open.

Is Paper Loaded?

Load paper if not loaded.

Loading Paper(P. 131)

Is Paper Jammed?

If so, r

emove any jammed paper.

Paper Jams(P. 626)

Have the T

oner Cartridges Reached the End of Their Lifetime?

Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridges, and replace any toner cartridges, as needed.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 607)

Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 602)

Cannot receive the fax. Make sure the fax was sent correctly by the sender.

Oper

ations were not performed within the xed time when receiving a fax manually, and the machine timed out.

When You Hear a Beep During Fax Reception, Press [Start Receiving] Within 35 Seconds.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Fax] [Start Receiving]

Cannot recognize the image.

In Memory Media Print, you selected an image for which a pr

eview cannot be displayed.

Does the Machine Have Sucient Free Memory?

● If the machine does not have sucient free memory, previews of JPEG and TIFF images cannot be

displayed.

● Check the faxes received in the memory of the machine, and print or forward them as needed, and delete

any unnecessary faxes.

Viewing and Printing Faxes Saved in the Memory(P. 417)

Cannot send because more than one destination is specied.

Sending of fax

es to multiple destinations is restricted.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Restrict Sequential Broadcast] Setting.

[Edit] in [Restrict Sequential Broadcast], select [Off] [OK]

Troubleshooting

701

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to change

the setting. [Restrict Sequential Broadcast](P. 546)

Cannot specify group destinations when on-hook.

If you press [Hook] when sending a fax, you cannot specify a group destination.

Specify the destination without pressing [Hook].

Cannot specify group destinations, or multiple destinations at the same

time.

You cannot specify multiple destinations or group destinations when the handset is off the hook.

Return the handset, and then specify the destination.

Cannot use these settings. Sending to the specied destination is restricted.

Sending or saving to a destination registered to a specied favorite setting is restricted due to Department ID

Management.

For the Department ID and PIN, contact the system administrator.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Restrict Functions] Setting of Your Department ID.

[Department ID Management] select the Department ID to edit clear the [Restrict Scan] and [Restrict

Fax] checkbo

xes

[OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to

change the setting. [Department ID Management](P. 567)

Cartridge communication error. Cannot print. A non-Canon or counterfeit

cartridge may be inserted.

Printing cannot be performed due to incorr

ect installation of the toner cartridge, a damaged toner cartridge, or the

use of a toner cartridge whose print quality cannot be guaranteed.

Reinstall the Toner Cartridges or Replace with New Toner Cartridges.

Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 602)

● For

optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.

List of

Consumables

(P. 608)

● If the message still appears after repeatedly reinstalling the toner cartridges, contact your dealer or

service representative.

If the Problem Persists(P. 728)

Cartridge Communication Error Problems resulting from the use of non-

Canon cartridges are not covered under the warranty.

Printing cannot be performed due to incorrect installation of the toner cartridges, a damaged toner cartridge, or the

use of a non-Canon toner cartridge, resulting in a communication error.

Reinstall the Toner Cartridges.

Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 602)

● For

optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.

List of

Consumables

(P. 608)

Troubleshooting

702

● If

the message still appears after repeatedly reinstalling the toner cartridges, contact your dealer or

service representative.

If the Problem Persists(P. 728)

Change the authentication password.

The password has expired.

Set a new password.

Check the authentication settings.

The authentication method set on the machine does not match that set on the RADIUS server.

Check the Authentication Method Set on the RADIUS Server, and Set This Correctly.

Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

Color copying is restricted. Only Black & White copying is available.

Color copying is restricted due to Department ID Management.

For the Department ID and PIN, contact the system administrator.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Restrict Functions] Setting of Your Department ID.

[Department ID Management] select the Department ID to edit clear the [Restrict Color Copy] checkbox

[OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to

change the setting. [Department ID Management](P. 567)

Color printing is restricted. Only Black & White printing is available.

Color printing is r

estricted due to Department ID Management.

For the Department ID and PIN, contact the system administrator.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Restrict Functions] Setting of Your Department ID.

[Department ID Management] select the Department ID to edit clear the [Restrict Color Print] checkbox

[OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to

change the setting. [Department ID Management](P. 567)

Copying is restricted.

Copying is restricted due to Department ID Management.

For the Department ID and PIN, contact the system administrator.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Restrict Functions] Setting of Your Department ID.

Troubleshooting

703

[Department ID Management] select the Department ID to edit clear the [Restrict Color Copy] and

[Restrict Black & White Cop

y] checkboxes

[OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to

change the setting. [Department ID Management](P. 567)

Could not connect.

An error occurred, preventing the machine from establishing a direct connection.

Wait a Moment, and Try Connecting Again.

If you still cannot establish a connection, restart the machine.

Set the IP Address for Connection to Something Other Than "192.168.22.xx".

The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

Connection Settings] [Edit] in [IP Address for Direct Connection], enter the IP address [OK] restart

the machine

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congur

e the

settings.

[Direct Connection Settings](P. 472)

Is the Subnet Mask Congur

ed Correctly?

Check the IPv4 subnet mask settings. Change the settings if they have not been congured correctly. For

details, contact the network administrator.

Viewing the IP address set to the machine(P. 89)

Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 65)

Could not connect. Check the encryption key.

The network k

ey (encryption key) of the wireless LAN router (access point) is not congured correctly, preventing

connection.

Reset the Network Key.

Check the network key of the wireless LAN router, and congure the settings correctly on the machine.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 54)

Could not connect. The maximum number of devices that can connect to the

access point has been r

eached.

The maximum number of devices that can be connected to the wireless LAN router (access point) has been reached,

preventing connection.

Reduce the Number of Devices (Clients) Connected to the Wireless LAN Router.

For the maximum number of connections, see the manual of the wireless LAN router or contact the

manufacturer.

Could not connect using Easy Connection via PC. The device will restart.

An err

or occurred, preventing the machine from connecting in Access Point Mode. Alternatively, an error occurred

when starting cableless setup mode.

Restart the Machine, and Start Cableless Setup Mode Again.

Administrator privileges are required.

[Home] on the operation panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Easy Connection via PC] [Yes]

start the settings on the computer

Troubleshooting

704

Could not connect using the wireless LAN. Turn the main power OFF and ON,

then congure the settings again.

An error occurred, preventing the machine from connecting to the wireless LAN.

Restart the Machine, and Congure the Wireless LAN Connection Again.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 54)

e the Machine and Wireless LAN Router (Access Point) Located Appropriately?

● The machine and wireless LAN router should be installed in a location without walls or other obstructions

between the devices and within range of 164' (50 m).

● Do not install near a microwave oven, digital cordless telephone, or other device that generates radio

waves.

Check the Security Settings of the Wireless LAN Router.

For details, see the manual of the wir

eless LAN router or contact the manufacturer.

Could not connect using WPS. Wait a moment, then congure the settings

again.

An error occurred, preventing the machine from establishing a WPS connection.

Wait a Moment, and Congure the Settings Again.

If you still cannot establish a WPS connection, check whether the wireless LAN router (access point) supports

WPS.

If It Supports WPS

Check that the machine and wireless LAN router are located appropriately.

● The machine and wireless LAN router should be installed in a location without walls or other

obstructions between the devices and within range of 164' (50 m).

● Do not install near a microwave oven, digital cordless telephone, or other device that generates radio

waves.

If It Does Not Support WPS

Connect using a differ

ent connection type.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 54)

Could not detect any connections from wireless devices.

An err

or occurred, preventing the machine from detecting mobile devices.

Troubleshooting

705

Did You Connect Within the Fixed Time?

Connect the mobile de

vice to the machine within ve minutes of the SSID and network key being displayed.

Could not perform cleaning.

Cleaning could not be performed due to jammed paper, loading of incorrect paper, or another problem.

Load Correct Paper in the Paper Drawer.

Follow the instructions on the operation panel during cleaning, and load usable paper. Loading Paper in

the Paper Dr

awer(P. 132)

Is Paper Jammed?

If so, remove any jammed paper.

Paper Jams(P. 626)

Could not perform correction.

Correction could not be performed due to jammed paper, loading of incorrect paper, or another problem.

Load Correct Paper in the Paper Drawer.

Follow the instructions on the operation panel during correction, and load usable paper. Loading Paper in

the Paper Dr

awer(P. 132)

Place the Paper with the Printed Calibration Image on the Platen Glass.

Place the print side of the calibration image face down with the black band at the back of the machine.

Is Paper Jammed?

Remo

ve any jammed paper.

Paper Jams(P. 626)

Check the Remaining Amount of T

oner in the Toner Cartridges.

A sucient amount of toner in the toner cartridges is required to perform correction. Check the remaining

amount of toner in the toner cartridges, and replace any toner cartridges, as needed.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 607)

Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 602)

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Cannot analyze the

authentication server certicate.

Check the certicate of the authentication server, and change the setting, as needed.

Check the Certicate of the RADIUS Server, and Change the Setting, as Needed.

Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Change the authentication

password.

The password has expired.

Set a New Password.

Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

Troubleshooting

706

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Check the authentication

settings.

The authentication method set on the machine does not match that set on the RADIUS server.

Check the Authentication Method Set on the RADIUS Server, and Set This Correctly.

Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Congure the correct

authentication information.

The authentication method or authentication information of IEEE 802.1X is not set correctly.

Set the Authentication Method and Authentication Information (Keys and Certicates, Password, CA

Certicate) Correctly.

Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate(P

. 388)

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Congure the information

required for authentication.

The authentication method or authentication information of IEEE 802.1X is not set correctly.

Set the Authentication Method and Authentication Information (Keys and Certicates, Password, CA

Certicate) Correctly.

Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate(P

. 388)

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. No reply from the

destination.

The network connection may have a pr

oblem.

Check the Network Status and Settings.

● Check the Ethernet cable and switch status.

● Check the network key of the wireless LAN router, and congure the settings correctly on the machine.

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. The authentication server

certicate has e

xpired.

The server certicate sent from the RADIUS server has expired.

Check the Expiry Date of the RADIUS Server.

Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. The authentication server

certicate is incorrect.

A CA certicate that supports the certicate of the authentication server is not registered to the machine.

Troubleshooting

707

Check the Certicate Information of the Authentication Server, and Register a Supported CA

Certicate.

Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained fr

om an Issuing Authority(P. 401)

Could not perform Open System authentication. Check the encryption key

settings.

The WEP authentication methods of the machine and wireless LAN router (access point) do not match, or MAC address

ltering of the wireless LAN router is set to prevent a connection to the machine, thereby preventing Open System

Authentication.

Use the Manual Setup Method to Change the WEP Authentication Method to [Shared Key], and

Connect Again.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method)(P. 62)

In the MA

C address ltering setting of the wireless LAN router, allow the connection to the machine.

Check the MAC address of the machine, and congure the wireless LAN router to allow a connection from

that MAC address.

Viewing the MAC Address and Connection Information of the Wireless LAN(P. 90)

For the setup method, see the manual of the wir

eless LAN router or contact the manufacturer.

Could not perform Shared Key authentication. Check the encryption key

settings.

The network k

ey (encryption key) of the wireless LAN router (access point) is not congured correctly, or the WEP

authentication methods of the machine and wireless LAN router do not match, preventing Shared Key Authentication.

Reset the Network Key.

Check the network key of the wireless LAN router, and congure the settings correctly on the machine.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 54)

Match the WEP Authentication Method on the Machine and Wir

eless LAN Router.

The machine may be set to Shared Key Authentication, and the wireless LAN router may be set to Open

System Authentication. Change the WEP setting according to the authentication method you are using.

When Using Open System Authentication

Connect to the wireless LAN using either of the following methods:

● Connect with the access point setup method.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Searching for a

Router (Access Point Setup Method)(P

. 60)

● Using the Manual Setup Method, connect with the WEP authentication method set to [Open System].

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method)(P. 62)

When Using Shar

ed Key Authentication

On the wireless LAN router, change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key", and connect again.

For the setup method, see the manual of the wireless LAN router or contact the manufacturer.

Direct Connection terminated.

The connection with a mobile device was terminated.

Directly Connect Again.

Connecting a Mobile Device Directly to the Machine (Direct Connection)(P. 343)

Easy Connection via PC ended due to timeout The device will restart.

30 minutes have elapsed since the start of the cableless setup mode without connecting to the computer.

Restart the Machine, and Start Cableless Setup Mode Again.

Troubleshooting

708

Administrator privileges are required.

[Home] on the operation panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Easy Connection via PC] [Yes]

start the settings on the computer

End of Cartridge Lifetime

The toner cartridges have reached the end of their lifetime.

It Is Recommended to Replace with New Toner Cartridges.

Press [Display Cartridge Replacement Steps] and replace the toner cartridges while following the instructions

on the screen. Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 602)

Faxing is restricted.

Faxing is restricted due to Department ID Management.

For the Department ID and PIN, contact the system administrator.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Restrict Functions] Setting of Your Department ID.

[Department ID Management] select the Department ID to edit clear the [Restrict Fax] checkbox [OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to

change the setting. [Department ID Management](P. 567)

ITB is near end of lifetime. Replcmt. is not yet needed.

It is nearing the time to r

eplace the transfer belt (ITB) inside the machine.

You can continue use, but you are recommended to contact your dealer or service representative as soon as possible.

If the Problem Persists(P. 728)

Load paper.

Corr

ect paper is not loaded.

Is Paper Loaded in the Paper Drawer or Multi-purpose Tray?

Load paper if not loaded.

Loading Paper(P. 131)

e You Using Appropriate Paper When Printing Reports, Lists, and Received Data?

● Check that the paper is usable, and replace it with paper to suit your purpose.

Usable Paper(P. 19)

Loading Paper(P. 131)

● Set

the paper size and type correctly according to the loaded paper.

Specifying the Paper Size and

ype(P. 144)

Low Cartridge Level

It is nearing the time to replace the toner cartridges.

Prepare New Toner Cartridges, and Replace the Old Ones, as Needed.

When printing large printing jobs, it is recommended to press [Display Cartridge Replacement Steps] and

replace the toner cartridges while following the instructions on the screen. Replacing the Toner

Cartridges

(P. 602)

To Continue Printing, Use the Procedure Below.

Troubleshooting

709

When Faxing, I-Faxing, or Printing an Auto Report

In the follo

wing cases, the data may be saved to the memory of the machine without being printed to

prevent printing text that is dicult to read or images that are dicult to see:

● When receiving a Fax or I-Fax

● When communication results reports are set to be printed automatically (when a message appears for

the black toner cartridge)

To continue printing, enable [Continue Printing When Amount in Cartridge Is Low].

Settings] [Edit] in [Common Settings] select the [Continue Printing When Amount in Cartridge Is

w] checkbox

[OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to

congur

e the settings.

[Continue Print. When Cart. Low](P. 549)

* When this setting is enabled, the printing r

esults may be light or faded.

● Y

ou can manually specify when this message appears (when toner is low).

[Display Timing for Cart.

ep.](P. 467)

Memory Full (Secure Print)

The memory is full with Secur

e Print data that has not been printed.

Print the Secure Print Data Saved to the Memory.

For details about how to print, see the procedure for when using the Secure Print function.

Step 2:

Printing Secur

e Data by Entering a PIN or Password(P. 217)

Memory Full (Skip Error)

The memory is full with data that has not been printed due to an err

or.

Cancel Printing of the Data with an Error, or Press [Skip Error] on the [Status Monitor] Screen.

Canceling Printing with the Operation Panel or Remote UI(P. 231)

Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 233)

Memory Media Print is restricted.

The settings ar

e congured to not print data from a USB memory device.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Memory Media Settings] Setting.

The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

[Memory Media Settings] [Edit] select the [Memory Media Print] checkbox [OK] restart the

machine.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to change

the setting. [Memory Media Settings](P. 556)

Troubleshooting

710

No reply from the destination.

The Ethernet cable may not be connected or there may be a problem with the switch.

Check the Ethernet cable and switch status.

No response from the host.

The machine is not connected correctly to the network.

Check the Settings of the Machine and Network, and Connect Again.

When Connected via Wireless LAN

Congure the settings correctly according to your usage environment. Connecting to a Wireless

LAN(P

. 54)

When Connected via Wired LAN

Check that the Ethernet cable is properly connected.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 53)

Paper jammed.

Paper jammed in the machine during printing.

Remove the Jammed Paper, and If Printing Does Not Resume Automatically, Try Printing Again.

Paper Jams(P. 626)

Paper Settings and Loaded Size Mismatch

The size of the paper loaded in the machine does not match that set on the oper

ation panel or printer driver.

Match the Size of the Loaded Paper with the Paper Size Setting.

When Using the Loaded Paper

● Change the paper size setting on the operation panel to match the size of the loaded paper.

Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Paper Drawer(P. 145)

Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 147)

● When

printing from a computer, change the paper size setting on the printer driver to match the size of

the loaded paper.

Printing from a Computer(P. 210)

When Reloading Paper

Load paper of the size set on the oper

ation panel or printer driver.

Loading Paper(P. 131)

Check That the Paper Guides Ar

e Aligned with the Markings and Are Not Too Loose or Too Tight.

Paper Drawer

Multi-purpose Tray

Troubleshooting

711

Prepare cartridge.

It is nearing the time to replace the toner cartridges.

Prepare New Toner Cartridges, and Replace the Old Ones, as Needed.

When printing large jobs, it is recommended to replace the toner cartridges. Replacing the Toner

Cartridges

(P. 602)

To Continue Printing, Use the Procedure Below.

When Faxing, I-Faxing, or Printing an Auto Report

In the following cases, the data may be saved to the memory of the machine without being printed to

prevent printing text that is dicult to read or images that are dicult to see:

● When receiving a Fax or I-Fax

● When communication results reports are set to be printed automatically (when a message appears for

the black toner cartridge)

To continue printing, enable [Continue Printing When Amount in Cartridge Is Low].

Settings] [Edit] in [Common Settings] select the [Continue Printing When Amount in Cartridge Is

w] checkbox

[OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to

congur

e the settings.

[Continue Print. When Cart. Low](P. 549)

* When this setting is enabled, the printing r

esults may be light or faded.

● Y

ou can manually specify when this message appears (when toner is low).

[Display Timing for Cart.

ep.](P. 467)

Printing is restricted.

Printing is r

estricted due to Department ID Management.

For the Department ID and PIN, contact the system administrator.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Restrict Functions] Setting of Your Department ID.

[Department ID Management] select the Department ID to edit clear the [Restrict Color Print] and

[Restrict Black & White Print] checkbo

xes

[OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to

change the setting. [Department ID Management](P. 567)

Problems resulting from the use of non-Canon cartridges are not covered

under the warr

anty. The amount remaining in the cartridge cannot be

displayed correctly.

The remaining amount of toner is not correctly displayed due to the use of a toner cartridge whose print quality

cannot be guaranteed.

Troubleshooting

712

Replace with a New Toner Cartridge.

Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 602)

For optimum print quality

, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.

List of

Consumables

(P. 608)

Remote scanning is restricted.

Scanning from a computer is restricted due to Department ID Management.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Department ID Management] Setting.

[Department ID Management] [Edit] select the [Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs] checkbox [OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to

change the setting. [Department ID Management](P. 567)

Scanning is restricted.

Scanning is restricted due to Department ID Management.

For the Department ID and PIN, contact the system administrator.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Restrict Functions] Setting of Your Department ID.

[Department ID Management] select the Department ID to edit clear the [Restrict Scan] checkbox

[OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to

change the setting. [Department ID Management](P. 567)

Set the correct authentication information.

The authentication method or authentication information of IEEE 802.1X is not set corr

ectly.

Set the Authentication Method and Authentication Information (Keys and Certicates, Password, CA

Certicate) Correctly.

Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate(P

. 388)

Set the information necessary for authentication.

The authentication method or authentication information of IEEE 802.1X is not set correctly.

Set the Authentication Method and Authentication Information (Keys and Certicates, Password, CA

Certicate) Correctly.

Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate(P

. 388)

Specifying and registering new destinations is restricted.

Destinations that can be specied for sending ar

e restricted to those destinations registered in the Address Book.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Restrict New Destinations] Setting.

Troubleshooting

713

Destinations] [Edit] clear the [Restrict New Destinations] checkbox [OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to change

the setting. [Restrict New Destinations](P. 535)

The authentication server certicate has expired.

The server certicate sent from the RADIUS server has expired.

Check the Expiry Date of the RADIUS Server.

Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

The authentication server certicate is incorrect.

A CA certicate that supports the certicate of the authentication server is not registered to the machine.

Check the certicate information of the authentication server, and register a supported CA certicate.

Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained fr

om an Issuing Authority(P. 401)

The computer is restricted.

Saving of scanned data to a computer is restricted due to Department ID Management.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Department ID Management] Setting.

[Department ID Management] [Edit] select the [Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs] checkbox [OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to

change the setting. [Department ID Management](P. 567)

The encryption key is not set correctly. Check the encryption key settings.

The network k

ey (encryption key) of the wireless LAN router (access point) is not congured correctly on the machine.

Alternatively, the WEP authentication method of the machine does not match that of the wireless LAN router.

Reset the Network Key.

Check the network key of the wireless LAN router, and congure the settings correctly on the machine.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 54)

Match the WEP Authentication Method on the Machine and Wir

eless LAN Router.

The machine may be set to Shared Key Authentication, and the wireless LAN router may be set to Open

System Authentication. Change the WEP setting according to the authentication method you are using.

When Using Open System Authentication

Connect to the wireless LAN using either of the following methods:

● Connect with the access point setup method.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Searching for a

Router (Access Point Setup Method)(P

. 60)

● Using the Manual Setup Method, connect with the WEP authentication method set to [Open System].

Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method)(P. 62)

When Using Shar

ed Key Authentication

On the wireless LAN router, change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key", and connect again.

For the setup method, see the manual of the wireless LAN router or contact the manufacturer.

Troubleshooting

714

The fax number has too many digits.

Sending of a fax cannot be performed because the specied fax number has too many digits.

Specify a Fax Number That Does Not Exceed the Maximum Number of Digits to Send a Fax.

If the settings are congured to send a fax after entering a designated number before you specify a

destination registered in the Address Book, the maximum number of digits to send a fax may be exceeded.

[Use Addr. Book When On-Hook](P. 546)

The memory is full. [The memory is full.] Is Displayed on the Operation Panel, and the Operation Cannot Be Performed.

Scanning or faxing cannot be performed due to insucient available memory

. If there is data waiting to be printed or

sent, wait until the processing is completed.

Check the Received Faxes Saved in the Memory.

Print or forward them as needed, and delete any unnecessary faxes.

Viewing and Printing Faxes Saved in

the Memory(P

. 417)

When Scanning, Change the Data Size to a Small File Format.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Scan] select the scan type [Send Settings] tab

[File

Format] select the le format.

ou can skip this step when saving data to a USB memory device.

For details about the le formats, see the following:

Setting File / Division(P. 269)

When Saving Scanned Data to a USB Memory Device, Delete Any Unneeded Files from the Device, or

Use a Differ

ent USB Memory Device.

Inserting and Removing a USB Memory Device(P. 177)

When Sending Fax

es, Divide the Original or Lower the Resolution.

● When sending an original with many pages, divide the original and send it.

● Change the set resolution to a lower resolution when scanning the original.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Fax] [TX/RX Settings] tab [Resolution] select the

esolution.

The memory is full. Enter the original type settings again.

Scanning of the original cannot be performed due to insucient available memory when cop

ying.

To Copy, Change the [Original Type] Setting.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Copy] [Other Settings] [Original Type] [Text/Photo/Map

(Speed)].

The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled. Do you want to print?

Reading of the original cannot be performed due to insucient available memory

. Alternatively, all the pages could

not be read when sorting and copying.

Divide the Original Before Copying.

Print up to the pages that were read or cancel the job, and then divide the original before copying.

Troubleshooting

715

Try Conguring the Setting as Follo

ws.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Copy] [Other Settings] [Original Type] [Text/Photo/Map

(Speed)].

The number of entered characters is incorrect or invalid characters are used.

The network key of the wireless LAN router (access point) is not congured correctly on the machine.

Reset the Network Key.

Check the network key of the wireless LAN router, and congure the settings correctly on the machine.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 54)

The USB memory is restricted.

Saving of scanned originals to a USB memory device is restricted.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Memory Media Settings] Setting.

The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

[Memory Media Settings] [Edit] select the [Store to Memory Media] checkbox [OK] restart the

machine.

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to change

the setting. [Memory Media Settings](P. 556)

Use Remote UI to set the information necessary for authentication.

The authentication method or authentication information of IEEE 802.1X is not set corr

ectly.

Check the IEEE 802.1X Setting, and Set This Correctly.

Check the following, and change the setting, as needed.

Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 386)

● The login name is specied corr

ectly.

● At least one of the following checkboxes is selected: [Use TLS], [Use TTLS], and [Use PEAP].

● When using TLS, a key and certicate are registered.

● When using TTLS or PEAP, the user name and password are set correctly.

Troubleshooting

716

An Error Code Is Displayed

84CU-0SR

If printing cannot be performed, or scanned data or a fax cannot be sent or r

eceived, or another error occurs, an error

code (three-digit number starting with "#") is displayed in the report or job log.

Report

Job Log

Select the err

or code from the list below, and check how to troubleshoot the problem.

#001 to #099

#001(P. 717) #003(P. 718) #005(P. 718) #012(P. 718) #018(P. 718) #022(P. 718)

#037(P. 719) #099(P. 719)

#401 to #499

#401(P. 720) #406(P. 720) #408(P. 720)

#701 to #799

#701(P. 720) #703(P. 720) #751(P. 721) #752(P. 721) #753(P. 721) #755(P. 721)

#766(P. 722)

#801 to #899

#801(P. 722) #802(P. 722) #804(P. 722) #806(P. 723) #808(P. 723) #809(P. 723)

#810(P. 723) #813(P. 723) #816(P. 724) #818(P. 724) #819(P. 724) #820(P. 724)

#821(P. 724) #822(P. 724) #827(P. 724) #829(P. 724) #839(P. 725) #841(P. 725)

#844(P. 725) #846(P. 725) #852(P. 725) #853(P. 726) #861(P. 726) #863(P. 726)

#901 to #999

#934(P. 727) #995(P. 727)

● If the pr

oblem persists even after trying the troubleshooting methods, contact your dealer or service

representative.

If the Problem Persists(P. 728)

#001

The original is jammed in the feeder.

Remo

ve the Jammed Original.

Paper Jams in the Feeder(P. 633)

Troubleshooting

717

#003

The data volume is too large to send or receive a fax.

Divide the Original or Lower the Resolution.

Cannot Send a Fax

● When sending an original with many pages, divide the original and send it.

● Change the set r

esolution to a lower resolution when scanning the original.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Fax] [TX/RX Settings] tab [Resolution]

select the resolution.

Cannot Receive a Fax

Ask the sender to divide the original or lo

wer the resolution and send the fax again.

#005

There was no response from the other party's device within the time limit.

Did You Specify an Overseas Destination?

You may not have been able to connect correctly to the destination. After entering the international access

number or country code, enter the wait time (pause) or lower the communication start speed before sending

the fax. Cannot Send a Fax to an International Destination(P. 689)

Is the Other Party

's Device Ready to Receive a Fax?

The power of the other party's device may not be turned on, or the RX Mode may not be congured correctly.

Have the other party check these.

#012

The r

eceiving device is out of paper (recording paper).

Have the other party add more paper.

#018

Ther

e was no response from the other party's device due to it being busy or another reason.

Did You Specify an Overseas Destination?

You may not have been able to connect correctly to the destination. After entering the international access

number or country code, enter the wait time (pause) or lower the communication start speed before sending

the fax.

Cannot Send a Fax to an International Destination(P. 689)

Is the Other Party

's Device Ready to Receive a Fax?

The power of the other party's device may not be turned on, or the RX Mode may not be congured correctly.

Have the other party check these.

#022

Sending of fax

es from a computer is restricted. Alternatively, the destination specied as the forwarding destination

may have been deleted from the Address Book.

To Cancel Restriction of Sending Faxes from a Computer, Change the [Fax TX Settings] Setting.

Troubleshooting

718

[Edit] select the [Allow Fax Driver TX] checkbox [OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to change

the setting. [Allow Fax Driver TX](P. 546)

ding Destination to the Address Book.

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 164)

Check Whether the Fax That Could Not Be Forwar

ded Is Saved in the Memory.

If the fax is saved in the memory, you can try forwarding it again.

Checking Faxes that Failed to Be

Forwar

ded(P. 305)

#037

Sending of a fax failed due to insucient available memory or the maximum number of destinations to which a fax

can be sent was exceeded. Alternatively, printing could not be performed due to the le size.

If there is data waiting to be printed or sent by fax, wait until the processing is completed.

Check Received Data Saved to the Memory.

Print or forward them as needed, and delete any unnecessary data.

Viewing and Printing Faxes Saved in the Memory(P. 417)

Checking Faxes that Failed to Be Forwarded(P. 305)

When Sending Fax

es, Divide the Original or Lower the Resolution.

● When sending an original with many pages, divide the original and send it.

● Change the set resolution to a lower resolution when scanning the original.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Fax] [TX/RX Settings] tab [Resolution] select the

esolution.

When Sending a Fax Using Windows, Are You Trying to Send the Fax to Multiple Destinations?

Sending of the fax may have failed due to the maximum number of destinations that can be specied at a

time was e

xceeded.

Use the following procedure to change the fax driver setting and increase the number of destinations that

can be specied at a time.

Log on to the computer using an administrator account.

[

] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] click [Printers & scanners]

➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Select the fax driver of the machine

[Manage] click [Printer properties]

➠ The fax driver pr

operties screen is displayed.

On the [Device Settings] tab, select the [Set the number of destinations that can be specied at once to

2000] checkbo

Click [OK].

When Printing, Reduce the File Size or Divide the File.

Optimize the le to mak

e it smaller, or divide the le and then print it.

#099

The job was canceled.

This does not indicate a malfunction. Perform the oper

ation again, as needed.

Troubleshooting

719

#401

The USB memory device does not have sucient free memory.

Delete Any Unneeded Files from the USB Memory Device, or Use a Different USB Memory Device.

Inserting and Removing a USB Memory Device(P. 177)

#406

An error occurred when saving data to a USB memory device.

Has the USB Memory Device Been Removed?

Conrm the orientation of the USB memory device, and insert it correctly into the machine. Inserting and

Remo

ving a USB Memory Device(P. 177)

Divide the Original.

When saving an original with many pages, divide the original before saving it.

#408

The USB memory device may have been removed, or the USB memory device was formatted with an unsupported le

system.

Has the USB Memory Device Been Removed?

Conrm the orientation of the USB memory device, and insert it correctly into the machine. Inserting and

Remo

ving a USB Memory Device(P. 177)

Was the USB Memory Device Formatted with a Supported File System?

You can use a USB memory device with a FAT16 or FAT32 le system.

#701

Authentication could not be performed due to incorr

ect entry of the Department ID or PIN. Alternatively, the user

attempted to perform an operation restricted with Department ID Management without entering the Department ID.

Enter the Correct Department ID and PIN.

If you lost your Department ID or PIN, contact the system administrator.

To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Department ID Management] Setting.

[Department ID Management] [Edit] select the [Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs], Allow Scan Jobs

with Unkno

wn IDs], and [Allow Black & White Copy Jobs] checkboxes

[OK]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to

change the setting. [Department ID Management](P. 567)

#703

The machine does not have sucient fr

ee memory.

Is Any Other Data Being Sent?

Wait for sending to be completed before sending again.

Are You Sending an Original with Many Pages?

Divide the original and send it.

Check the Received Faxes Saved in the Memory.

Print or forward them as needed, and delete any unnecessary faxes.

Viewing and Printing Faxes Saved in

the Memory(P

. 417)

Troubleshooting

720

Restart the Machine, and Then Send or Save the Data Again.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

#751

The machine was unable to connect to the store location, or unable to connect to the network due to a disconnection.

Check the Store Location.

Check that the FTP server is started.

Check the Network Status and Settings.

If the machine is not connected to a network, recongure the network settings.

Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 88)

Setting Up the Network(P. 50)

#752

The SMTP/POP3 server name is not congured correctly, or the machine is not connected correctly to the network.

Congure the SMTP or POP3 Server Name Correctly.

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)(P

. 245)

Check the Network Status and Settings.

If the machine is not connected to a network, recongure the network settings.

Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 88)

Setting Up the Network(P. 50)

#753

The machine was unable to connect to the network due to a disconnected Ethernet cable.

Check That the Ethernet Cable Is Pr

operly Connected.

#755

The T

CP/IP is not congured correctly, or the machine was unable to connect to the network due to the set wait time

before connection.

Check the Network Status and Settings.

If the machine is not connected to a network, recongure the network settings.

Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 88)

Setting Up the Network(P. 50)

Is Ther

e a Set Wait Time Before Connection?

Check whether a wait time is set.

Time for Connection at Startup]

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to view this

information. [Wait Time for Conn. at Startup](P. 474)

Troubleshooting

721

● If

a wait time is set, a connection cannot be established immediately after turning ON the power of the

machine. Sending starts after the wait time has elapsed.

● To change the wait time, click [Edit] on the above [Waiting Time for Connection at Startup] screen, enter

the wait time, and then click [OK].

#766

The certicate has expired.

Renew the certicate, or use a certicate that is not expired.

Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate(P

. 388)

Are the current date and time on the machine correct?

Check the date and time setitngs. If the settings are not correct, set the time zone, and then set the current

date and time.

Setting the Date and Time(P. 436)

#801 Error Code "#801" Is Displayed

The machine cannot connect to the SMTP server, or the information of the SMTP server or shared folder is not set

correctly.

Check the Network Status and Settings.

If the machine is not connected to a network, recongure the network settings.

Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 88)

Setting Up the Network(P. 50)

Set the information of the SMTP server or shar

ed folder correctly.

When Sending an E-mail or I-Fax

Set the information of the SMTP server correctly.

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail

Server (Remote UI)

(P. 245)

When Saving to a Shared Folder

Use Remote UI to display the Address Book, click the applicable destination, and set the information of the

shared folder correctly.

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 164)

When Sending an E-mail or I-Fax, Check the Status of the SMTP Server.

● If you r

eceive an error message from the SMTP server, check the details and take action.

● Check that the SMTP server is operating properly on the network. For details about the SMTP server

status, contact your provider.

When Saving to a Shared Folder, Check the Status of the Shared Folder and Computer.

Check that both the shared folder and the computer with the shared folder are operating properly.

#802

The SMTP

, POP3, or FTP server name is not set correctly.

When Sending an E-mail and Sending and Receiving an I-Fax, Correctly Set the SMTP or POP3 Server

Name.

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)(P

. 245)

When Saving to an FTP Server, Set the FTP Server Name Correctly.

Use Remote UI to display the Address Book, click the applicable destination, and set the server name

correctly.

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 164)

#804

ou do not have permission to access the shared folder or FTP server, or the destination is not set correctly.

Troubleshooting

722

Does the Sending User (User Name Registered as a Destination) Have Write Permission for the Store

Location?

If the user does not have permission, gr

ant write permission to the sending user for the store location. For

details, contact the network administrator.

Set the Correct Path to the Shared Folder or FTP Server.

Use Remote UI to display the Address Book, click the applicable destination, and set the server name

correctly.

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 164)

#806

The user name or password to be used to access the shared folder or FTP server is not set correctly. Alternatively, the

destination of the e-mail or I-Fax is not set correctly.

When Saving to a Shared Folder or FTP Server, Correctly Set the User Name and Password to Be Used

to Access the Server.

Use Remote UI to display the Address Book, click the applicable destination, and set the user name and

password correctly. Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 164)

When Sending an E-mail or I-Fax, Specify a Corr

ect E-Mail Address Before Sending.

When you are using a destination in the Address Book, check that the e-mail address registered in the

Address Book is correct.

Registering Destinations (Address Book)(P. 154)

#808

An err

or or timeout occurred on the FTP server.

Set the information of the FTP server correctly.

Use Remote UI to display the Address Book, click the applicable destination, and set the information

correctly.

Registering Destinations to the Address Book (Remote UI)(P. 164)

#809

The le could not be saved because a le with the same name alr

eady exists on the FTP server or SMB server.

Delete the le, and scan again.

#810

The machine cannot connect to the POP3 server, or the information of the POP3 server is not set corr

ectly.

Check the Network Status and Settings.

If the machine is not connected to a network, recongure the network settings.

Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 88)

Setting Up the Network(P. 50)

Set the information of the POP3 server corr

ectly.

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)(P

. 245)

Check the Status of the POP3 Server.

Check that the POP3 server is operating properly on the network. For details about the POP3 server status,

contact your provider.

#813

The user name or passwor

d to be used for POP3 server authentication is not set correctly.

Set the User Name and Password Correctly.

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)(P

. 245)

Troubleshooting

723

#816

The maximum number of pages that can be printed for the department has been reached.

Check the Usage, and Reset the Count to Zero.

Conrming Usage b

y Department ID(P. 369)

#818

The received data is in a format that cannot be printed.

Have the sender change the le format and resend the le.

#819

The received data has invalid MIME information and cannot be processed.

Have the sender check the settings and resend the data.

#820

The received data has invalid BASE64 or uuencode data and cannot be processed.

Have the sender check the settings and resend the data.

#821

The received data has a TIFF analysis error and cannot be processed.

Have the sender check the settings and resend the data.

#822

The le format is unsupported, and printing cannot be performed.

Save using a supported le format.

The following le formats can be printed from a USB memory device:

● JPEG (DCF, Exif2.21 or earlier, JFIF)

● TIFF (JPEG, MH, MR, MMR compression)

● PDF

#827

The r

eceived data includes unsupported MIME information and cannot be processed.

Have the sender check the settings and resend the data.

#829

The received data exceeds the maximum size that can be received by the machine.

Have the Sender Check and Resend the Data.

When Receiving a Fax

Troubleshooting

724

The machine prints or saves to memory pages 1 to 999 and deletes page 1,000 and beyond. Have the

sender r

esend page 1,000 and beyond.

When Receiving an I-Fax

The machine cannot receive an e-mail that exceeds 24 MB. Have the sender reduce the size of the e-mail to

24 MB or less and resend it.

#839

The user name or password to be used for SMTP authentication is not set correctly.

Set the User Name and Password Correctly.

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)(P

. 245)

#841

Communication with the SMTP server is set to be encrypted, but there is no encryption algorithm shared with the

SMTP server, so encrypted communication failed. Alternatively, a verify certicate error occurred.

Check the Algorithms Supported by the SMTP Server and Those Supported by the Machine.

● For details about the algorithms supported by the SMTP server, contact your provider.

● For details about the algorithms supported by the machine, see the following:

Keys and Certicates(P

. 34)

Is an Appropriate CA Certicate Registered?

Check that the CA certicate used for authentication of the SMTP server is registered to the machine.

Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained fr

om an Issuing Authority(P. 401)

Check the SMTP Server Certicate.

Check that the server certicate is correct and is not a self-signed certicate.

Disable Encryption When Communicating with the SMTP Server

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)(P

. 245)

#844

Communication with the POP3 server is set to be encrypted using POP authentication befor

e sending data (POP

before SMTP), but encrypted communication failed. Alternatively, a verify certicate error occurred.

Is an Appropriate CA Certicate Registered?

Check that the CA certicate used for authentication of the POP3 server is registered to the machine.

Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained fr

om an Issuing Authority(P. 401)

Check the POP3 Server Certicate.

Check that the server certicate is correct and is not a self-signed certicate.

Disable Encryption When Communicating with the POP3 Server

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)(P

. 245)

#846

APOP authentication is set to be used to encrypt the passwor

d at authentication using POP authentication before

sending data (POP before SMTP), but APOP authentication failed.

Disable APOP Authentication.

Conguring Detailed Information of the E-mail Server (Remote UI)(P

. 245)

#852

The po

wer of the machine turned OFF for some reason.

Troubleshooting

725

Make sure the power plug is rmly inserted into an outlet.

#853

Printing or Secure Print failed for some reason.

If the operation was canceled when print data was being sent from a computer to the machine, try printing again.

Otherwise, check the following:

Are You Printing a Large Job?

The data volume may have exceeded the processing capacity of the machine. Reduce the number of pages to

print, or print when there is no print data being printed or waiting to be printed.

Is the Data to Be Printed Corrupted?

If the data is corrupted or otherwise damaged, x the data.

Are You Trying to Print a PDF File from a USB Memory Device?

When printing a password-protected PDF le, enter the password before printing.

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Memory Media Print] select the le to print [Apply] [Set PDF

Details] [Password to Open Document] enter the password [Apply]

Are You Trying to Print with Secure Print?

The machine may be congur

ed not to use the Secure Print function. Try either of the following methods:

● Enable Secure Print.

The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.

select the [Secure Print] checkbox [OK] restart the machine

On the operation panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to

congur

e the settings.

[Secure Print](P. 504)

● Print without using the Secur

e Print function.

Was the Secure Print Data Left for a While?

If printing of the Secure Print data is not performed after a set period of time, the data is deleted from the

memory automatically. If the save period elapses and the data is deleted automatically, try printing with

Secure Print again.

* You can change the save period (time until the data is deleted).

Changing the Time Period That Print

Data with a PIN (Secur

e Data) Is Saved(P. 218)

#861

ou are using an unsupported printer driver, or the data you are trying to print is corrupted.

Use the printer driver of the machine, and try printing again.

Printing from a Computer(P. 210)

Is the Data to Be Printed Corrupted?

If the data is corrupted or otherwise damaged, x the data.

#863

An err

or occurred, preventing printing.

Restart the Machine, and Then Print the Data Again.

Restarting the Machine(P. 104)

Troubleshooting

726

#934

The job was deleted by the Auto Delete Suspended Jobs function.

Resolve the Error That Caused the Job to Be Suspended.

Resolve the error, and try printing or copying again.

* Disable the Auto Delete Suspended Jobs function, or change the time until the data is automatically

deleted. [Auto Delete Suspended Jobs](P. 508)

#995

Sending or r

eceiving of a waiting job was canceled.

Try sending or receiving again, as needed.

Troubleshooting

727

If the Problem Persists

84CU-0SS

If the pr

oblem persists even after trying the troubleshooting methods, contact your dealer or service representative.

Do not disassemble or repair the machine yourself.

● Disassembling or r

epairing the machine yourself may void the warranty.

Checks Before Contacting Us

● Pr

oduct name (MF753Cdw / MF751Cdw)

● Dealer purchased from

● Details of the problem (such as operation details and their results)

● Serial number

How to Look Up the Serial Number

[Home] screen on the operation panel [Status Monitor] [Device Information] [Serial Number]

● Y

ou can also check this information using Remote UI from a computer.

Managing the Machine from a

Computer (Remote UI)(P

. 437)

● You can also check this information on the label on the back of the machine.

Customer Support (U.S.A.)

If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information in this chapter, for the fastest resolution, please

efer to available support materials (including the Knowledgebase FAQs and How to Video material) for your

product at www.usa.canon.com.

Customer Support (Canada)

If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information in this chapter, for the fastest resolution, please

efer to available support materials (including the Knowledgebase FAQs and How to Video material) for your

product at www.canon.ca/support.

Troubleshooting

728

Appendix

Appendix .............................................................................................................................................................

730

Manuals of the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 731

Using the User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 732

Manual Display Settings ................................................................................................................................... 735

Operation Examples When Using a Computer ................................................................................................ 736

Environmental Information, Regulations, and Standards .............................................................................. 746

Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 753

Trademarks and Copyrights ............................................................................................................................. 754

Third-party Software ......................................................................................................................................... 756

Appendix

729

Appendix

84CU-09H

In this chapter, you can vie

w the manuals of the machine and the basic operations required when using the machine

with a computer.

Manuals of the Machine

Manuals are provided according to your purpose.

Manuals of the Machine(P. 731)

The User

's Guide (this manual) contains information on all functions of the machine and specications as well

as how to maintain the machine. You can search for specic information and change the text size and layout.

Using the User's Guide(P. 732)

Manual Display Settings(P. 735)

Basic Oper

ations When Using with a Computer

You must set up a computer to use the machine from the computer and view information set on the machine

from the computer. The operations are introduced using Windows and macOS operation examples.

Operation Examples When Using a Computer(P. 736)

Other Information

Environmental Information, Regulations, and Standards(P. 746)

Notice(P. 753)

Trademarks and Copyrights(P. 754)

Third-party Software(P. 756)

Appendix

730

Manuals of the Machine

84CU-09J

The manuals belo

w are provided with the machine. Use these according to your purpose.

Click on the icon to display the corresponding manual (PDF).

Important Safety Instructions

This contains required information to prevent injury and accidental damage to property.

Setup Guide

This e

xplains the process from unpacking the machine to setting it up so that it is ready to use.

User's Guide (this manual)

This describes all the functions of the machine in detail. It also contains the specications and describes ho

to maintain the machine. The User's Guide is displayed in a Web browser.

Using the User's Guide(P. 732)

Send Setting Guide

This describes the pr

eparations and settings for sending scanned data by e-mail and saving it to a shared

folder. The Send Setting Guide is provided on the supplied CD/DVD-ROM.

* You can also display the Send Setting Guide at startup when using the downloaded Send Function Setting

Tool.

● For details about the drivers, softwar

e, and manual of the Application Library, see the online manual site.

https://oip.manual.canon/

● For details on the Application Library, see the following manual.

Application Library

Appendix

731

Using the User's Guide

84CU-09K

The User

's Guide (this manual) contains information on all functions of the machine and specications as well as how

to maintain the machine.

You can use the User's Guide to nd useful information through the contents and search function.

* Click [

] or [ ] at the top of the screen to change between contents and search keyword display.

Screens and Illustrations(P. 732)

Symbols(P. 732)

Key and Button Indicators(P. 733)

Search Function(P. 733)

Operating Environment(P. 734)

● The User

's Guide describes the various functions of all model series including the machine. You can view a

table indicating which functions and options are supported for each model.

Supported Functions and

Options(P

. 3)

Screens and Illustrations

In the User

's Guide, unless otherwise stated, the following are used in the screens and illustrations.

Model

MF753Cdw

Toner Cartridges

Canon Cartridge 069

Computer Operating System

Windows 10

macOS 11

● The screens may vary depending on the model.

● The operations and screens may vary depending on the computer operating system.

● The screens are subject to change due to updates of the drivers and software.

Symbols

The warnings and cautions ar

e also listed in the Important Safety Instructions supplied with the machine. See this for

more information.

Manuals of the Machine(P. 731)

Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or serious

personal injury if not performed corr

ectly. To ensure that you use the machine

safely, always observe these warnings.

Indicates a precaution for preventing the risk of personal injury or property

damage other than a pr

oduct fault due to improper use of the machine. To

ensure that you use the machine safely, always observe these cautions.

Appendix

732

Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully,

and mak

e sure not to perform the described operations.

Indicates important requirements and restrictions for security and data

otection as well as precautions that should be observed. Be sure to read these

items to avoid malfunction, fault, or property damage due to incorrect operation.

Indicates a clarication of an oper

ation, or contains additional explanations for a

procedure.

Key and Button Indicators

The oper

ation panel keys and buttons displayed on the screen are indicated as follows:

Operation Panel Keys

Indicated with an icon.

Example: Home key

Buttons Displayed on the Operation Panel and Computer Screen

Enclosed in squar

e brackets [ ].

Example:

[

]

[Cancel] [Yes]

[The memory media can be safely r

emoved.]

Search Function

Click [

] at the top of the screen.

➠ The search keyword input eld is displayed at the top left of the screen.

Enter a keyword, and click [ ] or press the [Enter] key on the computer.

● Separ

ate multiple keywords with spaces to search for pages that include all keywords.

● Enclose keywords in double quotation marks (") to search for pages that only contain complete matches

including spaces.

Click the search result to view the page.

● Click [

] to show or hide the search results.

● Click [ ] to display the contents.

Appendix

733

Operating Environment

The User's Guide can be viewed in the following operating environments:

Windows

Internet Explorer 9 or later

Microsoft Edge

Firefox

Firefox ESR

Chrome

macOS

Safari

Firefox

Chrome

Linux

Firefox

iOS

Safari

Android

Chrome

Only available when vie

wing at the online manual site.

Appendix

734

Manual Display Settings

84CU-09L

Appendix

735

Operation Examples When Using a Computer

84CU-09R

When using the machine fr

om a computer, you must congure the settings of the computer according to the function

you are using. In addition, you may need the computer information to view the information set on the machine.

In this case, use the operation examples below to check the required settings and information on the computer.

Creating a Shared Folder(P. 736)

Enabling Network Discovery(P. 738)

Displaying a Shared Printer in the Print Server(P. 738)

Viewing the System Information of the Computer(P. 739)

Viewing the Network Connection Information of the Computer(P. 741)

Viewing the Printer Port(P. 743)

Viewing Two-way Communication(P. 744)

Printing a Test Page(P. 744)

Creating a Shared Folder

When Using Windows(P. 736)

When Using macOS(P. 737)

◼ When Using Windo

Create a folder in any location (such as Desktop).

Right-click the created folder, and click [Properties].

On the [Sharing] tab, click [Advanced Sharing].

➠ The [Advanced Sharing] scr

een is displayed.

Select the [Share this folder] checkbox, and click [Permissions].

Congure the access privilege.

Appendix

736

In [Group or user names], select [Everyone].

In [Permissions], select the [Allow] checkbox in [Change].

Click [OK].

Click [OK]

[Close].

➠ The cr

eated folder can be used as a shared folder.

◼ When Using macOS

Click [

] [System Preferences] [Sharing].

➠ The [Sharing] screen is displayed.

Select the [File Sharing] checkbox, and click [＋] in [Shar

ed Folders].

Create a folder in any location (such as Desktop), and click [Add].

Congure the access privilege.

Appendix

737

In [Shared Folders], select the created folder.

In [Users], select [Everyone] [Read & Write].

Close the screen.

➠ The cr

eated folder can be used as a shared folder.

Enabling Network Discovery

Right-click [

] (Start), and click [Network Connections].

➠ The [Status] scr

een is displayed.

Click [Network and Sharing Center]

[Change advanced sharing settings].

➠ The [Advanced sharing settings] scr

een is displayed.

In [Network discovery], select [Turn on network discovery], and click [Save changes].

Displaying a Shared Printer in the Print Server

When Using Windows(P. 739)

When Using macOS(P. 739)

Appendix

738

◼ When Using Windo

Right-click [

] (Start), and click [File Explorer].

In [Network], select the print server to display the shared printer.

If nothing is displayed in [Network], enable network discovery. Enabling Network Discovery(P. 738)

◼ When Using macOS

Click [

] [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

➠ The [Printers & Scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Click [+] at the bottom left.

➠ The [Add] scr

een is displayed.

Click [

], to display the shared printer.

Viewing the System Information of the Computer

When Using Windows(P. 740)

When Using macOS(P. 740)

Appendix

739

◼ When Using Windo

Right-click [

] (Start), and click [System].

➠ The [About] scr

een is displayed.

In [Device specications], vie

w the computer name and operating system version.

● The computer name is displayed in [De

vice name].

● The operating system version is displayed in [System type].

If the computer has a 32-bit operating system, "32-bit Operating System" is displayed.

If the computer has a 64-bit operating system, "64-bit Operating System" is displayed.

◼ When Using macOS

Click [

] [System Preferences] [Sharing].

➠ The [Sharing] scr

een is displayed.

The name displayed in [Computer Name] on the [Sharing] screen may not be usable on the network. Use

the following procedure to view the computer name used on the network.

Click [Edit].

In [Local Hostname], view the computer name.

Parts displayed in gray are not included in the computer name.

Appendix

740

Click [Cancel].

Viewing the Network Connection Information of the Computer

When Using Windows(P. 741)

When Using macOS(P. 742)

◼ When Using Windo

Right-click [

] (Start), and click [Network Connections].

➠ The [Status] scr

een is displayed.

View the network connection information.

Viewing the SSID of the Wired LAN

Vie

w the SSID in [Network status].

Viewing the IP Address and DNS Server

Click [Properties] for the connected network.

In [Properties], view the IP address and DNS server.

Appendix

741

◼ When Using macOS

Click [

] [System Preferences] [Network].

➠ The [Network] scr

een is displayed.

View the IP address, DNS server, and other information.

For Wired LAN

Appendix

742

For Wireless LAN

● Vie

w the SSID in [Network Name].

● View the IP address in [Status].

● Click [Advanced], and view the DNS server on the [DNS] tab.

Viewing the Printer Port

Click [

] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].

➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Click the printer driver of the machine

[Manage] [Printer properties].

➠ The printer driver pr

operties screen is displayed.

On the [Ports] tab, view the port being used.

Appendix

743

If the IP Address of the Machine Is Changed

● The r

equired action depends on the port you are using.

- If [Canon MFNP Port] is displayed in [Description], the connection is maintained as long as the machine

and computer belong to the same subnet, so no action is required on the computer.

- If [Standard TCP/IP Port] is displayed in [Description], you must add a new port.

Adding a Port(P. 198)

Viewing Two-way Communication

Click [ ] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].

➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Click the printer driver of the machine

[Manage] [Printer properties].

➠ The printer driver pr

operties screen is displayed.

On the [Ports] tab, check that the [Enable bidirectional support] checkbox is selected.

Printing a Test Page

Required Preparations

● Load Letter size paper in the paper dr

awer.

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 132)

When Using Windows(P. 744)

When Using macOS(P. 745)

◼ When Using Windo

Click [

] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].

➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Click the printer driver of the machine

[Manage] [Printer properties].

➠ The printer driver pr

operties screen is displayed.

On the [General] tab, click [Print Test Page].

➠ When the print data is sent corr

ectly, a test page is printed from the machine.

Appendix

744

◼ When Using macOS

Click [

] [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

➠ The [Printers & Scanners] scr

een is displayed.

Select the machine, and click [Open Print Queue].

From the [Printer] menu, click [Print Test Page].

➠ When the print data is sent corr

ectly, a test page is printed from the machine.

Appendix

745

Environmental Information, Regulations, and

Standar

84CU-09S

◼ International ENERGY ST

program (for USA and Canada only)

The international ENERGY STAR Program is an international program that promotes energy

savings in computers and other oce equipment. The pr

ogram backs the development and

dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is

an open system in which businesses can participate voluntarily.

◼ IPv6 Ready Logo

The protocol stack included in this product has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2

established b

y the IPv6 Forum.

◼ When disposing of used toner cartridges

● T

o protect the environment and make more effective use of resources, Canon promotes the recovery and recycling

of used toner cartridges. Please cooperate in the recovery of toner cartridges (resource reuse). For details on

resource reuse, see the Canon website:

global.canon/ctc

When disposing of toner cartridges, pack them in their original packaging to prevent toner dispersal and dispose of

the cartridges in accordance with your local government instructions.

◼ TERMS OF imageWARE REMOTE SERVICE

If your Canon imageCLASS product is enabled with embedded functions for the imageWARE Remote Diagnostic

Service (“iWR”), or your product is not iWR enabled but it interacts with the iWR Remote Diagnostic System (“RDS”)

Plug-In program of imageWARE Enterprise Management Console (“EMC”) software, then Canon USA, Canon Canada or

their respective authorized independent Canon retail dealers can access Product meter readings and receive

notications of certain automated meter information, device error monitoring and supply replenishment notices

automatically via the internet. You can read more about iWR in Canon published materials available from your dealer

or on the web sites of Canon USA (www.usa.canon.com) or Canon Canada (www.canon.ca). iWR will only collect and

transmit Product specic meter readings and service data, and will not access, collect or transmit your image content

data in the Product.

Your instruction to Canon USA, Canon Canada or your dealer to activate iWR (embedded or Plug-In) for a Product shall

be considered (i) a representation that you have an internal IP network and internet access available on a generally

continuous basis; (ii) authorization by you to establish, and perform during the period of iWR activation, HTTPS

communications using your network bandwidth for transmissions over the internet of use and service data

accumulated by the Product and send iWR notice emails to Canon USA, Canon Canada or your dealer, and (iii)

authorization by you to store, analyze and use this data for purposes related to servicing the Product and for Product

and iWR improvement.

Appendix

746

By so instructing Canon USA, Canon Canada or your dealer, you shall also be considered to acknowledge that (A) the

iWR softwar

e (embedded or Plug-In) is the condential property of Canon USA and its licensor; (B) you have no rights

in such iWR software (except as the Product executes the limited data collection and transmission functions for which

it is congured when delivered and you obtain the benets of iWR as outlined in Canon published materials), (C) you

shall not disassemble, decompile, reverse engineer, disclose or attempt to copy such iWR software, allow any third

party to do any of the foregoing or transfer your limited rights to any other party without the prior written approval of

Canon USA or Canon Canada; and (D) there are many factors outside the control of Canon USA, Canon Canada or their

respective dealers that could affect the accuracy or timing of meter readings or service data harvested by iWR and,

except as expressly provided in the limited warranty statement for the Product or End-User License Agreement for

EMC software, in the case of the iWR RDS Plug-In program, neither Canon USA, Canon Canada nor their respective

dealers shall be responsible for alleged deciencies in, or your dissatisfaction with, iWR or any software used to

provide iWR.

If your dealer ceases to be an authorized Canon USA dealer, it will no longer have access to the use and service data

accumulated by iWR for your Product. In that case, you may request or instruct to Canon USA to recommend to you an

alternative service provider who will have access to this data in order to maintain Product service utilizing iWR

functionality.

◼ UNIVERSAL GATEWAY 2 WEBSITE TERMS OF USE

The Universal Gateway 2 Website (“UGW2”) is operated by the Business Information Communications Group ("BICG,"

“we,” “our” or “us”) of Canon U.S.A., Inc. (“Canon U.S.A.”). These Universal Gateway 2 Website Terms of Use ("Terms of

Use") govern your use of the UGW2 and any of the websites, subsites, interactive features, forms, mobile and social

media pages made available through the UGW2 (collectively “Services”). Please review the Universal Gateway 2

Website Privacy Statement which governs the collection and use of your information.

The Services are intended for business use by business users.

BICG may change or cancel the UGW2 or any of its features at any time without notice.

This is a legally binding contract in electronic form between you, an employee or other representative ("you," "your,"

or "yourself") of the company that has authorized you to use or benet from the UGW2 (“Company”), and BICG.

BY USING THE SERVICES OR REGISTERING WITH ONE OF OUR SUBSITES, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND, WITHOUT

LIMITATION OR QUALIFICATION, TO THESE TERMS OF USE, AND ANY OTHER AGREEMENTS (AS DEFINED BELOW) AND

MAY USE THE SERVICES AS LONG AS YOU COMPLY WITH THESE TERMS OF USE. THESE TERMS OF USE APPLY WHETHER

YOU ARE ACCESSING THE SERVICES OFFLINE OR VIA A COMPUTER, TABLET, MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER

TECHNOLOGY OR DEVICE NOW KNOWN OR HEREAFTER DEVELOPED (EACH A "DEVICE").

1. ELIGIBILITY

In order to use the Services, you need to (a) be 18 or older, or at minimum the legal age of majority in your jurisdiction,

and (b) have the power to enter a binding contract with us and not be barred from doing so under any applicable laws

in your country of residence. You also warrant that any account information that you submit to BICG is true, accurate

and complete.

2. CHANGES TO THESE TERMS OF USE

Occasionally we may, in our discretion, make changes to these Terms of Use. Changes will be effective immediately

(except for material changes) upon the posting of the revised Terms of Use to the Services. In the event we make

material changes to these Terms of Use, we will notify you prior to the changes taking effect. Please note that if you do

not agree to the modied Terms of Use, you may not use the Services. Your continued use of the Services following the

posting of the changes or any applicable notice period will mean that you accept those changes.

3. ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATIONS

Support by Email, Chat. When you use the Services, submit forms or send emails to us, you are communicating with us

electronically. You consent to receive communications from us electronically. We will communicate with you by email,

or by posting notices on the Services. You agree that all agreements, notices, disclosures and other communications

that we provide to you electronically satisfy any legal requirement that such communications be in writing.

4. UNSOLICITED IDEAS

Canon U.S.A. and its parent company, successors, subsidiaries, aliates and related entities (“Canon Group”) have

been actively engaged in research and development in diversied scientic and business areas for many years. In

order to protect the interests of Canon U.S.A. and Canon Group in the ideas and information which have been

Appendix

747

conceived or developed internally, and to avoid possible future misunderstandings with you or others, Canon U.S.A.

does not solicit ideas, inventions, work samples, materials, demos, and the lik

e or agree to receive any condential

information from persons or entities outside the Canon Group. Canon U.S.A. maintains a strict policy of not accepting

or considering any creative ideas, suggestions or materials from the public ("Unsolicited Idea(s)") and therefore you

should not submit any Unsolicited Idea(s) to BICG through the Services or otherwise to Canon U.S.A. Canon U.S.A. does

not wish to receive Unsolicited Idea(s) from you and has expressly advised you not to submit them. If you nonetheless

intend to submit an Unsolicited Idea, Canon U.S.A. strongly recommends that you rst consult an attorney in order to

evaluate the effect that submitting such an Unsolicited Idea would have on any rights that you might otherwise have.

Nonetheless, if you do send Canon U.S.A. an Unsolicited Idea that is not already protected by a United States patent or

is not public information, it immediately becomes the property of Canon U.S.A. By submitting an Unsolicited Idea to

Canon U.S.A., you agree to convey your ownership interest in the Unsolicited Idea to Canon U.S.A., and that Canon

U.S.A. will exclusively own all rights, title and interest therein. Furthermore, Canon U.S.A. and its designees will be free

to use, without any compensation to you whatsoever, any concepts, ideas, know-how or techniques contained in any

Unsolicited Idea for any purpose whatsoever, including but not limited to developing, manufacturing, and marketing

products using such information. Neither Canon U.S.A. nor the Canon Group will be liable for such use or disclosure of

such Unsolicited Idea or for any similarities in the Unsolicited Idea and any future Canon U.S.A. or Canon Group uses

or activities.

5. USE OF THE SERVICES

You agree that your use of the Services will comply with applicable laws, and unless otherwise expressly permitted by

Other Agreements, you agree that your use of the Services will strictly be for your own personal and non-commercial

use. In addition, you agree not to take any steps in connection with your use of the Services that could adversely affect

Canon U.S.A. or the Canon Group, including engaging in or attempting to engage in the following conduct:

• interrupting the operation of the Services in any manner whatsoever, including by imposing an unreasonable load on

the Services;

• deleting or revising any material or other information of any other user, Canon U.S.A., Canon Group or any third

party;

• harvesting or otherwise collecting information about others, including email addresses, without their consent;

• deciphering, decompiling, disassembling, or reverse-engineering any of the software comprising or in any way

making up a part of the Services;

• posting advertisements or solicitations of business other than those explicitly approved by Canon U.S.A.;

• defeating, investigating, or providing information concerning methods of defeating security mechanisms, including

by allowing another person to access the Services using credentials issued to you, or by falsifying, deleting, or

concealing Internet Protocol header, email sender, or other identifying information;

• engaging in conduct that restricts, inhibits or discourages any other person or entity from using or enjoying all or

any portion, features or functions of the Services, or which, in Canon U.S.A.’s judgment, exposes Canon U.S.A. or

Canon Group or any of their users, customers, or suppliers to any liability or detriment of any type;

• engaging in conduct affecting Canon U.S.A. or Canon Group adversely or reecting negatively on Canon U.S.A. or

Canon Group, the Services, Canon U.S.A.’s or Canon Group’s goodwill, name or reputation or causing duress, distress

or discomfort to Canon U.S.A., Canon Group or anyone else, or discouraging any person or entity from doing business

with Canon U.S.A. or Canon Group; or

• taking any other action that could endanger or cause damage to Canon U.S.A. or Canon Group, other users of the

Services, or other third parties.

Canon U.S.A. may take any action that it deems appropriate if it determines, in its exclusive discretion, that you have

engaged in any of these practices or otherwise violated these Terms of Use. Such action may include termination of

your access to the Services or initiation of civil or criminal legal proceedings. Under these circumstances, Canon U.S.A.

may also investigate your use of the Services and provide information about your use to law enforcement.

6. OUR INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS

interfaces, images, software, and any audio, text and video clips (the "Materials"), are protected by copyright under

U.S. copyright law, international conventions and other copyright laws. All Materials are owned or licensed by Canon

U.S.A. or by its third-party licensors. You cannot use the Materials, except as specied herein. Any unauthorized use of

the Materials may violate, without limitation, copyright laws, trademark laws, the laws of privacy and publicity, and

communications regulations and statutes. You may not change the Materials in any way or reproduce, publicly display,

Appendix

748

distribute or otherwise use the Materials for any public or commercial purpose. Any reproduction of the Materials on

any other web site or network

ed computer environment for any purpose is prohibited.

Trademarks: Canon U.S.A. trademarks, logos, and service marks and those trademarks, logos, and service marks

licensed to Canon U.S.A. by Canon Inc. (collectively, the "Trademarks") displayed on the Services are registered and

unregistered marks of Canon U.S.A. or Canon Inc. All other trademarks, trade names, product names, service marks

and all other non-Canon U.S.A. marks are the property of their respective owners. Nothing contained on the Services

should be construed as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right to use any Trademark

displayed on the Services without the written permission of Canon U.S.A. or such third party that may own other

trademarks displayed on the Services. The absence of a product or service name or logo anywhere in the text of the

Services does not constitute a waiver of any trademark or other intellectual property rights concerning that name or

logo.

7. USER IDS AND PASSWORDS

Certain areas of the Services may offer the opportunity to register or create an account. You will be asked to create a

user ID and password in connection with such an account. You are responsible for maintaining the condentiality of

the password and account and are fully responsible for all activities that occur under your password or account. Canon

cannot and will not be liable for any loss or damage arising from your failure to comply with this Section. You agree to

notify BICG immediately of any unauthorized use of your user ID or password, or any other breach of security related

to the Services. Your user ID and password may be cancelled, altered or replaced at any time.

If BICG requests that you provide information about yourself in connection with your creation of an account, you

agree that the information that you provide will be entirely truthful and accurate. If the information that you provide

to BICG changes, you agree to promptly provide BICG with updated information.

8. OTHER AGREEMENTS; SOFTWARE, SOLUTIONS, OR ACCESS

Canon U.S.A. and Canon Group may provide products (such as hardware or software), services and solutions, including

cloud solutions, or access to subsites of the Services under supplemental terms and agreements (“Other

Agreements”). The obligations of Canon U.S.A. or any member of Canon Group with respect to any product, service,

solution, or access that it makes available to you under any Other Agreement shall be governed solely by the Other

Agreements, under which such product, service or solution or access is provided and these Terms of Use shall not be

deemed or construed to alter the terms of such Other Agreements.

9. USE OF SOFTWARE

Any software that is available on the Services ("Software") is the copyrighted work of Canon U.S.A. and/or its licensors.

Copying or reproducing the Software to any other server or location for further reproduction or redistribution is

strictly prohibited, unless such reproduction or redistribution is permitted by a license agreement accompanying such

Software. You may not create derivative works of the Software, or attempt to decompile or reverse-engineer the

Software unless otherwise permitted by law. Use of the Software is subject to the license terms of any license

agreement that may accompany or is provided with the Software. You may not download any Software until you have

read and accepted the terms of the accompanying software license.

WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, THE SOFTWARE IS WARRANTED, IF AT ALL, ONLY ACCORDING TO THE TERMS OF

THE SEPARATE LICENSE AGREEMENT ACCOMPANYING THE SOFTWARE. EXCEPT AS WARRANTED IN SUCH LICENSE

AGREEMENT, CANON U.S.A., CANON GROUP, AND ITS AND THEIR LICENSORS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND

CONDITIONS WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT, TO THE MAXIMUM

EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights: The Software available on the Services and accompanying documentation that is

downloaded from the Services for or on behalf of the United States of America, its agencies and/or instrumentalities

are provided with Restricted Rights. You agree to meet all requirements necessary to ensure that the Federal

Government will honor such rights. Disclosure, use or reproduction of the Software and accompanying documentation

are subject to restrictions set forth at Federal Acquisition Regulation 52.227-14, when applicable, or in the Department

of Defense Federal Acquisitions Regulations Supplement 252.227-7013.

Export Controls: Software available on the Services is further subject to United States Export Controls. No software

available on the Services may be downloaded or exported (i) into (or to a national or resident of) any country to which

the United States has embargoed goods; or (ii) to anyone on the United States Treasury Department's list of Specially

Designated Nationals or using the Commerce Department's Table of Deny Orders. By downloading any Software, you

represent and warrant that you are not located in, or under the control of, or a national or resident of any such

country or on any such list.

10. MOBILE APPLICATIONS

Appendix

749

If Canon U.S.A. offers products and services through applications available on your wireless or other mobile Device

(such as a mobile phone) (the "Mobile Application Services"), these Mobile Application Services ar

e governed by the

applicable additional terms governing such Mobile Application Service. We do not charge for these Mobile Application

Services unless otherwise provided in the applicable additional terms. However, your wireless carrier's standard

messaging rates and other messaging, data and other rates and charges will apply to certain Mobile Application

Services. You should check with your carrier to nd out what plans your carrier offers and how much the plans cost. In

addition, the use or availability of certain Mobile Application Services may be prohibited or restricted by your wireless

carrier, and not all Mobile Application Services may work with all wireless carriers or Devices. Therefore, you should

check with your wireless carrier to nd out if the Mobile Application Services are available for your wireless Device, and

what restrictions, if any, may be applicable to your use of such Mobile Application Services.

11. LINKS TO OTHER WEBSITES AND PRODUCTS

Canon Subsites: You may be required to agree to Other Agreements and user codes of conduct in order to access

certain portions of the Services, which are known as "subsites." If you attempt to access a subsite that requires you to

enter into such a supplemental agreement, the controller of that subsite will advise you and provide you with an

opportunity to review the Other Agreement and agree to it before accessing the subsite or using such subsite’s

services. Both these Terms of Use and the Other Agreements will govern your use of the subsite. In the event of any

inconsistency between these Terms of Use and the Other Agreements, the Other Agreements will control, except that

nothing in the Other Agreements may limit (a) Canon U.S.A.’s disclaimer of warranties, (b) your agreement to

indemnify Canon U.S.A. or Canon Group, or (c) the licenses you grant to Canon U.S.A. or other intellectual property.

Third Party Links: Mention of third party products, companies and websites on the Services is for informational

purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation of such products, companies, or

websites. Canon U.S.A. and Canon Group make no representations, warranties or other commitments whatsoever

regarding any third party products, companies or websites that may be referenced on, accessible from or linked to the

Services, or the quality, safety or suitability of any products offered by third-party companies. Likewise, links to third-

party sites are provided for your convenience only. When you access a non-Canon U.S.A. site, including any site that is

referenced on, accessible from or linked to from the Services, or that contains the Canon U.S.A. logo, please

understand that such site is independent from Canon U.S.A., that Canon U.S.A. does not control that site, and that

Canon U.S.A. is not responsible for the content of that site. Links from the Services to any other site do not mean that

Canon U.S.A. approves, or endorses or recommends that site. Canon U.S.A. disclaims all warranties, express or implied,

as to the accuracy, legality, reliability or validity of any content on any other site. Viewing of all other sites is at your

own risk. It is your responsibility to take precautions to protect yourself from viruses, worms, Trojan horses, and other

potentially destructive programs, and to protect your information.

12. SALE OF PRODUCTS AND SERVICES

Terms of Sale Shall Govern: These Terms of Use govern your access to and use of the Services. You acknowledge and

agree that your rights and responsibilities regarding purchases of products and services offered within the UGW2 will

be governed by such other terms and conditions as provided in the applicable terms of sale. In the event there is a

conict between these Terms of Use and the terms provided in an applicable terms of sale, the terms of sale shall

prevail.

Pricing: We cannot conrm the price or availability of an item until you order. We try to be as accurate as possible.

However, despite our best efforts, a small number of the items available for sale or lease may not be available, the

offer may have been misstated or expired, or an item may be mispriced. The correct price for any item will appear in

your shopping cart before you check out. Please be sure to verify the price for your purchase in your cart before

submitting payment.

Availability of Products and Services: The products and services displayed on the Services may not be available for

purchase in your particular country or locality. The reference to such products and services in the Services does not

imply or warrant that these products or services will be available at any time in your particular location, or at the price

or terms displayed on the Services. We do not warrant that product descriptions or other Services content is accurate,

complete, reliable, current, or error-free.

INFORMATION REGARDING CANON PRODUCTS AND SERVICES, INCLUDING THEIR AVAILABILITY, APPEARANCE, PRICE

AND SPECIFICATIONS IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. SUCH INFORMATION SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE A

REPRESENTATION, WARRANTY OR OTHER COMMITMENT BY CANON WITH RESPECT TO ANY PRODUCT OR SERVICE

AND CANON U.S.A. HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AS TO THE ACCURACY,

MERCHANTABILITY, AND SUITABILITY FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR COMPLETENESS THEREOF.

13. DISCLAIMER

YOUR USE OF THE SERVICES IS SOLELY AT YOUR OWN RISK. THE SERVICES (INCLUDING ALL CONTENT AND FUNCTIONS

MADE AVAILABLE ON OR ACCESSED THROUGH THE SERVICES) ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE.” TO THE

FULLEST EXTENT PERMISSIBLE BY LAW, NEITHER CANON U.S.A. NOR CANON GROUP MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS

OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER (1) FOR THE ACCURACY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

Appendix

750

PURPOSE OR COMPLETENESS THEREOF, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OR ANY

ONTENT PUBLISHED ON OR AVAILABLE THROUGH THE SERVICES, (2) THAT THE SERVER THAT MAKES THE SERVICES

AVAILABLE IS FREE OF VIRUSES OR OTHER COMPONENTS THAT MAY INFECT, HARM OR CAUSE DAMAGE TO YOUR

COMPUTER EQUIPMENT OR ANY OTHER PROPERTY WHEN YOU ACCESS, BROWSE, DOWNLOAD FROM OR OTHERWISE

USE THE SITE, (3) THAT CANON U.S.A. WILL CONTINUE TO PROVIDE THE SERVICES OR, IF IT DOES CONTINUE TO

PROVIDE THE SERVICES, THAT THE SERVICES WILL CONTINUE TO PROVIDE THE SERVICES IT CURRENTLY PROVIDES OR

THAT THE SERVICES WILL FUNCTION THE WAY THAT IT CURRENTLY DOES; OR (4) THAT ANY OF YOUR CONTENT OR

COMMUNICATIONS WILL BE RETAINED OR STORED ON THE SERVICES FOR ANY PARTICULAR AMOUNT OF TIME.

UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, CANON U.S.A.'S NEGLIGENCE OR GROSS

NEGLIGENCE, WILL CANON U.S.A., ANY ENTITY WITHIN THE CANON GROUP, OR ANY OTHER PARTY INVOLVED IN

CREATING, HOSTING OR DELIVERING THE SERVICES, BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF YOUR ACCESS TO OR USE

OF,THE SERVICES, YOUR INABILITY TO ACCESS OR USE THE SERVICES, YOUR RELIANCE ON OR USE OF INFORMATION

OR SERVICES PROVIDED ON OR THROUGH THE SERVICES, OR THAT RESULT FROM MISTAKES, OMISSIONS,

INTERRUPTIONS, DELETION OF FILES, ERRORS, DEFECTS, DELAYS IN OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, OR ANY FAILURE

OF PERFORMANCE, EVEN IF CANON U.S.A. OR SUCH OTHER ENTITY OR PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY

OF SUCH DAMAGES. PLEASE NOTE THAT SOME JURISDICTIONS MAY NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, SO SOME OF THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. CHECK YOUR LOCAL

LAWS FOR ANY RESTRICTIONS OR LIMITATIONS REGARDING THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES.

CANON U.S.A. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS AND IMPLIED, TO THE GREATEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW.

CANON U.S.A. ALSO ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY, AND WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR, ANY DAMAGE TO OR VIRUSES THAT

MAY INFECT YOUR COMPUTER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER PROPERTY, OR FOR ANY LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA ON

ACCOUNT OF YOUR ACCESS TO, USE OF, OR BROWSING IN THE SERVICES, OR YOUR DOWNLOADING OF ANY

MATERIALS, DATA, TEXT, IMAGES, VIDEO, OR AUDIO FROM THE SERVICES. NOTWITHSTANDING THE LIMITATION OF

LIABILITY CONTAINED HEREIN, IN NO EVENT SHALL CANON U.S.A.'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES,

LOSSES AND CAUSES OF ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU,

IF ANY, FOR ACCESSING THE SERVICES.

14. INDEMNIFICATION

You agree to indemnify, defend and hold Canon U.S.A., Canon Group, and all of their respective agents, directors,

ocers, employees, information providers, licensors and licensees (collectively "Indemnied Parties") harmless from

and against any and all liability and costs and expenses (including, without limitation, attorneys' fees and costs),

incurred by the Indemnied Parties in connection with your use of the Services or any claim in connection with or

resulting from any breach by you of these Terms of Use. You agree to cooperate fully in Canon U.S.A.'s defense of any

such claim. You agree that Canon U.S.A. shall be entitled to select its own counsel, at your expense, to defend it in

connection with any claim subject to indemnication by you. You agree that Canon U.S.A., and not you, will have

control over the defense of any such claim. You further agree that you will not in any event settle any matter involving

Canon U.S.A., whether or not the settlement binds or is on behalf of Canon U.S.A., without the written consent of

Canon U.S.A.

15. TERMINATION

Canon U.S.A. may terminate these Terms of Use and/or suspend or terminate your access to the Services for any

reason at any time without notice to you. If you wish to discontinue your access to the Services and cancel any account

that you have been issued, please refer to the supplemental terms of that particular subsite or service. Otherwise,

applicable sections of these Terms of Use shall survive any termination of your account or these Terms of Use. In

particular, because the licenses you grant to us are perpetual, these licenses survive any termination of this

agreement.

16. APPLICABLE LAWS

The UGW2 is administered by BICG from its oces in Melville, New York, United States of America. These Terms of Use

and the Other Agreements are governed and interpreted under the laws of the State of New York. You agree that any

claim or dispute against Canon U.S.A. arising out of or relating to the use of the Services must be resolved by a court

located in the Eastern District of New York, unless otherwise agreed upon by all parties. Any claim or cause of action

arising out of or related to your use of the Services must be led within one (1) year after such claim or cause of action

arose, regardless of any statute or law to the contrary. In the event any such claim or cause of action is not led within

such one (1) year period, such claim or cause of action shall be forever barred.

17. GENERAL PROVISIONS

These Terms of Use and the Universal Gateway 2 Website Privacy Statement set forth the entire understanding and

agreement between you and BICG with respect to the Services. You acknowledge that any other agreements between

you and BICG with respect to the Services are superseded and of no force or effect. If any provision of these Terms of

Use shall be determined to be unlawful, void or for any reason unenforceable by a court or other legal authority of

Appendix

751

competent jurisdiction, then that provision will be severed from these Terms of Use and will be deemed replaced by an

equivalent enfor

ceable provision that, as nearly as possible, reects the intent of the parties. The severance of any

individual provision of these Terms of Use will not affect the validity and enforceability of any remaining provisions.

BY CONTINUING TO USE THE SERVICES, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THESE TERMS OF USE.

Appendix

752

Notice

84CU-09U

● The information in this document is subject to change without notice.

● CANON

INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

EXCEPT AS STIPULATED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THEREOF WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PATENT RIGHTS.

CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE,

NOR FOR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MANUAL.

● If you are unable to view the manual in PDF format, download Adobe Acrobat Reader from the Adobe Systems

website (https://get.adobe.com/reader/).

Appendix

753

Trademarks and Copyrights

84CU-09W

◼ T

rademarks

Adobe, Acrobat and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or

other countries.

Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Safari, Mac, macOS and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc.

iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.

Mopria®, the Mopria® Logo and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria

Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

Google Chrome, Chrome OS, Chromebook, and Android are trademarks of Google LLC.

This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.

UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Oce and may

be registered in certain jurisdictions.

otected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593;

6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.

All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems

Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'

implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.

Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item

refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed

by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript

language.

Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Appendix

754

The PDF logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other

countries.

Cop

Protected by U.S. Patents 6,185,684; 6,205,549; 7,213,269; 7,272,628; 7,278,168; Patents pending in the U.S. and other

countries.

All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems

Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'

implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.

Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item

refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed

by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript

language.

Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe LiveCycle® Policy Server, PostScript, the PostScript Logo, and PostScript 3 are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

All brand names and product names appearing on this document are registered trademarks or trademarks of their

respective owners.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

◼ Copyright

Unauthorized reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part is prohibited.

V_220228

Appendix

755

Third-party Software

84CU-09X

For details about thir

d-party software, click the following icon:

Third-Party Services

Third-Party Software Included in This Manual

Appendix

756

This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,

ersion 1.1.

This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:

http://scripts.sil.org/OFL

-----------------------------------------------------------

SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007

-----------------------------------------------------------

PREAMBLE

The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide

development of collaborative font projects, to support the font

creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to

provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and

improved in partnership with others.

The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and

redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The

fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,

redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved

names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,

however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The

requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to

any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.

DEFINITIONS

"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright

Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may

include source les, build scripts and documentation.

"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specied as such after the

"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software

components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).

"Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,

deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the

components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting

the Font Software to a new environment.

"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical

writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.

PERMISSION & CONDITIONS

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining

a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,

modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the

Font Software, subject to the following conditions:

SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE

757

1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in

Original or Modied V

ersions, may be sold by itself.

2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,

redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy

contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be

included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or

in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or

binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.

3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font

Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the

corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the

primary font name as presented to the users.

4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font

Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any

Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the

permission.

5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,

must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be

distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to

remain under this license does not apply to any document created using

the Font Software.

TERMINATION

This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are

not met.

DISCLAIMER

THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT

OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING

FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM

OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.

SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE

758

The Software Subjected to Other License Conditions

Please refer to Contents of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and

corresponding license conditions.

Contents of Software

Name of Software page

1.Adobe PDF Scan Library ............................................................................................................... 2

2.Adobe PostScript 3 ....................................................................................................................... 5

3.expat ......................................................................................................................................... 12

4.HarfBuzz .................................................................................................................................... 13

5.Lua ............................................................................................................................................ 14

6.LuaSocket .................................................................................................................................. 15

7.LuneScript .................................................................................................................................. 16

8.Net-SNMP .................................................................................................................................. 17

9.OpenSSL .................................................................................................................................... 29

10.XKCP ........................................................................................................................................ 33

1.Adobe PDF Scan Library

Portions use software under the following terms:

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation

(http://www.apache.org/).

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted

provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and

the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions

and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the

distribution.

3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following

acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation

(http://www.apache.org/)."

Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party

acknowledgments normally appear.

4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote

products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please

contact [email protected].

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their

name, without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION

OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE

GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,

EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache

Machines, Inc., http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation,

please see <http://www.apache.org/>.

______________________________________________________________________________________

March 27, 2003

Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the

"Sablotron XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License

Version 1.1 (the "License"). You may obtain a copy of

the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/

Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF

ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and

limitations under the License.

The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.

The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance

Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems

Incorporated are available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet

from:

http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp

The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:

https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/

______________________________________________________________________________________

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any

purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies

and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation.

Silicon Graphics makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is

provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.

______________________________________________________________________________________

The Loki Library

Alexandrescu, Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied".

software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice

appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in

supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Wesley Longman make no representations

about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied

warranty.

______________________________________________________________________________________

Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at

http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty .

______________________________________________________________________________________

2.Adobe PostScript 3

Portions include software under the following terms:

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.

______________________________________________________________________________________

The Apache Software License, Version 1.1

This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation

(http://www.apache.org/).

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted

provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and

the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions

and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the

distribution.

3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following

acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation

(http://www.apache.org/)."

Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party

acknowledgments normally appear.

4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote

products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please

contact [email protected].

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their

name, without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION

OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE

GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,

EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache

Machines, Inc., http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation,

please see <http://www.apache.org/>.

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its

contributors.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted

provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and

the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions

and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the

distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following

acknowledgement:

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its

contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or

promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL

THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,

OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

______________________________________________________________________________________

This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by James A. Woods, derived from original

work by Spencer Thomas and Joseph Orost.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright

notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising

materials, and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was

developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to

endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and

associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including

without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell

copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to

the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial

portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEX CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE

FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR

OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR INCONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER

DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or

otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written

authorization from the X Consortium.

______________________________________________________________________________________

NOTICE REGARDING SABLOTRON

March 27, 2003

Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the

"Sablotron XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License

Version 1.1 (the "License"). You may obtain a copy of

the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/

Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF

ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and

limitations under the License.

The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.

The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance

Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems

Incorporated are available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet

from:

http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp

The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:

https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its

contributors.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted

provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and

the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions

and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the

distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following

acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California,

Berkeley and its contributors.